diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 9948.txt | 7996 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 9948.zip | bin | 0 -> 145261 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/bbsca10.txt | 7956 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/bbsca10.zip | bin | 0 -> 144569 bytes |
7 files changed, 15968 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/9948.txt b/9948.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e6e3deb --- /dev/null +++ b/9948.txt @@ -0,0 +1,7996 @@ +Project Gutenberg's The Banner Boy Scouts Afloat, by George A. Warren + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Banner Boy Scouts Afloat + or, The Secret of Cedar Island + +Author: George A. Warren + +Posting Date: November 5, 2011 [EBook #9948] +Release Date: February, 2006 +First Posted: November 3, 2006 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT *** + + + + +Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Mary Meehan, and the Project +Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team + + + + + + + + + + + +The Banner Boy Scouts Afloat + +OR + +The Secret of Cedar Island + +By GEORGE A. WARREN + +1913 + + + + + + + +CONTENTS + +CHAPTER + + + I THE MYSTERIOUS BOXES + + II GLORIOUS NEWS + + III FOR CEDAR ISLAND--GHOST OR NO GHOST + + IV LAYING IN THE STORES + + V JUST AFTER THE CLOCK STRUCK TEN + + VI THE GREAT CRUISE OF THE SCOUTS BEGUN + + VII STUCK FAST IN THE MUD + + VIII WHAT THE WATER GAUGE SHOWED + + IX ON THE SWIFT RADWAY + + X DODGING THE SNAGS AND THE SNARES + + XI THE CAMP ON CEDAR ISLAND + + XII WAS IT A BURSTING METEOR? + + XIII THE FOOTPRINTS IN THE SAND + + XIV TRYING TO FIGURE IT ALL OUT + + XV ORDERED OFF + + XVI UNDER COVER OF DARKNESS + + XVII PITCHING TENTS IN THE "SINK" + + XVIII WHAT LAY IN THE BRUSH + + XIX LAYING PLANS + + XX THE EXPLORING PARTY + + XXI A MYSTERY OF THE OPEN GLADE + + XXII THE WIGWAG MESSAGE + + XXIII STILL FLOUNDERING IN THE MIRE + + XXIV THE DISCOVERY + + XXV TIME TO GO BACK + + XXVI HONORABLE SCARS + + XXVII ANOTHER THREATENING PERIL + +XXVIII PREPARED FOR THE WORST + + XXIX LIFTING THE LID + + XXX GOOD-BYE TO CEDAR ISLAND + + XXXI A SCOUT'S DUTY + + XXXII CONCLUSION + + + + +PREFACE + + +Dear Boys:-- + +It is with the greatest pleasure that I present you with the third volume +of the "Banner Boy Scouts Series." This is a complete story in itself; +and yet most of the leading characters you, who have already read the +first and second volumes, will easily remember. I trust you will heartily +welcome the appearance once more on the stage of Paul, Jack, Bobolink and +all the other good fellows belonging to Stanhope Troop of Boy Scouts. + +Those of you who are old friends will recollect that while the Red Fox +Patrol was forming, the boys had a most strenuous time, what with a deep +mystery in their midst, and the bitter strife resulting from their +competition with rival troops belonging to neighboring towns. How the +beautiful banner was cleverly won by Stanhope, I related in the first +volume, called: "The Banner Boy Scouts." + +In the succeeding story the Stanhope Scouts went on their first long +hike, to camp in the open. The remarkable adventures they met with +while enjoying this experience; as well as the stirring account of how +they recovered a box of valuable papers that had been stolen from the +office of Joe Clausin's father, form the main theme of "The Banner Boy +Scouts on a Tour." + +And now, in this third book, I have endeavored to interest you in another +series of happenings that befell these wide-awake boys before their +summer vacation was over. I hope you will, after reading this story +through to the last line, agree with me that what the young assistant +scout master, Paul Morrison, and his chums of Stanhope Troop endured +while afloat all went to make them better and truer scouts in every sense +of the word. + +Cordially yours + +GEORGE A. WARREN. + + + + + +CHAPTER I + +THE MYSTERIOUS BOXES + + +"What are you limping for, Bobolink?" + +"Oh! shucks! I see there's no use trying to hide anything from your sharp +eyes, Jack Stormways. Guess I just about walked my feet off today, goin' +fishin' with our patrol leader, away over to the Radway River, and about +six miles up." + +"Have any luck, Bobolink?" instantly demanded the third member of the +group of three half-grown boys, who were passing after nightfall through +some of the partly deserted streets on the outskirts of the thriving town +of Stanhope; and whose name it might be stated was Tom Betts. + +"Well, I should say, yes. Between us we got seven fine bass, and a +pickerel. By the way, I caught that pickerel; Paul, he looked after the +bass end of the string, and like the bully chap he is divided with me;" +and the boy who limped chuckled as he said this, showing that he could +appreciate a joke, even when it was on himself. + +About everybody in town called him Bobolink; and what boy could do +otherwise, seeing that his real name was Robert O. Link? + +As the trio of lads were all dressed in the khaki suits known all over +the world nowadays as typifying Boy Scouts, it could be readily taken for +granted that they belonged to the Stanhope Troop. + +Already were there three full patrols enlisted, and wearing uniforms; +while a fourth was in process of forming. The ones already in the field +were known as, first, the Red Fox, to which these three lads belonged; +then the Gray Fox, and finally the Black Fox. But as they had about +exhausted the color roster of the fox family, the chances were that the +next patrol would have to start on a new line when casting about for a +name that would stamp their identity, and serve as a totem. + +An efficient scout master had been secured in the person of a young man +by the name of Mr. Gordon, who cheerfully accompanied the lads on their +outings, and attended many of their meetings. But being a traveling +salesman, Mr. Gordon often had to be away from home for weeks at a time. + +When these lapses occurred, his duties fell upon the shoulders of Paul +Morrison, who not only filled the position of leader to the Red Fox +Patrol, but being a first-class scout, had received his commission from +Headquarters that entitled him to act as assistant scout master to the +whole troop during the absence of Mr. Gordon. + +"How did you like it up on the Radway?" continued the one who had made +the first inquiry, Jack Stormways, whose father owned a lumber yard and +planing mill just outside the limits of the town, which was really the +goal of their present after-supper walk. + +"Great place, all right," replied Bobolink. "Paul kept calling my +attention to all the things worth seeing. He seems to think a heap of the +old Radway. For my part, I rather fancy our own tight little river, the +Bushkill." + +"Well, d'ye know, that's one reason I asked how you liked it," Jack went +on. "Paul seemed so much taken with that region over there, I've begun to +get a notion in my head he's fixing a big surprise, and that perhaps at +the meeting to-night he may spring it on us." + +"Tell me about that, will you?" exclaimed Bobolink, who was given to +certain harmless slang ways whenever he became in the least excited, as +at present. "Now that you've been and gone and given me a pointer, I c'n +just begin to get a line on a few of the questions he asked me. Well, +I'm willing to leave it to Paul. He always thinks of the whole shooting +match when trying to give the troop a bully good time. Just remember +what we went through with when we camped out up on Rattlesnake Mountain, +will you?" + +"That's right," declared Tom Betts, eagerly; "say, didn't we have the +time of our lives, though?" + +"And yet Paul said only today that as we had so long a time before +vacation ends this year, a chance might pop up for another trip," +Bobolink remarked, significantly. + +"Did, eh? Well, don't that go to prove what I said; and you just wait +till we get back to the meeting room in the church. Paul's just bursting +with some sort of secret, and I reckon he'll just have to tell us +to-night," and Jack laughed good-naturedly as he still led his two +comrades on toward the retired lane, where his father's big mill adjoined +the storage place for lumber; convenient to the river, and at the same +time near the railroad, so that a spur track could enter the yard. + +Besides these three boys five others constituted the Red Fox Patrol of +Stanhope Troop. In the first story of this series, which appeared under +the name of "The Banner Boy Scouts; Or, The Struggle for Leadership," +the reader was told about the formation of the Red Fox Patrol, and how +some of the boys learned a lesson in scout methods of returning good for +evil; also how a cross old farmer was taught that he owed a duty to the +community in which he lived, as well as to himself. In that story it was +also disclosed how a resident of the town offered a beautiful banner to +that troop which excelled in an open tournament also participated in by +two other troops of Boy Scouts from the towns of Aldine and Manchester; +the former on the east bank of the Bushkill, about six miles up-stream, +and the latter a bustling manufacturing place about seven miles down, and +also on the same bank as Aldine. + +In this competition, after a lively duel between the three wide awake +troops, Stanhope won handsomely; and had therefore been given the banner, +which Wallace Carberry proudly carried at the head of the procession +whenever they paraded. + +The second book, "The Banner Boy Scouts on a Tour; Or, The Mystery of +Rattlesnake Mountain," was given over almost exclusively to descriptions +of the wonderful things that came to pass when Stanhope Troop spent a +part of their vacation camping out in order that those who were backward +in their knowledge of how to take care of themselves when in the open +should have a good chance to learn many of the secrets of Nature. + +So many strange things happened to the boys when up on Rattlesnake +Mountain that it would be utterly impossible to even mention them here; +but if you wish to know all about the mystery they solved, and the +numerous other exciting events that befell them, you must get the +second volume. + +There was to be a special meeting, which the acting scout master had +called for this evening; and Bobolink, Jack, and Tom Betts expected to +be back from their errand in time to answer to their names when the roll +was called. + +It was only to oblige Jack that the other two had left home half an hour +earlier than was really necessary. Jack had asked them, over the +telephone, to drop around, as he had to go out to his father's mill +before he could attend the meeting in the church, where a room in the +basement had been kindly loaned to them by the trustees. + +"What's all this mean about you going to the mill at this queer old +hour?" Bobolink was saying, as the three boys continued to walk on +abreast, the speaker carrying the silver-plated bugle which he knew how +to manipulate so well when the occasion allowed its use. + +"Why, you see it's this way," Jack went on to explain. "My father knows a +man of the name of Professor Hackett, though what he's a professor of +you needn't ask me, because I don't know. But he's a bright little +gentleman, all right; and somehow or other he looks like he's just cram +full of some secret that's trying to break out all over him." + +Bobolink laughed aloud. + +"Well, that's a funny description you give of the gentleman, I must say, +Jack; but go on--what's he got to do with our making this trip to the big +mill tonight?" + +"I just guess it's got everything to do with it," replied the other. "You +see, the professor had a number of big cases sent up here on the train, +and they came today, and were taken to the mill; for my father promised +to keep them there a couple of days until the owner could take them away. +What under the sun's in those big boxes I couldn't tell you from Adam; +all I know is that he seems to be mighty much afraid somebody's going to +steal them." + +"Wow! and are we going there to stand guard over the blooming old +things?" exclaimed Bobolink in dismay; for he would not want to miss that +special meeting for anything. + +"Oh! not quite so bad as that," answered Jack, with a laugh. "But you +see, that professor wrote my father that he wanted him to hire a trusty +man who would stay in the mill over night until he could get up here +from New York and take the boxes away, somewhere or other." + +"Oh, that's it, eh? And where do we find the guardian of the treasure? Is +he going to bob up on the road to the mill?" Tom Betts demanded. + +"He promised father to be on deck at seven-thirty, and it'll be close on +that by the time we get there, I reckon," Jack continued. + +"And what have you got to do about it?" asked Bobolink. + +"Let him in, and lock the door after he's on duty," replied Jack, +promptly. "You see, ever since that attempt was made to burn the mill, +when those hoboes, or yeggs, thought they'd find money in the safe, and +had their trouble for their pains, my father has been mighty careful how +he leaves the office unfastened. He couldn't see this man, Hans Waggoner, +who used to work for us, but talked with him over the 'phone, and told +him I'd be there to meet him, and let him in. That's all there is to it, +boys, believe me." + +"Only, you don't know what's in those boxes, and you'd give a cookie to +find out?" suggested Bobolink. + +"It isn't so bad as that," replied the other. "Of course I'm a little +curious about what they might hold, that they have to be specially +guarded; but I guess it's none of my business, and I'm not going to +monkey around, trying to find out." + +"Say, d'ye suppose your dad knows?" asked Tom. + +"Sure he must," came from Jack, instantly. "He'd be silly to let anybody +store a lot of cases that might hold dynamite, or any other old +explosive, in his planing mill, without knowing all about 'em; wouldn't +he? But my father don't think it's any of my affair, you see. And +besides, I wouldn't be surprised if that funny little professor had bound +him not to tell anybody about it. They got the boxes in on the sly, and +that's a fact, boys." + +"Oh! splash! now you've got me worked up with guessing, and I'll never be +able to sleep till I know all about it," grumbled Bobolink. + +"You're just as curious as any old woman I ever heard of," declared Jack. + +"He always was," said Tom Betts, with a chuckle, "and I could string off +more'n a few times when that same curiosity hauled Bobolink into a peck +of trouble. But p'raps your father might let out the secret to you, after +the old boxes have been taken away, and then you can ease his mind. +Because it's just like he says, and he'll keep on dreamin' the most +wonderful things about those cases you ever heard tell about. That +imagination of Bobolink is something awful." + +"Huh!" grunted the one under discussion, "not much worse than some +others I know about right now; only they c'n keep a tight grip on +theirs, and I'm that simple I just have to blurt everything out. Both of +you fellers'd like to know nearly as much as I would, what that +mysterious little old man has got hid away in those big cases. Of course +you would. But you jump on the lid, and hold it down. It gets away with +me; that's all." + +"All the same, it's mighty good of you fellows, coming all the way out +here with me tonight; and even when Bobolink's got a stone bruise on his +heel, or something like that," Jack went on to say, with a vein of +sincere affection in his voice; for the boys making up the Red Fox Patrol +of Stanhope Troop were very fond of each other. + +"Oh! rats! what's the good of being a scout if you can't do a comrade a +little favor once in a while?" asked Bobolink, impetuously. "But there's +the mill looming up ahead, Jack, in the dark. Half a moon don't give a +whole lot of light, now, does it; and especially when it's a cloudy night +in the bargain?" + +"Well, I declare!" exclaimed Jack. + +"What is it; did you see anything?" demanded Tom Betts, hastily. + +"I'm not dead sure," admitted Jack; "you see, just as Bobolink said, the +light's mighty poor, and a fellow could easily be mistaken; but I +thought I saw something that looked like a tall man scuttle away around +that corner of the mill, and dodge behind that pile of lumber!" + +"Whew!" ejaculated Bobolink, showing the utmost interest, for excitement +appealed to him. + +"Say, perhaps Hans has arrived ahead of the half hour," suggested +Tom Betts. + +"No, it wasn't Hans, because I know him well, and he's a little runt of a +Dutchman, but a fighter from the word go; and my father knows nobody's +going to get away with those boxes of the professor while Hans and his +musket, that was used in the Civil War, are on guard. That was a tall +man, and he ran like he'd just heard us coming, and wanted to hide. I +guess somebody else is curious about those boxes, besides Bobolink." + + + + +CHAPTER II + +GLORIOUS NEWS + + +"Look! there he goes scooting away over past that other pile of lumber!" +said Tom Betts, pointing as he spoke; and both the others caught a +glimpse of a dim figure that was bending over while hurrying away, as if +anxious not to be seen. + +"Well, what d'ye think of the nerve of that?" ejaculated Bobolink, making +a move as though in his impetuous way he was sorely tempted to chase +after the disappearing figure of the unknown; only that the more cautious +Jack threw out a hand, and caught hold of his sleeve. + +"Never mind him, boys," remarked the son of the lumber man. "Perhaps it +was only a tramp from the railroad, after all, meaning to find a place to +sleep among the lumber piles. But I'm going to tell my father about it, +all the same. Seems to me he ought to have some one like Hans stay here +every night. Some of those hoboes will set fire to things, either by +accident, or because they are mad at the town for not handing enough good +things out to suit their appetites." + +They walked on, and in another minute were at the office door. There they +sat down on the stoop to rest and talk; but only a few minutes had passed +when they heard the sound of approaching footsteps; and a small but very +erect figure appeared, carrying an old-fashioned musket of the vintage of +'61 over his shoulder. + +"Hello! Hans, on time all right, I see!" called out Jack. + +"Dot is me, I dells you, every time. I am punctuality idself. I sets me +der clock, undt figure dot all oudt, so I haf yust der time to valk here. +Der sooner you obens der door, Misder Jack, der sooner I pe on der chob," +was the reply of the little man who had been hired to watch the mill, and +those strange boxes, during the night. + +Evidently Hans was "strictly business." He had been hired to watch, and +he wanted to be earning his wages as quickly as possible. + +So Jack used his key, and the four entered the office. It was quite a +good-sized room. The windows were covered with heavy wire netting, and it +seemed strong enough to resist any ordinary degree of force. After that +attempt to rob his safe, Mr. Stormways had taken precautions against a +similar raid. + +The watchman also carried a lantern, which he now lighted. No sooner had +this been done than Bobolink uttered an exclamation. + +"I reckon now, Jack, that these three big boxes are the ones the +professor wants watched?" he observed, pointing as he spoke to several +cumbersome cases that stood in a group, occupying considerable space. + +Tom Betts, also looking, saw that they were unusually well fastened. In +addition to the ordinary nailing, they were bound along the edges with +heavy twisted wire, through which frequent nails had been driven. When +they came to be opened, the job would prove no easy one. + +"Yes, those are the ones; and Hans is to spend most all his time right +here in the office," Jack went on to say. "I'm going to ask my father if +he ought not to hire you to be night watchman right along, Hans. This +plant of ours is getting too big a thing to leave unguarded, with so many +tramps coming along the road in the good old summer time. I suppose you'd +like the job, all right?" + +"Sure," replied the bustling little man, his eyes sparkling. "I always +did enchoy vorkin' for Misder Stormways. Undt it habbens dot yust now I +am oudt off a chob. Dot vill pe allright. I hopes me idt turns out so. +Undt now, off you like, you could lock der door some. I stay me here +till somepody gomes der mornin' py." + +"Oh! you keep the key, Hans," replied Jack. "You might want to chase out +after some one; but father told me to warn you not to be tempted to go +far away. You see, he's storing these cases for a friend, and it seems +that somebody wants to either get at 'em, or steal them. They're what +you're hired to protect, Hans. And now let us out, and lock the door +after we're gone." + +Anxious to get to the church before the meeting could be called to order, +the three scouts did not linger, although Hans was such an amusing little +man that they would have liked nothing better than to spend an hour in +his society, listening to stories about his adventures--for the Dutchman +had roamed pretty much all over the world since his boyhood. + +"Shucks! I forgot to examine those boxes," lamented Bobolink, when they +were on the way past the end of the lumber yard. + +Jack was glancing sharply about, wondering whether that tall, skulking +figure they had glimpsed could be some one who had a peculiar interest in +the boxes stored in the office of the mill until Professor Hackett called +for them; or just an ordinary "Weary Willie," looking for a soft board to +sleep on, before he continued his hike along the railroad track. + +But look as he would, he could see no further sign of a trespasser. Of +course that was no sign the unknown might not be within twenty feet of +them, right then. The tall piles of lumber offered splendid hiding-places +if any one was disposed to take advantages of the nooks; Jack had +explored many a snug hole, when roaming through the yard at various +times, and ought to know about it. + +"Oh! I took care of that part," chuckled Tom Betts. "I saw you were +talking with Jack and old Hans, so I just stepped up, and walked around +the boxes. There isn't a thing on 'em but the name of the professor, and +Jack's dad's address in Stanhope." + +"And they didn't look much like animal cages to me," muttered Bobolink; +upon which both of the others emitted exclamations of surprise, whereupon +the speaker seemed to think he ought to make some sort of explanation, so +he went on hastily: "You see, Jack, I somehow got a silly idea in my mind +that p'raps this little professor was some sort of an animal trainer, and +meant to come up here, just to have things quiet while he did his little +stunts. But that was a punk notion for me, all right; there ain't any +smell of animals about those boxes, not a whiff." + +"But what in the wide world gave you that queer notion?" asked Tom. + +"Don't know," replied Bobolink, "'less it was what Jack said about +the professor writing up from Coney Island near New York City; that's +the place where all the freaks show every summer. I've been down +there myself." + +"Listen to him, would you, Jack, owning up that he's a sure enough freak? +Well, some of us had a little idea that way, Bobolink, but we never +thought you'd admit it so coolly," remarked Tom Betts, laughingly. + +"And the wild animal show down there is just immense," the other went on, +not heeding the slur cast upon his reputation; for like many boys, +Bobolink had a pretty tough skin, and was not easily offended; "and I +guess I've thought about what I saw done there heaps of times. So Coney +stands for wild animal trainin' to me. But that guess was away wide of +the mark. Forget it, fellows. Only whenever Jack here learns what was in +those boxes, he must let his chums know. It's little enough to pay for +draggin' a lame scout all the way out here tonight; think so, Jack?" + +"I sure do, and you'll have it, if ever I find out," was the reply. +"Perhaps, after they've been taken away by the professor, my father +mightn't mind telling me what was in them. And we'll let it rest at +that, now." + +"But you mark me, if Bobolink gets any peace of mind till he learns," +warned Tom. + +Chatting on various matters connected more or less with the doings of the +Boy Scout movement, and what a fine thing it was proving for the youth of +the whole land, Jack and his chums presently brought up at the church +which had the bell tower; and where a splendid meeting room had been +given over for their occupancy in the basement, in which a gymnasium was +fitted up for use in the fall and winter. + +In that tower hung a big bell, whose brazen tongue had once upon a time +alarmed the good people of Stanhope by ding-donging at a most unusual +hour. It had come through a prank played upon the scouts by several tough +boys of the town whose enmity Paul Morrison and his chums had been +unfortunate enough to incur. But for the details of that exciting episode +the reader will have to be referred back to the preceding volume. + +Jack Stormways never glanced up at that tower but that he was forcibly +reminded of that startling adventure; and a smile would creep over his +face as he remembered some of the most striking features connected with +the event. + +In the big room the three scouts found quite a crowd awaiting their +coming. Indeed, it seemed as though nearly every member of the troop had +made it an especial point to attend this meeting just as though they +knew there was something unusual about to come before them for +consideration. + +As many of these lads will be apt to figure in the pages of this story, +it might be just as well to listen to the secretary, as he calls the +roster of the Stanhope Troop. Once this duty had devolved upon one of the +original Red Fox Patrol; but with the idea of sharing the +responsibilities in a more general way, it had been transferred to the +shoulders of Phil Towns, who belonged to the second patrol. + +RED FOX PATROL + +1--Paul Morrison, patrol leader, and also assistant scout master. +2--Jack Stormways. +3--Bobolink, the official bugler. +4--Bluff Shipley, the drummer. +5--Nuthin, whose real name was Albert Cypher. +6--William Carberry, one of the twins. +7--Wallace Carberry, the other. +8--Tom Betts. + +GRAY FOX PATROL + +1--Jud Elderkin, patrol leader. +2--Joe Clausin. +3--Andy Flinn. +4--Phil Towns. +5--Horace Poole. +6--Bob Tice. +7--Curly Baxter. +8--Cliff Jones, whose entire name was Clifford Ellsworth Fairfax Jones. + +BLACK FOX PATROL + +1--Frank Savage, patrol leader. +2--Billie Little, a very tall lad, and of course always called Little +Billie. +3--Nat Smith. +4--Sandy Griggs. +5--Old Dan Tucker. +6--"Red" Conklin. +7--"Spider" Sexton. +8--"Gusty" Bellows. + +Unattached, but to belong to a fourth patrol, later on: + +George Hurst. +"Lub" Ketcham. + +Thus it will be seen that there were now twenty-six lads connected with +the wide awake Stanhope Troop, and more coming. + +After the roll call, they proceeded to the regular business, with Paul +Morrison in the chair, he being the president of the association. It was +surprising how well many of these boyish meetings were conducted; Paul +and some of his comrades knew considerable about parliamentary law, and +long ago the hilarious members of the troop had learned that when once +the meeting was called to order they must put all joking aside. + +Many a good debate had been heard within those same walls since the +scouts received permission to meet there; and yet in camp, when the rigid +discipline was relaxed, these same fellows could be as full of fun and +frolic as any lads going. + +Tonight it had been whispered around that Paul had some sort of +important communication to make. No one could give a guess as to what it +might be, although all sorts of hazards were attempted, only to be +jeered at as absurd. + +And so, while the meeting progressed, they were growing more and more +excited, until finally it was as much as some of them could do to repress +a cheer when Paul, having made sure that there was no other business to +be transacted, arose with a smile, and announced that he had a certain +communication to lay before them. + +"Are you ready to hear it?" he asked; "every fellow who is raise +his hand." + +Needless to say, not a single hand remained unraised. Paul deliberately +counted them to the bitter end. + +"Just twenty-four; and as that is the total number present, we'll call it +unanimous," he said, just to tantalize them a little; and then, with an +air of business he went on: "Two splendid gentlemen of this town, by name +Mr. Everett and Colonel Bliss, happen to own motorboats. As they have +gone to Europe, to be away until late in the Fall, they thought it would +show how they appreciated the work of the Stanhope Troop of Boy Scouts if +they offered the free use of their two boats to us, to make a cruise +wherever we thought best during the balance of vacation time. Now, all in +favor of accepting this magnificent offer from our fellow townsmen +signify by saying 'aye!'" + +Hardly had the words fallen from the speaker's lips when a thunderous +"aye" made the stout walls of the building tremble. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +FOR CEDAR ISLAND--GHOST OR NO GHOST + + +"Three cheers for Colonel Bliss and Mr. Everett!" called out Bobolink, +almost too excited to speak plainly. + +Paul himself led the cheering, because he knew those delighted boys just +had to find some sort of outlet for the enthusiasm that was bubbling up +within them. And doubtless the walls of that sacred building had seldom +heard such cheers since away back in the time when a meeting was held +there at news of the Civil War breaking out in 1861 and the patriotic +citizens had formed a company on the spot, to volunteer their services to +the President. + +"Where will we go?" called out one scout, after the cheering had died +down, and they found time to consider ways and means of employing the +motorboats that had been so generously given into their keeping. + +"Down the Bushkill to the sea!" suggested one. + +"I suppose you think these motorboats can jump like broncos?" declared +Jud Elderkin, with a look of disgust; "else how would they ever get +around that big dam down at Seely's Mills? We could crawl a few miles +_up_ the Bushkill, but to go down would mean only a short cruise." + +"Let Paul say!" cried Bobolink, shrewdly reading the smile on the face of +the assistant scout master, as he listened to all sorts of wild plans, +none of which would hold together when the rest of the scouts started to +pick flaws. + +"Yes, Paul's got a scheme that'll knock all these wildcat ones just to +flinders, see if it don't," remarked Tom Betts, waving his hands to +enforce silence. + +"Go on and tell us, Paul; and I reckon I c'n give a right smart guess +that it's about that Radway River country," declared Bobolink. + +"Just what it is," said Paul. "Listen, then, and tell me what you think +of my plan. I've figured it all out, and believe we could make it a go. +If we did, we'd surely have the time of our lives, and find out something +that I've wanted myself to know a long while back. It's about a trip up +the Radway River, too, just as our smart chum guessed." + +"But, say, the boats are right here at Stanhope, and have been used in +running up and down the Bushkill; then how in the name of wonder can we +carry them over to the Radway, which is some miles away, I take it?" +asked William Carberry, soberly. + +"Wait and see; Paul's got all that arranged," declared the confident +Tom Betts. + +"Have 'em hauled over on one of his father's big lumber wagons, mebbe," +suggested Nuthin, who was rather a small chap, though not of quite so +little importance as his name would seem to indicate. + +"Oh, you make me tired, Nuthin," declared Bobolink; "why, those +motorboats weigh a ton or two apiece. Think of gettin' a wagon strong +enough to carry one; and all the slow trips it'd have to take to get 'em +there and back. I reckon the whole of our vacation'd see us on the dry +land part of the cruise. Now, let Paul tell us what plan he's been +thinking about to get over to the Radway with 'em." + +"Well, it's just this way," the chairman of the meeting went on to say, +calmly, with the air of one who had studied the matter carefully, and +grasped every little detail; "most of you know that there was a stream +known as Jackson Creek that ran into the Bushkill a mile below +Manchester. That was once dredged out, and made to form a regular canal +connecting the two rivers. For years, my father says, it was used +regularly by all sorts of boats that wanted to cross over from one +river to the other. But changes came, and by degrees the old canal has +been about forgotten. Still, it's there; and I went through it in my +canoe just yesterday, to sound, and see if it could be used by the +motorboats now." + +"And could it?" asked Bobolink, eagerly. + +"I think there's a fair chance that we'd pull through, though it might +sometimes be a close shave. There's a lot of nasty mud in the canal, +because, you see, it hasn't been cleaned out for years. If we had a good +rain now, and both rivers raised, we wouldn't have any trouble, but could +run through easy enough." + +"Well, supposing we did get through, how far up the Radway would we +push?" asked Bobolink, determined to get the entire proposition out of +Paul at once, now that they had him going. + +"All the way to Lake Tokala," replied Paul, promptly. "Some of you happen +to know that there's a jolly island in that big lake, known as Cedar +Island, because right on top of a small hill in the middle, a splendid +cedar stands. Well, we could take our tents along, and make camp on that +island, fishing, swimming, and having one of the best times ever heard +of. What do you say, fellows?" + +Immediately there was a clamor of tongues. Some seemed to be for +accepting Paul's suggestion with a whoop, and declared that it took them +by storm. A few, however, seemed to raise objections; and such was the +racket that nobody was able to make himself understood. So the chairman +called for order; and with the whack of his gavel on the table every +voice was stilled. + +"Let's conduct this meeting in a parliamentary way," said Paul. "Some of +you must have thought it stood adjourned. Now, whoever wants to speak, +get up, and let's hear what you've got to say." + +"I move that we take up the plan offered, and make our headquarters on +Cedar Island," said Wallace Carberry, rising. + +"Not on your life!" declared Curly Baxter, bobbing up like a +jack-in-the-box; "I've heard lots about that same place. It's troubled +with a _mystery_, and only last week I heard Paddy Reilly say he'd never +go there fishin' again if he was paid for it. He's dreadfully afraid of +ghosts, Paddy is." + +"Ghosts!" almost shouted William Carberry; "I vote to go to Cedar +Island then. I've always wanted to see a genuine ghost, and never yet +had a chance." + +"Now, I heard that it was a wild man that lived somewhere on that same +island," remarked Frank Savage. "They say he's a terror, too, all covered +with hair; and one man who'd been looking for pearl mussels in the river +up that way told my father he beat any Wild Man of Borneo he'd ever set +eyes on in a freak show or circus." + +"Oh, that's a fine place for honest scouts to pitch their tents, ain't +it--I don't think!" observed Joe Clausin, with a sneer. + +"H-h-huh! ain't there j-j-just twenty-six of us s-s-scouts; and ought we +b-b-be afraid of one l-l-little g-g-ghost, or even a w-w-wild man?" +demanded Bluff Shipley, who stuttered once in a while, when unduly +excited, though he was by degrees overcoming the nervous habit. + +"Put it to a vote, Mr. Chairman!" called out Bobolink. + +"Yes, and majority rules, remember," warned William Carberry. + +"But that don't mean a feller just _has_ to go along, does it?" asked +Nuthin, looking somewhat aghast at the thought. + +"Of course it don't;" Bobolink told him; "all the same you'll be on deck, +my boy. I just know you can't resist having such a jolly good time, ghost +or not. Question, Mr. Chairman!" + +"Vote! Vote!" + +"All in favor of trying to go through the old canal that used to connect +the Bushkill with the Radway, and cruising up to Cedar Island, camping +there for a week or ten days, say 'aye,'" Paul went on to remark. + +A thunderous response cheered his heart; for somehow Paul seemed very +much set upon following out the scheme he himself had devised. + +"Contrary, no!" he continued. + +There were just three who boldly allowed themselves to be set down as not +being in favor of the daring plan--Nuthin, Curly Baxter and Joe Clausin; +and yet, just as the wise, far-seeing Bobolink had declared, when it came +to a question of staying at home while the rest of the troop were off +enjoying their vacation, or swallowing their fear of ghosts and wild men, +these three boys would be along when the motorboats started on their +adventurous cruise. + +"The ayes have it; and the meeting stands adjourned, according to the +motion I can see Jack Stormways's just about to put," and with a laugh +Paul stepped down from the platform. + +For fully half an hour they talked the thing over. It was viewed from +every possible angle. Many objections raised by the doubters were +promptly met by the ready Paul; and in the end it was definitely decided +that they would give just one day to making all needed preparations. + +They had tents for the three patrols now, and all sorts of cooking +utensils; for frequently the scouts were divided into messes, there being +a cook appointed in each patrol. + +What was needed most of all were the supplies for an extended stay; and +when it was taken into consideration that a score of boys, with ravenous +appetites, would want three big meals each and every day, the question of +figuring out enough provisions to see them through was no light matter. + +But then they had considerable money in the treasury, and a numbers of +the boys said they would bring loaves of bread, and all sorts of eatables +from home; so Paul saw his way clear toward providing the given quantity. + +"Don't forget that the gasoline is going to eat a big hole into our +little pile of the long green," remarked Curly Baxter, still engaged in +trying to throw cold water on the scheme. + +"Oh, that makes me think of something I forgot to tell you, fellows," +declared Paul, his face filled with good humor. "One of the stipulations +connected with the lending of these two motor-boats by the kind gentlemen +who own them was that they insisted on supplying all the liquid fuel +needed to run the craft. The tanks are to be filled, and each boat +carries in addition another drum, with extra gasoline. We'll likely have +enough for all our needs that way, and without costing us a red cent, +either. So, you see how easy most of your objections melt away, Curly. +Chances are, you'll fall into line, and be with us when we start the day +after tomorrow." + +Several of the boys were feeling pretty blue. They wanted to accompany +the rest of the troop the worst way; but it happened that their folks had +planned to go down to the sea-shore for a month, until school began +again; and the chances were they would have to go along, though every one +of them declared they would choose the cruise up the Radway in the two +motorboats, if given their way. + +But it looked as though there was going to be a pretty fair crowd on each +boat. Paul counted noses of those he believed would be along, and found +that they seemed to number eighteen. If two of the three timid ones +concluded to throw their fears to the winds, and come along, it would +make an even twenty. + +"Of course, it will be hard to sleep so many aboard, because the boats +are small affairs, taken altogether," Paul observed; "but we hope to make +the journey in a full day, and be on Cedar Island by nightfall." + +"Whew! night on Cedar Island--excuse _me_ if you please!" faltered Curly +Baxter, holding up both hands, as though the idea suggested all sorts of +terrible things to his mind; but much as he seemed desirous of causing +others to back out, Paul saw no signs of any one doing so. + +"Meet here at noon tomorrow, boys, and I'll report what I've done. Then +we can figure on what else we have to lay in store, so as to be +comfortable. We must get everything down to the boats before evening, +because we start early on Wednesday, you hear. At eight A. M., Bobolink, +here, will sound his bugle; and ten minutes later we weigh anchor, or cut +loose our hawsers, as you choose to say it, for it means letting go a +rope after all." + +They started home in bunches, as usual, those who happened to live near +together naturally waiting for each other. Paul, Jack, and Bobolink +walked together. + +"And just as it happens so many times," Paul was saying, as they +sauntered on in the direction of home. "Mr. Gordon is away on the road +somewhere, selling goods; so we have to go without having our fine +scoutmaster along to look after us." + +"Guess nobody will miss him very much, although Mr. Gordon is a mighty +nice man and we all think a heap of him; but you are able to fill his +shoes all right, Paul; and, somehow, it seems to feel better not to have +any grown-up along. The responsibility makes most of the fellers behave, +and think for themselves, you see," Jack went on to say. + +Paul heaved a little sigh, for he knew who shouldered most of that same +responsibility. + +"But," remarked Bobolink, as he was about to separate from Jack and Paul +on a certain corner, where their ways divided; "I'd give something right +now to just know what's in those queer old boxes Professor Hackett has +stored in your mill, Jack; and why they have to be watched, just like +they held money or something that has to be guarded against an unknown +enemy! But I guess I'll have to take it out in wantin', because you don't +know, and wouldn't tell till you got the consent of your dad, even if you +did. Goodnight, fellows; and here's hoping we're going to have the time +of our lives up and around Cedar Island!" + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +LAYING IN THE STORES + + +Well, it was a busy day for the scouts of Stanhope Troop. + +There was the greatest running back and forth, and consultations among +the lads, ever known. Where a parent seemed doubtful about giving +permission for a boy to take part in the intended cruise, influence was +brought to bear on coaxing neighbors to drop in, and tell how glad they +were their boys were independent, as it was the finest thing that could +ever come to them; and also what slight chances there seemed to be of any +accident happening that might not occur when the lads stayed at home, +where they would go in swimming anyhow. + +And owing to the masterly way in which the objections of certain parents +were met and overcome, long before noon every boy who had a ghost of a +chance of sailing on the two motor-boats reported that he had gained +consent; even Curly Baxter admitted that his folks had been won over, +and that he "could go along, if so he he chose to shut his eyes to facts, +and just trust to luck," which, be it said, he finally did, just as Paul +had believed would be the case. + +Meanwhile Paul and Jack were making their purchases of provisions, using +a list that had been found useful on their other camping trip; although +several little inaccuracies were corrected. For instance, they had taken +too much rice on that other occasion; and not enough ham, and salt pork, +and breakfast bacon. + +Eggs they hoped to buy from some farmer over on the mainland; and +possibly milk as well. Jack even hinted that they might feel disposed, if +the money held out, to get a few chickens, and have one grand feed before +breaking camp. + +"And this time we'll try and make sure that none of our grub is hooked, +like it was when we camped up on old Rattlesnake Mountain," Jack had +declared, with emphasis, for the memory of certain mysterious things +that had happened to them on that occasion often arose to disturb some +of the scouts. + +"Oh! it ought to be easy to look out for that part of the job," Paul had +made answer; "because, you see, we'll have the two boats to store things +in, and they can be anchored out in the lake, if we want, each with a +guard aboard." + +By noon the whole town knew all about the expected cruise. Boys who did +not have the good luck to belong to Stanhope Troop became greatly excited +over it; and by their actions and looks showed how envious they were of +their schoolmates. + +Just about then, if the assistant scout master had called for volunteers, +he could have filled two complete additional patrols with candidates; for +the fellows began to realize that the scouts were having three times as +much fun as any one else. + +But Paul was too wise for that. He believed in selecting the right sort +of boys, and not taking every one who offered his name, just because he +wanted to have a good time. These fellows would not be able to live up to +the iron-clad rules that scouts have got to subscribe to, and which are +pretty much covered in the twelve cardinal principles which, each boy +declares in the beginning, he will try and govern his life by--"to be +trustworthy, loyal, helpful, friendly, courteous, kind, obedient, +cheerful, thrifty, brave, clean, and reverent." + +Some of the scouts were at Headquarters, as the room under the church was +called, getting the supplies there in order, to take down to the boats +later on, when they were surprised to have a visitor in the shape of old +Peleg Growdy. + +This man lived just outside the town limits, on the main road. He had +once kept his wagon yard in a very disgraceful condition, much to the +disgust of the women folks of Stanhope. The boys, too, looked upon Peleg +as a crusty old fellow, who hated their kind. + +He had done something to offend one of the scouts, and it was proposed +that they play some sort of trick on the old fellow in order to pay him +back; but Paul ventured to say that if the scouts went in a body to his +place, when he was asleep, and cleaned up his wagon yard so that it +looked neat, he would have his eyes opened to the debt he owed the +community. + +Paul, it seemed, had learned the main cause of the old man's holding +aloof from his neighbors. It came from the fact that some years back he +had lost his wife and children in the burning of his house; and ever +since had looked upon boys as especially created to worry lone widowers +who wanted only to be let alone. + +Well, the scouts certainly made a great friend of Peleg Growdy. He had +even tried to induce them to let him purchase their suits to show that he +was a changed man; but of course they could not allow that, because each +true scout must earn every cent of the money with which his outfit in the +beginning is bought. But in many ways had old Peleg shown them that he +was now going to be one of the best friends the boys of Stanhope Troop +had ever possessed. + +He had heard about their intended trip, when he came to town with some +produce; and rather than go back home with some things for which there +did not seem to be any sale at the price he wanted, he had come around +with his wagon to ask his boy friends to please him by accepting them as +his contribution to the cause. + +They could not disappoint the generous-hearted old man by refusing; and +besides the half-bushel of onions, and double the quantity of new +potatoes, looked mighty fine to the lads. + +About two o'clock, when it seemed that their list was about complete, +even though they would doubtless think of a lot of things after it was +too late to get them, Paul decided to send for the wagon that was to haul +the tents and other things, including blankets for the crowd, brought +from various homes to the meeting place, down to the waiting boats. + +"I wanted to get Ezra Sexton, but he was busy," Jack explained, when he +had carried out the errand given into his charge; "fact is, I hear, +Bobolink, that Ezra came early this morning with an order from the +professor, and took all those big cases away in his two wagons." + +"Well, that was quick work now, wasn't it?" grumbled Bobolink; "reckon I +won't ever have a chance to see what was inside those boxes. Say, see +here, d'ye happen to know where Ezra hauled 'em? Not to the railroad, I +should think, because they only came that way yesterday." + +But Jack shook his head. + +"Some distance off, I reckon, because the trucks don't seem to be back +yet, so I couldn't get to see Ezra," he remarked; "but when we come home +again, I'll ask my father about it, and relieve that curiosity of yours, +Bobolink." + +"Huh! that means mebbe two weeks or so I'm to go on guessing, I s'pose," +the other remarked, in a disconsolate way that made Jack laugh. + +"Funny how you do get a notion in that coco of yours; and it'd take a +crowbar to work it loose," he observed, at which the other only +grinned, saying: + +"Born that way; must 'a made a mistake and left the wrong article at our +house for the new baby; thought it was a girl; always wantin' to know +everything, and never happy till I get it. But Jack, I'll try and keep +this matter out of my mind. Don't pay any attention to me, if I look +cross once in a while. That'll be when it's got me gripped fast, and I'm +tryin' to guess." + +"I've known you to do the same when you had one of those puzzles, trying +to work it," chuckled Jack Stormways. "Fact is, I remember that once you +told me you sat up till two o'clock in the morning over that ring +business." + +"But I got her, Jack--remember that; won't you? If I hadn't I'd been +burning the midnight oil yet, I reckon. 'Taint safe to make _me_ a +present of a puzzle, because I'm just dead sure to nearly split my poor +weak brain trying to figger it out. And Jack, I'll never be happy till I +know what was in those boxes; and why did that sly little professor +believe someone wanted to steal his thunder and lightning?" + +It took several loads to carry all their traps down to the boats. But +finally, as the groceries had also been delivered, the scouts took count +of their stock, and it was believed they had about everything, save what +the boys might bring in the morning from home. + +Paul advised them to go slow with regard to what they carried along, as +they did not expect to be gone six months. If any garments gave out, why, +there would be plenty of soap and water handy; and the fellow who did not +know how to wash a pair of socks, or some handkerchiefs, had better take +a few lessons on how to play laundry woman in an emergency. + +"If things keep on multiplying much more," the scout master remarked, as +he looked around at the tremendous amount of stuff which the boys were +now beginning to stow away systematically; "why we won't be able to +navigate the boats through that shallow canal at all. They'll just stick +fast, because they'll be so low down in the water; and chances are we'll +have to spend all our vacation slobbering around in that mud trying to +coax them along. Go slow, fellows; bring just as little as you possibly +can in the morning. If there's any doubt about it being a real necessity, +why leave it at home. We're all scouts and true comrades, ready to share +and share alike; so, no matter what happens, no one will go without." + +Of course there were many persons who came down to watch the loading of +the supplies, for half of Stanhope was interested in the expedition; and +groups of envious boys could be seen in various nooks, taking note of all +that went on, while they wished they had such good luck. + +No one was allowed on board who had no business there. Of course when any +of the fathers or mothers of the boys who were going happened along, they +were only too proudly shown through both boats, and had everything +explained by half a dozen eager scouts. But a couple of guards stood at +the gangplank, and no boy was allowed aboard unless accompanied by his +parents; and even then a strict watch was kept, because there were some +pretty mean fellows in town, who believed in the motto of "rule or +ruin." When they were not allowed to play, they always tried their best +to see to it that no one else played, either. + +"There's Ted Slavin and Ward Kenwood sitting up on the bank over there, +Paul," remarked Jack, about half an hour before the time when the scouts +would have to be going home to their suppers. + +"I've been watching them," replied the scout master; "and from the way +they carry on, laughing when they put their heads together, I had just +about made up my mind that they were hatching up some mischief." + +"Mischief!" echoed Bobolink, who was close by at the moment, and heard +what was being said; "say, that's too nice a word to use when talking +about the pranks of that combination. Ward, he supplies some of the +brains, and all of the hard plunks; while that bully, Ted Slavin, does +the work, or gets some of his cronies to do it for him. Now, I wonder if +they'll try to come aboard here, and play hob with our stuff, like they +did once before when we were all ready to hike off on a jaunt?" + +"Don't bother yourself about that, Bobolink," said Paul, quietly. "I had +decided, even before I noticed Ward and Ted, that we must have a guard +stay on board all night. I'm going to see right now what fellows can be +spared. They can go home to supper, and some of us will wait for them to +come back." + +"Let me be one, Paul; won't you?" pleaded Bobolink. + +"But you are so quick to act, and it might bring on trouble," objected +the other. + +"Oh! I'll promise to think five times before I act once; and besides, +there'll be some fellow along, like Jack here, who can keep me quiet. Of +course, though, if you believe I'm not fit to do the work, why--" + +"That'll do for you, Bobolink," Paul broke in, "if your folks say you can +stay, come back ready to camp on board. I'll find you one or two +mates--four if possible--so you can sleep in relays of twos. And I'll +also try to fix up some dodge that will cool those fellows off, in case +they try to jump aboard between sunset and daylight." + +"Huh! I'd rather _warm_ their jackets for 'em," growled Bobolink; who, +having suffered before at the hands of the meanest boy in Stanhope, Ted +Slavin, had only the poorest opinion of him, and of those who trained in +his company. + +"When I come back tonight, after supper," continued Paul, "I'm going to +fetch my shotgun along. It might come in handy on the cruise in case we +ran up against a wildcat, or something like that. And I've known such a +thing as a double-barrel to be mighty useful, when fired in the air, to +make sneaking boys nearly jump out of their skins with alarm--but always +in the air, remember, Bobolink." + +"Oh! don't worry about me; my bite is not half as bad as my bark. I like +to make out I'm just fierce, when all the while, if you could look +inside, you'd find me chuckling to beat the band. I wouldn't shoot a gun +at anybody, unless it was to save another fellow's life; and then I'd try +to pepper his legs. Fetch the gun, Paul; it'll come in real handy." + +So, when Paul did come back after dark, he carried the weapon under his +arm in true hunter style; for Paul had been several times up in Maine, +and knew a good deal of woodcraft, having had actual experience, which is +better than theory, any day. + +These four scouts were left in charge of the two boats, when finally Paul +went back home to get some sleep before the eventful day that was to +witness the sailing of the motorboat expedition: + +Bobolink; Tom Betts; Spider Sexton, of the Black Fox Patrol and Andy +Flinn, who belonged to the Gray Foxes; and firmly did they promise Paul +to keep a bright lookout to make sure that no harm came to the boats +during the long night. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +JUST AFTER THE CLOCK STRUCK TEN + + +"Here we are, monarchs of all we survey," remarked Bobolink, as the last +of the other scouts went off, leaving the four guards to their task of +taking care of those two fine motorboats for the night. + +It was nine o'clock. + +The well-known sounds from the church steeple had told them that; and +somehow every fellow counted the strokes aloud, as though on this night +in particular they meant far more than at other times. + +Stanhope, not being a manufacturing town, like Manchester, was, as a +rule, rather quiet of nights; except when the Glorious Fourth was being +celebrated; or some other holiday kept the younger element on the move. + +Bobolink had been given the post of "Captain of the Guards;" while Tom +Betts was to be considered the second in command. They were to divide the +duties in such fashion that there would be two of them on deck at a time. + +"I'll take Andy for my mate; and you can have Spider to help out," +Bobolink had told Tom, when they were arranging the programme. + +"And how long will the watches be?" demanded Spider, who liked to sleep +about as much as any fellow in the troop; he had gained that odd name not +because he was artful and cruel; but on account of his slender legs, +which long ago some smart boy had likened to those of a spider; and it +only requires a hint like that to establish a nick-name. + +"Two hours each, divided into four," replied the chief, feeling the +responsibility of his position; for this was really the first time +Bobolink could remember being placed over any of his fellow scouts--Paul +wished to "try him out," and discover what sort of reliance could be +placed in the lad. + +"That's an awful short time to get a snooze," complained Spider, yawning. +"Why, you'd hardly get asleep before you'd have to wake up." + +"Then what's the use going to sleep at all, at all?" remarked Andy +Flinn, with a broad smile. "Let's draw lots to say who'll stand guard +the whole night" + +"Well, I guess not," objected Spider, vigorously. "Half a loaf is some +better'n no bread, they always say; and four hours ought to make a +fellow feel as though he hadn't been shut out altogether from his +needed rest." + +"Needed rest is good for you, Spider; the only trouble is you need too +much," Bobolink remarked. "But here's the way we'll fix it: Andy and me, +why, we'll be the pioneers on the job, starting in right now, while you +others curl up somewhere, and get busy taking your forty winks. At +eleven-ten we'll give you the foot, and take your places. Jack left me +his little watch, so we could tell how time goes; but sure, you can hear +the clock in the church steeple knock off the hours. And for the last +time, listen to me; not one wink must any sentry take while on duty. +Sleeping on post is the most terrible thing you can do. They shoot +soldiers in war time who betray their trust that way. Get your +instructions, fellows?" + +"I'm on to what you mean, all right," said Spider; "and I guess I know my +weakness, as well as anybody. To prove that I want to do the right thing, +I'm going to fix it up with my mate to give me a jab with this pin, every +time he gets a notion in his head that I'm drowsing." + +"Say, that sounds heroic all right," remarked Bobolink, doubtfully; "but +you don't want to get too gay with that same pin, Tom. It'd be a shame to +wake Andy and me up every ten minutes, making Spider give a yelp. Better +just shake him if he acts sleepy. And above everything else, keep a +bright watch along the shore." + +"Think they'll be apt to come from that direction, do you?" asked Spider. + +"Just as like as not," the other returned; "but that isn't saying you +ought not to keep an eye on the other side, and all around. I wouldn't +put it past that Ted Slavin to swim down this way from some place above, +thinking he could do his little trick by fooling us, and coming aboard on +the water side." + +"Whew! do you really think, then, he'd dare board these boats, knowing +that they belong to two of the richest and most prominent citizens of +Stanhope?" asked Spider, who occasionally liked to air his command of +fine language. + +"Well, you ought to be on to the curves of that Ted Slavin; and if you +just look back to things he's been known to do in the past, why, lots +of times he's played his pranks on people that had a pull. Why, didn't +he even sneak into the loft over Police Headquarters once, and rig up a +scare that came near breaking up the force. Ted fixed it so the wind'd +work through a knot-hole in the dark, whenever he chose to pull a +string over the fence back of the house, and make the awfullest +groaning noise anybody ever did hear. It got on the nerves of Chief +Billings and his men. They hunted that loft over and over, but of +course the groans didn't come when they were up there. Why, he had 'em +so badly rattled that they all just about camped out on the pavement +the rest of that night." + +"Sure, I remember that," declared Andy Flinn, laughing. "Three nights did +he play the same joke, and then they got on to him. Wan officer do be +sneakin' up to the loft, while the rist pretended to be huntin' around +downstairs. He discovered the sthring, cript downstairs again, wint out +on the sly, and, be the powers, followed it to the fince. Then he wint +around, and jumped on Tid while the bhoy was a pullin' his sthring like +smoke, makin' worse groanings than any time yit. Sure they thried to hush +the joke up, the police was that ashamed; but it cript out some way." + +"Well, get off to bed, Spider and Tom;" said Bobolink, "we'll wake you up +when it's time to change the watch. And remember what a nice little +surprise we've got ready for anybody who thinks he can meddle with things +that don't belong to him. Skip out now, both of you." + +The two motorboats had been lashed side by side. They were about of a +size, and something like twenty-four feet in length, with a rather +generous beam, because their owners went in for pleasure and comfort, +rather than racing. Still, one of the boats, the _Speedwell_, was said to +be capable of doing a mile in seven minutes, if pushed, on flat water; +while the other, called the _Comfort_, being broader, could not do +anything like that. + +It was easy to pass from one boat to the other, as they lay there. Each +had a canopy top, and curtains that could be dropped, and buttoned, +during a wet spell, or if the owner chose to sleep aboard; but on this +occasion Paul had believed it best that these latter should remain up, so +as to allow of free observation all around. + +A stout hawser secured the boat nearest the shore to a big stake that +had been driven deeply into the earth. Thus the boats lay close beside +a short dock that was called a landing stage. As the current of the +Bushkill was always pretty strong there must be more or less of a +strain on that hawser; but since it was comparatively new, the boys +felt that there could not be the slightest danger of its breaking, +unless some outside influence were brought to bear on it, such as a +keen-edged knife blade. + +In that case, as it was very taut, it would naturally part readily; and +with consequences disastrous to the safety of the two boats, which must +be carried off down-stream in the darkness, possibly to be driven ashore +on some rocks below. + +And so Bobolink, having been duly warned with regard to possible trouble +in connection with that same hawser, had mentally called the rope his +"dead line;" and he watched the shore above that point three times as +much as any other place. + +He and Andy had planned not to talk while on duty. If they found it +necessary to say anything at all, which was hardly likely, the +communication would be in the lowest whisper. + +Bobolink was not greedy, but he really hoped that if any sort of +trouble did come it would come along while he and Andy were holding the +post of guards. He had a little fear that Spider Sexton might not be +depended on, no matter what his good intentions, while Tom Betts was an +unknown quantity. + +In case Andy happened to be sitting in one boat, while Bobolink was +occupying the other, they had fixed it up so that by taking a lead +pencil, the "commander" could give a few little light taps on the side of +the craft, using his knowledge of the Morse code to send the message, and +in this way ask whether his assistant were wide awake, and on the job, +when Andy would send back a reply along the same order; for he aspired to +be a signal man of the troop, and was daily practicing with the wigwag +flags, as well as smoke and fire signals. + +The town clock boomed out the hour of ten. + +Bobolink had himself begun to feel rather sleepy, and more to arouse his +dormant faculties than anything else, he sent a message along the wooden +telegraph line. The reply was a bit slow in coming, which made him think +Andy might also be inclined to fall into a doze. + +So Bobolink decided that he must bestir himself, and give the signal more +frequently. He would not have this, his first important commission, turn +out poorly, for a good deal. Perhaps his whole future usefulness as a +scout who could be depended on in emergencies rested on the way he +accounted for the safety of the motorboats this night. + +When he found himself letting his eyes shut, even for a minute, he would +immediately try to picture the consternation that would ensue should a +fire suddenly envelope the boats that had been placed in the hands of the +scouts, and for which they would be held responsible. + +He knew Ted Slavin of old, and felt that the town bully would not +hesitate at even such a thing as that. + +Then there was such a thing as cutting the hawser, and letting the boats +drift down-stream, to bring up against some rocks that might stave a hole +in the delicate planking. Who could tell but what the rope had parted +under a strain? Sometimes a break may look like the work of a sharp +knife; and anyway, as darkness lay upon the scene, with a cloudy sky +overhead to hide the young moon, the identity of the vandal could never +be absolutely known. + +All these things Bobolink was turning over and over in his mind as he sat +there trying to keep awake. + +It is one of the hardest things to do, and especially when the subject is +only a half-grown lad, with but a dim idea of the responsibility +depending on the faithful discharge of his duty. + +Hello! what was that? Bobolink thought he surely heard a sound like +muttered conversation. But then, even in steady old Stanhope, there were +a number of happy-go-lucky chaps who tarried late in the saloons; and +when they finally started homeward, used to talk to themselves along the +way. Perhaps it was only one of these convivial fellows trying to find +the way home, and getting off his course, coming to the open place along +the river bank, intending to lie down and sleep his confusion off. + +Bobolink was thrilled, however, a minute later, when he felt sure he +could again hear the low mutter of voices. It struck him that several +persons might be urging each other on, as though inclined to feel the +need of backing. + +It came from up-river, too, the point he meant to watch more than any +other; and this fact increased the suspicious look of the case. + +"Oh! it's coming," whispered the eager boy to himself; "and I only hope +the water will be hot enough, that's all." + +His words were mysterious enough to suit any one; and even while he was +speaking in this manner Bobolink started to crawl under the canopy that +sheltered him from the dew of the night. He allowed the end of his pencil +to throb against the side of the boat, giving the one significant word: +"Come!" An immediate answer assured him that Andy heard, and understood. +Another minute, and the Irish boy came shuffling over from the other +boat, trying to keep from making any more noise than was necessary. + +"Take hold," Bobolink whispered in his ear, pulling the other's head down +close to his lips; "They're coming! Be ready to go at it licketty-split +when I say the word. Get that?" + +"Sure!" came in the faintest tone from the other; whereupon Bobolink, +feeling that his hour had arrived, started once more to crawl back to his +former position. + +But now he had something in his hands that looked very like a snake; or +since Bobolink was known to fairly detest all crawling creatures, it +might be a rope, although there are still other things that have that +same willowy appearance--a garden hose, for example. + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +THE GREAT CRUISE OF THE SCOUTS BEGUN + + +When Bobolink again reached the bow of the _Comfort_, and peered above +the side, he glued his eyes to the spot where he knew the rope lay that +held the boats moored to the shore. + +And as the half moon condescended to peep from behind the dark clouds +that had until now hidden her bright face, the scout could make out a +flattened figure, that seemed to be hugging the earth, while creeping +slowly forward. + +Not only one, but three more, did he see, all in a line, as though in +this way the conspirators had arranged to keep their courage up to the +sticking point. Each fellow might watch his mates, and see that no one +lagged behind. + +Bobolink was quivering with eagerness and excitement. He figured that +these night crawlers had only five more feet to cover before they would +be as close to his "dead line" as prudence would dictate that he allow, +since it might require only a single sweep of the knife to cut that rope. + +They kept on advancing as though anxious to get the job over with, now +that they had keyed their courage up to the proper pitch. + +Another foot was all that Bobolink meant to allow, and then his time +would come to act. Those last few seconds seemed fairly to crawl, so +wrought-up was the waiting scout; but finally he concluded that it was no +use holding off any longer. So he suddenly called out the one word: + +"Now!" + +Instantly a new sound broke the silence. Bobolink elevated the object +he was hold in his hands. There came a queer, whizzing noise, like +water squirting from the end of a nozzle; which was exactly what it +was, and _hot_ water in the bargain, not actually scalding, but of such +a temperature to make a fellow wince, if it happened to sprinkle +over-his face. + +It was all Bobolink's idea. He had brought a little garden pump aboard +during the afternoon, with the hose that went with it. There was a +kerosene cookstove aboard each boat, used when going ashore might be +unwise on account of rainy weather; and on this the artful schemer had +heated his water. Every time he went back to that quarter he tested its +temperature, to see whether it kept up to the pitch he meant it should +be. And Andy's part of the job was to manipulate the handle of the little +pump with all his vim and power. + +Imagine the consternation of four plotters, who, when just about to +carry out their pleasant little scheme, suddenly and without warning, +found a spray of hot water touching every exposed part of their skin! + +Do you wonder that they immediately let out a few yelps, and scrambling +to their feet, rushed headlong away, followed by the laughter and jeers +of Bobolink and his hard-working assistant. + +"Go it, you tigers! My! what sprinters you can be, when you only half +try! Come again, when you cool off a bit! Plenty more of the same kind on +tap! Don't be bashful, Teddy; let's hear from you again, and often. Whee! +just listen to 'em howl, would you?" + +Perhaps some of those who were with Ted Slavin in his little game were +more frightened than hurt by the hot water, but they certainly did +chatter as they kept on up the river bank. Little danger of them making +another try to injure the boats again that night! + +Of course Spider and Tom Bates had jumped up at the first outbreak, ready +to help repel boarders. Their assistance was not needed; but they enjoyed +the joke as much as their chums and for the next half hour all sat +around, talking, and comparing notes. + +But finally silence again rested over the scene; Spider and Tom +condescended to crawl under their blankets again for another "cat-nap," +as the former dubbed it, while Bobolink and his able assistant resumed +their duties as sentries. + +The night, however, was disturbed no more by any outbreak. Those would-be +jokers seemed to know when they had taken hold of what Bobolink termed +the "business end of a buzz-saw;" at any rate they were only conspicuous +during the remainder of the night by their absence. + +Of course every one of the boys on board the two motorboats was glad when +the first peep of dawn came. It had seemed about "forty-eleven hours +long," Spider admitted; though he also triumphantly asked Tom Betts +whether the other had had occasion to jab that pin into him even once, +which the second scout laughingly admitted he had not. + +"See there," Spider had declared, "can't I keep awake when duty +calls me? You needn't be afraid to trust a Sexton, when you need a +faithful watcher." + +Before the sun appeared Paul and Jack were on hand, to make sure that +everything was in shape for an early start, for they hoped to get away by +nine o'clock. + +Others of the scouts began to drop around, and from the appearance of +their eyes Paul was of the opinion that a full night's sleep had not been +enjoyed by many of the members of the troop. Of course, it was the +excitement of starting out on such a glorious cruise that kept them +awake; for it is not given to scouts very often to enjoy such a prospect, +afloat, with staunch motorboats given over into their keeping. + +Since so many things had been looked after on the preceding afternoon, +there was really little to be done that morning. Every fellow was +supposed to be on hand at a certain time, ready with his little blanket, +and his haversack, in which he would carry a towel, some soap, a brush, +an extra shirt, some socks and handkerchiefs; and if he could find a +spare bit of room, why, he was entitled to cram in all the crullers or +other dainties he could manage; for after that supply was gone there +would be only plain camp fare until they got home again. + +Paul was kept busy seeing that everything was stored away in the right +place. Of course the supplies of food and the tents, as well as the +numerous blankets, had to be divided as equally as possible, so that each +boat would have its fair cargo. + +When the roster of those who could go was taken, just before the time +came to start, and the others were ordered ashore, it was found that all +told there were just eighteen fellows lucky enough to be in the lot. + +Some of the boys who could not go looked pretty doleful as they watched +the preparations. There were the twins, William and Wallace Carberry, +whose parents insisted on their going to the sea-shore; and Horace Poole, +as well as Cliff Jones, of the second patrol, also compelled to obey the +parental injunction; when, if given their choice, they would ten times +sooner have remained at home, and had the chance of starting out on this +wonderful cruise with their chums. + +Sandy Griggs, the butcher's son, was laid up with a lame leg; while +George Hurst happened to develop a touch of malaria, and his parents +would not hear of him going on the water at such a time. As for Red +Conklin and Lub Ketcham, for some reason or other which they did not care +to explain, they had been positively refused permission to go along; +perhaps they were being punished for some misdemeanor; and if so, to +judge from the long faces they showed, the like would not be apt to +happen again very soon; for it pained them dreadfully to think that they +were to be debarred from all that glorious fun which the fortunate +eighteen had ahead of them. + +With nine to a boat there was considerable crowding; but this came mostly +on account of the tremendous amount of material carried. Why, one would +almost be inclined to think those boys were going off for a whole three +months, instead of not more than two weeks at most, to judge from the +stuff they carried. It takes boys a long time to learn to plan such trips +as this in light marching order, doing without everything save absolute +necessities. + +Why, there was Bobolink, who ought to have known better, actually trying +to get Paul to allow him to take along that little garden pump, with its +line of hose. Just because it had come in so happily when those jokers +meant to cut the hawser, and set the two boats adrift, Bobolink declared +there could be no telling how many times it would prove a blessing; but +Paul utterly refused to carry such a burden; and so in the end it was +put ashore, and given in charge of the twins to return in safety to the +Link garden. + +When nine o'clock struck, everything seemed to be ready. + +"I can't think of anything else; can you. Jack?" Paul asked his second in +command, and who was to take charge of the _Speedwell_, while Paul +himself ran the other craft. + +"I see you've got the extra gas aboard, and that was one thing I had on +my mind," replied Jack. "There's nothing else that I know. Look at +William Carberry, will you? I honestly believe he's figuring in his mind +right now whether he dares go, against his home order, and jump aboard, +to sail with us." + +"I wouldn't let him, now that I know he couldn't get permission," +remarked Paul, promptly. "We want to make a start with a clean record. No +fellow is going without the full permission of his folks. I'd hate to +think that any scout sneaked off, and came anyhow. He wouldn't have a +good time, because all the while he'd be thinking of what was coming when +he got back." + +"Bobolink is rubbing his chin every time he looks at that little garden +pump," Jack went on, chuckling mightily, as though he enjoyed watching +the faces of his comrades, and reading all sorts of things there. "He +just can't see why you wouldn't let him carry it along. I heard him tell +how it would be good for giving us all a clean-off shower bath, when we +went in swimming; and all that sort of thing. When he can't have what he +wants, Bobolink is a hard loser; isn't he, Paul?" + +"Well, he beats any one else in hanging on," replied the other. "Now +take those boxes that little old professor stored one night in your +father's mill--Bobolink just can't get them out of his mind; and he +never will be happy till you find out what was in them. After that he'll +forget all about the things. But if everything is ready, I guess we +might as well start." + +When the _Speedwell_, being on the outside, started to "popping," and +then moved off, there was a cheer from fully five score of throats; +and counting the girls who had also come down to see the beginning of +the motorboat cruise, there must have been nearly double that number +on the bank. + +Then the roomier _Comfort_ also made a start, and following in the wake +of the pilot boat, turned until her nose pointed down-stream. Flags were +flying from fore and aft of both boats; and the boys waved their +campaign hats, while they sent back hearty cheers in answer to the many +good wishes shouted after them by the crowd ashore, while Bobolink blew +cheery blasts on his bugle, and Bluff Shipley would have beaten a lively +tattoo on his drum, only it had been decided best to leave that +instrument at home. + +And with all this noisy send-off, the two boats began to chug-chug down +the Bushkill, bound for that far-away island in Lake Tokala, about which +so many strange stories had from time to time been told. + +"Well, we're off at last, Bobolink," said Jack, who had that individual +aboard with him. + +"That's right, and everything seems lovely, with the goose hanging high," +replied the other. "But seems to me the troop owes us guards a vote of +thanks for serving as we did. Just think what a lot of grunters we'd have +been this fine morning, if our boats had been set adrift, and brought up +on the rocks down below, with chances of holes being knocked in the +sides! Say, we've got a whole lot to be thankful for, Jack; and my old +garden pump stood up to the racket first-rate, too." + +"That's true, Bobolink; and as soon as we're settled in camp I'm going to +make sure that the troop acknowledges its indebtedness to you four +fellows by a vote of thanks, see if I don't." + +"Oh say, now, I didn't mean to hint that way," objected the other, +turning a little red in the face with confusion. "We only did our duty, +after all, if we did lose a lot of sleep. But then, I guess we got as +much as a lot of the fellows that went to bed at home. Yes, we're off at +last, and things look great. I'm as happy as a lark, and that free from +care--well, I would be, that is, if only somebody could up and give me +just a hint what those boxes had in 'em. It was so funny to have that +queer professor store 'em with your father in his mill; and then to have +somebody sneakin' around, wantin' to steal them. Needn't grin at me that +way, Jack; you know I'm a little weak in that quarter. I sure _do_ want +to know! Don't suppose you've heard anything new since I talked with you +last about it?" and as Jack shook his head in the negative, Bobolink +looked disappointed, and turned away. + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +STUCK FAST IN THE MUD + + +"About three mile's below Stanhope now; aren't we, Paul?" asked Jud +Elderkin, the leader of the second patrol, who, with Bluff, Nuthin, +Joe Clausin, Gusty Bellows, Old Dan Tucker, Phil Towns and Little +Billie, constituted the crew of the _Comfort_, commanded by the scout +master himself. + +Jack had been given charge of the other boat, because Frank Savage was +not feeling any too well, though probably he had not let his folks know +about it, lest he be kept at home. + +"More than that, Jud," answered the other; "and in the most ticklish part +of the river, too. I ought to signal the other boat to slow up some more. +You see, while there are no rocks around here, the eddies form sandbars +that keep changing, just as I understand they do away out in the big +Mississippi, so that a pilot on his way up-river finds a new channel cut +out, and bars that were never there when he went down a week before." + +"And notice, too, that Jack's given over the wheel to Bobolink, while he +is back looking after the motor. Now, Bobolink is a cracker-jack of a +fellow to get up all sorts of clever schemes for sprinkling creepers in +the night; but he's a little apt to be flighty when it comes to running a +boat. There! what did I tell you, Paul; they've run aground, as sure as +you live!" + +"You're right, Jud; and it looks like the _Speedwell_ might go over on +her beam-ends, the way she's tilted now. Good for Jack; he's ordering +them all over on the upper side! That may keep her from toppling over!" +Paul exclaimed, as he gave the wheel a little turn, and headed straight +for the boat in peril. + +"Wow! that was a right smart trick of Jack's!" cried Jud, in admiration. +"If he'd lost his head, like some fellows I know might have done, +nothing'd ever kept that boat on her keel. And just to think what a nasty +job we'd have on our hands, trying to right her again, and before our +great trip had hardly started." + +"Yes," added Old Dan Tucker, who happened to be close to them, "that +ain't the worst of it. You know the main part of the grub's aboard the +other boat Think of those juicy hams floatin' off down the Bushkill, with +not a single tooth ever bein' put in 'em; and all that bread and stuff +soaked. Oh! it gives me a cold shiver to even think of it," for Dan loved +the bugle call that announced dining time better than any other music. + +The greatest excitement prevailed aboard both boats. Jack seemed to be +keeping his crew perched along the upper rail, where their weight had the +effect of holding the boat with the narrower beam from toppling over on +her side. It looked like a close shave, as Jud Elderkin said, with that +swift current rushing past on the port quarter, and almost lapping the +rim of the cockpit. + +Of course, as soon as she struck Jack had shut off power, so that the +boat was now lying like a stranded little whale. + +Paul brought up alongside, looking out that he did not strike the same +unseen sandbar. + +"Take this rope, some of you, and make fast to that cleat at the stern," +Paul called out, giving a whirl that sent it aboard the tilted motorboat. + +"What are you meaning to do, Paul; give us a pull back?" asked Jack, who +did not seem to be one-half so "rattled" by the mishap as some of the +other fellows; simply because he had the faculty of keeping his wits +about him in an emergency. + +"That's the only way I can see," came the reply. "And as the stern +is under water, Jack, what's the matter with backing when we start +to pulling?" + +"Not a thing, that I can see," answered the skipper of the _Speedwell_; +"But I hope she slides off all right." + +"Have your crew get as far aft as they can," continued Paul. "That will +lighten the bow, more or less. And keep them all on the side they're on; +only as soon as she drops back on an even keel, they must get over, so +she won't swing to starboard too much. All ready, now?" + +"Yes, the rope's tied fast to the cleat, and unless you yank that out by +the roots, the boat's just _got_ to move! Say when, Paul," with which +Jack again bent over the three horse-power motor with which the faster +boat was equipped. + +Paul took one look around before giving the word. He wanted to make sure +that everything was in readiness, so there might be no hitch. A mistake +at that critical stage might result in bringing about the very accident +they were striving to avoid, and as a consequence it was wise to make +haste slowly. That is always a rule good scout masters lay down to the +boys under their charge. "Slow but sure" is a motto that many a boy would +be wise to take to himself through life. + +And when Paul had made certain that everything was in readiness he +started the motor of the _Comfort_, reversing his lever; so that every +ounce of force was exerted to drag the companion boat off its sandy bed. + +Jack complied with the requirements of the situation by also starting +his motor the same way; and with the happiest results. + +"Hurrah! she's moving!" cried little Nuthin, who was not in danger, but +just as much excited as though the reverse had been the case. + +"There she comes!" yelled several of the anxious scouts, as the +_Speedwell_ was seen to start backward. + +"One good pull deserves another; eh, fellows?" cried the delighted +Bobolink, who was wondering whether Jack would ever entrust the wheel to +his care again, after that accident; but he need not have worried, for +somehow the skipper did not seem to feel that it was his fault. + +And Bobolink, when he was again placed in charge of the wheel, felt that +he had had a lesson that would last him some time. In this sort of work +there could be no telling what was going to happen; hence, each scout +would be wise to remember the rule by which they were supposed to always +be guided, and "be prepared." That meant being watchful, wakeful, +earnest, and looking for signs to indicate trouble, so that should it +come they would not be caught napping. + +After a little while they came in sight of Manchester, with its smoking +stacks, and its busy mills. Possibly the news of the expedition of the +Stanhope Troop had been carried to the boys down here. At any rate, there +was a group of several fellows wearing the well known khaki-uniform, who +waved to them from the bank and acted as though wishing the expedition +success. They were pretty good fellows, those Manchester scouts, and the +Stanhope boys liked them much more than they did the members of the +Aldine troop up the river. Everybody knows there is a vast difference in +boys; and sometimes even the fellows in various towns will seem, to be +built along certain lines, having pretty much the same leading +characteristics. The Manchester lads had proven a straight-forward set in +what competitions the several troops had had so far. And hence every +fellow aboard the two boats swung his hat, and sent back hearty cheers. + +"What's the matter with Manchester? She's all right!" they called, in +unison, as Gusty Bellows took upon himself the duties which, on the ball +field, made him invaluable as the "cheer captain." + +His name was really Gustavus Bellows; but that was easily corrupted into +Gusty when the fellows learned on his first coming to Stanhope what a +tremendous voice he had. + +About a mile or so below Manchester, Paul had said, the mouth of what +had once been Jackson Creek, might be found. Several of the boys +could remember having heard more or less about that abandoned canal; +perhaps the Manchester lads knew about it, since it was closer to +their home town. + +Everybody, then, was anxiously scanning the shore on the left, because +they knew it must lie somewhere along there. + +"I see the mouth!" exclaimed Phil Towns, who had very keen eyesight. +"Just look on the other side of that crooked tree, and you'll glimpse +a little bar that juts out. That must be on the upper side of the +creek's mouth; because Paul said bars nearly always form there. How +about that, Paul?" + +"Go up head, Phil; you've struck the bull's eye," replied the other, with +a laugh, as he began to head in toward the crooked tree mentioned, and +which doubtless he took for his landmark when in search of the creek. + +The _Comfort_ was in the lead now. Jack was content to play "second +fiddle," as he called it. As Paul had gone through the disused canal in +his canoe, exploring it pretty thoroughly, he must act as pilot. + +Once they had pushed past the mouth of the creek they found a rather +disheartening prospect. The water seemed very low, so that they could see +bottom everywhere. Even Paul frowned, and shook his head. + +"It surely must have lowered several inches since I was here yesterday," +he declared, in dismay. + +"Think we'll get through safely?" queried Jud Elderkin, anxiously. + +"I hope we may," replied the scout master; "but we've just got to creep +along, and be mighty careful. You see, most of the bed of this canal is +mud, and not sand. Once the sharp bow starts to rooting in that, there's +no telling how far we'll explore before letting up. And it's surprising +how that same mud clings. I could hardly work my light canoe loose two or +three times. Just seemed like ten pair of hands had hold of her, and were +gripping tight. Easy there, Jack, take another notch in your speed, old +fellow! Crawl along, if you can. And have the poles ready to fend off, if +we get into any bad hole." + +The boys were strung along the sides of the slowly moving motorboats. +Every fellow came near holding his breath with nervousness. + +"Excuse me from getting stuck here in this nasty mess," remarked Nat +Smith, on board the roomier boat with Jack, Bobolink, Tom Betts, Andy +Flinn, Curly Baxter, Spider Sexton, Frank Savage and Bob Tice. + +"Why, we might stay here a week," observed the last mentioned, in a voice +that told plainly how little he would relish such a mishap, when they had +planned such splendid times ahead. + +"All summer, if it didn't rain, because the creek would get lower all +the time." Paul himself observed, with emphasis, wishing to make every +scout resolve to avoid this catastrophe, if it were at all possible. + +"Who'd ever think," remarked Jud, "that there was such a queer old +place as this not more'n seven miles away from home? And not one of us +ever poked a boat's nose up this same creek before Paul came down, to +spy out things." + +"Oh! well, there's a reason for that," replied Phil Towns, who knew all +about everything that had ever happened in and around Stanhope. "Until +lately, when the scouts organized in these three towns, the boys of +Stanhope and those of Manchester never had much to do with each other. +Many's the stone fight I've been in with those big mill chaps. Sometimes +we whipped them; and then again they chased us right home. So no Stanhope +boy ever dared go far down the river in the old days. That's the reason, +I guess, why none of us ever tried to explore this place. Say, we seem to +be getting in worse and worse, Paul. It isn't more'n a foot deep over +there on the right, and less'n ten inches here on the left." + +"I know it, Phil, and I'm beginning to be afraid we'll have to back out +of this the best way we can," replied the scout master, reluctantly; for +his heart had been set on carrying out this plan, and he hated to be +compelled to give it up. + +Hardly had he spoken than the boat brought up with a jolt that came near +throwing several of the scouts into the water and mud. They had run +aground after all! Paul turned the motor to the reverse, and the little +propeller fairly sizzled in its mad efforts to drag the craft back into +clear water, but it was just as Paul had said--there seemed to be +innumerable hands clinging fore and aft that refused to let go. And in +spite of all the work of the motor they did not move an inch. + +"Rotten luck!" exploded Jud Elderkin, as he looked helplessly around, as +if to see whether a fellow could at least jump ashore; but since ten feet +of that ooze lay on either side, he failed to get much encouragement. + +"Ahoy, _Speedwell_, you'll have to give us a lift!" called Paul, making a +megaphone out of his hands. + +"Y-y-yes, t-t-turn about's f-f-fair p-p-play," added Bluff, waving his +bugle. "We p-p-pulled you off, and n-n-now you g-g-got to return the +f-f-favor." + +"Listen!" said Paul, sharply; "Jack's calling something." + +And as they all lined up along the side of the _Comfort_ they heard +Jack's voice come across the forty feet of water and mud, saying: + +"Only wish we could, Commodore; but sad to say, we're stuck about as fast +in this lovely mess as you are, and can't budge her an inch!" + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +WHAT THE WATER GAUGE SHOWED + + +"Well, here is a pretty kettle of fish!" grunted the disgusted Jud. "We +seem to take to sandbars and mud flats today to beat the band." + +Paul had stopped the motor, since it seemed useless. But of course he did +not mean to give up trying to get the boat off. + +"One thing's sure," he said, positively, when the others gathered around +him, as if in this emergency they looked to the scout master to invent +some method of beating the sticky mud at its own game; "every minute we +stay here makes it all the worse for us." + +"Yes, because our weight is sure to make the boat sink deeper in her +nest!" declared Little Billie, leaning far over the side, as if to see +how far down in her muddy bed the boat lay. + +"Yes, that's one thing," added Paul; "but another is the fact that the +creek is falling all the time. Unless it rains, there'll soon be nothing +but mud around us. Now, every fellow crowd back here, and leave the bow +as free as we can. That might loosen the grip of the mud; and when I +turn on the motor at full speed again, let's hope she'll move." + +It was a sensible suggestion; and indeed, about the only thing possible, +since the other boat, being in the same fix, could not come near, either +to give a friendly tug, or take off the _Comfort's_ crew. + +When he had them all as far in the stern as they could get, with a +warning not to allow themselves to be shaken loose, unless they wanted a +mud bath, the skipper started his motor working. + +When it was going at full speed the boat quivered and strained, but did +not move, so far as any one could see; and they were all eager to detect +the first sign of motion. + +"No good!" sighed Jud. "Might as well look the thing in the face, +fellows. Here we stay, and eat up all our grub, day after day. Ain't it +fierce, though? How d'ye suppose we'll ever stand it? If anybody had a +pair of wings now, and could fly ashore, we might get help to pull us +out. But we couldn't use our wigwag flags, even if we tried, because +who'd see 'em? Oh! what tough luck!" + +Paul may have felt somewhat discouraged himself, but he was not the +fellow to betray the fact--so early in the game, at least. + +"Well, Jud," he said, soberly, "perhaps we may have to stick it out +here for a while, but I hope it won't be as bad as you say. And make +up your mind that if we do, it'll be a mighty strange thing, with +eighteen wide awake scouts to think up all sorts of schemes and dodges +that we can try." + +"That's the stuff, Paul!" exclaimed Phil Towns. "Every fellow ought to +get right down to hard pan, and try to think up some way of beating this +old sticky mud. What's the use of being scouts, if we let a little thing +like this get the better of us? If I could only wade ashore, I'd fix a +hawser to a tree back there, and then by workin' the engine p'raps we +might pull the boat off. I've seen 'em do that with a steamboat, away +down on Indian River, when I was with my folks in Florida last winter. +And it worked, too." + +"Well, try the wading; it looks fine!" laughed Joe Clausin. + +"Don't think of it," called out Gusty Bellows at that moment. "I stuck +this pole down in the soft slush, and my stars! it goes right through to +China, I reckon. Anyhow, I couldn't reach bottom. And if you jumped over, +Phil, you'd be up to your neck at the start. Let's tie a rope under your +arms first, anyhow." + +But Paul quickly put an end to all this sort of talk. + +"There's no use trying anything like that," he said. "Even if you did +reach the shore, we haven't got a rope long and strong enough to do the +business. Besides, we may have help soon." + +With that all the boys began craning their necks, as if they expected to +see some kind of a queer craft that could pass over mud as easily as +other boats did water, bearing down on them, with the design of dragging +them from the bank, + +"Say, what does he mean? For the life of me I can't glimpse anything +worth shucks; and the blooming old _Speedwell_ seems to be sticking tight +and fast, just the same way we are. Loosen up, Paul, and put us wise; +won't you?" pleaded Phil. + +"I didn't mean that any living thing was going to hold out a hand to +us," remarked the smiling scout master; "but look aloft, boys, and see +what's coming." + +With that they followed his instructions. + +A general shout went up. + +"Whee! rain a-comin' down on us! Get the curtains ready to button fast, +boys, or we'll have all our fine stuff soaked through and through." +Little Billie called, himself setting things in motion by seizing one of +the rolled curtains, and letting it come down, to be fastened around the +cockpit by means of gummets and screws. + +"But Paul meant something else," declared Jud Elderkin, wisely. "You see, +if only that rain does come, and it's heavy enough, there's going to be +a lot more water in this old canal than we need to pull through with. You +know how quick the Bushkill River rises; and I guess it's the same way +with the Radway." + +"Oh! don't we wish that there'll just be a little old cloud-burst!" cried +Gusty Bellows. "I could stand anything but staying here seven or ten +days, doin' nothing, only eat, and stare at this mud, and wish I was back +home. Come on, little clouds; get a move on you, and let's hear you growl +like thunder." + +They had by now called the attention of the others to the prospects for +rain. Indeed, as soon as the first curtain fell, some of Jack's crew took +note of the significant fact, and they could be seen looking up at the +blackening heavens. There had been very few times in the past when those +boys had hoped it would rain. Perhaps, when they were kept home from a +picnic--for reasons--some of them may have secretly wished the clouds +would let down a little flood, so that those who had been lucky enough to +go, might not have such a laugh on them after all. + +But certainly they never felt just as they did now, while watching the +play of those gathering storm clouds. + +"And the best of the joke is," commented Jud, with a grin, "that lots of +the good folks at home right now are looking up at those same black +clouds, and pitying us boys. They don't realize how we're just praying +that the rain won't turn out a fizzle, after all. Wasn't that a drop I +felt?" + +[Transcriber's note: Beginning of sentence missing from original text] +till that gray gets nearly overhead," remarked Paul, pointing up +at a line marked across the heavens about half-way toward the horizon, +and in the direction of the wind. + +"It's getting dark, anyway," remarked Nuthin, rather timidly; for truth +to tell, the small boy had never ceased to remember how, earlier in the +season, when in camp up near Rattlesnake Mountain, a terrible storm had +struck them and as he clung desperately to the tent they were trying to +hold down, he had actually been carried up into the branches of a tree, +from which position only the prompt work of his fellow scouts had finally +rescued him. + +"And look at that flash of lightning, would you?" echoed Joe Clausin. +"Wow! that was a heavy bang; wasn't it? Tell you now, that bolt must 'a +struck somethin'! Always does, they say, when it comes quick like that." + +"How's the cover; just as snug as you can make it, boys?" demanded Paul; +"because we'll likely get a bit of a blow first, before the rain comes, +and it'd be a bad job if we lost this whole business. Stand by to grab +hold wherever you can. After that, if we weather it all right, there'll +be no trouble." + +"And say, she's coming licketty-split, believe me," called Jud. "I c'n +hear it hummin' through the trees over there like the mischief. Take +hold, everybody; and don't let it get away from you!" + +"We'll all go up together this time, then!" muttered little Nuthin; but +with the grit that seemed a part of his nature, once he started in to do +anything, he also seized the canvas covering at the bottom, and set his +teeth hard. + +With a roar the wind struck them. Had it come from the right quarter Paul +believed it might have helped work them loose; but it happened +unfortunately that just the reverse was the case. If anything, they were +driven on the mud-bank all the harder. + +But at any rate the tarpaulin canopy did not break loose, and that was +something to be satisfied with. + +The wind whooped and howled for perhaps three minutes. Then it died down, +as if giving up the attempt to tear the boat's top out of the hands of +the determined boys. + +"The worst's over, fellows!" called Paul, breathing hard. + +"Hurrah! that's better'n saying it is yet to come. How'd the _Speedwell_ +make out?" Jud asked, sinking back on a thwart, the better to find some +place to peep out. + +"Seems to be all there," replied Nuthin, who had been quicker to look +than the more clumsy Jud. "She's got her cover on, and I guess that means +they're safe and sound; but she don't seem to be floatin' worth a cent. + +"No more are we; but listen, there comes the rain. Now for it," observed +Paul, as with a rush the water began to descend, rattling on the roof of +the canopy cover. + +"Fine! Keep right along that way for a while, and something's bound +to get a move on it, which I hope will be our two boats!" cried +Gusty Bellows. + +"Did you ever hear it come down heavier than that?" demanded Old Dan +Tucker, as he looked anxiously around to see that none of the cargo was +exposed to the flood. + +"Wonder if this old thing sheds water?" suggested Jud, looking up at the +heavy canopy as though he fancied that he felt a stream trickling down +the back of his neck. + +"You can bank on it," declared Joe Clausin. "Anything Mr. Everett owns +has got to be gilt-edged. And he'd never stand for a leaky canopy. +What're you lookin' at out there, Paul?" for the scout master was leaning +a little out on the side away from their companion boat in misery. + +"Why, you see," replied the scout master, drawing his head back, "I +fixed a little contrivance here, just before the storm broke, and I'm +looking now to see whether it shows the least gain in water. I marked +this pole with inches, and rammed it just so far in the mud. If the water +starts to rising any, I can tell as soon as I look." + +"And is she going up yet?" asked Jud, eagerly, + +"Well, it wouldn't be fair to expect that for some time yet," replied +Paul. "At the best I expect we'll have to stay here an hour or so, until +the water up-stream has a chance to come down. I hope it may surprise me, +and get here quicker than that. And boys, if we have to spend all that +time doing nothing, why we might try that little oil stove Mr. Everett +has, and see how it can get us a pot of coffee, with our cold lunch." + +"What time is it now?" asked Jud; while Old Dan Tucker pricked up his +ears, at the prospect of "something doing" along his favorite line. + +"Going on eleven; and I had my breakfast awful early!" remarked +Little Billie. + +"And I had hardly a bite--reckon I was too much excited to eat--so I'm +mighty near starved right now," declared Dan Tucker; but then the boys +had known him to put up that same sort of a plea only an hour after +devouring the biggest meal possible, so they did not expect to see him +collapse yet awhile from weakness through lack of food. + +All the same, Paul agreed that it might serve to distract their minds if +they did have lunch. He also asked Jud to get in communication with those +on the other boat, if the rain had let up enough for them to exchange +signals, and by means of the flag, tell them what those on the _Comfort_ +meant to do. + +Just as Bobolink, who answered, had informed them that those under Jack +were about to follow the same course, Paul took another glance at his +rude water gauge. + +When he drew in his head, Jud, who had been waiting to tell what the +others reported, saw that Paul was smiling as though pleased. + +"What's doing, Commodore?" he asked. + +"The water has risen half an inch, and is still going up," replied Paul. + +At that there was a roar of delight--only Old Dan Tucker was so busy +watching the lunch being got ready, he did not seem to hear the +joyous news. + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +ON THE SWIFT RADWAY + + +"Let me work my flags a little, and tell the other boat the news!" +suggested Jud; and as no one objected he got busy. + +It was good practice, and he had something worth while to communicate, so +Jud enjoyed the task. + +By the time he was through, lunch was ready, the coffee having boiled +enough to please the most critical among the boys. + +"Rain seems to be letting up some," remarked Gusty Bellows, as they +gathered around to discuss what was to be their first meal of the trip. + +"Oh! I hope it isn't going to tantalize us, and raise our hopes only to +dash 'em down again," said Gusty. + +"From the signs I don't think we're through with it all yet," Paul +observed; and as they had considerable faith in the acting scout master +as a weather prophet, there arose a sigh of satisfaction at this remark. + +"Take a look, and see if she's still moving up the scale, Paul," begged +the anxious Phil Towns. + +When this had been done, there was a look of eager expectancy on +every face. + +"Over a full inch since the start," Paul reported. + +"And that's nearly half an hour back," complained Gusty. "Gee! if it goes +up as slow as that, we'll be camping here at sun-down, sure, fellers." + +"Oh! I don't know," Paul put in, confidently; "you must remember that +the rain has fallen all over the watershed that supplies both these +rivers; and this canal now serves as a link between the two. If either +one rises a good deal, we're just bound to get the benefit of that +little flood. Even at an inch an hour we could be moving out of this +before a great while. And I expect that the rise will do better than +that, presently. Just eat away, and wait. Nothing like keeping cool when +you just have to." + +"Yes, when you tumble overboard, like I did once on a time," chuckled +Jud. "I kept perfectly cool; in fact, none of you ever saw a cooler +feller; because it was an ice-boat I dropped out of; and took a header +into an open place on the good old Bushkill. Oh! I can be as cool as a +cucumber--when I have to." + +An hour later Paul announced that the rise had not only kept up as he +predicted, but was increasing. + +"Here's good news for you, fellows," he remarked, after examining his +post, "if it keeps on rising like it's doing right now, we'll be starting +in less than another hour!" + +"Whoopee! that suits me!" cried Gusty, enthusiastically. + +"Ditto here," echoed Jud. "I never was born for inaction; like to be +doing something all the time." + +"So do I," Paul observed, quietly; "but when I find myself blocked in one +direction I just turn in another, and take up some other work. In that +way I manage not only to keep busy, but to shunt off trouble as well. Try +it some time, Jud, and I give you my word you'll feel better." + +But that next hour seemed very long to many of the impatient boys. They +even accused the owner of the watch of having failed to wind it on the +preceding night, just because it did not seem inclined to keep pace with +their imagination. + +The water was rising steadily, if slowly, and some of them declared that +there was now a perceptible motion to the boat whenever they moved about. + +Urged on by an almost unanimous call, Paul finally agreed to start the +motor again, and see what the result would be. So Jud sent the order to +the second boat by means of his signal flags. + +When the cheerful popping of the _Comfort's_ exhaust made itself heard, +there was an almost simultaneous cheer from the scouts. + +"We're off!" they shouted, in great glee. + +"Goodbye, old mud bank!" cried Gusty, waving his hand in mock adieu +to the unlucky spot where so much precious time had been wasted. "See +you later!" + +"Not much we will!" echoed Joe Clausin. "I've got that spot marked with a +red cross in my mind, and if this boat ever gets close to it again, +you'll hear this chicken cackle right smart. It's been photographed on my +brain so that I'll see it lots of times when I wake up in the night." + +"How about the other boat?" asked Paul, who was stooping down to fix +something connected with the motor at the time, and could not stop to +look for himself, although he could hear the throbbing of the +_Speedwell's_ machinery. + +"Oh! she slid off easier than we did, I reckon," remarked Old Dan Tucker, +now snuggled down comfortably, and apparently in a mood to take things +easy, since it would be a long time between "eats." + +"Tell them to go slow, all the same, Jud," Paul remarked. + +"You don't seem to trust this creek as much as you might, Paul?" +chuckled Gusty, who was handling the wheel, during the minute that +Paul was busy. + +"Well, after that experience I confess that I'm a little suspicious of +all kinds of mud banks. They're the easiest things to strike up an +acquaintance with, and a little the hardest to say goodbye to, of +anything I ever met. Give her a little twist to the left, Gusty. That +place dead ahead don't strike me as the channel. That's the ticket. I +guess we missed another slam into a waiting mud bank. Now I'll take the +wheel again, if you don't mind." + +"Rain's over!" announced Little Billie. + +"Looks like it, with that break up yonder," Jud remarked, glancing aloft. +"Hope so, anyhow. We've had all the water we needed, and if it kept on +coming we'd be apt to find things kind of damp up there at the island." + +The mention of that word caused several of the boys to glance quickly at +each other. It was as though a shiver had chased up and down their spinal +columns. For Joe and Little Billie, and perhaps Gusty Bellows, were not +quite as easy in their minds about that "ghost-ridden" island as they +might have been; although, if taken to task, all would doubtless have +stoutly denied any belief in things supernatural. + +The _Comfort_ acted as the pilot boat, and led the way, slowly but +surely, with the _Speedwell_ not far behind. The latter had one or two +little adventures with flirting mud banks, but nothing serious, although +on each occasion the cries of dismay from the crew could be plainly heard +aboard the leading craft. + +And so they came in sight of a river that had a decided current, after +the smart shower had added considerably to its flow. By now the sun was +shining, and the rain clouds had about vanished, being "hull-down" in the +distance, as Jud expressed it; for since they were now on a voyage, he +said that they might as well make use of such nautical terms as they +could remember. + +"That's the roaring Radway, I take it," observed Gusty, as all of them +caught glimpses of the river through the trees ahead. + +"Just what it is," replied Paul; "and as it has quite a strong current, +we're going to have our hands full, pushing up the miles that lie between +here and our camping place." + +"But we c'n do it before dark; can't we, Paul?" asked Phil Towns. + +"Sure we can, if nothing happens to knock us out," said Gusty, before the +other could reply. "Why, we've got several hours yet, if we did have such +tough luck in the blooming old canal." + +"We ought to be mighty glad we got off as as easy as we did, that's +what!" declared Old Dan Tucker, who was something of a philosopher in +his way, and could look at the bright side as well as the next one, +always providing the food supply held out. + +Ten minutes later the _Comfort_ was in Radway River, headed +up-stream. Just as Paul had said, the current proved very swift, and +while the little motor worked faithfully and well, their progress was +not very rapid. + +Besides, it kept them always on the watch. No one was acquainted with +the channel, and the presence of rocks might not always be detected from +surface indications. Some of the treacherous snags were apt to lie out +of sight, but ready to give them a hard knock, and perhaps smash a hole +in the bow. + +And so Paul stationed two boys in positions where they could watch for +every suspicious eddy, which was to be brought to his attention +immediately it was discovered. + +An hour passed, and they were still moving steadily up the river. Paul, +in reply to many questions by his impatient comrades, announced that to +the best of his knowledge they ought to arrive at their destination an +hour and more before dark; which pacified the croakers, who had been +saying the chances were they would have to spend their first night on the +bank, short of the island by a mile or more. + +"That's all right," Old Dan Tucker had remarked; "just so long as we get +ashore in time to build our cooking fire, it suits me." + +Everything seemed to be moving along with clock-like regularity, the +boat breasting the current and throwing the spray in fine style, when +Jud gave a cry. + +"Something's happened to the _Speedwell_!" he announced. + +Of course every eye was instantly turned back, and they were just in time +to see something that announced the truth of Jud's assertion. + +Andy Flinn stood up in the bow of the second boat, which no longer +chugged away as before, and he threw something out that splashed in +the water. + +"It's their anchor!" cried Jud. "Either somebody's overboard, or else +their motor's broken down!" + +"It's the motor, I guess," Paul observed. "Get out our anchor, and +follow suit." + + + + +CHAPTER X + +DODGING THE SNAGS AND THE SNARES + + +A minute later both motorboats lay anchored in the middle of the +swift-flowing Radway, and about sixty feet apart. + +"What's the matter?" shouted Jud, taking it upon himself to learn the +facts in the quickest possible time, so that signal flags were not used. + +"Something's happened to our motor; but Jack thinks he can fix her up, +given a little time," came in the voice of Bobolink. + +"Well, call on us if we can help out any," Paul shouted; for the slapping +of the water against the sides of the boat, as well as over the stones on +either hand, made it hard to hear plainly. + +"What if they can't fix the motor up?" remarked Phil Towns; "I hope that +won't mean we've got to spend the whole night out here in the middle of +the river." + +"Oh I if it comes to the worst, we can tow her ashore; and then it's camp +on the river bank for ours," announced Paul, cheerfully. He always seemed +to have plans made up in advance, as though anticipating every trouble +that could arise, and getting ready for it. + +"Huh! that mightn't be so bad, after all," grunted Joe Clausin; and even +Gusty Bellows and Little Billie nodded their heads, as if agreeing that +there were things less desirable than camping on the bank. + +The minutes dragged along, until half an hour had gone. Even Paul began +to show signs of restlessness. He finally made a megaphone of his hands, +and called to Bobolink: + +"Tell Jack to step up; I'd like to ask him a question or two." + +"Ay, ay, sir," replied the other, touching his forelock in true +man-o'-war style, and immediately the head of Jack appeared. + +"What's the good word, Jack?" asked the Commodore of the expedition. "Can +you make the mend, d'ye think; and just about how long is it going to +take you?" + +"Between five and ten minutes, not more," came the reply; "I've got the +hang of it now, and the end's in sight." + +"Whoopee! that sounds good to me!" shouted Gusty Bellows, waving his hat. + +Five minutes had hardly passed before they heard the familiar pop-pop-pop +of the _Speedwell's_ motor exhaust. + +"How is it?" called Paul once more. + +"Fine and dandy," answered Bobolink, waving his bugle; and giving a few +vigorous blasts to indicate that victory was nigh. + +"They're hauling in the anchor, which is a good sign," declared Nuthin. + +Presently both boats were again breasting the stream. Apparently no +serious result had come from the accident, save that more than a good +half-hour had been wasted. But still Paul declared that he had hopes of +making their destination before darkness set in. + +The sun was getting very low, and the river looked desolate indeed. It +was bordered by swampy land; and where the ground showed, there seemed to +be such a vast number of rocks that farming had never been attempted. + +"What d'y'e suppose is in those marshes?" Gusty asked, after they had +passed about the fifth. + +"I understand that a lot of cranberries are gathered here every Fall, and +sent down to the cities for the market," Jud Elderkin replied. + +"And seems to me a bear was killed last year somewhere up here," Nuthin' +put in, rather timidly. "So I'm glad you brought that gun along, Paul. We +are not lookin' for a bear, because we never lost one; but if he _did_ +come to camp it'd be nice to feel that we could give the old chap a warm +reception." + +"Huh! I can see the warm reception he'd get," chuckled Jud. +"Seventeen trees would each one have a scout sitting up in the +branches as quick as hot cakes. Guess Paul would have to be the +reception committee all alone." + +"Don't you believe it," remarked Gusty Bellows; "You'd see me making for +the axe in a _big_ hurry, I believe in an axe. It makes one of the +greatest weapons for defence you ever saw. I've practiced swinging it +around, and I know just how to strike." + +"Well, we'll remember that; won't we, fellows?" remarked Jud, with a +laugh. "Plenty of axe exercise Gusty needs, to keep him in trim for +bears; and I can see now how our firewood is going to be attended to." + +They kept pushing on all the while; and there was never a time that the +lookout did not have to keep his eyes on the alert, because of the traps +and snares that lay in wait for the voyagers up the rough Radway. + +"Great river, I don't think!" Joe Clausin ventured to remark, after they +had done considerable dodging, to avoid a mass of rocks that blocked the +way in a direct line. + +"Still, you'll notice that there's always a passage around," said Paul. +"It's that way with nearly everything. Lots of times we don't see the +opening till we get right on it, and then all of a sudden, there's the +path out." + +"I guess you're right, Paul," observed Joe. "Things do happen to a fellow +sometimes, in a funny way, and just when he feels like giving up, he sees +the light. You remember a lot of trouble I had once, and how it turned +out splendidly? And so I learned my lesson, I sure did. I look at things +different now. It showed me how silly it is to worry over things that you +can't help." + +"But all the same," remarked Gusty, "I wish we had a squint at that same +old lake ahead. It's getting sunset, and beyond, Paul." + +"I know it, and we must be pretty near the place now," replied the scout +master. "Unless we see it inside of ten minutes I'll have to give the +word to turn in to the shore at the next half-way decent landing, where +there seems to be enough water to float our boats." + +"There's a good place right now," declared Joe, pointing; "and we +mightn't run across as fine a landing again." + +"Ten minutes, I said," repeated Paul, positively; because he believed +that there were certain signs to tell him they would come in sight of +the big lake, from which the Radway flowed, after they had turned the +next bend. + +Somehow the others seemed to guess what he had in mind, and all were +anxiously watching as they drew near the bend. + +As the trees ceased to shut out their view, they gave a shout of delight, +for the lake was there, just as Paul had anticipated. + +"Whew! she's a big place, all right!" declared Jud, as they looked toward +the distant shore, where the trees seemed lost in the shadows. + +"I never dreamed there was a lake like this so near Stanhope," declared +Joe, as he stared. "That one up by Rattlesnake Mountain could be put in a +corner of Tokala, and wouldn't be missed. And say, that must be the +island over yonder; don't you think so, Paul?" + +"Look and see if you can sight a cedar growing on the top of the hill +that they say stands in the middle of the island," suggested the scout +master, still busy at the wheel; for the danger was not yet all over, as +they had not entered the lake itself, though very near. + +"It's there, all to the good!" announced Jud. + +"Anybody could see that" added Gusty, who was a little jealous of the +superior eyesight of several of his comrades, he being a trifle +near-sighted. + +"Well, if we are going to make a job of it, the sooner it's over the +better," was the queer remark Joe made; but no one paid any particular +attention to his words, they were so taken up with watching the island. + +And so the leading motorboat left the noisy waters of the Radway, and +glided into the smoother lake, much to the satisfaction of the crew; for +the boys had grown tired of the constant need of watchfulness in avoiding +reefs and snags. + +Paul shut off power, and waited to see whether the companion boat +succeeded in reaching the calm waters of the big lake as successfully as +they had done. As it was now pretty close to dark, in spite of the +half-moon that hung overhead, seeing the partly hidden rocks was not an +easy task. + +And so he watched with not a little concern the progress of the +_Speedwell_ during those last few minutes. But Jack was alive to the +situation; and managed to bring his boat safely through, being greeted +with a cheer from those on board the waiting _Comfort_. + +"Now it's straight for the island!" called out Bobolink, as the boats +drew together, and the motors started as cheerfully as if they had not +undergone a hard day's work from the time the voyagers left Stanhope. + +"We'll have to make camp by firelight, that's plain," grumbled Gusty. + +"What's the odds, so long as we get fairly comfortable for the night?" +Bobolink retorted, being one of the kind who can make the best of a bad +bargain when necessary. "All we want to do is to get the tents up and a +fire going, so we can cook something. Then in the morning we'll do all +the fancy fixing you can shake a stick at, and try out all the new +wrinkles every fellow's had in mind since our last camp. This is what I +like. A lake for me, with an island in it that nobody lives on, but +p'raps an old wildcat or a she bear with cubs." + +"But they say something _does_ live on it, and that he's a terror too; a +real wild man that's got hair all over him like a big baboon--I heard it +from a man that saw him once, and he wouldn't lie about it either," Joe +Clausin called out. + +Although the rest of the scouts mocked him, and pretended to jeer at the +idea of such a thing as a wild man existing so near Stanhope, +nevertheless, as the two motorboats gradually shortened the distance +separating them from the mysterious island, they gazed long at the dark +mass lying on the still water of the big lake and its gloomy appearance +affected them. + +Just as Joe Clausin had said, it had a real "spooky" air, that, at the +time, with night at hand, did not impress them very favorably. + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +THE CAMP ON CEDAR ISLAND + + +It was with extreme caution that the two motor-boats crept along the +shore of the island, with numerous eyes on the lookout for a good +landing place. + +"Seems to be plenty of water right here," remarked Jud, who was sounding +with one of the poles. "Eight feet, if an inch, Paul." + +Paul shut off the power immediately. + +"And this looks like the best sort of place to make our landing," he +said. "If we don't like it, or find a better for a permanent camp in the +morning, we can change. Get busy with the poles, fellows, and shove the +boat alongside that bank there." + +This was readily done, and Jud was the first to jump ashore. He wanted to +be able to say that of the whole troop he had landed before any one else, +ghost or no ghost. + +Soon the others followed suit, even if Joe and Little Billie--and yes, +Gusty Bellows also looked timidly around. There was Nuthin, always +reckoned a rather timorous chap, showing himself indifferent to spirits, +and all such things. What bothered Nuthin concerned material things, like +cats, and dogs, and wandering bears; he snapped his fingers at spooks, +because he had never seen one, and did not believe in "fairy stories," as +he called them, anyway. + +As the second boat came alongside, and her crew swarmed over the side, +there were plenty of hands to do things, though they naturally looked to +Paul for orders. + +"A fire, first, fellows!" called out the scout master; "so we can see +what we're doing. Because it's getting pretty dark around here, with +these trees overhead. Jud, you take charge of that part, and the rest +gather wood." + +Many hands make light work, and in what Bobolink called a "jiffy" there +came plenty of wood of all kinds, from dead branches to small-sized logs. + +Jud, like every true scout, knew just how to go about starting a fire. +True, the recent rain had wet pretty much all of the wood, so that a +tenderfoot would have had a difficult task getting the blaze started, +though after that trouble had been surmounted it would not be so bad. But +Jud knew just how to split open a log, and find the dry heart that would +take fire easily; and in a brief time he had his blaze springing up. + +Then others began to bring some of the things ashore, particularly the +tents, in which they expected to sleep during their stay. + +Most of the boys were deeply impressed by the size of both the lake and +the island; since they had not dreamed that things would be upon such a +large scale. + +Then there was that strange silence, broken only by the constant murmur +of the water passing out, where the Radway River had its source; and +perhaps, when a dry spell lowered the water of the lake, even this might +not be heard. + +It seemed to some of the scouts as though they were isolated from all the +rest of the world, marooned in a desolate region, and with many miles +between themselves and other human beings. + +However, when the white tents began to go up, as the several squads of +workers took hold in earnest, things began to look more cheerful. There +is nothing that chases away the "blues" quicker than a cheerful fire, and +the sight of "homey" tents. + +"In the morning, if we feel like it, we can put up a flagstaff in front, +and fly not only our banner, but Old Glory as well," Paul observed. "And +now, suppose some of you fellows give me a hand here." + +"What you going to do, Paul?" asked Old Dan Tucker, eagerly. + +"Begin to get supper," came the answer. + +"I'll give you a hand there," said the other. + +"Me too," said Nat Smith, who was a clever cook. + +And when the odor of coffee began to steal through the camp, the boys +felt amply repaid for all they had undergone in the rough trip from +Stanhope. They sniffed the air, and smiled, and seemed ready to declare +the expedition a great success. + +More than that, the cooks being blessed with healthy appetites +themselves, had cut generous slices from one of the fine hams, and these +were also on the fire, sizzling away at a great rate, and throwing off +the most tempting odors imaginable. + +It was a happy sight about that time, and showed the best side of camp +life. All of the boys belonging to the Red Fox Patrol at least, had been +through the mill before, and knew that there was another side to the +picture; when the rain descended, and the wind blew with hurricane force, +possibly tearing the canvas out of their hands, and leaving them exposed +to the storm, to be soaked through. + +But of course they hoped nothing of that sort was going to happen to them +on this trip. Once a year ought to be enough. + +If the season of preparation was delightful, what shall be said of that +time when the eighteen boys sat around in favorite attitudes, each with a +cup of steaming coffee beside him, to which he could add sugar and +condensed milk to suit his taste; while on his knees he held a +generous-sized tin pannikin, upon which was heaped a mess of friend +potatoes and ham, besides all the bread he could dispose of? + +"This is the stuff; it's what I call living!" Bobolink remarked. + +"You never said truer words." mumbled Old Dan Tucker, who was about as +busy as a beaver, his eyes sparkling with satisfaction. + +"One thing sure!" declared Spider; "when Dan stops eating, he'll +quit living." + +"Huh! guess all of us will," added Curly Baxter. + +They were in no hurry to finish the feast; and when the end did arrive, +it would take a microscope to discover any crumbs left over. + +"The worst is yet to come," announced Jud, "and that's washing up." + +But all these things had been arranged for beforehand, so that in due +course of time every fellow would have his share of camp duties. Today he +might have to assist in the cooking; tomorrow help wash dishes; the next +day be one of the wood-getters; and then perhaps on the fourth blissful +day, he would be at liberty to just loaf! + +And no doubt that last day was the one most of them would be apt to +enjoy above all else; for otherwise they would hardly have been flesh +and blood boys. + +While those whose duty lay in cleaning up after the meal were engaged, +some of the others joined Paul in bringing the blankets ashore, and +distributing them to the various tents. + +There were three of the latter, which would allow of six boys to each, +perhaps a rather "full house"--but then they could curl up and not take +much room. + +"Aren't we going to keep any watch, Paul?" asked Joe Clausin, when later +on some of the more tired talked of turning in. + +"Watch for what?" demanded Bobolink. + +"Guess Joe thinks Ted Slavin and his crowd might get over here, and throw +stones at our tents, like they did once before," suggested Nuthin. + +"Well, they do say there's a wild man around here," declared Joe, in a +half hesitating way; for he was actually ashamed to expose his belief in +supernatural things for fear of being laughed at. + +"Let Mr. Wild Man come around; who cares?" sang out Bobolink. "Why, the +circuses are always wantin' wild men, you know; and I guess we'd get a +pretty hefty sum now, if we could capture this wonderful critter that's +been living here so long covered with the skins of wild beasts he's ate +up. It's me to hit the rubber pillow I fetched along. And Joe, if you +want to watch, nobody is going to keep you from doing it" + +And with these words Bobolink dodged into the tent that he knew his mess +belonged to; in which action he was followed by numerous other scouts. +Joe, finding himself left in the lurch, cast a fearful glance around at +the heavy growth of timber on one side the camp, the lake being on the +other; after which he shook his head as though the prospect of sitting +there by the dying fire did not appeal very much to him--and crawled +under the flap, too. + +Perhaps it could hardly be said that silence rested on the scene; for +with a dozen and a half boys trying to get to sleep there is always more +or less horseplay. But an hour later, something like quiet settled down. +The fire was dying out, too, since they had no reason for keeping it +going, the night air being balmy. + +Midnight came and went, and it must have been toward two o'clock in the +morning when every boy suddenly sat upright, as though a galvanic shock +had passed in and out of every tent. + +So it had, for the very earth trembled under them, as a terrific +detonation sounded, just as though a bolt of lightning had struck a +nearby tree. And some of the scouts were ready to declare that the +shock had been accompanied by a brilliant electric flash, that almost +blinded them. + +Immediately there began to be an upheaval, as blankets were tossed aside +and the scouts crawled or scrambled from under, uttering all sorts of +exclamations, and apparently too dazed to account for the phenomenon. + +They began to swarm out of the tents, and loud were the outcries of +astonishment when they discovered not a cloud as big as a hand in the +starry heavens. + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +WAS IT A BURSTING METEOR? + + +"Who hit me?" exclaimed Bobolink, rubbing his eyes as he gained his feet +and looked around at the dimly-seen forms of the other scouts; for the +moon had by now sunk behind the horizon. + +"What busted?" demanded Nuthin. "I bet it was that bottle of raspberry +vinegar my sister put in my knapsack. It's gone sour, and exploded, sure +as anything." + +Strange to say, none of the others even bothered laughing at such a +foolish remark as this. They stared at the clear sky overhead, and the +twinkling stars looking down upon them, just as though winking to each +other, and enjoying the confusion of the valiant scouts. + +Even Paul, who generally knew everything, seemed mystified. + +"I declare if I can tell what it was," he said upon being appealed to by +some of the others in the group. "I was sound asleep, like the rest of +you, when all of a sudden it seemed as if the end of the world had come. +I felt the ground shake under me and as I opened my eyes it seemed as if +I was nearly blinded. The flash came and went just like lightning, and +that bang was what would pass for thunder in a storm; but for the life of +me I can't see any sign of trouble up there." + +"And we don't hear anything more; do we?" demanded Jud. + +"Sounded like a big cannon to me," remarked Jack. + +"Couldn't be that the State troops are out, and having manoeuvres, with a +sham battle, could it?" questioned Gusty Bellows. + +"Well, hardly, without somebody knowing about it. And they generally take +up that sort of thing later in the year. There's only one explanation +that sounds a bit reasonable to me," Paul went on. + +"Tell us what that is, then?" asked Bobolink. + +"I've heard about meteors falling, and exploding when they hit the +earth," the scout master went on to say. + +"That's right!" echoed Jack; "and say, they're always accompanied by a +dazzling light, as they shoot through space, burning the air along with +them. Yes, siree, that must have been a big meteor stone." + +"Then it struck the earth right close to our camp, mark me," vowed Jud. + +"Ain't I glad it didn't pick out this spot to drop on," crowed +Nuthin. "Whew! guess we'd have been squashed flatter than that pancake +you hear about." + +"What are meteors made up of--they drop from stars; don't they?" +asked Bob Tice. + +"Oh! there's just millions and billions of 'em flying around loose," said +Phil Towns, who liked to read of astronomy at times. "Lots of 'em happen +to get caught in the envelope of air that surrounds the earth. Then they +fall victims to the force of gravitation, and come plunging down at such +speed that they do really burn the air, just like Jack said. You see, +they're made up for the most part of metals, and our old earth draws 'em +like a monster magnet." + +"Is that what shooting stars are?" Bob went on to ask. + +"Why, yes, they're really small meteors. We often pass through a mess of +'em. I've counted hundreds in a single night," Phil continued, always +willing to give any information he could along his favorite study. + +"Well, they say lightning don't strike in the same place twice; and that +goes with your old buzzing meteors too, I reckon; so what's the use in +our staying up any longer?" remarked Bobolink, who seemed quite satisfied +with the explanation Paul had given of the queer noise, and the flash of +brilliant light. + +So they crawled back into their snug nests, and tried to compose +themselves for sleep. But it is extremely doubtful whether a single one +of those eighteen boys secured so much as a decent cat-nap between that +hour and dawn. + +Despite their apparent belief in the explanation of the phenomenon +advanced by Paul, the boys could not get rid of the notion that that +tremendous crash had something to do with the strange things told about +the haunted island, and which helped to give it its bad name. + +They were up pretty early, too. The first birds were beginning to chirp +in the brush when figures came crawling out of the tents, with a great +stretching of arms, and long yawns. + +Then the lake tempted many of the boys, and a great splashing announced +that those who could swim were enjoying a morning dip while others were +taking a lesson in learning the first rudiments in the art; for Paul +wanted every scout in Stanhope Troop to be able to swim and dive before +the Fall came on. + +The scout master himself watched the proceedings, hardly able to get his +own dip because of his anxiety concerning those who, for the time being, +had been placed in his charge. + +This thing of being responsible for seventeen lively boys is not all that +it may be cracked up to be; especially if the acting scout master is a +conscientious chap, alive to his duties. Paul felt the weight of the +load; but he did not shrink. + +Breakfast was presently under way, and nobody found any fault when +Bobolink announced that he meant to instruct Nat Smith and another boy +just how to go about making those delicious flapjacks for which he +himself had become famous. + +In the cooking contests, at the time the Stanhope Troop carried off their +banner in competition with the troops of Manchester and Aldine, Bobolink +had easily outclassed all rivals when it came to the science of camp +cookery, and his flapjacks were admitted without a peer, so that ever +since, when the boys had an outing, there was always a shout when it was +found that Bobolink was willing to get a mess of cakes ready for their +attention. + +Although most of the boys had looked a bit peaked, and even haggard, when +they first issued from the tents, this had long since vanished. The +frolic in the cool water, and now this feast in the open, proved the +finest tonics possible. + +They were now filled with new energy and pluck. Nobody dreamed of being +frightened away from camp by such a little thing as a meteor bursting +near by, or any other strange happening. Perhaps, when night came around +again, this buoyant feeling might take wings, and fly away; but then, +there would be fourteen and more hours before darkness again assailed +them, and what was the use fretting over things so far removed? + +All had made up their minds to do a lot of things while up at camp, +according to their various tastes. One began to look around for subjects +he could take snapshots of, having a liking for photography. Another got +a companion to take up a station along the shore, so that they could +exchange messages, using the flags and the code. + +Then there were several who evinced a decided interest in finding the +tracks of wild animals, like a raccoon, or a rabbit, or even a squirrel, +when nothing better presented itself. These they minutely examined, and +applied all sorts of theories in forming the story of the trail. In many +cases these proved very entertaining indeed, and Paul was always pleased, +with Jack's assistance, to pass on such things, being adapted through +practical experience to correct errors, and set the beginner straight on +certain facts that he had mixed. + +There were numerous other things to do also. One boy loved to hunt wild +flowers, and as soon as he could coax a mate to accompany him, since Paul +would not allow the scouts to go off alone, he busied himself in the +undergrowth, looking in mossy spots for some of the shy blossoms that +appealed to his collecting taste. + +Another seemed to have a love for geology. He wanted to find specimens +of every sort of stone, and hinted of certain stories of mining having +been carried on in these regions a century or two ago. But as he did not +find any ore that contained precious minerals in paying quantities, +during their stay on Cedar Island, the chances are that his father will +still have to go right along paying his bills, even after he gets into +college later in life. + +The morning was slipping away fast, and they had not found any better +place to settle on for a camp. It seemed that, by the merest chance, they +had hit upon the best spot for a short stay on the island. + +Three of the boys wandered along the shore, fishing. Paul had seen them +pull in several good-sized bass, and began to make up his mind that after +all they were going to have a fish dinner, if the luck held. He was even +debating whether he dared leave camp for a while, and taking his jointed +rod, joined the trio who had wandered around the bend of the eastern +shore of the island; for Paul certainly did love to feel a lively fish at +the end of his line, and could not think of leaving Lake Tokala without +giving its finny inhabitants a chance to get acquainted with him. + +Just as he had about decided that he could be spared for the hour that +still remained until noon, Paul thought he heard a shout. Now, the +scouts had more than a few times given tongue during the morning, when +engaged in some boisterous game; but it struck Paul, whose nerves were +always on the alert for such things, while this responsibility rested on +his shoulders, that there was certainly a note, as of alarm, about this +particular outcry. + +It seemed to come from around that bend, too, where he had seen the three +boys disappear. Even as he looked in that direction, he saw something +come in sight among the rocks that lay so thickly around. It was Gusty +Bellows, one of the anglers; yes, and there was Little Billie just behind +him, taking great leaps that promised to speedily leave the other far in +the lurch. + +Paul's heart seemed to stand still. Where was Jud, who had been in the +company of the two? What could have happened? + +The scout master dropped his rod, which he had been in the act of +jointing, and started on a run to meet the two fishermen; for he +could hear them shouting, though unable to distinguish just what they +were saying. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +THE FOOTPRINTS IN THE SAND + + +Then Paul felt a sensation of sudden relief pass over him. He had +discovered a third figure running, some distance in the rear of the other +scouts; and when he recognized this as Jud Elderkin, he knew that +whatever might have happened to frighten the fishermen, at least none of +them seemed to be in any immediate danger. + +Of course, by this time scouts were springing up all around, and all +heading toward the common centre, which would be where Paul and the +fishermen must meet. + +Little Billie was the first one to arrive, for, being possessed of long +legs, in spite of his name, he could get over ground at a prodigious +rate, given cause. And judging from his ashen face, he had plenty of that +right now. + +"What is it?" demanded Paul, as the other came panting along. + +"Wild man!" gasped Little Billie. + +"Whee!" exclaimed Bobolink, who had managed to get near enough to catch +what was said. + +"'Fraid he nabbed poor Jud!" said Gusty, now reaching the spot, and just +about at his last gasp. + +"Not much he didn't, because there he comes now!" ejaculated Bobolink. + +"Oh! mercy!" exclaimed Little Billie, evidently thinking he meant +the wild man. + +"It's Jud, and all to the good; but even he looks white around the gills, +too, Paul. They must have seen _something_, to give 'em all such a +scare," Bobolink went on to say. + +"You just bet we did; ask Jud!" declared Gusty, just as though he +imagined the others might question their veracity, but would believe the +patrol leader, who was now coming along with great leaps and bounds. + +And presently Jud Elderkin halted at the group. He looked first at Gusty, +and then at Little Billie. There was a question in his eye. + +"Sure, we saw it, too, Jud!" declared Gusty, holding up his quivering +hand just as though he were in the witness box; but then, as his father +was a lawyer, possibly Gusty often experimented on himself, since he +meant to either take up the same pursuit in life, or give his magnificent +voice a chance to earn him a living in the role of an auctioneer. + +"Me too; and say, wasn't it a terror, though?" the tall scout declared. + +"Well, I didn't wait long enough to have any words with the Thing," +admitted Jud. "You see, I happened to be further away from home than the +other fellows, and I knew I'd have more space to cover. So, after letting +out a yell to sort of warn 'em, why I just put for cover. Never ran +faster even between bases. Thought he'd get me sure before I rounded that +bend; but when I looked back, blessed if he wasn't grabbin' up our +strings of fish like fun, and making off with 'em. I don't know right now +whether I'm just scared, or only boiling mad. Tell me, somebody!" + +"A little of both, I guess!" declared Bobolink, grinning. + +"Say, then, it wasn't just a big yarn about that wild man, after all; was +it?" said Tom Betts. + +"How about that, Little Billie; did you see him?" demanded Jud. + +"Did I? Think I was runnin' for my health? Why, he looked all of seven +feet high to me, and covered with long hair. Talk about your Robinson +Crusoe making him a coat of an old nanny goat, that feller was in the +same class; eh, Gusty?" loudly asserted the tall boy. + +"I saw him, all right, don't you forget it," declared the one +addressed. "And I certain sure thought he was after _me_. But if Jud +says he took our nice string of bass, why that changes the thing, and +makes me mad as hops. Think of us workin' all that time, only to fill +up a crazy crank. Next time I go fishin' I'm meanin' to sit home, and +do it off the door step." + +Paul was revolving many things in his mind and trying to understand. + +"I want several of you to go back with me," he said, presently; "the rest +head for camp or go about whatever you were doing." + +"Want to take a squint at his tracks; eh, Paul?" asked Jud. + +"No harm done if we do," remarked Bobolink, thus declaring his intention +of being one of those who were to accompany the leader. + +Jack also went along, and Jud, making four in all; but the last mentioned +refused to budge a foot until he had obtained a healthy-looking club, +which he tucked under his arm. + +"Now, I want to warn that same critter to keep his distance from me," Jud +said, as he led off with long strides. "He gave me one scare, and I +promise you that if he tries that game again there's going to be a warm +time around these regions. But I reckon he's satisfied with all our nice +fish, and we won't see anything of him until he gets good and hungry +again. Wonder if he eats 'em raw, Chinese fashion, or has some way of +making a fire?" + +"What's that over yonder?" asked Paul. + +"Where?" gasped Jud, brandishing his club. + +"Looks like a string of fish; and so, you see, the wild man didn't get +_all_ you fellows caught. We'll just pick that lot up, and trot along," +observed Paul. + +"He got mine, all right; these must have been what one of the other +fellows had. You see, they were so badly rattled they just cut and run, +and held on to their rods only. Yep, there's a second string of fish, and +that accounts for both; but you needn't think mine'll be laying around, +for he got 'em. + +"Well, show me just about where he was when you saw him last," +Paul demanded. + +Jud could easily do this. They found the print of human feet in the +earth. It must have been an unusually large foot that made the marks; and +this tallied with what had been said about the height of the wild man. + +"You're not goin' to try and follow him, I hope, Paul?" asked Jud, +uneasily, as if he drew the line at certain things, ready and willing as +he might be to back the scout master in most ventures. + +"Oh! it wouldn't pay us," retorted Paul. "As one of the boys said, we +haven't lost any wild man; and so far as I know there's no one missing +around Stanhope, so it can't be some man from there. I think we'd do well +to mind our own business in this affair; don't you, fellows?" + +"Yes, I do," replied Jack, "but I was wondering whether this thing will +crop up to give us a heap of bother while we're camping up here." + +"How's that?" asked Bobolink. "There's only one thing that gives me any +carking care, and you know what that is, Jack, old boy. If I only knew +about those boxes, I'd be so much easier in my mind." + +"Well," said Paul, "if this crazy man would steal our fish, he'd just as +lief take anything else we've got that's good to eat. When he smells our +coffee cooking it'll call up some long-forgotten craving for the Java +bean; and first thing you know he'll be invading our camp every night, +hunting around for any old thing he can steal." + +"Now, I like that," said Bobolink, satirically. "Nice prospect, ain't it, +not to be able to step out of the tent of nights, without bumping noses +with that awful Man Friday in wild animal shows? P'raps in self-defense +we may have to do that grand capture act after all, Paul." + +"Well, there's nothing more to learn here, so we might as well turn back +again. As I don't see anything of your string of fish, Jud, I calculate +that he must have gotten away with 'em. We can add a few more to these, +and have enough for a regular feast. Come on, boys, back to camp for us." + +Some way or other it was noticed that during the early afternoon most of +the boys hung around the camp. It seemed to have an especial attraction +for them all. One busied himself sorting over the collection of the +morning in the way of plants. A second was polishing up certain specimens +of quartz he had found, after cracking some of the round stones that had +washed on the island during a flood, possibly many years back. A third +developed his pictures, having brought along his daylight tank. + +And so it went, until Paul smiled to observe what a busy colony he had in +his charge. On his part, he took a rod and line, with some bait, and went +off with Jack to add to the number of fish, so that there would be enough +for all at supper time. And as the others had fished in one direction, +Paul and his chum decided to move in the other. + +They put in an hour with very fair success, considering that it was not +the best part of the day for fishing. + +Of course, as they walked along, keeping close to one another, +occasionally Paul and Jack would chat on various subjects. They also kept +their eyes open, not wishing to be taken by surprise, should that hairy +individual, who seemed to have a craving for fish, rush out at them. + +And more than that, Paul had copied the example set by Jud. It was +fashionable about that time not to walk forth without a nice little Irish +shillelah under one's arm, with which a head could be made to sing +unmercifully, in case of necessity. + +Paul had just had a pretty lively time with a good fish, and had +succeeded in bringing his prize to land, when he happened to look down at +the beach on which he was standing. Bobolink and Tom Betts were coming +along, as though curious to see how fast the stock of provisions for +supper was increasing. + +So Paul bent down to examine something that had caught his attention. The +other three coming up, Jack having joined Bobolink and Tom, found the +scout master still on his hands and knees. + +"Hello! found something, have you?" asked Bobolink. + +"Mebbe the footprints of the ghost!" chuckled Tom, meaning to be +humorous. + +But Jack saw that his chum was very serious; and as he dropped down +beside Paul, he let his eyes fall upon the sand. + +"What's this, Paul?" he remarked, immediately. "Looks like the prow of a +rowboat had been pulled up here--why, that's a dead certainty, because +look at the plain prints of boots here, and several different kinds, +too. Shows that somebody landed here on the island; and Paul, it must +have been _after_ that rain storm, for these marks don't seem to be +washed, as they would be if the rain had beat down on them. What in the +world d'ye suppose it means? Are there people on this queer old Cedar +Island? If there are, who can they be, and why should they hide from +everybody like this?" + +As Jack said this he looked up. Bobolink and Tom were staring at the +plain marks in the sand, with wonderment written on their faces; and even +Paul shook his head. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +TRYING TO FIGURE IT ALL OUT + + +"We'll have to look into this thing," said Paul, finally, seeing that his +three chums were waiting for an opinion from the one they looked up to as +their leader. + +"But what I said was pretty close to the truth; wasn't it, Paul?" +Jack asked. + +"Every word of it" came the ready response, for Paul was always willing +to give every fellow his meed of praise. "The only trouble is, it stops +right where you left off. None of us can say a word after that." + +"How many men were there in the crowd?" asked Tom Betts. + +"I could make out four," replied Jack; "you take another look, Paul, and +see if that's correct." + +"I know it is," remarked the scout master, nodding, "because I counted +them before I called you. And they seemed to lift something heavy from +the boat, which they carried away into the bushes here." + +"Whee! something heavy, eh?" burst out the impetuous Bobolink; "and they +carried it between them, two and two; was it, Paul?" + +"Why, yes, two on each side; if you look close, you can see where they +stepped into each other's footprints," assented the patrol leader. + +"That's so," agreed Bobolink, after bending down hastily; "just +like--er--you've seen the pall-bearers at a funeral!" + +"Oh!" exclaimed Tom, turning a little white at the idea. + +"Of course, that isn't saying it _was_ a funeral," remarked Bobolink, +hastily, as he noticed that Paul glanced at Jack, and the two shook their +heads a trifle, as though the idea failed to impress them favorably. "But +whatever it was, they seemed to find it heavy, the way their toes dug +into the sand here." + +"Yes, it was heavy, all right," admitted Paul. "I think, from the way the +rear men stepped into the prints of the one up head, that whatever they +were carrying could not have been very lengthy; in fact, it must have +been short, but rather broad." + +"Well, that's a smart idea of yours, Paul, and I c'n see how you hit on +it," Bobolink was quick to say, with a look of sincere admiration. + +"But whatever do you reckon would bring four men up here to this lonely +island, carrying some heavy object in a rowboat?" Tom Betts went on. + +"That's where we have to do our guessing," Paul replied. "We don't know; +and as they haven't been obliging enough to write it out, and fasten the +card to a tree, why, we've just got to put on our thinking caps, as my +mother would say." + +"Well, we've had some experience in the past with hoboes; think they +could be a batch of Weary Willies, Paul?" remarked Tom Betts. + +"I'm not ready to say off-hand that they're not," replied the other, +slowly; "but it hardly seems likely. In the first place, every one of +them seemed to be wearing sound shoes. Did you ever know four tramps +to do that?" + +"Well, I should say not," replied Bobolink, scornfully. "It'd be a wonder +if one out of four had shoes that'd hold on without a lot of rope. You +clinched that idea the first thing, Paul." + +"Then what'd you say they were?" demanded Tom. + +Bobolink rubbed his chin reflectively. + +"A heap of difference between plain tramps, and the kind they call yeggs; +isn't there, Paul?" he asked, presently. + +"Everybody says so," came the answer. "Yegg-men are supposed to be the +toughest members of the tramp tribe. They're really burglars or +safe-blowers, who pretend to be hoboes so they can prowl around country +towns, looking up easy snaps about the banks and stores that ought to be +good picking. And so you think these four men might belong to that crowd, +do you, Bobolink?" + +"It's barely possible, anyhow," the one addressed went on, doggedly. "And +I was just trying to remember if I'd heard of any robbery lately. There +was a store broke into over at Marshall two weeks ago, and the thieves +carried off a lot of stuff. But seems to me, the men got nabbed later on. +I'm a little hazy about it, though. But supposin' now, that these four +men had made a rich haul somewhere, and wanted to hide their stuff in a +good place, could they find a better one than up here on Cedar Island?" + +The other three exchanged glances. + +"I guess that's about right," admitted Tom. + +"It's certainly quiet enough to suit anybody; and chances are they +wouldn't be disturbed in a coon's age," declared Jack. "Our coming here +was a freak. It mightn't happen again in many years." + +"And this old island's already got a bad name; hasn't it?" +Bobolink went on. + +"That would help keep people away," admitted Paul. "I've heard of men +coming up in this region winters, trapping the muskrats that swarm in the +marshes; but up to cranberry picking time it's almost deserted." + +"Jack, you must have had an idea, too?" remarked Bobolink. + +"Well, I did; but perhaps the rest of you'll only give me the laugh if I +mention it," replied Jack. + +"All the same, it isn't fair to keep anything back," Tom declared. "My +guess didn't pan out much, and you couldn't have worse luck than that. +So tell us." + +"Yes, go on, Jack, and give us the benefit of your think-box. I've known +you to get away up head more'n a few times, when it came to a live race. +And mebbe some of the rest of us mightn't think so badly of your idea as +you do yourself," and as he said this Bobolink sat down on the sand to +listen, all the while eyeing those mysterious tracks as though he half +expected them to give tongue, and tell the true story of their origin. + +"Oh! well, that seems only fair, so here goes," Jack began. "Somehow I +happened to remember that once on a time I read about some counterfeiters +who had their nest in an old haunted mill, away up in the country." + +"Whee!" Bobolink said, sitting bolt upright. + +"None of the country people would ever go near the place, you see; and +when a light happened to be seen in it at night time, they talked about +the ghost walking, and all that," Jack continued. + +"Huh! that must have been when the boss was paying off his hands," +chuckled Bobolink. "I always heard that was the time the ghost walked." + +"In this case the truth was only found out by some accident," Jack went +on to say, without paying any heed to the interruption. "I think a hunter +was overtaken by darkness, having lost himself in the woods. He was a +stranger, and had never heard about the haunted mill. So, seeing a light, +he went up to ask his way, or if he could get a chance of a bed that +night, I forget which. He saw enough to give him a suspicion; and when he +did get back to the tavern he was stopping at, he sent word to the +Government authorities. A raid resulted, and they caught four +counterfeiters hard at work." + +"_Four,_ you said, Jack!" echoed Tom. + +"Yes, just the same number there seems to be here; but then that's only a +coincidence, because those others are serving ten-year sentences in the +penitentiary. Now, you see, I guess the fact of Cedar Island being said +to have a real ghost got me into the idea of thinking about that story I +read in the paper. Of course it's a silly idea all around." + +"Well, I don't know," said Paul, slowly. + +"You don't mean to say you think it might happen that way here?" demanded +Jack, seeming to be the only one desirous of "shooting holes" in the +proposition he had himself advanced, as Bobolink expressed it later on. + +"It's possible," Paul said, simply. + +"Huh! for my part," spoke up Bobolink, "I think it's more than that, +even. If you asked me straight now, I'd be inclined to say it's +probable." + +"Same here," remarked Tom Betts, eagerly. + +Jack laughed as if pleased. + +"I declare, I really expected to hear you knock my idea all to flinders," +he remarked. + +"But what under the sun could they be carrying in that big box?" asked +Tom Betts. + +"Box!" muttered Bobolink, frowning, as though the word recalled to his +mind a matter that had been puzzling him greatly of late; but he did not +think to say anything further on that subject. + +"Well, sometimes machinery comes that way," suggested Paul. "If these +strange men did turn out to be what Jack said, they might be getting +a press of some kind up here, to do their printing with. I never saw +an outfit, but seems to me they must have such a thing, to make the +bogus bills." + +"That's right," added Tom. "I read all about it not long ago. Wallace +Carberry's so interested in everything about books and printing, that he +clips all sorts of articles. And this one described a kind of press that +had been taken in a raid on some bogus money-makers. Yep, it must have +been machinery they were lugging off here. Whew! just to think of us +bein' mixed up in such a business. I wonder, now, if the Government ever +pays a reward for information about such things." + +"Oh! rats! that's the last thing a scout should bother his head about," +said Bobolink, scornfully. "He ought to see his duty, and do it. Though, +of course, if a nice little present happens along afterwards, why, I +guess there's no law against a scout acceptin' it; eh, Paul?" + +"Certainly not," replied the other, "you've got the idea down pretty +fine, Bobolink. But let's see if we can guess anything else. Then we'd +better go back to camp, and start the rest of the fellows thinking about +it. Perhaps Jud or Andy or Nuthin might dig up something that never +occurred to any of us." + +But although they talked it over for some little time they did not seem +able to conjure up any new idea; everything advanced proved to hinge upon +one of the explanations already spoken of. And in the end they were +forced to admit that they had apparently exhausted the subject. + +"Let's pick up our fish, and stroll back, fellows," proposed Paul, +finally. + +"Lucky to have any fish, with that hog around," remarked Bobolink. + +"Now you're meaning the wild man, I take it?" said Jack. + +"No other; the fellow that drops in on you when you ain't expectin' +company, and just swipes your string of fish like he did Jud's. I might +'a thought Jud was giving us a yarn to explain why he didn't have +anything to show for his morning's work; but both Little Billie and Gusty +saw the same thing. Say, that's another link we got to straighten out. +What's a crazy man doing up here; and is he in the same bunch that made +these tracks?" + +"That's something we don't know," admitted Paul. + +"But we mean to find out," asserted Bobolink, with a determined snapping +of his jaws. + +"Perhaps so--anyhow, we'll make a brave try for it," Paul declared. + +"He wasn't one of these four, that's flat," said Tom Betts. "We all saw +what a big foot the wild man had; and besides, he goes without shoes." + +"Glad to see you noticed all that," commented Paul, who always felt +pleased when any of the troop exhibited powers of observation, since it +proved that the lessons he was endeavoring to impress upon their minds +had taken root. + +They turned their faces toward the camp, and Paul made sure to pick up +the fish he and Jack had caught. + +"With what we'e already cleaned, they'll make a fine mess for the +crowd," he remarked, pointing out an unusually big fellow that had given +him all the fun he wanted, before consenting to be dragged ashore. + +"I notice that you both kill your fish as you get 'em," remarked Tom. + +"I wouldn't think of doing anything else," replied Jack. "It only takes a +smart rap with a club on the head to end their sufferings. I'd hate to +think of even a fish dying by inches, and flapping all over the boat or +the ground, as it gasps its life away. That's one of the things scouts +are taught--to be humane sportsmen, giving the game a chance, whether +fish, flesh or fowl, and not inflicting any unnecessary suffering." + +"Wonder if anything's happened in camp since we came away; because +Bobolink and I have been gone nearly an hour," remarked Tom Betts, to +change the subject; for his conscience reproved him with regard to the +matter Jack was speaking about. + +"What makes you think that?" asked Paul, suspiciously. + +"Oh! nothing; only things seem to be on the jump with us right now; and a +fellow can't turn around without bumping into a wild man, or some bogus +money-makers, it seems. P'raps the ghost'll show up next. Listen! wasn't +that somebody trying to blow your bugle, Bobolink, that you left hung up +in the tent?" + +"It sure was, for a fact. Let's start on a run, fellows. Mebbe they've +gone and grabbed that wild man! P'raps he was bent on carryin' off the +whole outfit this time. You never can tell what a crazy man'll do next; +that's the hard part of being a keeper in a queer house, where they keep +a lot of that kind; anyhow a man told me that once who'd been there. But +listen to that scout trying to sound the recall, would you? Whoop her up, +boys; there's _something_ happened, as sure as you live!" + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +ORDERED OFF + + +It was about four o'clock in the afternoon of this, the first day of +their intended stay on Cedar Island, when Paul and his three comrades +came running around the bend of the shore above the camp, and saw some of +the scouts beckoning wildly to them. + +"They've gone and grabbed him, sure as shooting!" gasped Bobolink, +exultantly. + +But Jack and Paul noted that while there teemed to be a cluster of the +boys no strange form could be seen among them. In fact, they appeared to +be greatly excited over something Jud Elderkin was holding. + +And in this manner then did the quartette reach the camp. + +"Where is he; got him tied up good and hard?" demanded Bobolink, speaking +with difficulty, from lack of breath. + +Nobody paid the slightest attention to what he was saying; and so +Bobolink, happening to notice that it was Curly Baxter who had been +taking liberties with his precious bugle, quietly possessed himself of +it, and examined it carefully, to make sure that it had not been dented. + +"Take a look at this, Paul," said Jud, as he held out the fluttering +piece of paper that had evidently caused all the excitement. + +Written upon this the scout master saw only a few words, but they +possessed considerable significance, when viewed in the light of the +strange happenings of the recent past. + +"_Leave this island at once_!" + +Just five words in all. Whoever wrote that order must be a man who did +not believe in wasting anything. There was no penalty attached, and they +were at liberty to believe anything they chose; just the plain command to +get out, and somehow it seemed more impressive because of its brevity. + +Paul looked at Jack, and then around at the anxious faces of the other +scouts. He saw only blank ignorance there. Nobody could imagine what this +strange order meant. The island might have an owner, but at the best it +was only a worthless bit of property, and their camping on its shore for +a week could not be considered in the light of trespass. + +"Where did you get this, Jud?" asked the scout master. + +"Why, Old Dan Tucker brought it to me," replied the leader of the Gray +Fox Patrol, promptly. + +"And where did _you_ find it, Dan?" continued Paul, turning on the scout +in question, who seemed only too willing to tell all he knew--which, it +turned out, was precious little at best. + +"Why, you see, I had a dispute with Nuthin about the number of hams +fetched on the trip. He vowed there was two, and I said three, countin' +the one we'd cut into last night. So to prove it, I just happened to step +into the tent where we've got some of the grub piled up. It was three, +all right, just as I said. But I found this paper pinned to one of the +whole hams, which, you know, are sewed up in covers right from the +packers. I couldn't make out what it meant. First I thought Nuthin was +playin' a joke on me; but he denied it. So I took the paper to Jud, +seein' that you were away, Paul." + +"It was pinned to one of the hams, was it?" asked the scout +master, frowning. + +"Sure, and the pin's still stickin' in it," answered Dan, positively. + +Paul looked around. + +"I want to settle one thing right at the start, before we bother any more +about this matter," he remarked. "Did any one of you write this, or have +you ever seen it before Dan brought it to Jud?" + +"He showed it to me," exclaimed Nuthin; "but it was the first time I +ever glimpsed that paper or writin', Paul, I give you my word." + +"If anybody else has seen it before, I want him to hold up his hand," +continued the scout master, knowing how prone boys are to play pranks. + +The boys glanced at each other; but not a single hand went up. + +"Well, that settles one thing, then," declared Paul. "This note came +from some one not belonging to our camp. He must have crawled into the +tent from the rear, taking advantage of our being busy. Yes, there's a +bunch of scrub close enough to give him more or less shelter, if he +crawled on all fours. Let's see if one or two of the tent pins haven't +been drawn up." + +Followed by the rest, Paul strode over to the tent where a quantity of +the provisions were kept. Entering this, he quickly saw that it was +exactly as he had suggested. Three of the tent pins, which the boys had +pounded down with the camp axe, had been pulled up, and this slack +allowed the intruder to crawl under the now loose canvas. + +"I can see the place he shuffled along, and where his toes dug into the +earth," declared Jack, as he bent over. + +"We'll try and follow it up presently, and see where he got on his feet +to move off," Paul remarked. "I'd like to find out whether his shoes +make a mark anything like some of those we were looking at up the +shore, Jack." + +"Whew!" exclaimed Bobolink, who was again deeply interested in what was +going on, since he had found his precious bugle unharmed. + +"Let's look at that paper again," resumed Paul. "The writing was done +with a fountain pen, I should say. That seems to tell that the owner was +no common hobo. And the writing is as clear as the print in our copybooks +at school. The man who did that was a penman, believe me. 'Leave this +island at once!' Just like that, short and crisp. Not a threat about what +will happen if we don't, you see; we're expected to just imagine all +sorts of terrible things, unless we skip out right away. One thing sure, +Jud, your wild man never wrote that note, or even pinned it on our ham, +because the crawler wore shoes." + +"That's right," muttered Jud, his face betraying the admiration he felt +for the scout master who knew so well how to patch things together, so +that they seemed to be almost as plain as print. + +"Now, the rest of you just stay around while I take Jack and Bobolink +with me along this trail. We want to settle one thing, and that'll come +when we hit the place where this party got up on his feet to move off." + +So saying, Paul himself got down and deliberately crawled under the +canvas the same way the trespasser had. Jack and Bobolink hastened to +follow his example, only too well pleased to be selected to accompany +the leader. + +It was no great task to follow the marks made by the crawling man. His +toes had dug into the soil, going and coming, for apparently he had used +the same trail both ways. + +"Here we are, boys; now, take a look!" said Paul, presently. + +They were by this time in the midst of the timber with which this end of +the island was covered. Glimpses of the tents could be seen between the +trees; but any intruder might feel himself reasonably justified in rising +to his full height when he had made a point so well screened from +inquisitive eyes. + +This man had done so, at any rate. The plain print of his shoes was +visible in a number of places. Both Jack and Bobolink gave utterance to +exclamations as soon as they saw these. + +"One of the four, that's dead sure!" the former declared, positively. + +"I'll be badgered if it ain't!" muttered Bobolink, staring at the tracks. + +"So you see, we've settled one thing right at the start," said Paul. + +"That's what we have," observed Bobolink. "It's those fellows who carried +the heavy load from the rowboat, after landin' on the island, after the +rain storm, that want our room more'n our company. The nerve of that +bunch to tell us to clear out, when chances are we've got just as much +right here as they have--p'raps a heap sight more." + +"That doesn't sound much like you wanted to make a change of base, +Bobolink?" remarked Paul, smiling. + +"No more do I," quickly replied the other. "I'm not used to bein' ordered +around as if I was a slave. What if there are four of them, aren't +eighteen husky scouts equal to such a crowd? No, siree, if you left it to +me, I'd say stick it out till the last horn blows. Give 'em the defi +right from the shoulder. Tell 'em to go hang, for all we care. We c'n +take care of ourselves, mebbe; and mind our own business in the bargain." + +"But it's something else that makes you want to stay?" Paul suggested. + +"How well you know my cut, Paul," declared the other. "You reckon I never +can stand a mystery. It gets on my nerves, keeps me awake nights, and +plays hob with my think-box all the time. Now, there was those boxes--but +I guess I'll try and forget all about that matter now, because we've got +a sure enough puzzle to solve right on our hands. Who are these four men; +what are they hiding on Cedar Island for; why should they want to chase +us away if they weren't afraid we'd find out _somethin_' they're a-doin' +here, that ain't just accordin' to the law?" + +"You've got it pretty straight, Bobolink," admitted Paul. "But since +we've learned all we wanted to find out, suppose we go back to the rest +of the boys. We must talk this thing over, and decide what's to be done." + +"Do you mean about skipping out, Paul?" Bobolink exclaimed. "Oh! I hope +now, you won't do anything like that. I'd feel dreadfully mean to sneak +away. Always did hate to see a cur dog do that, with his tail between +his legs." + +"Still, it might seem best to leave here by dark," said Paul. + +Something in his manner gave Jack a clue as to the meaning back of these +words. He knew the scout master better than did any other fellow in the +troop, and was accustomed to reading his motives in his look or manner. + +"I take it that means we might _pretend_ to clear out, and come back +under cover of the night, to make another camp; eh, Paul?" Jack now +remarked, insinuatingly. + +"That was what I had in mind," admitted the other; "but of course it'll +be up to the boys to settle such a question. I believe in every fellow +having a voice in things that have to do with the general business of +the camp. But majority rules when once the vote is taken--stay, or go +for good." + +"Glad to hear you say so," ventured Bobolink. "Because here's three votes +that will be cast for sticking it out; and if I know anything about Jud +and Nuthin and Bluff, together with several more, the majority will want +to stick. But I mean to give them a hint that we think that way. Several +weak-kneed brothers are always ready to vote the way the leaders do. When +the scout master takes snuff they start to sneezing right away." + +"And for that very reason, Bobolink, I don't want you to say a word in +advance to any of the fellows. When we have a vote, it should be the free +opinion of every scout, without his being influenced by another. But what +do you think of the idea, Jack?" + +"I think it's just great," answered his chum. "And by the way, if we +should conclude to come back to the island again in the night, I know the +finest kind of a place where we could hide the motorboats." + +"Where is that?" asked the scout master, quickly. + +"You haven't been around on the side of the island where the shore curves +into a little bay, like. The trees grow so close that their branches +overhang the water. If the boats were left in there, and some green stuff +drawn around them, I don't believe they'd ever be noticed, unless some +one was hunting every foot of the island over for them." + +"Yes, I think I know where you mean," said Paul. "I wasn't down by the +little inlet you speak of; but back on the shore there's a dandy place +among the rocks and trees, where we could pitch a new camp, and keep +pretty well hidden, unless we happened to make a lot of noise, which +we won't do if we can help it But everything depends on how the boys +look at it." + +"Anyhow," said Bobolink, resolutely; "I feel that we ought to put it up +to them that way; tell 'em how easy it will be to screen the boats, and +have a hidden camp. You'll let me tell about that, Paul, I hope, even if +I mustn't say you mean to vote to come back?" + +"I suppose that would be fair enough, because we ought to hold up our +side of the question," the scout master replied, as they drew near the +place where the three tents stood, and several groups of chattering +scouts could be seen, doubtless earnestly discussing this mysterious +thing that had come about; for, of course, Tom Betts had already told all +about the suspicious tracks of the four men who had carried a heavy +burden into the brush. + +They looked eagerly toward the advancing three, as though expecting that +Paul would now take them fully into his confidence. + +This he proceeded to do without further delay; and it was worth while +observing the various shades of emotion that flitted across the faces of +the listeners while the scout master was talking. Some seemed alarmed, +others disposed to be provoked, while not a few, Bobolink noted with +secret glee, allowed a frown to mark their foreheads, as though they were +growing angry at being so summarily ordered off the island by these +unknown men, who did not even have the decency to present their command +of dismissal in person. + +He knew these fellows could be counted on to vote the right way when the +question came up as to what they should do. + +When the entire thing had been explained, so that they all understood it, +Paul asked for a vote as to whether they clear out altogether, or appear +to do so, only to come back again. + +And, just as the sanguine Bobolink had expected, it resulted in thirteen +declaring it to be their idea that they should come back, and try to find +out what all these queer goings-on meant. When the result of the vote was +made known, even the five who had voted to go moved that it be made +unanimous. + +Perhaps they came to the conclusion that since a return was decided on it +would be safer to be with the rest on the haunted island, than off by +themselves in a lone tent on the distant shore, where no assistance could +reach them. + +"Well, we'd better have an early supper, then, and get away; or since it +is getting dark now, perhaps we'll have to put off the eating part until +later," Paul suggested. + +"Any old time will do for that," declared Bobolink, carelessly, whereupon +Old Dan Tucker gave him a look of dismay, and sadly shook his head, as +though he did not indorse such a foolish theory at all. + +So, when the others were carrying things to the boats, and showing +considerable nervousness while doing it, Old Dan managed to fill his +pockets with crackers, which he hoped might stave off starvation for a +little while at least. + +Acting on the suggestion of Jack, the scouts gave all sorts of +exhibitions of alarm as they busied themselves taking down the tents, and +loading their traps aboard the two motorboats. Every now and then one of +them would point somewhere up or down the shore, as though he thought he +saw signs of the enemy coming, whereupon a knot of the boys would gather, +and stare, and then scatter, to work more feverishly than ever. + +They really enjoyed acting the part, too. It seemed to appeal to their +fondness for a joke. And the best of it was, they always fancied that +somewhere or other at least one pair of hostile eyes must be observing +these signs of panic with satisfaction. + +Just as darkness began to creep over water and island, clouds shutting +out the moonlight again, all was pronounced ready. And then the cheery +"chug" of the motors sounded, for the boys purposely made all the noise +they could, under the impression that it might seem to add to the +appearance of a hasty flight. + +In this manner did the troop of scouts break camp before they had been on +Cedar Island more than twenty-four hours; and, so far as appearances +went, deserted the place of the evil name for good and all. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +UNDER COVER OF DARKNESS + + +Paul had settled it all in his mind as to what their course should +be. He drew a mental map of the island, and its surroundings; and +also remembered certain conclusions he had previously entertained +connected with the depth of water on all sides, between their late +camp and the mainland. + +So the _Comfort_ set the pace, which was not very fast; for they wanted +darkness to settle fully over the lake, in order that they might move +around without being seen from the island. + +"Tell me when the island is out of sight, Jud," remarked Paul; for some +of the time the two boats were side by side, and nothing interfered with +a clear view in the rear. + +"Why, it's swallowed up already in the night mist; I can just make out +that old cedar that stands on top of the little hill," came Jud's reply. + +"Good. Then we'll have an easy time slipping back, I reckon," said Paul. + +"Going all the way over to the shore; are you?" asked the other. + +"Might as well; though we'll have to feel our way. Pretty shallow; ain't +it, Jud?" for the scout master had set the other to work sounding with +one of the setting poles, by dropping it over every little while. + +"Touch bottom every time but seems to be plenty of water. Guess this +lake ain't near so deep as that other one up by Rattlesnake Mountain," +Jud remarked. + +"Oh! it's many times deeper on the other side of the island," observed +Paul. "I picked out this way across for a good reason." + +"I suppose you did," Jud said, with a sublime confidence that was +refreshing. + +"Because, you see," added Paul, "when we start back again, we'll have to +do without the help of our motors, for, muffle them as we might, they'd +make enough noise to betray us." + +"Oh! I see now," declared Jud, chuckling. "In place of the motor business +we'll use good hard muscle with these setting poles. And so long as we +can touch bottom right along, it ain't going to be a very hard job +getting back to the island. You don't think it's more'n half a mile; do +you, Paul?" + +"Not much more, and we can take our time, Jud. The one thing above all +others we've got to keep in mind is silence. Nobody ought to knock a +pole against the side of a boat under penalty of being given black marks. +And as for talking, it'll have to be in whispers, when at all." + +"S-s-sounds g-g-good to m-m-me," said Bluff, who somehow seemed to have +gone back to his old stuttering ways; though it might be the excitement +that caused the lapse. + +Nothing more was said on the way over, though doubtless the boys kept up +considerable thinking. They were tremendously worked up over the +situation. This scheme proposed by the scout leader seemed to appeal to +the spirit of adventure which nearly every boy who has red blood in his +veins feels to be a part of his nature. + +There was one among them, however, who was silent because of another +reason; for Old Dan Tucker always declared it a very bad and injurious +plan to try and converse when one's mouth was crammed full; and crackers, +too, being apt to get in the wind-pipe, may do all manner of choking +stunts. So he said never a word. + +They presently could see the other shore looming up, though it was +getting very dark, just as though a storm might be threatening to again +demoralize them. + +"Getting more shoal, Paul," warned the pole heaver. + +"How much water have you now?" demanded the leader, ready to give the +signal for bringing both motorboats to a stop, when it seemed necessary. + +"Eight feet, last time; now it's about seven, short," announced Jud. + +"Keep on sounding, and when it gets down to three, let me know," +ordered Paul. + +They were creeping along at a snail's pace now, so even should either +boat strike mud bottom, which Jud had declared it to be, no particular +damage would result. + +The shore was very close, and still Jud admitted that there was +plenty of water. + +"Keeps up in great shape, Commodore," he remarked, "reckon we could go +ashore here if we felt that way." + +"Which we don't," declared Gusty Bellows, in a low tone. + +And not a single voice was raised in favor of such a proceeding; if there +were any timid souls present, they failed to exhibit their weakness, +either through fear of boyish ridicule, or some other reason. + +Then Paul shut off power, and when he no longer heard the sound of the +_Comfort's_ exhaust, Jack followed suit. + +"We'll hang out here for half an hour, and then head back," +explained Paul. + +"The outlet isn't far away from here; is it?" Joe Clausin asked. + +"Not very far--on the right," Paul replied. "I had that in mind when +choosing to come this way. You see, if we were intending to only go +ashore, they'd expect to see a fire burning somewhere. As it is, they'll +be sure to think we've dropped down into the Radway, preferring to risk +all sorts of danger from the rocks and snags there, rather than stay here +another night." + +"Makes me think of Napoleon's retreat from Moscow," remarked Nat Smith in +the other motorboat. + +"Oh! come off, will you?" ridiculed Bobolink. "Napoleon was a good one, +but not in the same class with _us_. He never came back, like we're going +to do. This retreat is only a fine piece of strategy, remember, while his +was in deadly earnest." + +They talked in low tones that were cousins to whispers, and certainly +could not be heard half way over to the mysterious island, even +though water does make the finest conductor of sound possible, as +every boy knows. + +Finally, when about half an hour had gone, Paul said it was time to make +a fresh start. He had thought it all out, and while taking one pole +himself, asked the expert, Jud, to handle the other in their boat. + +Jack and Tom Betts were to look after those in the _Speedwell_; for the +scout master knew that Tom could be very careful, given a job that +required caution. + +They took their time, and by degrees Paul led the way across the shallow +part of the lake. Bobolink had aptly described their movement, when he +said it reminded him of the words in the song: "He came right in, and +turned around and walked right out again." + +Now it was so dark that most of the scouts found themselves confused as +to their bearings, the minute they lost sight of the trees along the +shore. Some wondered how Paul was going to go straight back over their +recent course, when he did not have even the stars to guide him. + +But then, there were many other things he did have, one of which was the +slight breeze that blew in his face, and which had been directly behind +them at the time they left the island. + +Slowly and laboriously, in comparison with their other trip, the scouts +crossed the stretch of water. And when finally those who were so eagerly +watching out for that cedar on the top of the little elevation in the +middle of the island whispered to Paul that it was dead ahead, they +realized with wonder that the pilot had led them in a direct line back +over their course. + +Now they altered the line of advance a little. This was in order to +approach the island about the place where the little bay extended into +its side, as described by Jack. And Paul allowed the other to take the +lead, since Jack would be more familiar with the locality than he himself +might feel. + +Noiselessly did the two boats enter that miniature bay, and glide along +until close to the bank, where the overhanging trees afforded the +protection they wanted, in order to conceal the craft. + +Landing was next in order, and then all their things must again be taken +ashore, from tents and blankets, to cooking kettles and eatables. + +By now the scouts had reduced many of these things to a system. Every boy +knew just what was expected of him; and presently there was a procession +of burden bearers carrying things into the brush along a certain trail, +once in a while perhaps stumbling a little, but keeping strict silence. + +They seemed to enjoy it hugely, too. Their nerves tingled while carrying +out this part of the programme--at least, Bobolink said he had such a +feeling, and doubtless several more were in the same condition. + +Of course there were those who trembled with anticipation of some sudden +alarm. And then again, others might be beginning to think they would soon +nearly "cave away" with the empty feeling they had; that was what Old +Dan Tucker confided in a whisper to Joe Clausin, resting firm in the +belief that none of the others knew about the pocket full of crackers, +that he called "life preservers"--which, alas, were all gone now, to the +last crumb. + +Paul led the line and picked out the easiest method of reaching the +place he had selected for the new camp among the rocks and trees. It was +in a depression, too, the others noticed, when he told them to drop +their bundles. That would enable them to have a little fire, since it +could not be seen as it would be if they were on a level, or an +elevation. And really, a fire was necessary, if Paul meant they should +have any supper at all. + +"As we brought about all we need, there's no use of making another trip +to the boats," Paul remarked in a low tone; from which the others judged +that conversation was not going to be entirely cut out, only they must +not elevate their voices above a certain pitch, so long as things were as +quiet as at present. + +Now began the task of getting the three tents in position again. And well +had the scouts learned their lesson in this particular; some of them even +going so far as to declare that they could do the job with their eyes +blindfolded, so familiar were they with every part of the operation. + +"Like learning type-writin' by touch in school," Bobolink had said. + +After all the tents had been raised, and the blankets placed inside, Paul +gave permission for a small cooking fire to be made. + +To some boys a fire is always a fire, no matter what its intended use; +but the scout who has camped out soon gets to know that there is a vast +difference between a camp fire, for instance, and one meant only for +getting meals over. + +The former may be composed of great logs and branches that send up a +cheery and brilliant blaze; but which is next to useless when the cook +wants to get close in, and attend to his various kettles and frying pans. + +Sometimes a hole is scooped out of the ground, and the fire for cooking +made in that, especially when on level ground, and danger exists of +hostile eyes discovering the blaze, however small. + +As a rule, however, such a fire is made about after this fashion: Two +logs may be used, if they have flat surfaces, having been more or less +squared off; but when stones can be procured they are to be preferred. +Two sides are fashioned out of flat stones, somewhat in the shape of the +letter V, only not having the line quite so pronounced. Thus a coffeepot +will rest snugly over the smaller end, while the big frying pan cozily +covers the larger. + +The fire need only be small, but when the cooking commences, there +should be for the most part red embers in the fireplace, capable of +sending up great heat, with but a minimum of blaze. And there a cook +can work in comfort, without dodging back every time a fierce blaze +darts toward him, threatening to singe his eyebrows, and shorten his +crop of hair. + +Jud knew just how to make such a fire, and as they would need several, in +order to cook for such a host, some of the other boys busied themselves +in copying what he did. They had seen him make such a stone fireplace +before, any way, and some of them had practiced the art in private, being +desirous of knowing how to do many of the things the leaders were so +proficient in. + +Soon they had more light, when Jud got his fire started; and it was +then that the boys realized just how fitting that spot was for a hidden +camp. Their tents could not be seen thirty feet away; and as for the +small amount of light made by the three cooking fires, little danger of +it being noticed, unless some one were close by, and actually stumbled +on the spot. + +In fact, the greatest chance they had of being discovered, as Paul well +knew, did not come from any sense of sight or hearing, but that of smell. +Should the odors from their supper chance to be carried across the +island, and in the direction of where these men were staying, they might +begin to suspect something was wrong, and start an investigation that +would lead to the discovery of the new camp. + +But Paul had also noticed that the night breeze was doing them another +good service; it had helped him find his way back to the island through +the darkness resting on the big lake; and now, blowing toward the distant +shore, the odors of cooking coffee, and frying bass would be taken +entirely away. + +And anyhow, there were eighteen half-starved scouts who had to be fed, +come what might. So the cooking went on apace, and in due time supper was +announced as ready. At which more than a few of the waiting lads heaved +sighs of satisfaction, and Old Dan Tucker, as usual, managed to be the +first to sit down. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +PITCHING TENTS IN THE "SINK" + + +"This thing is giving us lots of good practice at making camp, and that's +something," Bobolink remarked while he ate, always taking care to keep +his voice down to a low pitch, so it would not carry far on the night +air; though for that matter the wind had increased by now and was making +quite some noise through the tops of the trees around them. + +"I'd like to see anybody put up tents faster and better than we did right +here," declared Frank Savage; who had by now about recovered from the +feeling of sickness which came so near keeping him at home, when the +expedition was formed. + +"And as for fires, these couldn't be beat," observed Spider Sexton, as +he began to catch glimpses of the bottom of his tin platter, after +making away with some of the food that had been piled high on it by the +cook of his mess. + +"And talk about the grub--it just takes the cake," admitted Old Dan +Tucker; though no one seemed to pay the least attention to what he +thought, for they knew him of old, and that the present meal was always +the "best he had ever eaten, barring none." + +Of course it was only natural that while the scouts were enjoying +their meal in this fashion, many looks betrayed an uneasiness on the +part of some among their number. Possibly they were wondering whether +it could be that hostile eyes were fixed upon them then and there, and +if so, what those strange, unknown men, who seemed to want to rule the +island, would do when they discovered that the scouts had disobeyed +their order to leave. + +Would they resort to violence? It would not be an easy task to banish a +dozen and a half lively boys, they were thinking. + +Paul had made up his mind with regard to certain things that must be +done. First of all, they ought to get their heads together, and decide on +a plan. Should they make any sort of attempt that night to explore the +island? He owned a splendid little hand electric torch, into which he had +slipped a fresh battery before starting out on the voyage along the two +rivers; and this might prove very useful in searching dark and gloomy +parts of the island. But on the whole, it seemed so foolish to think of +such a thing, Paul wanted the rest to settle the matter. + +So, still cautioning them to speak only in whispers at the most, he +placed the whole matter before them; much as might the chairman of a +meeting, after which he asked in so many words: + +"You've heard all I know about it; now, what is your pleasure, fellows?" + +"So far as I'm concerned," said Bobolink, always the first to speak; "I'm +willing to do anything the rest say, or go wherever they want to head; +but to be honest, boys, I'd think we were off our base if we went +prowling around this queer old island at night time. There are a heap of +things about it that some people don't want us to know, it seems; and we +ought to take daylight to spear such facts." + +Others were of the same opinion; and when Paul put the vote, it was +overwhelmingly the sentiment of the meeting that they simply take things +as easy as they could until dawn came, and then, with fourteen hours of +light ahead, do all the exploring they liked. + +That settled it, since there could be no going behind the returns when a +majority favored any move. Accordingly, they made preparations for +passing the night as the conditions best allowed. + +"Of course, we must have sentries posted to keep watch?" remarked Jack. + +"All through the livelong night. They will have to be changed every +hour; and four can be on guard at a time. That'll give about two +turns to every scout, with a chance to get four hours sleep between +times on duty." + +And having said his, Paul, as the acting scout master, proceeded to +assign each one to his post number. There was no confusion. They had +practiced this same movement many a time, and now that it was to be +carried out, the boys profited by their experience. + +It could be seen that there was a condition of almost feverish excitement +under the surface, try as they might to conceal the fact by an appearance +of coolness. A real peril seemed to be hovering over them, since they had +chosen to disobey the mandate of the unknown who seemed to claim the +island as his private property. And if they were discovered during the +night, there would be no telling what might happen. + +At the same time the boys were enjoying the novel experience. It seemed +to give them a peculiar thrill, not unlike that of a daring skater who +shoots boldly over thin, new ice, that crackles under him, and bends in a +dreadful way, but does not break, because his passage has been too swift. + +In the morning Paul would pick out several of them, as he thought best; +and with this exploring party set out to learn what the island contained. +Meanwhile they would rest quietly in that rocky retreat, in the hope that +their return had not been noted by any observing eye, and that their +presence on the island was utterly unknown. + +The sentries had been selected, and every boy knew just when his turn to +take a post would come around. Those who were ready to lie down and get +some rest were expected to arouse their successors, so that the thing was +calculated to run along as smoothly as though on a greased track. + +If anything out of the ordinary came to pass, and there was time to +arouse the scout master, Paul wanted it done. He could not remain awake +himself more than any one of the others, much as he might wish to be on +the job all the time; but that need not prevent his keeping in touch with +whatever happened. + +Paul still had his shotgun, and had of course made sure to bring it from +the motorboat when he led his column of burden-bearers trailing through +the timber and rocks to that little sink in which the new camp had been +pitched. It had served him often and well, and he was accustomed to +placing the utmost confidence in the trusty little weapon. But he hoped +he would find no occasion to use it now, and against human beings. Only +as the very last resort would he turn to this. + +Still, there are times when the presence of an empty gun has done +wonders; since imagination invests it with all the attributes of a loaded +weapon. And that was one of the many reasons why Paul kept the +double-barreled gun close to him, even when he crept into the tent to +which he was assigned, and lay down on his blanket to try and get a +little sleep. + +Some of the other boys whispered for a while, as they lay with their +heads close together; but they were too sleepy to keep this up for long; +so that one by one they dropped off, until from their regular breathing +it was easy to guess that all had surrendered to the heavy hand of sleep. + +Those on guard duty were not supposed to move about very much. They had +been posted at what might be called the four corners of the camp. Here +they could, between them, about cover all the space around the sink, for +their positions were on the more elevated ground. + +And as the clouds were breaking at the time Paul crawled under the +tent, he felt pretty sure that before long they would have the +assistance of the moon, now more than half full, and which would not +set until after midnight. + +Those who were the first on duty fulfilled their part of the programme +faithfully. After standing out their "spell," they proceeded to quietly +awaken those who were scheduled to follow after them. Each fellow knew +who his successor was, and it had been made a part of his duty to see +that this scout was not only awakened, but on the job; after which he +himself could crawl in under his blanket, and take it easy until his +second turn came, hours later. + +Thus Bobolink was one of the second watch. In turn he would have the +pleasure of arousing the commander, and seeing that Paul took up his +duty; for in laying out the schedule Paul had not spared himself in +the least. + +Bobolink was an imaginative boy. He could see many things that others +were apt to pass by without discovering anything out of the ordinary. It +was a weakness which Bobolink had to guard against; lest he discover +things that had no foundation in fact. + +He sat there, listening and looking, for a long time. The music of the +breeze in the tree-tops made him a little nervous at first; but presently +he seemed to get more accustomed to the sounds, and then they made him +drowsy, so that he had to take himself sharply to task more than once +because his eyes found it so easy to shut. + +Wishing to have something to think about, so as to keep his wits aroused, +Bobolink began to try and figure out just where his fellow sentinels were +located and imagine what they were doing. Could they be struggling, as he +was, to keep awake, one of the hardest things a boy can battle with? + +What was that? Surely something moved out yonder among the scrub! + +Bobolink sat straight up. He was no longer sleepy. This thing seemed to +have made his eyes fly wide open; and with his heart pumping at a +tremendous rate, sending the hot blood bounding through his veins, surely +he was now in no danger of sleeping on his post. + +He watched the spot from which the sound had seemingly come. The moon +penetrated the bushes only faintly, because it was now nearing the +western horizon, its journey for the night almost done. Strive as +Bobolink might to see whether any one was crawling along there, he could +not for a time make sure. + +Then he detected a movement that must mean something. And at the same +time he discovered what seemed to be twin glowworms in the darkness. + +Bobolink had had some little experience in such things, and had read a +good deal on the subject. He knew that in the night time the eyes of many +wild animals, particularly of the cat tribe, can appear luminous, so +that, seen in a certain kind of gloom, they seem to be like yellow +globes. And that was what these were. + +"Huh!" said Bobolink to himself, after he had watched these queer glowing +balls of fire move several times, that proved in his mind they must be +the eyes of an animal: "Guess I better give Paul the high sign, and let +him figure out what it is." + +And with that he started to creep into the camp, leaving his post for +the time being unguarded; for with three other sentries on duty +Bobolink did not imagine there could be any danger in his withdrawing +from the line. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +WHAT LAY IN THE BRUSH + + +"Wake up, Paul!" + +Bobolink accompanied these whispered words by a gentle shake. He seemed +to know instinctively just where the scout master was lying; or else it +must have been, that all this had been systematically laid out +beforehand; and every fellow had a particular place where he was to curl +up in his blanket when not on duty. + +Paul was awake instantly, even though he had been far gone in sleep at +the moment that hand touched his arm. + +"All right, Bobolink," he said, in a low tone, so as not to arouse any of +the others. "I'm with you. Time up?" + +"Not quite, Paul; but there's some sort of beast creeping around the +camp; and I thought you ought to know." + +Paul sat up at once. + +"You did the right thing, Bobolink," he remarked, quietly. + +The sentry could hear him groping around, as if for something. Presently +Paul seemed to have found what he sought. Of course it was his shotgun. + +Wildcats were to be found in some of the woods not many miles from +Stanhope. The scouts knew this, because they had experience with these +bold pests, who had been attracted by the smell of food in their camp. +Besides, there were sometimes packs of wild dogs roaming the woods +that might need to be taught a lesson, in case they gave the campers +any trouble. + +So Paul had been wise to bring that double-barreled gun along. In a +pinch it would prove a handy thing to have with them. And no doubt it +gave Bobolink considerable satisfaction to realize that Paul had such a +weapon handy. + +Immediately the sentry started to crawl out of the tent again, with Paul +close at his heels. A head was raised, and one of the supposed sleepers +watched the dim figures retreating. + +It was Nuthin, who had chanced to be restless, and was awake at the time +Bobolink came in to arouse the scout master. He had heard all that passed +between them, and of course felt a thrill at the idea of some ferocious +wild beast prowling around the tents. + +Hardly had the other pair withdrawn before Nuthin started after them. He +might be a rather timid boy by nature; but when there was anything going +on Nuthin could not rest content unless he placed himself in a position +where he could see or hear--perhaps both. + +Bobolink led the way back to the post he had been occupying at the time +he made his discovery. He hoped those luminous eyes would still be +there, because it might not look just right should he be able to show no +proof of his story; and boys will take occasion to make all sorts of +jeering remarks about a fellow falling asleep on his post, and dreaming +wonderful things. + +So it was with considerable anxiety that the sentry crept along to the +very spot which he remembered he had been occupying at the time. + +Considerably to his dismay he could see nothing. There was the patch of +brush in which he had discovered those gleaming orbs, and from which had +arisen a low, threatening growl when he first moved off; but look as he +might Bobolink was unable to detect the first sign of a hostile presence. + +He felt disgusted with himself. Luck seemed to be playing him all +manner of tricks of late, and nothing went right. There was that affair +of the queer boxes which had been bothering him so long; then the +mystery of the unknown men who had ordered the scouts to leave the +island in such a peremptory fashion, without giving the least reason +for their churlishness. And now, here, even this little matter could +not work straight. + +"It's gone, Paul!" he felt compelled to mutter, after striving several +times to detect some sign, however faint, of those terrible yellow eyes. + +"Just where did you see it, Bobolink?" asked the scout master, knowing +from his chum's manner how disappointed the sentry must feel that he was +thus unable to prove his assertion. + +"Right in that brush yonder; you c'n see it looks darker than anything +else," replied Bobolink, eagerly; as if hoping that after all Paul's eyes +might prove better than his own, and pick up the lost glow. + +"Well, it seems to have gone away, then," said the scout master. + +"I'm afraid so," grumbled Bobolink, for all the world as though his whole +reputation for veracity depended on his showing the other that he had not +been imagining things when he gave his alarm. + +"What did you see?" continued Paul. + +"Two yellow eyes, and say, weren't they just awful, though? But seems +like the varmint has side-stepped, and vamoosed. Just my luck, hang it! I +wanted you to see 'em the worst kind, Paul." + +"A pair of shining eyes, eh? When you moved, did you hear anything, +Bobolink?" + +"Sure I did. It growled just like our dog does at home, when he's got a +bone, and anybody gets too near him," the sentry hastened to explain. + +"Made you think of a dog, did it, and not a cat?" asked Paul, quickly. + +"Why, yes, I reckon it did," replied Bobolink; "leastways, that's what +came into my mind. But then a big cat, a regular bobcat, I take it, could +growl that way, if it felt a notion to." + +"You came straight in to wake me up, of course?" continued Paul, +wishing to figure on the time that might have elapsed since Bobolink +left his post. + +"Crawled right in, and we got back here in a jiffy; but you see it was no +use when that jinx is on my trail, meanin' to loco everything I do. Now, +I reckon if it'd been any other feller in the bunch, the critter'd just +stood its ground, and I'd be vindicated. But me--I'm hoodooed of late, +and can't do a thing straight." + +"Listen!" said Paul, a little sharply, as though he had no sympathy with +such talk. + +They strained their hearing for possibly a full minute. Then Bobolink, +who liked to talk, could no longer hold in. + +"What'd you think you heard, Paul?" he whispered. + +"A little rustling sound just alongside the brush you pointed out," the +scout master replied. + +"But you didn't get it again; did you?" urged the other. + +"No. But that needn't be proof that something isn't there, and watching +us, even if we don't glimpse his eyes," replied Paul. + +"Oh!" ejaculated Bobolink, with a sudden sense of relief in his voice. + +"You heard the rustling then; didn't you?" Paul demanded. + +"I sure did, and right over back of the brush it seemed to be. P'raps +he's givin' the camp the shake, Paul; mebbe he's made up his mind it +ain't as healthy a place as he thought, after all." + +"It couldn't be one of the other sentries moving around, I suppose?" +ventured Paul, at which his companion gave a low chuckle. + +"With those glaring yellow eyes? Well, hardly, Paul. My stars! but if +you'd only seen 'em, you'd never say that. And besides, the boys were +ordered not to leave their posts, only to wake up the fellow that +came after 'em. Oh! put it down for me that isn't any of our bunch +stirring around." + +"Then I must find out what it is!" said Paul, with a ring of +determination in his voice. + +"Wow! d'ye mean to rush the beast, Paul, and try to knock him over with a +charge of Number Sevens?" demanded Bobolink. + +"I've got something better than that to scare him off," replied Paul. +"You know we don't want to shoot a gun, if we can help it; because the +report would tell the men that we'd come back, and might bring trouble. +I've got my little electric hand torch with me, and if I flash that into +the face of any wild animal the chances are it'll give him a scare +that'll send him off about his business." + +"Oh! I forgot all about that," said Bobolink. "It's just the thing, too. +How lucky you brought it along, Paul." + +Bobolink looked on a good many things as "luck," one way or the other, +when of a truth they were really planned ahead. The scout master had +realized that such a useful little contrivance would be apt to come in +handy on many occasions, when camping out, and had made it a particular +point to put the torch in his pack before leaving home. + +He had it beside him as he slept, but did not consider it wise to press +the button when awakened, lest the flash arouse the others who were +sleeping in the same tent. + +Bobolink could feel him moving away, and not meaning to be left behind, +he started after. Bobolink possessed courage, even if he lacked +discretion. The possibility of an encounter with this doubtless savage +animal did not deter him from following his leader. + +Again they heard that suspicious rustling in the bushes ahead, this time +louder than before. And quickly on the heels of this sound came a low, +threatening growl that, strangely enough, made Bobolink chuckle softly, +he was so pleased over having his announcement proven true to the +Commodore of the motorboat fleet. + +"Look out, Paul," he whispered; "he's laying for you in those bushes. +Better keep your gun handy, and be ready to give him Hail Columbia!" + +Paul did not answer. He had his gun held in such a way that it could be +fired with a second's warning. At the same time his left hand was +gripping the little electric torch, with his thumb pressed against the +trigger that would connect the battery, and send an intense ray of light +wherever he pointed. + +When he heard another rustle, and a growl even more vicious than before, +he judged about the position of the sounds, and pointing the end of the +torch straight ahead, pressed the button. + +As the vivid flash followed Paul saw something that looked like a +crouching panther staring at the dazzling glow of his torch--a hairy +beast that had rather a square head, and a tail that was lashing to and +fro, just as he had seen that of a domestic cat move with jerks, when a +hostile dog approached too close to suit her ideas of safety. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +LAYING PLANS + + +"Whee!" + +That, of course, was Bobolink giving expression to his feelings when he +too saw the crouching figure of the ugly beast in the pile of brush. + +He fully expected that Paul would now feel it necessary to raise his gun +to his shoulder, and fire, on the spur of the moment. Contrary to his +belief, he found that the scout master did nothing of the sort. Instead, +Paul took a deliberate step forward, straight toward the animal that lay +there, staring at the blinding light. + +"Oh I my stars! he's going to scare him off with only that light!" said +Bobolink, talking to himself; and yet, strange to say, he followed close +at the heels of the advancing scout master, clutching his club tightly, +and doubtless fully determined that if they were attacked, he would make +the stout weapon give a good account of itself. + +For a brief space it seemed an open question whether the animal would +turn tail and slink away, or openly attack the advancing boys. But there +was evidently something in that approaching dazzling light, and the +presence of human beings behind it, that proved too much for the beast. +He gave a sudden turn, and bounded off, vanishing in the denser scrub +beyond; and for a short time the listening Bobolink could hear the sound +of his retreat. + +"Whew I that was the stuff, Paul!" cried Bobolink. "He just couldn't look +you in the eye; could he? That fierce little staring orb was too much for +him. But what was it, Paul, a panther?" + +Some one laughed back of them, and turning, light in hand, Paul +saw Nuthin. + +"What ails you, and how did you get here?" demanded Bobolink. + +"Heard what you said to Paul in the tent, and wanted to see what was up, +so I just crawled out," answered the smaller scout, still grinning, as +though he had discovered something comical in the adventure. + +"Well, what ails you?" Bobolink demanded again, feeling irritated +somehow. + +"Panther! Well, I guess he hasn't got that wild, yet!" ejaculated Nuthin. + +Paul began to understand something about it. + +"See here, Nuthin," he said, sternly; "you know that was a dog, as well +as I do; have you ever seen him before? Do you know him?" + +Nuthin laughed softly. + +"Guess you fellows must have forgot that old mongrel dog, Lion, we used +to have," he went on. "Well, he disappeared a long time ago, and we never +knew what did become of him. There always was a sorter wild streak in the +critter. And now it seems that he's found, it nicer to live like a wolf +in the woods, than stay at home and be tied to a kennel. Because that was +Lion, I give you my word for it!" + +"Mebbe he smelled you here, and wanted to make up again?" +suggested Bobolink. + +"Don't you believe it," retorted Nuthin. "He never did like me, and my +dad wouldn't let me go near his kennel. When he skipped out we all felt +glad of it. And to think he'd show up here, of all places! What d'ye +reckon he's doin' over here on this island, Paul?" + +"Listen. When he got away from you did he have a rope around his neck, +with six feet of it trailing on the ground?" Paul asked. + +"Did he? Not any that I know about. We always kept him fastened with a +chain; and when he broke away, it was his collar that busted. I've got it +home yet," was the response. + +"Well, that dog had the rope, just as I described. He's been tied up, +of late, and broke away," the scout master observed, with conviction in +his voice. + +"Then he must have been in the keep of these men who're doin' somethin' +queer over here on Cedar Island, and don't want a parcel of peepin' +scouts around; looks that way, don't it, Paul?" Nuthin inquired. + +"I was wondering whether it could be that crowd, or the other," Paul +replied, musingly. + +"D'ye mean the wild man?" asked Bobolink. + +"It might be," replied Paul. "If your old dog, Nuthin, has taken to the +free life of the woods--gone back to the type of his ancestors, as I've +heard of dogs doing many a time--why, you see, he'd just seem to fit in +with a wild man who lived about like the savages used to away back." + +"Wonder if he'll come again to bother us?" queried Bobolink. + +"Honestly now, I don't think he will," Paul made answer. "That little +evil eye of the torch threw a scare into him he won't forget in a hurry. +I suppose he must have been roaming around, and got a sniff of our +cooking. That made him feel hungry, and he was creeping in closer and +closer, in hopes of stealing something, when we broke up his game. And +now, if it isn't time for me to go on duty, I'll crawl in again, and get +a few more winks of sleep." + +"Say, Paul, don't you think it'd be about right to leave that little +flashlight with me, in case the dog comes around again?" asked Bobolink. + +"I was going to say that very same thing; and when my turn comes you can +hand it over again. Here you are, Bobolink; and don't go to fooling with +it, unless you really hear something." + +"I won't, Paul," replied the other. "But chances are, I'd better make the +rounds and tell the other fellers about what happened; because they must +have seen the flash, and heard us talkin' over here; which will throw 'em +into a cold fit, wantin' to know all about it." + +"A good idea, Bobolink," observed the other, as he and Nuthin moved +toward the tents again. + +The balance of the night passed without any further alarm. If the wild +dog came prowling around again, attracted by the presence of good things +to eat, which may have reminded him of other days when he was content to +remain chained up in the Cypher back yard, and take the leavings from his +master's table, he certainly did not betray his presence nor could he +muster up enough courage to crawl into the camp, when it was guarded by +such a terrible flashing eye. + +Morning arrived in good time, and the boys were on the alert. This novel +experience was having its effect on them all. They showed that their +sleep could not have been as sound as appearances might indicate, for +many had red eyes, which were the cause of considerable comment, and not +a little good-natured chaff on the part of those who betrayed no such +telltale signs of wakefulness. + +Breakfast was prepared about in the same fashion as the supper had been +on the preceding night. Fires were carefully lighted, and such fuel +chosen, which, in the opinion of the best judges, would be least apt to +send up heavy smoke, such as might betray their presence on the island. + +All these little things were supposed to be a part of their education as +scouts and woodsmen. They aroused considerable interest among the boys, +many of whom had never bothered their heads before to discover that kinds +of wood burned in various ways; that one might give out only a light +brown smoke, hard to discern, while another would send up a dense smudge +that could not fail to attract the eye of any watcher. + +Paul showed them that when they wanted to signal with smoke, as all +scouts are taught to do when learning the wigwag code, they must be +careful to select only this latter kind of wood, since the other would +not answer the purpose. + +He had been thinking deeply over the matter, and had about made up his +mind as to what course they should pursue. Like most of his comrades, +Paul was averse to being driven away from Cedar Island by unknown +parties, without at least another effort to explore the mysterious +place, and making an attempt to discover what sort of business these men +were engaged in. + +That it was something unlawful he was convinced, as much as any of his +chums. Indeed, everything would seem to point that way. Men do not often +hide themselves in an unfrequented section of the country, unless they +are engaged in some pursuit that will not stand the light of day. + +At one time Paul had even suspected that these men might be some species +of game poachers, who wishing to defy the law that protected partridges, +and all feather and fur-bearing creatures in the woods, during the summer +season, had taken up their dwelling on lonely Cedar Island. + +This was in the beginning. On thinking it over, however, he came to the +conclusion that there was hardly enough game of all kinds within fifty +miles of Stanhope to pay several men to spend their time snaring it; and +so on this account he had thrown that theory overboard. + +As they ate their breakfast the boys talked of nothing else but the +mystery of the island, and many were the expressions of opinion that they +must not think of leaving without doing everything in their power to lift +the curtain. + +They wanted to know who the strange men were who had brought some bulky +object across from the mainland in a rowboat; what business they were +engaged in there; who the wild man might be, and last of all whether he +had any connection with the others. + +"You see," declared Bobolink, in his customary impressive way of talking, +"it looks to me as if they had him here to scare meddlers off. Who wants +to rub up against a wild man? Everybody would feel like giving the hairy +old fellow a wide berth, believe me. But Paul, if you make up a bunch to +explore this bally old island, please let me go along." + +There were others just as anxious and then again some gave no expression +to indicate how they felt about it. So the wise scout master, not wishing +to have any half-hearted recruits with him on such an errand, observed +these signs, and made sure to pick only such as had pleaded for +recognition. + +"You can go along, Bobolink," he said, presently; "and I shall need five +others in addition. Jack, you're one; then there's Bluff, Tom Betts, +Phil, and Andy. Jud Elderkin will be left in full charge here, and every +scout is expected to look to him as the chief while I'm gone. Is that all +understood, fellows?" + +Everybody looked satisfied--those who had been selected because they +wanted to be with the party of exploration and the scouts who would +remain behind because they had no particular desire to prowl through that +dense undergrowth, looking for what might prove to be a jack-o'-lantern. + +And as they continued to devour the food that had been cooked over the +little fires they exchanged confidences, all sorts of queer theories and +plans being suggested. For when eighteen wide awake scouts put their +heads together, it can be set down as positive that little remains unsaid +after they have debated any subject pro and con. + + + + +CHAPTER XX + +THE EXPLORING PARTY + + +Soon after breakfast was over, Paul began to make his arrangements. Like +a wise general he wanted to have all the details arranged beforehand, so +far as he could do so. + +"I hope you'll take the gun along, Paul," remarked Bobolink, when those +who had been selected to accompany the leader were stowing some crackers +and cheese in sundry pockets, so that they might have a little lunch, in +case they were delayed longer than seemed probable. + +"Yes, because we're more apt to find need for it than those who stay in +camp," the scout master had replied; which fact seemed to give Bobolink +considerable satisfaction. + +He had not liked the looks of that big fellow which Nuthin claimed to +have recognized as his old Lion. If they chanced to run across the beast +again, it might feel disposed to attack them; and nothing would please +Bobolink more than to have Paul bowl the creature over with a single +shot. Any dog that did not have the sense to stay at home, and feed at +the hands of a kind master, deserved to get the limit, he thought. + +"It isn't that alone," Bobolink had protested, when Paul took him to +task for showing such a bloodthirsty spirit; "I've been hearing lately +that some of the farmers up this way are complainin' about dogs killin' +their lambs this last spring. And chances are, this same Lion's been one +of the pack that did the mischief. Once they start in that way, nothin' +can cure 'em but cold lead. My father said that right out at table. So +you see, when dogs take to runnin' loose, they're just like boys, an' +get into bad ways." + +Paul thought this was a pretty good argument. He had himself made up his +mind that should they ever meet that animal again, and he showed a +disposition to attack any of the scouts, there was only one thing to do. + +"How about getting into communication with you while you're gone?" asked +Jud, who was naturally feeling the new responsibilities of his position +more or less, and wished to be posted. + +"It might be found a good thing," replied the scoutmaster; "and we could +do it easy enough by flags, if we managed to get to the top of that hill +where the lone cedar grows. So all the time we're away, Jud, be sure and +have a scout posted in a tree, where he can watch that cedar, keeping his +flag handy to answer, if he gets the signal. + +"Guess that can be fixed, all right," declared Jud. + +"Have him keep his eye out for smoke at the same time," continued Paul. +"We might want to tell you something, even without getting up to that +cedar tree. And in case you felt like sending back an answer, you'd +better have the boys collect a lot of that wood I showed you, that makes +a black smoke. You know our smoke code, Jud; no danger of our failing to +make good while you're handling the other end of the line." + +That made Jud smile, and feel like doing everything in his power to +satisfy the scout master. A few drops of oil prevents a vast amount of +friction. Paul knew there are few boys who do not like to be appreciated; +and they will do double the amount of work if they feel that they possess +the full confidence of the one who has been placed in command over them. + +When the word was finally given for the little expedition to leave camp, +and start into the unknown depths of the island, those who were to +remain behind insisted on shaking hands all around, and wishing them the +best of luck. Bobolink pretended to make light of it, and to laugh at +the fellows. + +"Great Scott! you'd think we were going away off to Hudson's Bay, not to +come back again for many moons, if ever!" he scoffed. "Talk about +Stanley's farewell to Livingstone in the African jungle, why it wasn't +in the same class as this. Don't you dare try to embrace me, Dan Tucker. +What d'ye think I am, the pretty new girl that's come to town, and who +danced with you at our class spread? Hands off, now! And don't any of +you cry when we're gone. I declare if you aren't turnin' into a lot of +old women." + +So the seven scouts strode away from the hidden camp in the sink, +plunging into the heavy growth of timber that covered most of the island. +Once only did they turn, to wave a goodbye to their watching companions, +who flourished their hats in response, but dared not give the cheer that +was in their hearts, because Paul had enjoined the strictest silence. + +Paul and Jack had more than once tried to figure out what Cedar Island +must look like; but at the best it was only guess work. None of them had +ever been here before, and so far they had only roamed over a small +portion of one end of the island, so that they could not tell even its +general shape. + +That was one of the reasons why Paul wanted to climb the little hill on +which grew the cedar from which the island must have taken its name. +Once they gained this point, he fancied they might be able to see all +parts of the place, and in this manner get a comprehensive idea as what +it was like. + +They kept pretty well together as they pushed through the brush and +timber. Paul instructed them to watch constantly on all sides, so that +nothing might escape their scrutiny; and as the little band of scouts +pushed deeper into the unknown depths of the mysterious island, they felt +more than ever a sense of the responsibility that rested upon their +shoulders. + +As one of the boys had remarked before, this was good training. They +could look back to other occasions when they had roamed the woods, once +in search of a little chap who had been lost; but somehow these incidents +lacked the flavor of mystery that surrounded them now. + +If these men should turn out to be what they already suspected, lawless +counterfeiters, would they not be apt to show a revengeful spirit if the +persistent boys interfered with their business to any extent? + +Just how far he would be justified in leading his companions on, when +there was this element of danger in the affair, was a serious question, +which Paul had as yet not settled in his mind. He was waiting until +something more definite turned up, and when that occurred he expected to +be governed by circumstances to a great extent. + +Of course they had frequent little shocks. These came when some small +animals rustled the bushes in fleeing before them, or a bird started out +of the thick branches of a tree. + +The boys were keyed up to such a pitch that their nerves were on edge. +When a crow, that had been watching their coming with suspicious eye, +gave a series of harsh caws, and flapping his wings, took flight, Andy +caught hold of Bluff's sleeve, and gave it a tug. + +"Q-q-quit t-t-that!" exclaimed Bluff, in a shrill whisper. "G-g-guess I'm +k-k-keyed up enough, without m-m-akin' me j-j-jump out of my s-s-skin!" + +"Arrah but I thought it was that ould dog a-goin' to lape at us, so I +did!" muttered the Irish lad, shaking his head, and grasping his cudgel +more firmly. + +All of them had been wise enough to arm themselves in some way before +starting out. And when seven fairly muscular boys wield that many clubs, +that have been tried and found true, they ought to be capable of doing +considerable execution. But in truth there were but six of the cudgels, +for Paul carried his gun only. + +They had by now cleared quite considerable ground, even though their +progress was in anything but a direct line. On account of dense patches +of thorn bushes Paul found it necessary to make various detours; but then +this did not matter to any great extent; for while it added to the length +of their journey, at the same time it promised to reveal more of the +island to their search. + +One thing surprised Paul. They found the trees so dense that most of +the time it was possible to obtain only glimpses of the sky above. +Fortunately the sun continued to shine. He thought it must be pretty +dingy here on a cloudy day. And the more he saw of Cedar Island the +less he wondered that some of the ignorant country people believed it +to be haunted. + +Bobolink must have been allowing his mind to run in a similar groove, for +presently pushing up alongside Paul, he remarked in a whisper: + +"Gee! did you ever see a more spooky place than this is, Paul? Now, if a +fellow _did_ believe in ghosts, which of course I don't, here's where +he'd expect to run across some of them. Look at that hollow over yonder, +would you? There goes a woodchuck dodging back into his hole in the bank. +Ain't it queer how all these animals ever got across from the mainland to +this island? Why, seemed like all of half a mile to me." + +"Wait till we get on top of that hill, and perhaps the thing won't seem +so queer, after all," replied Paul. "I was thinking the same way; and +then it struck me that the land might be a whole lot closer to the island +on the northern side. Why, how do we know but what it's only a narrow +strait there?" + +"I wonder, now," mused Bobolink, who always found much food for thought +in what information he extracted from the scout master. + +They kept on for some five minutes longer, under about the same +conditions. Paul, however, began to believe that they must by now be +drawing somewhere near the foot of the little hill that arose near the +center of the island, as closely as they could figure from their camp at +the southern end. + +The result of their watchfulness was made apparent when Tom Betts +suddenly declared that he had seen something that looked like a +blacksmith's forge just beyond a screen of bushes ahead of them. + +Cautiously advancing, the seven scouts presently found themselves looking +upon the exact object Tom had mentioned, which proved that his powers of +observation were good. It was a forge of some sort, with a bellows +attached, and a wind screen, but no shelter over the top; which fact +would seem to indicate that it must be in the nature of a field smithy, +used for certain purposes to heat or melt metal. + +There being no sign of life around, Paul and his six followers swarmed +out of the brush, and surrounded the forge, which was about as unlikely a +thing to be run across, away in this forsaken quarter of the country, as +anything they could imagine. + +And as Paul examined the portable forge closer he made an interesting +discovery. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +A MYSTERY OF THE OPEN GLADE + + +"This has been used since we had that hard rain, fellows," Paul observed. + +Some of the others had noticed him handling the ashes that marked where +the fire had been. + +"Say, they are not warm, now, are they?" asked Phil, looking uneasily +around, as if half expecting to see some rough men come swarming out of +the bushes. + +"Oh! I didn't mean that," replied the scout master. "But you can see +for yourselves that when it rains there's nothing to keep the water +from running down over this forge. In that case the ashes would be +soaked. If you look again you'll see these are perfectly dry, and have +never been wet." + +Several of the scouts picked up some of the ashes, and found that it was +exactly as Paul stated. They were as dry as powder; and could certainly +never have been rained upon. + +"That means the forge has been used since the storm that helped us get +through that muddy canal of Jackson's Creek; is that what you mean, +Paul?" asked Bobolink. + +"Nothing else," replied the other, still continuing his investigations, +as if he hoped to make some further discovery, that might tell them what +the field forge was intended for, when these unknown men carried it to +this secluded island. + +"Great governor, Paul!" + +Bobolink had stooped, and picked something from the ground. This he was +now holding in his hand, and staring at it, as though he could hardly +believe his eyes. + +The other scouts crowded around him, and their eyes, too, widened when +they discovered what it was. + +"A quarter of a dollar!" exclaimed Jack. + +"And a shining new one in the bargain," declared Tom Betts. + +"What d'ye think of that, now?" said Phil. + +Paul reached over, and took possession of the coin. + +"Did you find that, Bobolink?" he asked, for sometimes the other was +known to play tricks. + +"I sure did, Paul, right like this," and stooping over, Bobolink was +about to pretend to pick up something when he uttered a gasp. + +"Another one!" + +He was holding a second coin in his hand, the exact duplicate, so far as +they could see, of the first one. + +"Must grow here in flocks!" exclaimed Phil; "let's see if we can dig up a +whole bunch of 'em, boys!" But although they all started digging with the +toes of their shoes, no more shining coins came to light; and it began to +look as if Bobolink had been fortunate enough to pick up all there were. + +Paul closely examined the two bright quarters. + +"If those are queer ones then they'd fool me all right, let me tell you!" +declared Bobolink. + +"I never saw better in my life," Paul admitted. + +The boys were looking pretty serious by now. It began to seem as though +that guess made by one of their number could not have been so wide of the +mark as at the time some of them believed. Here was pretty strong +evidence that these men were engaged in manufacturing spurious coins. + +Ought they to consider they had gone far enough, and give up the +exploration of the island, returning home to sound the alarm, and +send word to the authorities, so that these men might be trapped as +they worked? + +Paul was tempted to consider that his duty lay that way. Still, there +were some things that puzzled him, and made him hesitate before +concluding to follow that idea. + +Why should they keep the forge out here in the open, when some shelter +would seem to be the proper thing, if, as the scouts now believed, they +were using the fire to smelt metals, and blend them to the proper +consistency for the bad coins? + +That was something that puzzled Paul greatly. It caused him to look +around in the neighborhood of the forge, in the hope that he might pick +up some other clue. + +The ground was pretty well trampled over, as though a number of men had +been walking back and forth many times in their occupation, whatever it +could have been. Paul also saw a number of indentations in the earth, +which made him think some heavy object had rested in that open space. + +"Whatever they brought here," remarked Jack, presently, "it looks like +they must have used some sort of vehicle to carry it; because these +tracks have the appearance of ruts made by wheels." + +"Rubber tires, too," added Phil. "I've seen too many of 'em not to know; +for my father has a garage." + +"Is that so?" exclaimed Bobolink, shaking his head, as if to say that +with each discovery the mystery, instead of getting lighter, only grew +more dense. + +"And look how close together they seem to be, would you; a pretty narrow +bed for a wagon, don't it seem?" asked Tom Betts. + +"But they run off that way," observed Bobolink, "and there are so many of +the tracks you can hardly tell which are mates. There's Paul followin' +'em up; reckon we'd better keep with him, boys. We don't want to get +separated." + +Paul soon came to a stop, and was joined by the others. + +"Queer how the marks all seem to knock off about here," he remarked, +pointing to the ground. "You can't find one further on. And it isn't that +the ground suddenly gets hard, either. This looks the queerest thing of +them all. What do they run that thing with wheels up and down here for? +Anybody know?" + +But silence was the only answer he received, since every one of the six +other scouts seemed to be scratching his head, and wrinkling his +forehead, as though deep in thought, yet unable to see light. + +So they went back to the field forge, to look around again, though their +labor was all they had for their pains. + +"Not even another lovely quarter to be picked up where it got spilled +when they made 'em here, p'raps by the bushel," grumbled Bobolink, +scratching the earth with his toe in vain. + +He had recovered the coins from Paul, and jingled them in his pocket; +though the envious Bluff warned him that they might get him into a peck +of trouble, should he be caught by Secret Service men. + +"Huh! guess you think you c'n scare me into droppin' them," declared +Bobolink, thrusting out his chin at Bluff. "Let me know if you see me +doin' it; will you? I c'n just see you falling all over yourself, tryin' +to grab these dandy coins, if I let 'em slip by me. Shoot a ball up +another alley, Bluff. Go hunt a fortune for yourself, and don't want to +grab mine. Hands off, see?" + +"Do we go back now, Paul; or had we better keep on to the hill?" Jack +asked, as though he knew the other must have been settling this important +matter in his mind. + +"I think as we've come this far, with the hill just ahead of us, it would +be a disappointment not to get up to that cedar tree," Paul replied; at +which every one of the other scouts nodded his head. + +"W-w-want to s-s-see what the old p-p-place l-l-looks like," remarked +Bluff, in his positive way. + +"And there's no use in our staying around here any longer, either, I +should think," ventured Phil. "How do we know but what some of the men +may just happen to butt in on us, while we're looking their old forge +over? And if they did, I just guess they'd make things hum for us. So I +say, into the woods again for me--the sooner the better." + +"I hope we're doing the right thing by keeping on," Paul observed, +looking at his companions in a way they took as an invitation to +back him up. + +"Who's got a better right to go where we feel like?" demanded Bobolink. + +"Honest men wouldn't have any kick coming, just because a troop of Boy +Scouts happened to camp on their island; and it only goes to show +they're doing something shady, that's what. I say go on," Phil gave as +his opinion. + +Jack, Andy, Bluff and Tom were quick to declare themselves opposed to any +change of plan, at least, until after they had reached their goal, which +was the foot of the cedar on top of the hill. + +This decision seemed to give Paul more heart, and when they left the open +space he cast a last glance back at it, as though still puzzled. + +The trees grew even more dense as they drew nearer the foot of that +peculiar rise in the ground which went to make up what they called a +hill. Indeed, the boys were astonished to find such an almost +impenetrable jungle. + +"Isn't that some sort of shack you can see over yonder?" asked Phil, +presently. + +As the rest looked, they agreed that it looked like a rude shelter, made +out of branches, and some boards fastened together in a crude way. + +There was no sign of life about the place, and after making sure of this +the scouts grew bold enough to advance upon it from what seemed to be the +rear, though this could be settled only by the fact that the entrance to +the rustic hut appeared to be on the other side. + +Creeping noiselessly up until they were alongside the shelter, the scouts +set about finding loopholes through which they might obtain a glimpse of +what lay on the other side of those frail walls. + +Then one by one they drew back, and the looks they cast at each other +indicated that what they had seen was not a pleasant sight. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII + +THE WIGWAG MESSAGE + + +The other side of the rough shack was partly open, so that +considerable light managed to gain admittance. This had enabled the +scouts to see a figure lying on some old blankets, together with the +skins of several animals. + +It was without doubt the wild man who had given some of their troop such +a bad scare when he turned up near the camp soon after their arrival on +the island. + +He seemed to be sound asleep, and none of them were at all anxious to +make any sound calculated to arouse him. Indeed, more than one put a +finger to his lips to indicate that they were sealed, as he turned and +looked anxiously at his comrades. + +Paul made motions to let them know it would be just as well if they quit +the vicinity of that queer shack, where the crazy man, as they now deemed +him, had his home. + +A few minutes later, when they had put enough distance between themselves +and the rude shelter to permit conversation, Bobolink could no longer +keep his opinions to himself. + +"He was a jim-dandy, all right, and a genuine wild man of the woods!" he +remarked. "What are the circus fellows thinkin' of, to let such a fine +chance slip by to get a real 'What-is-it,' fresh from the jungles of +Borneo, half man, and the rest gorilla?" + +"And he had Nuthin's dog, after all," observed Paul, quietly. + +"What makes you say that, Paul?" asked Jack. + +"Because, in the first place, I saw a lot of bones, picked as clean as a +whistle, lying on the ground over in a corner. Then there was a lair that +looked as if an animal slept in it. And if that wasn't enough, I noticed +a piece of broken rope fastened to a stake, close by that corner. You +remember I said the dog was dragging a piece of rope around with him, +when he came creeping up near our camp last night? He broke away, all +right; and I guess the wild man will be minus his dog after this." + +"Well, that's one thing settled," asserted Phil "We know now, for sure, +there _is_ a wild man up here; and some of the officers will have to come +and capture him. My father is one of the county freeholders, and he's +overseer of the poor in the bargain; so I suppose it'll be up to him to +carry out the job. They can't afford to have people say there's a crazy +wild man at large, in our district, you see." + +"Did any of you notice that there was a rude sort of table in the shack?" +asked Paul, as they kept on moving forward, wondering if a third +discovery might be made at any minute. + +"Well, now, that's a fact," replied Bobolink. "I did see that, but +somehow didn't think it queer at the time, not enough to mention it, +anyhow. But come to think of it, it was kind of out of the way in the +shack of a wild man, eh?" + +"There was something on the table that would seem stranger, if you'd +noticed it. I saw a battered old coffeepot there!" observed Paul, +smiling grimly. + +"What?" ejaculated Bobolink. "A wild man liking coffee! Where d'ye +suppose he gets the roasted bean? It don't grow on the bushes up here; +and he sure don't look as if he had the cash to buy it. Oh! p'raps they +use him to pass some of this bogus coin they make! Mebbe he goes to +towns, and buys their supplies, all the time they're workin' like beavers +up here, makin' the stuff." + +"I don't just agree with you there, Bobolink," said Paul. "In the first +place, as Phil will tell you, if such a scarecrow ever came into +Stanhope, or any other town in the country, the officers would be sure +to arrest him, and examine him to see if he oughtn't to be shut up in the +asylum. If he got the old pot and the coffee to go with it from these +men, then it was in the nature of a bribe not to interfere with their +business, as they wanted to stay here on his Island." + +"Great brain, Paul; you seem to hit the right idea every time. And +chances are, that's just what happened," Bobolink remarked. + +"That dog didn't come back," observed Tom Betts. + +"And therefore he's still loose," added Phil, uneasily. "Hope we don't +run across the beggar again; but if we should, remember Paul, the country +expects you to do your duty. You must bag him, no matter what noise you +have to make doing it" + +"Leave that to me," remarked the scout master. "Now that we know pretty +well how the land lies, and whose dog it is, perhaps I won't be so +squeamish about shooting the beast if the chance comes along." + +"Here's the foot of the rise," Jack broke in. + +"And the trees grow more thin as the ground ascends, you notice," Paul +went on. He called their attention to all such things, because he was +acting as scout master of the troop, and it seemed to him that he should +not allow any chance to pass whereby he might enlarge the horizon of +scout lore of the lads under him. + +"Then it strikes me that we ought to be a bit careful not to show +ourselves too plain, as we go up," Jack suggested. + +"You're right," added Bobolink. "For all we know, these fellows may +have a lookout in a tree, as well as we have, and he'd see us if we got +careless. That means we must dodge along, taking advantage of every +sort of shelter that crops up. Great fun, boys, and for one I'm just +tickled to death over the chance to prove that we learned our little +lesson O. K." + +All were presently stooping at one moment, where the bushes grew sparse; +crawling in among some sheltering rocks at another, and even getting down +to wriggle along like so many snakes, when not even so much as a bush +offered a means of hiding from observation, in case hostile eyes happened +to be turned upwards toward the hilltop at the foot of the lone cedar. + +It was not a great distance to cover, and before long they found +themselves close to their goal. + +Already could they see over the southern side of the island; and after +they gained the cedar it would probably be easy to also survey the +northern half, the part which doubtless held more of interest to them +than any other, since they had reason to believe that the mysterious +dwellers on the isle were somewhere there. + +"Five more minutes will do it," remarked Paul, when they had gathered in +a shallow depression which afforded shelter until they caught their +breath again for another climb. + +Paul was looking hard at something far beyond the lake. Bobolink, of +course, being attracted by his scrutiny, also allowed his gaze to wander +in that quarter; but all he saw was what he took to be a buzzard, almost +out of sight--a dim speck in the heavens, and about to pass out of sight +altogether where clouds hovered above the southern horizon. + +"I c'n see about where our camp is," Phil was saying, "and I think I know +which tree the signal corps is stationed in. Anyhow, I seem to glimpse +something white moving among the green leaves, which, I take it, is a +flag being held ready to wave at us." + +"I reckon Paul will soon let 'em know we're still on the map," observed +Bobolink. "But won't they be s'prised when they learn that we saw the +terrible wild man in his own den; and ran across the plant where those +rascals make their bogus coin, that looks as bright and good as any Uncle +Sam stamps out?" + +Just then the leader gave the signal for another advance, and the six +scouts who followed set about completing the last leg of the climb. + +They finally found themselves at the roots of the cedar tree that crowned +the elevation, and which proved of a size far beyond what any of the +scouts had imagined. + +"Well, here we are at last," said Phil, breathing hard after his +exertions. + +"And," added Bobolink, also badly winded, though he would chatter; "now +to see Paul get one of the other fellows on the line, to wig his wag at +us, or do something that sounds that way. There he goes at it. And looky +there, they've been watching us climb, I reckon, because almost before +Paul made the first sign, that other fellow began sendin'." + +They watched the fluttering red flag with the white centre. Some of them +had taken more or less interest in sending and receiving messages; but +the boy in the tree proved too fast for any of them to follow. They +suspected that it was Jud Elderkin himself; for outside of Paul and Jack, +he was the best hand at that sort of thing. + +"My stars! he keeps right along doing it; don't he?" muttered Bobolink. + +"Must be some message, too, believe me," added Phil. + +"N-n-now, what d'ye s-s-suppose has happened at c-c-camp since we +q-q-quit?" remarked Bluff, anxiously waiting for the message to be +translated. + +Not once did Paul break in on the sending of the message. He sat there, +close to the base of the big cedar which sheltered his back from the +north side of the island; and seemed to be wholly engrossed in +transcribing the various signs of the flag code. + +They could not see the boy in the branches of the tree; but from their +elevated position the white and red flag was in plain view. Up and down, +and crosswise, it continued to write its message, that was doubtless like +printed letters to Paul and Jack, while unintelligible to those who had +never taken lessons in wigwagging. + +Finally came the well known sign that the message was done; and that the +sender awaited the wishes of the party with whom he was in communication. + +Paul turned upon his comrades. They saw that the frown had come back +again to his usually smooth forehead, as though he had learned +something to add to the perplexities of the problem they were trying so +diligently to solve. + +"It's Jud," he said, simply, "and he's just sent an astonishing +message. This is the way it ran, boys: 'Presence here known. Man in +aeroplane passed over camp. Went down lake half hour ago. Out of sight +now. Answer!'" + +No wonder Bobolink fairly held his breath, and the other five scouts +looked at each other, as though they could hardly believe their ears. For +a full minute they sat there and stared; while Bobolink remembered the +far-away black object that, at the time, he had thought to be a buzzard. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII + +STILL FLOUNDERING IN THE MIRE + + +"Whee!" + +It was, of course, Bobolink who gave utterance to this characteristic +exclamation. + +Like most of the others, he had been so stunned by the message +read by Paul, that for the moment he failed to find words to +express his feelings. + +An aeroplane had passed over the camp! And heading south, which would +take it toward the quarter where Stanhope lay! + +Here they had thought themselves so far removed from civilization that +the only persons within a range of miles might be set down as a wild man +and some lawless counterfeiters, who had chosen this region because of +its inaccessibility. + +And now they had learned that one of the latest inventions of the day had +been moving above the island, with the pilot actually looking down on the +camp, and so discovering the fact of the Boy Scouts having returned after +their banishment from the place. + +No wonder they all stared at each other, and that speech was denied them +for a time. + +Jack was the first to speak. He had read the message, being nearly as +good a signalman as Paul or Jud. + +"Things seem to be picking up at a pretty lively clip for us; eh, +fellows?" was the way he put it. + +"Picking up?" gasped Bobolink; "Seems to me they're getting to the red +hot stage about as fast as they can. An aeroplane! And up here on our +desert island at that, which folks said was given over to spooks and +wild men! That _is_ the limit, sure! Hold me, somebody; I think I'm +going to faint!" + +But as nobody made any movement in that direction, Bobolink +changed his mind. + +"Let's look into this thing a little closer, fellows," said Paul, always +prompt to set an investigation going. + +"That's what!" echoed Bluff, surprising himself by not stammering a +particle, even though he was still quivering with excitement. + +"Jud says an aeroplane passed over the camp; but he didn't tell whether +it rose from the island or not, though the chances are that it did," Paul +continued. + +"Why do you say that as if you felt sure?" demanded Tom Betts. + +"Yes," put in Phil, eagerly, "you've got on to something, Paul; give us +a chance to grab it, too, please." + +"Sure I will," complied the scout master, cheerfully. "And I'm only +surprised that one of you, always so quick to see such things, hasn't +jumped on to this little game as soon as I have. Look back a short time, +and you'll remember how we were scratching our heads over the tracks of +wheels down in that big opening!" + +"Wheels!" exclaimed Bobolink, with fresh excitement. "Well, I should say +yes; and looks to me like we had 'em in our heads too, where the brains +ought to be. Wheels, yes, and rubber-tired wheels too! Remember how they +seemed to run up and down a regular track, and just went so far, when +they gave out? Whoop! why, it's as easy as two and two make four. Anybody +ought to have guessed that." + +"Huh!" remarked Tom Betts, scornfully; "that's what they said, you +recollect, when Columbus discovered America. After you know, everything +looks easy. In my mind Paul goes up head. He's in a class by himself." + +"And that forge might have been used, among other things, for doing all +sorts of mending metal pieces connected with an aeroplane," Paul went on, +smiling at Tom's tribute of praise. + +"Not forgetting these sort of things," Bobolink observed, positively, +as he took out a pair of bright new quarters, and jingled them +musically in his hand. + +"Well, we haven't had any reason to change our minds about that +thing,--yet," said Paul. "But what strikes me as the queerest of all is +the fact that while we must have been pretty close by when that aeroplane +went up, how was it none of us heard the throbbing of the engine?" + +They looked at each other in bewilderment. Paul's query had opened up a +vast field of conjecture. One and all shook their heads. + +"I pass," declared Tom. + +"Me too," added Phil. + +"Must 'a got some new kind of motor aboard that is silent," +suggested Jack. + +"J-j-just a-goin' to s-s-say that, when Jack t-t-took the w-w-words out +of m-m-my m-m-mouth," Bluff exploded. + +"No trouble doin' that, Bluff," laughed Bobolink. "If that aeroplane did +climb up out of that field, while we pushed through the heavy timber, and +none of us heard a thing, let me tell you, boys, they've got a +cracker-jack of a motor, that's what!" + +"But arrah! would ye be thinkin' that a lot of bog-trottin' +counterfeiters'd be havin' a rale aeroplane?" burst out Andy Flinn, who +had up to now been unable to give any expression to his feelings. + +"I'd say these fellers must be a pretty tony lot, that's all," +Bobolink declared. + +"Whatever do you suppose they use such a machine for?" asked Tom. + +Again all eyes were turned upon Paul, as the oracle of the group of +wondering scouts. He shrugged his shoulders, as if he thought he had as +much right as any of the others to admit that he was puzzled. + +"Well, we'd have to make a stab at guessing that," he observed. "Any one +thing of half a dozen might be the truth. An aeroplane could be used for +carrying the stuff they make up here to a distant market. Then again, it +might be only a sort of plaything, or hobby, of the chief money-maker; +something he amuses himself with, to take his mind off business. All men +have hobbies--fishing, hunting, horse racing, golf--why couldn't this +chap take to flying for his fun?" + +"That sounds good to me," declared Bobolink; "anyhow, we know he must be +a kind of high-flier." + +"Seems like our mystery bulges bigger than ever," remarked Phil, +frowning. + +"It does, for a fact," admitted Tom; "instead of finding out things, +we're getting deeper in the mud all the time." + +"Oh! I don't know," Paul said, musingly; and although the rest instantly +turned upon him, fully expecting that the scout master would have some +sort of communication to make, he did not think it worth while, at that +time, to explain what he meant. + +"Say, I wonder, now, if we could see anything of those fellows from up +here?" remarked Bobolink, suddenly. + +"That's so," echoed Phil, perceiving what the other intended to convey; +"we can see the whole of the island now; and if they're camped somewhere +on the north end, perhaps we might get a glimpse of canvas." + +"What makes you think these men have their headquarters on the north end, +rather than anywhere else?" asked Paul, quickly. + +"Why, when we got up here, I noticed that smoke was climbing up over +there; and smoke means a fire; which also tells that some person must be +around to look after it," replied Phil, promptly. + +"Pretty good reasoning," said Paul, nodding his head toward Phil; for if +anything gave him pleasure as scout master of the troop, it was to see a +boy using his head. + +All now looked over the crown of the hill, toward the upper end of the +island. The first thing they saw, of course, was the thin column of +smoke which Phil had mentioned. Then Bobolink burst out with: + +"And you were right, Paul, when you said that the chances were the island +was close to the north side of the lake, so animals could swim across. +Why, only a narrow streak of water separates 'em there, sure enough." + +"Oh! that was only a guess on my part," Paul confessed. "I saw about how +far away the mainland trended up there, and supposed that our island must +run near it in places. I'm pleased to see that I hit the mark, for once +at least, in this mixed-up mess." + +Paul was evidently more or less provoked because he had been unable to +understand many of the strange things that had happened since their +arrival on Cedar Island. And the others knew that he was taking himself +to task because of his dullness; but what of them, if the scout master +needed to be wakened up--where did they come in? + +"I can't be sure about it," observed Phil, who had been looking intently +at one particular spot; "but it seems as if I could make out the roof of +a shed of some kind, over yonder, close to where the smoke rises." + +This set them all to looking again. Andy, who had very good eyes, +declared he could make it out, and that it was a roof of some kind; one +or two of the others, after their attention had been called to the spot, +also admitted that it did look a little that way, though they could not +say for a certainty. + +"Anyhow, I reckon that's where these men live," Paul declared; "and now +the question is, are we going to turn back here; or keep right on +exploring this queer old Cedar Island?" + +Bobolink, who was busy cutting his initials in the bark of the big cedar +that topped the squatty hill, spoke first of all; for being an impetuous +fellow, he seldom thought twice before airing his opinions. + +"Me to push right on," he said. "What difference does it make to us that +some other fellows chance to be camping on the same island? It's free to +all. We aren't going to bother them one whit, if only they leave us +alone. But they began wrong, you see, when they told us to get off the +earth. That riled me. I never did like to be sat on by anybody. It just +seems like something inside gets to workin' overtime, and all my badness +begins to rise up, like mom's yeast in a batch of dough. Count my vote to +go on ahead, Paul." + +"Well, who's next?" asked the scout master "and remember, that when +it comes to a matter like this, I always try and do what the +majority wants." + +"I'm willing to do what the rest say," came from Jack. + +"Go right on, and make a clean job of it," said Tom Betts, grimly. + +"S-s-same here!" jerked out Bluff. + +"That spakes my mind to a dot, so it do," Andy followed. + +Paul threw up his hand. + +"Enough said; that makes four in favor already, and settles the matter. I +won't tell you which way I would have voted, because the thing's been +taken from my hands. And besides, I would only have considered your +welfare in making my decision, and not my own desire." + +"Which manes he would have said yis for himsilf, and no for the rist of +us," declared the Irish boy, exultantly; "so it's glad I am we've made up +our minds to go on. Whin do we shtart, Paul, darlint?" + +"Right away," replied the one addressed. "There's no use staying any +longer up here, unless you think I'd better get Jud again, and wigwag him +all that we've learned up to now." + +"It'll keep," said Phil, hastily, for he wanted to see the faces of those +other scouts when the several astonishing pieces of news were told; +especially about the finding of the real wild man asleep, the discovery +of the field forge in the open glade and the picking up of the two silver +quarters, which last he felt sure would give them all a surprise. + +"A11 right!" the scout master announced, "I think pretty much the same +way; and besides, it would take a long while sending all that news. +But perhaps I ought to let the boys know we're going on further; and +that they needn't expect us much before the middle of the afternoon. +That'll give us plenty of time to roam around, and perhaps come back +another way." + +So he started once more to catch the attention of Jud, perched high up in +that tree above the sink near the lower end of the island, where he could +have an uninterrupted view of the cedar on the top of the hill. + +Then there was a fluttering of the signal flag and briefly the scout +master informed the other as to what their intentions were. + +"That job's done," Paul remarked, presently, when Jud replied with a +gesture that implied his understanding the message; "and now to move +down-hill again. We're taking some big chances in what we're expecting to +do, fellows, and I only hope it won't prove a mistake. Come along!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV + +THE DISCOVERY + + +"There's one thing that I think we haven't bothered our heads much about, +Paul," remarked Jack, just before they quitted the vicinity of the big +cedar on top of the hill. + +"What?" asked Bobolink, cocking his head on one side to see how well his +initials looked in the bark of the tree from which Cedar Island took its +name; and which would tell later explorers that others had been there +ahead of them. + +"Why, it seems to me those clouds down there on the southern horizon have +a look that spells storm," Jack continued. + +"Wow! wonder if we will strike another rainy spell?" said Bobolink, so +quickly that none of the others had a chance to get a word in; "that last +one helped us get out of the mud in the canal; if another comes will it +be as accommodatin', or turn on us, and whoop things up, carrying our +tents away over the island, and losing 'em in the swamps beyond there?" + +"Oh! say, don't imagine so much, Bobolink," interrupted Phil. "You're +the greatest fellow I ever saw for figuring all sorts of bad things out +long before they ever get a chance to start. What Jack means is, will we +be apt to get caught in the rain, and be soaked?" + +"That's the main thing," added Tom Betts, who was rather particular about +how his khaki suit looked on him, for Tom was a bit of a "dresser," as +some of the others, less careful with regard to their looks, called it. + +"I've noticed that it's grown pretty close and muggy," Paul went on. + +"I should say it had," added Bobolink. "I kept moppin' my face most of +the way up the rise. Thought we'd sure get a fine breeze after reachin' +the top; but nixey, nothing doing. It's as dead as a door nail; or Julius +Caesar ever was. Yes, that spells rain before night, I'd like to risk my +reputation as a weather prophet in saying." + +"Still, we go on?" Paul asked. + +"Well, we'd be a fine lot of scouts," blurted out Bobolink, "if the +chance of getting our backs wet made us give up a plan we'd decided on." + +"Lead the way, Paul; they're bent on finding out something more about +these men. And feeling that way, as Bobolink says, a little rain storm +wouldn't make them change their minds," and Jack, while speaking, started +after the scout master, who had commenced to descend the hill. + +They did not immediately turn toward the north side. There seemed no use +in deliberately making their presence known to any one stationed over at +the north end of the island, providing the mysterious men were not +already aware of it. + +Paul, when doing his wigwag act, had been careful to keep the crest of +the hill between his flag and that suspicious quarter where the smoke +column was lazily creeping up, as smoke has a habit of doing just before +rain comes. + +Of course it might be possible that the man in the aeroplane, after +discovering the tents in the sink, may have made some sort of signal +that would tell his comrades the fact of the scouts having returned in +the night. + +Paul wished, now that it was too late, he had thought to ask Jud about +that point. It might be of some benefit to them to know whether the men +were aware of their presence; or rested serene in the belief that they +were the only occupants of the island, besides the wild man. + +After the scouts had gone down a little way, Paul began to change his +course. He was now turning toward the north. The trees grew much more +thickly here, and would surely screen them from observation. + +The boys had resumed their former habit of observing everything that came +in their way, as true scouts always should. They turned their heads from +right to left and Bobolink even looked back of him more than a few times. +Perhaps he remembered that there was a wild man at large who might take a +notion to awake from his sleep, and, discovering the scout patrol, think +it his business to follow them. + +And then, to be sure, they ought to keep in mind the fact concerning that +wild dog that had gone back to the habits of its ancestors, preferring to +live by hunting, rather than take food from the hand of man. It would be +far from pleasant to have old Lion suddenly sneak up on them, and give +them a scare. + +But everything seemed peaceful around them. Now and then a bird would fly +out of a thicket, or give a little burst of song from the branch of some +tree. A red-headed woodpecker tapped boisterously on the dead top of a +beech near by, trying hard to arouse the curiosity of the worms that +lived there, so as to cause them to poke out their heads to see who was +so noisy at their front doors; when of course the feathered hammerer +stood ready to gobble them up. + +"Oh!" gasped Bobolink, when there was a sudden whirring sound of wings, +and they had a furtive glimpse of something flashing through the +undergrowth near by. + +"It's only a partridge; don't be worried!" remarked Phil. + +"Sure it was," muttered Bobolink, with scorn; "any fellow with only one +eye'd know that _now_; but all the same, the thing gave me a bad turn, +I'm that keyed up." + +"And that's a cotton-tail looking at us over yonder, so don't throw +another fit when he takes a notion to skip out," Phil continued, pointing +with his cudgel to where a rabbit sat, observing the intruders, as though +wondering what business any human beings had coming to the island that +had been left alone so long. + +Presently the little animal skipped off a few paces and then stopped +again. As the scouts advanced, it repeated these tactics; indeed, so +tame did it seem that any of them could have easily hit the rabbit with +a stone, had they felt so inclined, which, as scouts, they could not +think of doing. + +"Looks like she's got a litter of young ones close by here," said +Bobolink; "and is playing lame just to lead us away from the bunch. I've +seen rabbits do that before now. The cuteness of the thing! Look at her, +would you, just beggin' us to run after, and try to capture her?" + +"I've seen a partridge act as if she had a broken wing," Jack remarked, +quietly; "and flutter along the ground in a way that couldn't help but +make one try to catch her; but if you chased after her, it would be to +see the old bird take wing pretty soon, and go off like a rocket." + +"Same here," declared Paul; "and going back, I flushed a whole covey of +the prettiest little birds you ever saw. They'd been crouching under a +bush while the old one played lame; just as if she'd told them all about +it. But I heard her calling in the brush later on, and of course she got +them all together again." + +"There goes your lame rabbit now, Bobolink; and say, look at the way she +jumps over the ground," remarked Phil, chuckling. + +"Not so loud, boys," cautioned the scout master. "These things are all +mighty interesting; but we mustn't forget what we're here for nor yet the +fact that we've got a pretty good hunch there are some men close by who +would be just as mad as hops if they knew we meant to stalk their camp +and spy on them. If you have to say anything, whisper it softly, +remember." + +At that they all fell silent. It was true that they had forgotten for the +moment that they were doing scouting work; and under such conditions +talking was not allowed, especially above the lowest tone. + +All of them noticed that it was getting very close now, for they had to +use the red bandanna handkerchiefs they carried, and quite frequently at +that, to wipe away the perspiration that oozed from their foreheads. + +"Lucky we left our coats in camp; isn't it?" remarked Phil. + +"Looks that way now, but if that rain does strike us, we may wish we had +'em on," Tom Betts replied; showing that he at least had not been able to +put out of his head the possibility of a storm. + +"Seems to me we must be getting somewhere," Phil observed. + +"It can't be very much further," Paul answered, feeling that the remark +was addressed to him as the pilot of the expedition." + +"I should say not," came from Bluff, as chipper as a bird's song, and +without the least sign of halt or break; "if we go on much more, we'll +walk off the end of the island." + +Bobolink patted him on the back, as if to encourage him in well doing. + +"That's the stuff, Bluff; you c'n do it when you try," he whispered; "but +as to steppin' into the lake, I guess we aren't that near the north end +yet, by a good sight." + +Paul nodded his head, but said nothing; from that Bobolink knew the scout +master agreed with him. They could go considerably longer without being +halted by coming to the water's edge. + +Jack called the attention of his chums just then to something ahead. + +"Seems to me I smell smoke," he said, "and if you bend down here, so you +can look under the branches of the trees, you'll see something that's got +the shape of a shed, or cabin, off yonder." + +The others, upon making a try, agreed with Jack that it did seem that +way. + +"Oh! we're right on top of the nest, all right" chattered Bobolink, but +showing his wisdom by keeping his voice down to its lowest note; "and +now, if we c'n duplicate that little dodge we played at the shack of the +wild man, it's goin' to be as easy as turning over off a spring-board, +with a ten foot drop." + +"But if we're caught we might get shot at," suggested Phil, as if the +idea had struck him for the first time that they were really playing with +fire, in thus bearding desperate lawbreakers in their den. + +"We aren't going to get caught," said Bobolink; "who's afraid? Not I. +Lead along, Paul. I want to get this thing out of my system, so I c'n +have a little rest up here," and he placed a hand on his brow. + +Although himself doubtful as to the wisdom of the move, Paul could not +back down now, after allowing the boys to vote on the matter. Perhaps he +was more or less sorry that at the time he had not exercised his +privilege as scout master to put his foot down on their taking any more +chances, just to satisfy such curiosity as reckless fellows like Bobolink +might feel, with regard to the unknown men. + +It was too late now. Until some of the boys themselves manifested a +desire to call the retreat, he must go on; although it began to seem more +than ever audacious--this creeping up on a den of men who were hiding +from the eye of the law in order to carry on their nefarious trade. + +And so they started to creep forward, now dodging behind trees, and +crawling back of friendly patches of bushes whenever the chance presented +itself. It was all exciting enough, to be sure, and doubtless gave the +boys many a delightful little thrill. + +In this fashion they came upon a larger clump of trees and bushes, which, +instead of trying to round, they concluded to pass through. + +It was just as they gained a point inside this clump that they were +brought up with a round turn by discovering a couple of objects standing +there, as though they had been left behind when the valuable contents +which they formerly encased had been taken out. + +These were two large packing cases, of unusual shape, and made of heavy +planed boards! + +Some of the scouts looked at them carelessly, for to them these objects +did not carry any particular meaning. Not so Jack, Tom Betts and +Bobolink. Those three boys had received a shock, as severe as it was +unexpected. + +They recognized those cases as being the identical ones which had only +lately reposed snugly in the planing mill of Jack's father in Stanhope, +and to guard which one Hans Waggoner had been hired by the man who owned +them, Professor Hackett! And as they stood there and gaped, doubtless +among the many things that flashed into the minds of those three lads was +the fact that _somebody_ had been trying to get to see what the contents +of those mysterious cases might be; which person they now knew must have +been a Government Secret Service man, a detective from Washington, on the +track of the bold counterfeiting gang! + +All these things, and much more, flashed through the minds of Jack and +his chums, as they stood there in that thicket, and stared hard at the +two big cases bound around with twisted wire, but which had now been +relieved of their unknown contents, for they stood empty. + +And the others, realizing that something had occurred out of the regular +channel, waited for them to speak, and explain what they had discovered. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV + +TIME TO GO BACK + + +"What is it, Bobolink--Jack?" asked the scout master. + +"The boxes yonder!" Bobolink managed to exclaim. + +"You evidently have seen them before; tell me, Jack, are they the ones +you said your father stored for that man?" continued Paul. + +"They certainly look mighty like them," replied the other; "and you know, +they were taken away that morning early. They must have been carried +across country to the shore of the lake, and then ferried over in a +rowboat. That was what we saw the marks of, and the four men walked off +with these between them." + +"Whee! did you ever?" gasped the still bewildered Bobolink. "Yes, here +you c'n see the markin' on the lid they threw away when they opened this +one--'Professor Hackett, In care of John Stormways, Stanhope,' all as +plain as anything. And to think how after all my worryin' the old boxes +have bobbed up here. Don't it beat the Dutch how things turn out?" + +That seemed to be the one thing that gripped Bobolink's attention--the +strange way in which those two heavy boxes with the twisted wire binding +had happened to cross his path again. + +But Paul was thinking of other things, that might have a more serious +bearing on the case. He turned to Jack again. + +"What do you know about this so-called professor?" he asked. + +"Me? Why, next to nothing, only that he comes from down near New York +City at a place called Coney Island, where lots of fakirs hold out; and +plenty of men too, in the summer season, who would want to circulate a +little money that did not bear the Government stamp." + +"But your father seems to have known him; or at any rate believed he was +a law-abiding citizen," pursued Paul; "otherwise he would hardly have +given him the privilege of storing his cases in his mill over night." + +"Oh! my father is that easy-going, nearly anybody could pull the wool +over his eyes. He believed the yarn this pretended professor told him, +I've no doubt, and thought it next door to nothing to let him keep the +boxes in the mill for a short time. You know, my father is the +best-hearted man in Stanhope, barring none. But I agree with the rest of +you that this time he must have got stung. The professor is sure a bad +egg. I must put my dad wise as soon as I get half a chance." + +"Perhaps it's already too late to save him from getting stuck with a lot +of the stuff they manufacture?" suggested Tom Betts. + +"Oh! that could hardly be so," Jack replied, cheerfully. "When these +bogus money-makers want to get rid of some of their stock they always +have go-betweens do the job for them. It would be too easy tracing things +if they passed the stuff themselves. So I guess my dad hasn't taken in +any great amount of the counterfeits." + +Bobolink was down on his knees. He even crawled into one of the +overturned boxes, as though trying hard to ascertain from sundry marks +what could have been contained under that wooden cover. + +He came out, shaking his head, as though his efforts had not been +attended by success. + +"Looks like machinery of some kind, that's all I c'n tell," he admitted. +"But of course, they'd need a press of some sort to work off the paper +money on. Now, chances are, it's bein' put up right in that long shed +yonder, that we c'n see. Question is, how're we goin' to get close enough +to peek through a crack, and find out what's goin' on in there?" + +Again did most of the boys look uneasily at each other. Paul believed +that, now the great test had arrived, they were beginning to weaken a +little. No doubt it did not seem so glorious a thing when you got close +up, this spying on a band of lawless men, who would be apt to deal +harshly with eavesdroppers, if caught in the act. + +Still, he would not give the order to retreat unless they asked for it. +They had been allowed to settle that matter when they voted; it was up to +Bobolink, Tom, Bluff or Andy to start the ball rolling, if they began to +reconsider their hasty conclusion of a while back. + +Bobolink looked toward the low, long shed, now plainly seen, in something +of a rocky opening, with glimpses of water beyond which told how close to +the shore it had been built. But he did not act as though as anxious to +rush matters as before. + +"Why d'ye believe they ever landed those boxes where they did, and toted +'em all the way up here, heavy as they were, when there's the water close +by?" asked Jack. + +"I was thinking about that a minute ago," replied Paul; "and the only +explanation I can find is this: Perhaps the water is mighty shallow all +around up at the north end of the island. I can see that the shore is +rocky, and if that's so, then no boat with a heavy load could get close +enough in to land the stuff. And so they had to get busy, and carry the +boxes, one at a time." + +"Sounds reasonable, and we'll let her go at that," commented Bobolink, +who, as a rule, was contented to take Paul's opinion. + +Paul himself stooped down to take a look into the cases. He did not make +any remark as he straightened up again, nor did any of the others think +to ask his opinion; which possibly may have been lucky, for perhaps Paul +would not have liked to commit himself just then. If he had found +anything that gave him a new clue, he was evidently keeping it to himself +until he could get more proof. + +"S'pose we ought to make a fresh start," suggested Bobolink, but with a +lack of eagerness that was plainly noticeable; it was as though the +discovery of those two mysterious boxes under such strange conditions had +rather cooled his ardor. + +"That's so," remarked Tom. + +"We've g-g-got so n-n-near now, we ought to f-f-finish!" Bluff declared. + +And yet none of them made the slightest movement looking to an advance, a +fact that Paul could not help but notice, and which warned him they were +close to the point of a change of policy. A suggestion that they give up +the spy business at this stage, and retreat in good order to their camp, +would doubtless have met with favor, and been sure of a unanimous vote. + +But still Paul, having his own notions of such matters, when dealing with +boys, declined to say anything. If one of the four who were mainly +responsible for their being there should take it upon himself to offer +such a motion, he would only too gladly put it to a vote. Until such time +came he must continue to remain silent. + +"Just as you say, boys; I'm carrying out your plans," he remarked, +quietly, wishing to let them know that they had it in their own power to +alter conditions at any time they so desired. + +They all finally moved after the scout master, even if some feet did lag +a little. Bluff and Phil particularly were conscious of a strange sinking +sensation in the region of their hearts, which they mistrusted signified +fear; and rather than have any of their comrades suspect that they had a +cold hand pressing there, they shut their teeth hard together, and +determined that under no circumstances would they show the white feather. + +So Paul led them on. + +Again they tried to conceal themselves as best they might in devious +ways. Here the wide and generous trunk of a friendly tree afforded them +a certain amount of shelter; a little further on a small pile of rocks +answered the same benevolent purpose; but always the main idea was to +hide from any curious eyes that might be on the lookout in the +vicinity of that queer looking shed--newly made, if the fresh boards +signified anything. + +"Looky here! there's a man!" suddenly exclaimed Bobolink. + +The others had discovered the man at about the same time. They all lay +flat and hardly dared breathe, lest in some manner they attract the +attention of the stranger, who seemed to be not only a big man, but +rather a fierce-looking fellow in the bargain. + +He was glancing all around at the heavens, as though wondering whether +the aeroplane was not coming back, whatever its mission in flying away +south could have been. Standing there, he shaded his eyes with his +hands and continued to look toward the south for several minutes. Then +he made a gesture as of disappointment, and vanished around the corner +of the shed. + +"Never looked down this way once!" Bobolink said triumphantly, as though +their escape had caused his spirits to rise a little. + +"That leaves the coast clear again, anyhow," said Tom Betts, as if he now +had a rather disagreeable duty to perform, which, since it had to be +done, had better be gotten through with as speedily as possible. + +When leaving camp these brave scouts had never dreamed but that +spying upon the enemy would prove the most delightful task imaginable. +Even later on, when they had voted to keep moving forward, with so +much assurance, the picture had not begun to fade; but now it did not +seem the same. + +As the shelter grew less and less, however, it became evident that +presently, if they continued to advance in this fashion, they must reach +a point where, in order to make progress, they must expose themselves to +hostile eyes, should any be on the watch. + +Would even this cause one of the four scouts to "take water," as Bobolink +called it, and make the sign that he had had enough? + +Paul knew them all pretty well, and he also realized the fact that every +fellow possessed a nature bordering on the stubborn. It was the dread of +being thought cowardly that kept them from taking the cue from Paul, and +ending this foolish advance. + +They had gone over fifty feet since the last stop, and passed the last +large tree which could be looked on to give them any shelter. + +It was just at this moment that once again the big man was seen coming +hastily around the corner of the shed. + +At sight of him the boys stood still. There was no use trying to hide +now. Perhaps some faint hope took possession of them that they might be +unnoticed if they did not move; just as the still hunter, stalking a +feeding deer, will watch its short tail, and whenever he sees it twitch +he stands perfectly motionless; for he knows that the animal is about to +raise his head, and that he will probably be taken for a stump if he does +not move hand or foot. + +But evidently the man had sighted the seven khaki-clad scouts. He seemed +almost petrified with amazement at first, and stood staring at them. As +if awaking from his trance, he began to make frantic motions with his +arms, and at the same time shouted hoarsely at them: + +"Go back! Get out of that! You're crazy staying there! Run, I tell you, +while you have the chance! Get away! Get away, you fools!" + +The scouts looked at each other in astonishment. What could it all mean? +Were all the men on this queer island stark, staring crazy? He called +them that, but it is always a rule for mad people to believe every one +else crazy but themselves. + +"Say, what does the guy mean?" cried Bobolink, who seemed to be utterly +unable to understand a thing; "mebbe it's a small-pox hospital we've run +on, fellows!" + +But Paul was beginning to see a light. Possibly the excited gestures, as +well as the urgent words of the big man, may have assisted him to arrive +at a conclusion. + +He no longer felt so decided about not speaking the word that would +cause his little detachment to turn and retreat. There must be danger +hovering over them, danger in some terrible form, to make that unknown +man so urgent. + +"Let's get out of this, boys!" he called, "every fellow turn, and streak +it as fast as he can. And get behind trees as quick as you can, +because--" + +They had already started to obey the scout master, and possibly had +covered a few jumps when it seemed that the very earth shook and quivered +under them, as a fearful roar almost deafened every boy. + +Just as you have seen a pack of cards, made into tent shape in a curving +row, go falling down when the first one is touched, so those seven scouts +were knocked flat by some concussion of the air. + +They had hardly fallen than one and all scrambled to their feet, and fled +madly from the scene, as if fearful lest the whole end of the island +might be blown up behind them, and catch them in a trap from which there +could be no escape. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI + +HONORABLE SCARS + + +So it turned out after all that the scout master did not have to change +his mind, and give the order for retreat. When that dreadful panic +overwhelmed the scouts, it was really a case of "every one for himself." + +Either by rare good luck, or some sort of instinct, the seven lads +managed to keep pretty well together as they ran. Not a single fellow +dreamed of allowing himself to get separated from his comrades. It seemed +to be a case of "united we stand, divided we fall," or "in union there is +strength." + +If in their mad rush some of the boys collided with trees, or stumbled +over obstacles that they failed to discover in time, they were not of a +mind to let such trifles interfere with their making record time. + +In such cases it was only necessary to scramble erect again, and put on a +little extra spurt in order to overhaul their comrades. + +What had taken them half an hour to cover when they were "scouting" in +such approved fashion, was passed over in about five minutes. + +It was Paul who came to his senses first. He realized that there was no +one chasing them and that, to tell the truth, not one of the boys could +have been seriously hurt by what had befallen. + +So he began to laugh, and the sound reaching the ears of the others, +appeared to act on their excited minds like soothing balm. + +Gradually the whole lot slackened their pace until they were going at a +jog trot; which in turn settled down to a walk. + +Finally Bobolink came to a full stop. + +"Whee! let's get a few decent breaths, fellows!" he managed to gasp. + +The others were apparently nothing loth, and so they all drew up in a +bunch. A sorry lot they looked just then, to tell the truth. It seemed as +though nearly every fellow had some distinguishing mark. + +Phil's rather aristocratic face had a long scratch that extended down the +right side, and gave him a queer look; Jack was caressing a lump on his +forehead, which he may have received from a tree, or else when he was +knocked down without warning by that singular explosion; Andy was trying +to quench a nose-bleed, and needed his face washed the worst way; Bluff's +left eye seemed partly closed, as if he had been too close to the +business end of an angry bee; while Bobolink had two or three small cuts +about his face that made him look as if he had been trying to tattoo +himself--with wretched success. + +So they looked at one another, and each thought the balance of the crowd +had the appearance of a set of lunatics on the rampage. + +Hardly had they stared at each other than they set to laughing. + +"Oh! my stars! but aren't you a screamer though, Andy, with all that +blood smeared over your face; and Bluff, why he looks as if he'd been in +a prize fight!" was the way Bobolink expressed his feelings, bending over +as he laughed. + +"Huh! you're not so very pretty yourself!" replied Bluff, with not the +slightest sign of an impediment in his speech--evidently it had been +frightened out of his system for the time being. "Anybody'd think you +were a South Sea Islander on the warpath. And wouldn't they cross over to +the other side of the road in a hurry if they met you! Say, if Mazie +Kenwood or Laura Carson could only see you now, they'd give you the cut +straight." + +"Look at Jack's bump, would you?" Tom Betts exclaimed. + +"Don't call attention to me any more than you can help," Jack remarked, +making a wry face, as he caressed the protuberance on his forehead; "it +feels as big as a walnut, let me tell you, and hurts like fun. The sooner +I'm back in camp, so I can slap some witch hazel on that lump, the better +it'll please me, boys." + +After a little more laughing and grumbling, Paul, who had escaped without +any visible hurts, though he walked a little lame, remarked: + +"Well, do we start right back again, and take a look-in on those men? +Don't everybody speak at once, now!" + +All the same they did, and the burden of the united protest was that +circumstances alter cases; that they had arrived at the conclusion that +what those men were doing on the island could be no affair of honest, +law-abiding scouts; and that as for them, the camp in the sink offered +more attractions at that particular moment than anything else they +could think of. + +Of course that settled it. The scouting was over for that occasion. They +had done themselves credit, as far as it went; but then, who would ever +dream that they would come within an ace of being blown sky-high with the +whole upper end of the island? + +As if by common consent, they started to move forward again, and every +fellow seemed to know, as if by instinct, which was south, and +whereabouts the camp was, for they needed no pilot now. + +And as they journeyed they talked it all over. Every boy seemed to have +an opinion of his own with regard to what had happened, and they differed +radically. + +"Tell you what," said Tom Betts, who had also escaped with only a few +minor injuries, because he was as quick as a cat, and must have fallen on +a soft piece of ground besides; "tell you what, I thought that old hill +had turned into a volcano, and just bust all to flinders." + +"Well, now," Phil admitted, "I somehow had an idea that storm had chased +up when we didn't chance to be watching, and lightning had struck a tree +close to the place where we happened to be standing looking at that crazy +man wave his arms." + +"Me?" Bobolink remarked; "why, I was dead sure what we guessed about a +war game bein' played up here between two pretended hostile armies was +right; and that one of 'em had blown up the fort of the other. You see, +that aeroplane had a sorter military air about it, even if I didn't see +it. And I'm not sure yet it isn't that." + +"One thing sure," remarked Paul; "the man was trying to warn us to keep +back, for he knew some sort of mine was going to explode, and that we +might be killed. As it was, we got off pretty lucky, I think. This sprain +will heal in a day or two; but if a rock weighing a ton or two had +dropped down on me, I guess the chances of my ever seeing Stanhope again +would have been mighty slim." + +"But tell me," Bobolink asked, "what in the world would counterfeiters +want with exploding mines, and doin' all that sort of thing? Just +remember that big bang we had the other night, that woke everybody up. +Shows it's a habit with 'em, and that this wasn't some freak accident. +Gee! my head's buzzing around so I can't think straight. Somebody do my +guessin' for me; won't you, please?" + +"That's right," said Tom Betts, suddenly; "who are these men, anyway? +P'raps we didn't size 'em up straight when we made up our minds they were +bogus money-makers. Mebbe they happen to be a different sort of crowd +altogether. How about that, Paul; am I off my trolley when I say that?" + +"I've been beginning to believe something was crooked in our guess for a +little while, Tom," replied the scout master; "but all the same, you've +got me up in the air when you ask who and what they are. I'm rattled more +than I've been in many a day, to be honest with you all." + +Bobolink took out something from his pocket. He stared hard at the two +shining quarters, and jingled them in his hand. + +"Look good to me," he was heard to say; "I'd pass 'em any time for +genuine. But what silly chump'd be throwing good money around like +that, tell me?" + +"Or bad money either, Bobolink," remarked Paul; "so you see, it was an +accident in any case. You've lost money many a time out of your pocket; +well, this man was in the same boat. Chances are, that's straight goods." + +Bobolink grinned. + +"If that's so," he remarked calmly, "I'm in a half dollar, and that's +some satisfaction. But say, what a time we'll have tellin' the boys. Wow! +I can see the eyes of Little Billie, and Curly, and Nuthin just stickin' +out of their heads when they hear all we've run up against." + +"And we'd better move along a little faster while about it," +observed Paul. + +"Why? Hope you don't think any of those men are chasin' after us; or that +we'll run up against that wild man, or the big yellow dog again?" +Bobolink inquired, glancing fearfully about him. + +"No, I was considering the feelings of the boys," replied the +scout master. + +"That's a fact," Jack went on, "they'll be worried about us, after +hearing that terrible report, and think something has happened to our +crowd. But we're not a great way from camp now, Paul." + +"No, and if the distance was greater, I'd stop long enough to send up a +smoke signal that would tell Jud we were all right. But that'd take time, +and perhaps we'd better hurry along," and the scout master set a new +pace, even though limping slightly. + +"Got hurt some yourself; did you, Paul?" Jack asked, solicitously. + +"Oh! only a little sprain, but it happens to be on a muscle that I have +to use when I walk, and you know a fellow favors such a pain. But I can +see where the sink lies now; we'll be there in ten minutes, perhaps +half that." + +They continued to push on. For the time being most of them forgot about +their personal troubles, in their anxiety to join their comrades. And +Bobolink, as he walked beside Jack, spoke what was on his mind: + +"It was a grand old scare, all right, and one we won't ever forget, +believe me; but there's one thing that tickles me half to death, Jack. We +know _now_ where the queer old boxes went to, even if we are up in the +air about what was in them. And the chances are we may find that out +before we're done with this business; because those men ought to come +down and ask if anybody got hurt by their silly Fourth of July fireworks +display. There's the camp, boys. Whoopee!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII + +ANOTHER THREATENING PERIL + + +Loud cheers greeted the appearance of the seven scouts, as they hurried +forward into the camp. And when those who had remained with the tents saw +the various scratches, contusions and bumps that adorned most of the +returned boys' faces, they were burning with eagerness to hear the +details of the adventure. + +Such a clatter of tongues as ensued, as every fellow tried to tell his +version of the happening. If half that was said were written down, it +would require many more chapters to give the details. + +Gradually, however, each stay-at-home scout began to get a pretty clear +idea of the series of adventures that had befallen their mates in trying +to explore the mysteries of the island. They understood all about the +wild man, and what the consensus among the seven explorers seemed to be +concerning the strangers who occupied the island, and were conducting +such an amazing series of experiments, even making use of an aeroplane to +accomplish their ends. + +The guesses that followed were legion, yet Paul, who listened patiently +to the most astounding theories, shook his head in the end. + +"I don't believe any of us have hit on the right thing yet, fellows," he +said. "But there's meat in a number of the guesses you've made, and +perhaps we'll get the story after a while. But how about grub; we're as +hungry as bears?" + +"Never expected to join you at lunch, for a fact," grinned Bobolink; "but +then, we made better time than we ever thought we could on the return +journey. Talk to me about a prize spurrin' a fellow on to do his level +best--the whip that does it is to put a first-class scare in him. Then +you're goin' to see some runnin' that takes the cake. Wheel didn't we +sprint, though? Bet you I jumped clear over a log that stood six feet +high from the ground--more or less." + +It happened that the stay-at-home scouts had just prepared their noon +meal at the time the explosion occurred that made the whole island +tremble. That had startled them so much that they had not had the +heart to think of sitting down because of anxiety about the fate of +their chums. + +And so the dinner had remained untouched up to the time they heard the +"cooee" of the returning warriors; and then caught the bark of the fox, +that told them that Paul and his posse had returned. + +There was enough for all, because the cooks were very liberal in making +up their messes. And over the dinner more suggestions were made as to +what their future course ought to be. + +By now even the fire-eating Bobolink was ready to cry quits, and +back down; nor did he seem at all ashamed to admit the fact that he +was afraid. + +"If those sillies mean to blow up the whole island, some way or other, +why, what's the use of us stayin' here, an' goin' up with it, I'd like to +know?" he said. "Tell you what, I've got another guess comin', and it's +this: P'raps they're meanin' to get rid of this island and lake, and have +started to do the job. Mebbe some big railroad wants a short line across +country, and this thing is right in their way. I've heard of 'em doin' +bigger things than just blowing up a little island; haven't you, Paul?" + +He always appealed to the scout master when one of his brilliant thoughts +came along. Paul nodded his head. + +"That sounds more reasonable than a whole lot of things I've been +listening to, Bobolink, for a fact," Paul admitted. "Still, we don't +know, and there's no way to find out the true story, right now. +Listen, fellows!" + +"Thunder, away off, Paul; guess we've all got explosions on the brain, +because it gave me a start, too," said Jack, laughing. + +"And if a storm's coming along," observed Jud Elderkin, who seemed vastly +pleased when he heard that his signalling had been so easily understood, +"why, I reckon we ought not to think of pulling down our good tents, and +getting out of here, till she's over." + +It was plain from this that the scouts had determined to abandon their +dangerous island, and spend the balance of the outing by making a camp on +the mainland, where at least there was a reasonable expectation of not +being blown sky-high by some explosion. + +"And since we're done eating perhaps we'd better take another look at the +tent pins, to make sure they'll hold when the wind strikes us. Some of +these summer storms have a lively advance breeze, you know, boys," Paul +suggested. + +"Little Billie and I'll go over to the boats, and see that the curtains +are buttoned down snug. Some of us can stay inside while its rainin' and +that'll give more room in the tents," Bobolink remarked, jumping to his +feet, with a return of his customary lively Way. + +"And in this sink we'll be protected from any wind coming from the south, +don't you think, Paul?" Jack ventured. + +"Couldn't be better," was the reply. "Those trees and bushes, as well as +the rise in the ground, will help a lot. But get busy, fellows, with +those tent pins. I'll take the axe, and go the rounds myself, to make +doubly sure. It's not the nicest thing in the world to have your canvas +blow away--eh, Nuthin?" + +"You're right, it isn't," replied the little scout, "'specially when it +lifts you right up with it into a tree, and has you tied up there in the +snarls of a clothes line. I know all about that, and none of the rest of +you ever tried it. Excuse me from another balloon ride like that." + +In a short time everything was done that could be thought of to render +things storm-proof. Then the boys went over to the edge of the water to +watch the advance of the black clouds, which those at the boats in the +little cove declared was a sight worth seeing. + +And it certainly was, all the scouts admitted. Some of them were filled +with a certain awe, as they saw how inky the clouds looked. But what boy, +or man either, for that matter, is there who has not felt this sensation +when watching scurrying clouds that tell of an approaching storm? + +By degrees the boys began to drift back to the camp. Every sort of excuse +was given for leaving the beach. One fellow suddenly remembered that he +had left his coat hanging on a bush, another had forgotten to fasten his +knapsack, while a third wished to tie his blanket in a roll, in case the +water did find a way to get into the sink. + +Paul, Jack, Bobolink and Jud remained until they saw the rough water away +down near the southern shore of the lake, and understood that the first +squall must be swooping upon them. Then they too gave up the vigil, for +the chances were the rain would come with the first breeze. + +With a howl and a roar the storm broke upon them. Cowering in the tents, +about four in each, as the others had taken to the boats, they waited +with more or less suspense what might happen. + +The wind made the canvas shake at a lively clip, and the fastenings on +the southern side were sorely tried; but they had been well taken care of +and Paul called out that he believed they were going to hold. + +For half an hour the rain beat down in torrents. None of them remembered +ever hearing such a deluge descend, but perhaps their imaginations were +excited on account of the peculiar conditions that surrounded them. All +the same it rained, and then rained some more, until a very large +quantity of water must have fallen, all of them decided. + +With Paul and Jack in the tent that was nearest to the lake were +Bobolink, Tom Betts and Nuthin. + +"Seems to me it's gettin' kind of damp in here," remarked Bobolink, +when the clamor outside had died down somewhat, and they could hear each +other talk. + +"That's a fact," declared Paul; "and after all it's just as well that we +made sure our blankets and other things were tied up and hung away from +the ground. But seems to me I hear one of the fellows in the boat +shouting to us." + +When he opened the flap he found that the rain had almost stopped, as +well as the wind to a great extent. Perhaps the storm was over. + +"Hello!" Paul called out. + +"Hey! that you, Paul?" came in a voice he recognized as belonging to Jud, +who had been one of those in charge of the nearby boats. + +"Yes, what's wrong?" asked the scout master. + +"Can't you come over here? Going to be the dickens to pay, I reckon. The +bally old lake's rising like fun. Looks like the outlet must have got +stopped up somehow. You're sure going to have to move your tents mighty +quick. Coming, Paul?" + +"All right," answered the other, as he crawled out, and started under the +dripping trees for the spot where the two motorboats lay in the cove, +sheltered from the waves that had been dashing against the shore +elsewhere. + +When he reached the spot he found that all of the boys who had been +sheltered in the boats were lined up on the shore, where they could see +down the lake. Jud himself seemed to be watching the water steal up a +stick he had thrust into the sand. + +"Gee! she's mounting like fun!" he exclaimed. "Water must be pouring into +the old lake from every side, and little gettin' out. Say, if this keeps +on, the whole island, except that hill up yonder, will be under water +before night. It sets rather low, you understand, Paul." + +The scout master was naturally thrilled by these words. He knew that the +leader of the Gray Fox Patrol was no alarmist, and that he seldom lost +his head in times of excitement. + +And so it was with considerable apprehension that Paul stooped down so he +might see just how fast the lake was rising. And when he noticed that it +actually crept up the stick before his very eyes, he knew that what Jud +had said about the whole island being covered might not be such a silly +assertion after all. + +It began to look as though the adventures of the scouts had not yet +reached an end, and that they were in for another thrilling experience. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII + +PREPARED FOR THE WORST + + +"She's just walking up hand over fist; eh, Paul?" asked Jud. + +"No question about it, Jud," came the reply as the scout master cast an +apprehensive look across the half-mile of water that separated them from +the outlet of the lake. "I'd give something to know what's happened down +there, to dam this water up, and just how far it's going to rise on us." + +"Tell you what," said Bobolink, who had followed Paul when he left the +tent, as had also the rest of the occupants, "I wouldn't be a bit +surprised if that awful explosion shook the shoulder of earth and rock +down, that we saw hanging above the mouth of the Radway River where she +leaves the lake." + +"You've hit it, I do believe!" cried Paul, exultantly; "and that's just +what did happen, chances are, fellows." + +"But if the outlet is filled up," said Jud, "and this water keeps pouring +in on four sides, it's dead sure the blooming lake will fill up in short +order. What had we better do, Paul?" + +"That's just what I'm trying to figure on, Jud," answered the other; +"it's one of two things--either hike out for the hill, where we'll be +safe until the water goes down; or else get our things aboard the boats, +and stay here." + +"That last strikes me as the best of all!" declared Jack. + +"Besides," broke in Nuthin, "we don't want to lose those boats, you know. +They were loaned to us and if we let 'em go to smash, wouldn't it take us +a long time to pay the bill, though? Besides, we'll need 'em to get away +from here." + +"That isn't the worst of it," remarked Paul, who was very serious. + +"Why, what is there besides?" demanded Bobolink. + +"Suppose the water does get up so as to cover the island, all but the +hill," the scout master went on deliberately, as though making sure of +his ground as he talked; "and then, all of a sudden the weight of it +broke through the dam; don't you see the suction, as the water rushed +out, would be something _terrific_. No rope ever made, I reckon, could +hold these boats back. They'd sure be drawn through the gap, and carried +on the flood, any old way, even upside-down, maybe." + +"Whew!" whistled Bobolink; and as for some of the other fellows, they +began to lose their usual color as they realized what Paul was saying. + +"Now, that's just an idea that came into my mind," Paul went on, seeing +that he had alarmed some of the scouts. "It may never happen, you +understand. But you know the motto we believe in is 'be prepared!' That +means never to take things for granted. Keep your eyes and ears always on +guard, and see lots of things, even before they swoop down on you. So, +it's up to us, fellows, to get our tents and other fixings loaded up as +soon as we can. After that we'll go aboard ourselves, and try to prepare +against a sudden break in the dam." + +"And lookin' at that water creeping up," remarked Jud, "the sooner we get +busy, the better." + +Accordingly, they all hastened back to the camp. It was found that +already the water seemed to be creeping into the sink. Those in the other +two tents were talking it over, and wondering what was about to happen. + +When they heard the latest news, their faces indicated both astonishment +and not a little alarm. But under the direction of the scout master, they +started to convey all their belongings to the boats. + +First the blankets and clothes bags were taken over; then the food and +cooking utensils; and finally the tents came down in a hurry, for the +boys were working in water almost up to their knees when this last part +of the job was concluded. + +Once out of the sink, they found plenty of high ground to walk on, while +carrying the wet tents to the landing where the boats were lying. + +After they were all aboard, the scouts packed the stuff as best they +could, so that it would take up as little space as possible. Meanwhile +Paul and Jack, with both the other patrol leaders, were trying to figure +out just what would be the best course for them to pursue. + +"Makes me think of old Noah, when he went aboard the ark, and the animals +they followed two by two," said Bobolink, with a chuckle. + +"Huh, call yourself a kangaroo, or a monkey, if you like," spoke up Old +Dan Tucker, "but as for me I'd rather play the part of Ham, or one of the +other sons." + +"Sure thing!" assented Bobolink, cheerfully; "never saw the time yet +when you raised any kick about takin' the part of Ham. Sounds good, +don't it, Dan?" + +It was pretty hard to keep the spirits of Bobolink from sizzling and +gushing forth like a fountain when the water is turned on. He could joke, +even while the several leaders of the expedition were consulting gravely +about their chances of holding the boats against the frightful suction of +the current, when the obstructions in the outlet of the lake gave way, +which they hoped would not be suddenly, but by degrees. + +It was certainly a condition that confronted them, and not a theory. Paul +was really more worried than he showed; for he kept his feelings under +control, knowing that if some of the others realized how much he was +concerned, the fact might create a panic. + +"If I really thought the worst would come," Paul said, in a low tone, to +Jack, after it had been concluded that they would stay by the boats, and +do the best they could, "why I'd be tempted to give the order to just cut +for the hill, and leave everything but some food behind. Once up there, +we would be safe, and that's what we can't say is the case now." + +"But even if the water goes out with a rush, it can't tear a tree like +this one up by the roots; can it?" asked Jack, pointing to where the +cables of the boats had been secured as strongly as possible. + +"That's so," replied the scout master; "but then, think of the ropes, and +what a terrible strain would come on them. I'm afraid both would snap +like pipe-stems. To hold tight, we'd need a big chain; or a hawser like +that one the switching engine on the railroad uses to drag cars on a +parallel track. But then, the water may be nearly as high, right now, as +it will get We'll hope so, anyhow." + +That was Paul's way of trying to look on the bright side, although he +never failed to prepare for the worst, even while expecting the best. + +"If we could only think up some way to help ease the strain, it would be +a good thing," observed Jack, thoughtfully. + +"I wish you could. It would ease my mind more than I care to tell you," +was Paul's answer. + +"One thing, the storm is over," called out Jud, just then; "see, there's +a break in the clouds, and I reckon the sun will be peepin' out soon." + +"But the water will keep on rushing down the sides of the hills away off +yonder," Paul remarked, "and filling up this cup until it runs over. They +say that the Radway River drains three times the amount of country that +our own Bushkill does. And by the way the water comes in here, I believe +it. Look out there on the lake, will you; it shows that it's getting +wider right now." + +"Why, in another half hour, if it keeps on the same way, it's going to +lap over pretty much all the lower part of the island," Jack declared. + +Everything else was neglected now, and the scouts gathered along the side +of each boat, watching the lake. It was as if they half expected to see +the water suddenly take to rushing toward the spot where they knew the +peculiar outlet lay, not more than twenty feet across, and with abrupt +sides, one of which had been partly overhanging the water at the time +they entered. + +It was, of course, this section which must have been dislodged by the +blast which shook the surrounding territory, filling the bed of the +stream, and causing the rapidly accumulating waters of the lake to back +up, since they could find no place to discharge, as usual. + +It was while they were moodily watching the waste of waters that one of +the scouts, who had wandered across to the other side of the _Comfortt_ +suddenly sounded a fresh alarm, that sent another thrill to the hearts of +the already excited boys. + +"Hey! here's a lot of men comin' down on us, fellows I They're meanin' to +capture our boats, just like pirates. Boarders ahoy! Get busy everybody. +Clubs are trumps!" + +As they rushed to the other side, some having to clamber over the heaps +of duffle that took up so much room aboard, the scouts saw that it was no +false alarm. A number of men were hurrying toward them, splashing through +water that was in places almost knee deep, even when they took the upper +levels. Should they make a blunder, and stray off the ridges, it was +likely they would speedily have to swim for it. + +Paul was considerably aroused at first. They did not know very much +about these mysterious people of the island; and after their recent +rough experience, most of the boys were decidedly averse to knowing +anything more of them. And yet, here they were hurrying toward the +two motor-boats, as though they might indeed have some desperate +idea in view. + +Perhaps they meant to capture the boats, so as to insure their escape +from the rising waters. And then again, it seemed at least possible +that they might want to keep the scouts from telling what strange +things they had seen. + +So the first thing Paul did when he had that glimpse of the oncoming men, +was to hasten to possess himself of his double-barreled shotgun. Not that +he expected that there would be any necessity for firing it, but it was +apt to inspire a certain amount of respect. + +And the balance of the scouts had made haste to arm themselves with +whatever they could find that would help hold the enemy at bay. Some had +brought their clubs aboard, others seized upon the push poles, while one +grabbed up the camp axe, and another seized upon the hatchet. + +When eighteen husky and determined lads line the sides of two boats, +prepared to give a good account of themselves, it must needs be brave men +who would dare try to clamber aboard. + +And it was about this time, when things were looking rather +squally around the floating homes of the scouts, that Paul noticed +something singular. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX + +LIFTING THE LID + +Three men could be seen splashing desperately through the water; and they +seemed to be carrying a fourth, who was lying on a rude sort of litter, +as though he might either be sick, or badly hurt. + +And so it flashed through Paul's mind that perhaps after all their +mission was not one of conquest, or even hostility, but that they were +seeking help. + +"Hold up, fellows," he hastened to say; "we'll have to let them come +aboard now, because they never could get back to the hill again, with the +water rising so fast. Besides, I think they've got a wounded man along, +and need help. Don't forget we're scouts, and always ready to hold out a +helping hand." + +"That's the ticket!" declared the impulsive Bobolink, forgetting his +warlike disposition when he saw the man on the litter. + +So Paul beckoned to the men to approach. He had already made the +discovery that one of those who bore the litter was the big man who had +waved them away with such violent gestures, just before the terrible +explosion, when they happened to get too near the mine that was being +fired for some strange purpose. + +Two minutes later, and still splashing through water that came almost up +to their hips, those who bore the injured man arrived close to the boats. + +"Why, it's Professor Hackett who's being carried!" exclaimed Jack. + +The small man on the litter, who looked very white, lifted his head with +an effort, and tried to wave his hand. + +"Yes, that's who it is; and you're Jack Stormways; aren't you? Oh! I hope +that chum of yours can do something to stop this bleeding; I made them +carry me down here as a last chance. My man who was sent for a doctor in +our aeroplane, has not come back, and we're afraid he had an accident. +Can some of you boys help lift me aboard? I'm very weak from loss of +blood, and nearly gone." + +His voice was as faint as a whisper; and indeed, it was a wonder that he +managed to speak at all. + +The scouts had quite forgotten everything but that there was some one in +trouble. Tender hands immediately were forthcoming to assist in raising +litter and man over the side of the boat. Then the three attendants +climbed aboard, and strange to say the scouts seemed to have forgotten +all their fear of the men they had believed to be lawbreakers. For now +they saw that they were an intelligent lot of men, who bore little +resemblance to such criminals as they had seemed to be. + +Paul had long been interested in surgery. His father was the leading +doctor of Stanhope, and had always encouraged this fancy in the boy. It +seemed that the professor chanced to remember that he had been told about +the ability of Jack Stormways' chum; and when matters began to look +desperate, since none of his assistants could seem to stop the flow of +blood that followed his accident, as a last resort he had forced them to +put him on a litter, and make for the spot where they knew the scouts had +their camp, the man in the aeroplane having signaled the fact back to +them, just as Paul suspected. + +Of course they had not dreamed of such a thing as the lake rising, until +they had gone too far to retreat; and then they took desperate chances of +finding the boys still there, where they had boats with which they could +go to the mainland. + +Paul busied himself immediately. It was a pretty bad wound that the +little man had received, and his left arm would be practically useless +the balance of time; but he cared not for this, if only his life might +be spared. + +Jack and Jud assisted whenever their services were needed and in the end +Paul had not only stopped the flow of blood, but had the injured arm +neatly bandaged--as well, the professor weakly declared, as any surgeon +could have done. + +"And now," said Paul, turning on the big man, who had hovered around +anxiously, watching what was being done, as though he thought a great +deal of the professor; "in return for what we've done, won't you please +tell us who and what you are, and why you're doing all these queer stunts +away up here on this lonely island, where nobody can see you? We're all +mixed up, and don't know what to think. At first we believed you must be +a lot of counterfeiters hiding from the Government agents; but what with +these explosions, and such things as aeroplanes, I'm getting it in my +head that it means you're trying out some big sensations that are going +to be sprung on the Coney Island public next season." + +"And that's where you made a pretty clever guess, my boy," said the big +man, as he settled down to take it a bit more easily after his recent +hard work; "Professor Hackett has invented most of the biggest sensations +seen at seaside resorts these last ten years. He expects to excel his +record next season, and then retire; and I tell you, now, I began to +think he'd retire another way, if he lost much more blood from that +wound, which he got by accident this morning." + +The scouts looked at each other, and a broad smile appeared on many a +face that only a short time before had been pale with apprehension. + +When a thing that has seemed a dark mystery is finally explained, it +often looks so easy and simple that all of us wonder how we ever could +have bothered our heads over such a puzzle. And so it was in this case. +Why did it come that no one had guessed the true explanation before, when +it was so easy? + +They began to tell the big man all about their experiences, and how so +many things seemed to make it appear that the strangers were hiding +from officers. + +"How about that fellow who was hanging around my father's mill that night +you had your two big boxes stored there?" Jack asked. + +"He represented a rival inventor, who has always been jealous of +Professor Hackett, and is forever trying to find out what he has on the +stocks," replied the big man, whose name they learned was Mr. Jameson, an +able assistant to the inventor of aerial bombs, brilliant exploding +mines, and a dozen other wonders that thrill audiences at the seashore +each season. + +"But wouldn't he be likely to follow the wagon when it took the boxes +away in the morning?" the boy continued to ask. + +"Oh! we put him on a false scent, by shipping two other boxes away on a +train," was the reply. "He must have gone two hundred miles before he +discovered his mistake; and I doubt very much if he knows yet, but is +watching those cases to see what we do with them, away out in western New +York State." + +"Er, how about these?" asked Bobolink, jingling the two shining quarters +in his hand. "I picked 'em up close to that field smithy you have on the +island. We thought they were the best counterfeits we ever saw. I guess +they are." + +"I lost a bunch of small change through a hole in my pocket," laughed the +man, "and so I judge those are a part of it. But keep them as souvenirs +of your wonderful adventures on Cedar Island. Every time you look at them +you'll remember that narrow escape you and your friends had when you came +near stepping on a mine, the fuse of which had been lighted; for +Professor Hackett, even while he was wounded, would not hear of us +stopping our work." + +"Thanks," replied the gratified Bobolink, again pocketing the quarters +that had been the cause of so much speculation among the seven scouts; +"I'll be glad to accept your kind offer. But there's another thing we'd +like to know." + +"Speak up, then, and I'll be pleased to accommodate you, if the +knowledge is in my power to bestow. This flood bids fair to bring our +experiments to an end for the time being, even if the professor's +weakness hadn't made it necessary that we get to some place where he can +receive the right kind of care, to build up his strength. What's +bothering you now, my boy?" + +"How about the wild man?" asked Bobolink. + +"Oh! he was here when we came, and we made friends with him," the other +replied, promptly. "You see, some of us have been up here for a month. We +had some new stuff shipped in those big cases; but it'll all be rusted +now by this water. The poor fellow is harmless, for all he looks so +fierce. Why, at the smell of coffee the tears trickled down his dirty +cheeks like rain; it seemed to be just one last link that bound his +flitting memory to something in the far-away past. We gave him an old +saucepan to cook it in, and showed him how. Ever since he's visited us +often, and we supplied him with food, because it seemed as though he was +the one who had first right to this island." + +"I hope the poor old chap has the good sense to climb that hill, and get +away from the rising water," remarked Jack, with some feeling. "Have you +any idea who he can be, or where he came from?" + +"We made up our minds that he had been out of his head a long time, and +perhaps had escaped from some institution. He mentioned the name of John +Pennington once, and we think it must have been his. The professor +intended to make inquiries, later on, and if possible have him returned +to his home, wherever it might be." + +"Did he have a big yellow dog tied up at his shack?" asked Nuthin, +eagerly, as though he wished to settle that point, because the animal in +question had once belonged to the Cypher family. + +"Yes," answered Mr. Jameson, "but it got away from him one night, by +breaking the rope, and he's been making a great fuss about it ever since. +But from the ugly looks of the beast, I'd sooner put a bullet in him than +try to make friends." + +"Well, that about finishes the list of questions we've been nearly dying +to ask somebody," remarked Bobolink, "and seems like everything's been +explained. What we want to know now, and there isn't a livin' soul c'n +tell the answer to that, I reckon, is, how high is this old lake goin' to +get before she commences to fall again? And how in Sam Hill are we +expectin' to ride those motor-boats over that pile of rocks and mud, that +lies in the outlet? Anybody know the answer? I'd like to hear it." + +But they shook their heads. Nobody could say, although all sorts +of guesses ran the rounds, for the scouts were good hands at that +sort of thing. + +The water was still rising, and apparently just as fast as ever. Already +it had encroached upon the main part of the island; and Mr. Jameson +declared that he was sure it must be all around the shed where they kept +their machinery, that had been brought secretly to this isolated spot, +where they hoped to complete the greatest marvel in the way of sensations +ever known to curious crowds at watering places. + +"It'll be badly hurt, unless the water goes down soon," remarked the +big man; "but that doesn't seem to be the worst thing that can happen, +if what your Doctor Paul here, says, turns out to be true, and the +water goes out of the lake in a raging torrent that may drag boats and +all with it." + + + + +CHAPTER XXX + +GOOD-BYE TO CEDAR ISLAND + + +They passed a most anxious hour, after the coming of the professor and +his assistants. The lake kept on rising until pretty much all of the +island except the hill was under water. Of course the trees stood out, +but most of their roots were under ten feet or more of water. + +It would not last much longer, that they knew, for the supply must be +falling short, and besides there was always a chance that the fearful +force exerted by such a mass of pent-up water would break away the +obstruction that clogged the outlet. + +Paul had done everything he could think of to add to their security in +case the worst came. Some of the scouts were even perched in the +neighboring trees. These were the more timid, who Paul knew were +shivering from anxiety, and watching the spot where the lake water +ordinarily escaped, as though dreading lest at any second they should see +a sudden heave that would mean the beginning of the end. + +"Good news, Paul!" sang out Jud Elderkin, to whom had been delegated the +duty of keeping watch on the rise of the flood. "She's stationary at last +Never rose a bit the last ten minutes. And believe me, I honestly think +she's begun to go down just a little." + +The other boys let out a cheer at this news. That was what they were all +hoping for--that the water would go down gradually, so as not to endanger +the motorboats. + +Just how the craft were to get out of the lake, if the exit remained +closed, no one could say; but then they might look to Paul to open a way +somehow. He could make use of some dynamite to blow up the obstructions, +so Mr. Jameson had suggested, and it sounded all right. + +Five minutes later Jud was quite positive that the tide was on the ebb. + +"Two inches lower than she was at the highest point. Paul!" he called +out, jubilantly. + +"Hurrah! that sounds good to me!" exclaimed Bobolink, swinging his +campaign hat vigorously about his head, as he sat in the bow of the +_Comfort_, it being a part of his task to watch the cable, and if the +worst came to ease up on it so that there would be less likelihood of a +sudden snap. + +"But we're not out of danger yet, remember," cautioned the scout master. + +Presently the water was lowering at a still faster rate. + +"Looks like the opening might be getting larger," said Jack, when this +fact was made clear beyond any doubt. + +"Watch over there," said Paul, "and see if there's any sudden rush, +though already the water is escaping so fast that I begin to believe we +might hold on here, even if the whole pile of earth and rocks were washed +away, leaving the channel clear." + +Five, ten, fifteen minutes crept along, and all the while the water kept +going steadily down until much of the island could be seen again under +the trees. + +"Oh! look, there she goes!" cried Bobolink, without warning, and thereby +causing some of the fellows who had descended from the trees to wish they +were aloft again. + +Over in the vicinity of the outlet they could see something of a +commotion. The water seemed to be running down hill, as it struggled to +pour out through the now cleared passage. + +Immediately the boats felt the suction, which must have been very strong +indeed. They strained at their ropes, and those who had the cables in +charge obeyed the instructions given to them, allowing a certain length +of line to slip, thus easing the fearful drag. + +"Whoop! they're going to hold!" exclaimed Bobolink, in great glee. + +Paul believed so himself, and a smile came to his face that up to now had +looked careworn and anxious; for a dreadful catastrophe had been hovering +over them, he felt certain. + +And the ropes did make good, holding in spite of that fierce drag. The +water soon got down to about its normal level, when the pull upon the +hawsers ceased, and everything seemed to settle back into the old rut. + +But the boys had had quite enough of Cedar Island. It was water-soaked +now, and offered little attraction to them for camping. Paul suggested +that they leave the cove and head for a certain section of the main shore +which, on account of being much higher than the island, had not been +overflowed. + +There was not a single voice raised in opposition, and so they started +the motors and with a series of derisive sounds that seemed almost like +chuckles the boats said goodbye to Cedar Island. Landing they found a +splendid spot for the erection of the tents, and before the coming of +night the scouts were as snugly fixed as though nothing had happened to +disturb them. + +The injured professor declared that he meant to stick by Paul until his +messenger arrived with a carriage and a doctor by way of the road, which +ran only a half mile away from the lake. + +He expressed himself satisfied with the work Paul had done on his arm, +and believed it to be the right thing. + +They hoped to spend a quiet night. There would be no bomb explosions in +the heavens to disturb them, at least. Mr. Jameson had already +explained to the boys that, if they had happened to be awake at the +time of that first tremendous shock, they must have seen by the glare +in the heavens that it was a new kind of aerial bomb that had been +fired; and possibly under such conditions some one of the scouts would +have guessed the truth. But when they crept out of the tents there was +nothing to be seen aloft. + +Luckily, these wide-awake boys could accommodate themselves to their +surroundings. Their former experiences had made most of them +quickwitted, resolute and cheerful under difficulties that might have +daunted most lads. + +Although they had received a tremendous shock because of the numerous +remarkable occurrences that had taken place since their landing on Cedar +Island, now that their troubles seemed to have departed, most of the +scouts were just as full of life and good-natured "chaff" as ever. + +Bluff seemed to never tire of entertaining those who had not been +fortunate enough to be among the valiant band of explorers with +wonderful accounts of all they had seen. He had them holding their +very breath with awe, as he described, in his own way, how they first +of all crept up to the shack in the thicket and looked in upon the +wild man asleep. + +But when Bluff told of how he and his comrades had been warned off in +such a dramatic manner by the unknown man, and immediately afterwards +found themselves knocked down by that tremendous concussion, as the +explosion took place, he had them hanging on his every sentence. + +But words failed Bluff when he tried to picture the wild scene that had +followed. That furious scamper through the wooded part of the island must +remain pretty much in the nature of a nightmare with the boys. + +Phil and Bobolink and Andy all eagerly chimed in, trying to do the +subject justice, but after all it seemed beyond their powers. They could +only end by holding up both hands, rolling their eyes, shrugging their +shoulders, and then mutely pointing to the various cuts, scratches and +contusions that decorated their faces. The rest had to be left to the +imagination. + +Fortunately there was an abundance of witch hazel ointment along, so that +every sufferer was able to anoint his hurts. The whole bunch seemed to +fairly _glisten_ from the time of their arrival at the boats. Indeed, +there never had been such a wholesale raid made upon the medical +department since the Stanhope Troup of Banner Boy Scouts was organized. + +But after all was said and done they had come out of the whole affair at +least with honor. And now that the peril was a thing of the past they +could well afford to laugh at their adventures on Cedar Island. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI + +A SCOUT'S DUTY + + +"Seems like a dream; don't it, Paul?" + +Jack dropped down beside the acting scout master as he made this +remark. He had just stepped out from the new camp on the mainland, and +found Paul sitting upon a log, looking across the water in the +direction they had come. + +The sun was just setting, and a rosy flush filled the western heavens. It +seemed to fall softly upon mysterious Cedar Island, nestling there in the +midst of the now tranquil waters. + +Paul looked up with a smile, as he made room on the log for his chum, who +had always been so willing to stand by him through thick and thin. + +"Well, do you know, Jack," he spoke, "that was just exactly what seemed +to strike me. I was staring hard at the island, and wondering if I had +been asleep and dreamed all those queer happenings. Fact is, just before +you spoke I even pinched my leg to see if I was really wide awake." + +The other laughed at this. + +"Oh! you're awake, all right, Paul," he remarked. "You seemed to get off +without any show of damage to your good-looking face. As for the rest of +us, if ever we begin to think we've been and dreamed it, we've got a +remedy better than pinching. All we have to do is to bend down over a +still pool of water and take a look at our faces. That'll convince us in +a hurry we _did_ have a lively time of it." + +Paul pointed across the lake to where the island lay bathed in that +wonderful afterglow that shone from the painted heavens. + +"Did you ever see a prettier sight?" he asked. "It looks as peaceful as +any picture could be. You wouldn't think a bunch of fellows could run up +against such a lot of trouble over on such a fine little place as Cedar +Island; would you, now?" + +"I feel the same way you do, Paul; and I'd say we never ought to have +left it, only after the flood it'd be a muddy place, and we wouldn't take +any pleasure getting around." + +"Oh! well," Paul rejoined cheerfully, "after all, perhaps it isn't our +last visit up this way. Who knows but what we may have another chance to +come over here and look around. It was a good scheme, I'm thinking, Jack, +and we'll never be sorry we came." + +"I should say not," remarked the other, quickly; "just turn around and +take a look back into our camp. See where Professor Hackett is lying +propped up with pillows from the boats. Well, suppose we'd never come +over this way, what d'ye think would have happened to him? He says he +owes his life to your skill, Paul, and that, try as they would, Mr. +Jameson and the other assistants couldn't seem to stop the bleeding. That +alone pays us for all we've gone through, Paul." + +"I guess it does," Paul admitted, readily, "because he's a smart man, and +has done a lot to entertain the crowds that go to the seashore to rest +and forget their troubles. But I'm glad none of the boys seem to have +suffered any serious damage from the effect of the explosion or that mad +chase afterwards." + +"Yes, we ought to call ourselves lucky, and let it go at that," +Jack remarked. + +"When you think about all that might have happened, I tell you we've got +lots of reason to be thankful," Paul went on, with considerable feeling. + +"Sure we have," added Jack. "Instead of that stick taking me in the +cheek, it might have struck my eye and injured my sight for life." + +"And where I got only a wrench that may make me limp a little for a few +days, I could have broken a leg," said Paul. + +"That's one of the rules scouts have to keep in mind, you know," Jack +continued; "always be cheerful and look on the bright side of things. I +reckon there never comes a time when you can't find a rainbow of promise +if you look far enough. Things are never as bad as they might be." + +"The boys seem to have settled down here just as if they meant to enjoy +the rest of the stay," Paul observed, as he turned his head again, so as +to look at the bustling camp close by. + +"Yes, and even the very air seems to tell of peace and plenty," said +Jack, with a little laugh, as he sniffed the appetizing odors that were +beginning to announce that preparations for the evening meal had started. + +"You're right," agreed Paul, "I guess there's nothing more 'homey' than +the smell of onions frying. I never get a whiff of it on the street of a +winter evening but what I seem to see some of the camps I've been in. And +then, just think how it gets your appetite on edge, till you can hardly +wait for the cook to call out that supper's ready. But I was thinking of +some other things when you came up." + +"I reckon I could mention one of them," said Jack. + +"Let's hear, then," the other demanded. + +Jack swept his hand down the lake in the direction of the outlet. + +"You're worrying about that," he said. + +"Well, that's just about the size of it, Jack. We know the lake's gone +down to about what it was before the storm hit us; but what if a great +big rock blocks the passage?" + +"You know what Mr. Jameson said you could do?" Jack remarked. + +"About the dynamite, to blast an opening big enough for our boats to get +through? Yes, Jack, I suppose that could be done." + +"And he says he'll stand by to see that it _is_ done," the other +continued. "As Mr. Jameson is an expert at all sorts of explosives, you +can just make up your mind we'll have no trouble getting away. Besides, +Paul, I've got a feeling that when we go down in the morning to take a +survey, we'll be more than pleased with the way things look." + +"Which all sounds good to me," Paul hastened to declare. "Anyhow, I'm +going to believe it's bound to turn out as you say. In spite of our +troubles we've been a pretty lucky lot." + +"But you talked as though the getting away part of the business was only +a part of what you had on your mind," Jack went on. + +"There was something else," the other scout admitted. + +"Suppose you open up and tell me, Paul; because somehow I don't seem to +be able to get what you mean." + +"It seems to me," the patrol leader remarked, seriously, "that while all +of us scouts, and the professor's party in the bargain, have been shaking +hands with each other over the lucky escape we had, we've pretty near +forgotten one poor chap." + +Jack gave a start, and then whistled softly. + +"That's right, Paul," he said, "for I take it you mean the crazy +islander." + +"How do we know what happened to him?" Paul continued. + +"But Mr. Jameson seemed to feel sure he would take to the hill when the +flood came," Jack replied. "And he also told us, you remember, that some +of their food was at a higher point than the water could have reached. +So, if the crazy man wanders about that camp, there's no need of his +going hungry long." + +"I guess that's about so," Paul agreed, as though these words from his +chum took away some of his anxiety. "From what they say, it seems as if +he has come to look on them as friends. So, chances are ten to one he'd +go to their different camps after the flood went down." + +"Queer how he came to be here," Jack remarked. + +"Oh, I don't know," the other observed; "there's no telling what a crazy +person will do. His coming to this island must have been with the hazy +notion that any one searching for him couldn't find him here." + +"Searching for him, Paul?" + +"Well, you remember Mr. Jameson said he had an idea the poor fellow must +have escaped from some institution," Jack continued. + +"Yes, he did say that; and for all he looks so big and fierce, with his +long hair and beard, he's harmless. But, Jack, between us now, do you +think we could go back home when our little vacation trip is over and +feel that we'd done _all_ our duty as true scouts, when that poor chap +had been left up here--perhaps to starve on Cedar Island?" + +"Whew! You're the greatest boy I ever saw, Paul, to get a grip on a +situation and remember things." + +"But--answer my question," persisted the other. + +"Well, what you said must be so," Jack acknowledged; "and it makes me +feel pretty small to remember that, while we've all been feeling so merry +over our wonderful escape, I'd forgotten all about _him_." + +"Jack, it's too late to do anything tonight, you know." + +"I reckon it is, Paul," replied the other, looking a bit anxiously across +the water to where the glow was commencing to give way to shadows along +the wooded shore of Cedar Island; "but if you thought best, I'd be +willing to take the lantern and cross over with you." + +Paul thrust out his hand impulsively. + +"Shake on that, old chum," he exclaimed. "Your heart's as big as a bushel +basket, and in the right place every time. But on the whole, Jack, I +don't believe it would be the wise thing for us to do." + +"Just as you say, Paul; only I wanted you to know I was ready to back you +up in anything." + +"We're both tired, and sore in the bargain," continued the scout +master, steadily. + +"Yes," Jack admitted, unconsciously caressing his painful bruises. + +"The island is in a bad state just now, after being flooded," Paul +continued. + +"That's right, I can jolly well believe it," his chum agreed. + +"And if the wild man hasn't been drowned, he'll surely be able to look +out for himself a while longer. Mr. Jameson felt sure he wouldn't starve, +with all the food they left behind." + +"Then it won't hurt to let it go till tomorrow, eh, Paul?" + +"I had made up my mind that we'd organize another party, this time taking +some of the fellows who have been kept in camp, and comb Cedar Island +from end to end to find that man." + +"A good plan, Paul," said the other scout; "but do you think he'll make +friends with us, even when we find him?" + +"Mr. Jameson says he understands the peace sign," the scout master +continued, "and must really have had a bright mind at some time. He told +me he had an idea the man may have met with some injury that had +unsettled his reason. He seemed to be greatly interested in all they were +doing, and several times even made suggestions that startled the +professor." + +"I remember that much, too," said Jack, "and Mr. Jameson also said he +meant to try and learn if anybody knew about a John Pennington. That was +the name the man spoke once in his rambling talk." + +"Well, perhaps we may be able in some way to do the poor fellow a good +turn, Jack. I hope so, anyhow. My! how those boys are trying to beat the +record at getting up a grand supper. Seems to me my appetite is growing +at the rate of a mile a minute." + +"If it keeps on that way, good-bye to our stock of provisions," laughed +Jack; "but, to tell the truth, I feel pretty much the same. The most +welcome sound I could hear right now would be Bluff calling everybody to +get a share of that fine mess." + +"Then you won't have to wait long, I guess," his chum declared, +"because from all the signs of dishing out I imagine they're about ready +right now." + +Paul proved a true prophet, for immediately Bluff began to ding-dong upon +a sheet iron frying pan, using a big spoon to produce a discord that, in +the ears of the hungry boys, was the sweetest music in the world. + +Gathering around, the scouts made a merry group as they proceeded to +demolish the stacks of savory food that had been heaped upon their tin +plates; and drink to each other's health in the fragrant coffee that +steamed in the generous cups, also of tin, belonging to their mess chest. + +After supper the scouts sat around, and while some of them worked at +various things in which they were particularly interested, such as +developing the films that would give a dozen views of the great flood, +others sang songs or listened to Mr. Jameson tell strange stories. + +The man had been to the corners of the world during a busy lifetime, +often with scientific parties sent out by societies interested in +geography, natural history or astronomy. And hence it had fallen to the +lot of Mr. Jameson to experience some remarkable adventures. The boys +felt that he was the most interesting talker they had ever met. + +After several hours had slipped by, some of the scouts, notably those +who had been among the bold explorers band, were discovered to be nodding +drowsily. Indeed, Andy and Tom Betts had gone sound asleep, just as they +lay curled up before the fire. The warmth of the blaze, together with the +unusual exertions of the day, had been too much for the boys. + +And so the bugler was told to sound "taps" to signify that it was time +they crawled under their blankets. + +A few chose to sleep aboard the motor boats, which, of course, relieved +the tents from overcrowding. Professor Hackett and his assistants had +been lodged in one of the tents, which fact had something to do with the +lack of room. + +But presently all these things had been arranged. Paul himself intended +to pass the night in the open. He declared he would really enjoy the +experience; and two others insisted on keeping him company--little Nuthin +and Bobolink. + +So Paul, who knew a lot about these things, showed them just how to wrap +themselves up like mummies in their blankets, and then lie with their +feet to the fire. He said old hunters and cowboys always slept that way +when camping in the open. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXII + +CONCLUSION + + +Paul was awakened by feeling something nudging him in the ribs. It was +Bobolink's elbow; and, thinking at first that it might be an accident, +the scout master made no move. + +But again he received a severe jolt. And at the same time came a whisper +close in his ear: + +"Paul! Are you awake?" Bobolink was saying, so low that any one six feet +away could not have heard his voice. + +"What ails you?" asked Paul. + +He might have imagined that the other had been taken ill, from over +feeding, perhaps, and wanted Paul, as the doctor of the troop, to give +him some medicine. But on second thought Paul realized that there was too +much mystery about the action of Bobolink to admit of such an +explanation. + +"Listen, Paul," the other went on, still whispering, "there's some sort +of wild beast goin' to raid the camp!" + +"What's that?" asked the scout master, a little sternly, for, knowing +the weakness of Bobolink in the line of practical joking, he suspected +that the other might be up to some of his old tricks. + +And Bobolink must have detected an air of doubt in the manner in which +Paul spoke those two words, for he immediately resumed: + +"Honest Injun, Paul, I ain't foolin'! Say, do they have panthers around +here? Because that's what I think it must be." + +"Where'd you see it?" + +As Paul put this question he was working his arms free from the folds of +his blanket. When he lay down, more through force of habit than because +he thought there would be any need of such a thing, Paul had placed his +shotgun on the ground beside him. And no sooner was his right hand at +liberty than, groping around, he took possession of it. + +"Up in that big oak tree," Bobolink went on. "You watch where that limb +hangs out over the camp and you'll see somethin' move; or I've been +dreamin', that's all." + +Paul did not have to twist his head very far around in order to see the +spot in question. He watched it as the seconds began to troop along, +until almost a fell minute had gone. + +And Paul was just about to believe Bobolink must have been dreaming, when +he, too, saw the bunch of leaves violently agitated. + +Undoubtedly some tree-climbing animal was up there. Paul felt a thrill +pass through him. Unconsciously, perhaps, his fingers tightened their +grip upon the shotgun, which was apt to prove a tower of strength in case +the worst that could happen came to pass. + +Straining his eyes, as he partly lifted his head, Paul believed he could +just make out a shadowy form stretched upon the large oak limb. + +He was more than puzzled. + +Wild animals were not altogether unknown within the twenty-mile limit +around Stanhope. A bear might be seen occasionally--or at least the +tracks of one, for the timid beast knew enough to hide in the daytime in +one of the numerous swamps. + +But this did not seem large enough for a bear, which would have surely +made a more bulky object clinging to the limb. Moreover, bears were not +reckoned bold, and no hunter had ever known one to come spying around a +camp. As soon as the trail of human beings is run across by a bear, the +animal always takes the alarm and hastens to its den, to lie low until +the danger has passed. + +But Bobolink had mentioned the magic word "panther," and this caused the +other aroused scout to look more closely at the dimly seen object Sure +enough it did seem to be flattened out on the limb, much as Paul +imagined a big cat might lie. + +"What'd we better do about it, Paul--give a yell and jump up?" Bobolink +asked, his voice quivering, perhaps with excitement, or it might be under +stress of alarm; for it was not the nicest thing in the world to be lying +there helpless with a hungry panther crouching above. + +"Wait, and let's make sure," replied the careful Paul. + +Some impetuous boys would have thought, the very first thing, of bringing +that double-barrelled gun to bear on the dark, shadowy figure, and +cutting loose, perhaps even firing both charges at once. + +At such close range, less than thirty feet, a shell containing even bird +shot is apt to be projected with all the destructive qualities of a large +bullet. Paul knew all about this, and also had faith in the hard-hitting +qualities of his long tested gun; but he was not the one to be tempted +into any rash action. + +"Be sure you're right; then go ahead," was a motto which Paul always +tried to practice. He had certainly found it worth while on more than one +occasion in the past, and it was likely to serve him well now. + +And so he waited, ready for a sudden emergency, but not allowing himself +to be hurried. + +He soon had reason to feel very thankful that his good sense had +prevailed, for presently the leaves were again set to shaking and, as +they parted, Paul saw something that gave him a shock. + +"Oh! what d'ye think of that, now? It's the wild man of Cedar Island!" +gasped Bobolink, actually sitting up in his excitement. + +And Paul had already made certain of this fact as soon as his eyes +fell upon the hairy face seen among the branches. The shudder that +passed through his frame had nothing to do with fear. Paul was only +horrified to realize what might have happened had he taken Bobolink's +suggestion for the truth, and fully believed the figure in the oak to +be a savage panther. + +"We'd better let Mr. Jameson know," Paul remarked, as he also sat up and +cleared his legs of the blanket. + +"Yes, he'll know how to get him down. I bet you, Paul, the feller went +and swam across from the island. But how would he guess we were here?" + +"Oh! he could see the boats in the day time; and don't forget we've had a +fire burning all night, so far," said the scout master. + +When Mr. Jameson came out of the tent, in answer to Paul's low summons, +and learned what had happened, he readily agreed to influence the wild +man to come down. The poor fellow had learned to look on Mr. Jameson as +a friend, and, realizing that he had abandoned the island, doubtless it +was his desire to see him again that had induced this visit. + +He proved to be harmless, and upon being given food ate ravenously. Later +on it was discovered that he had launched a log and made his way to the +mainland by means of this crude craft, with a branch for a paddle. + +Mr. Jameson declared that he would take the stranger to Stanhope when the +vehicle came for the professor, and do all in his power to learn just who +he was, as well as get him safely back among his friends. + +To dispose of the wild man of Cedar Island once and for all, it might be +said right here that Mr. Jameson kept his word. The name John Pennington +served as a clue, and in the end he learned that was his name. He had +lost his mind through an accident and, though his case was deemed +hopeless, occasionally he was apt to have little flashes of his former +cleverness. He was returned to the sanitarium from which he had escaped, +and the boys never heard of him again. But the memory of the wild man +would always be associated with Cedar Island. + +On the following day Paul and Jack managed to get around to the outlet, +for the scout master was anxious to learn what the chances of their +leaving the lake, when they were ready, might be. + +They found that, just as had been believed that shoulder of rock and +earth had been shaken loose by the tremor of the earth at the time of the +big shock, when the professor was experimenting with some new explosive. + +In falling, it had indeed dammed the outlet, and the storm coming so soon +after, of course the water in the lake had risen at a frightful rate. In +the end the obstruction had commenced to disappear; but luckily for all +concerned, it had held fairly well until much of the water had escaped, +when finally it had given way. + +The channel was as good as ever; indeed, Paul seemed to think that +it offered fewer impediments to a passage now than before all this +had happened. + +That eased the minds of the scouts, and they could go back again to their +camp with good news for the others. + +A carriage came that day for the professor, and his assistants managed to +carry him across country to the road; just as they had undoubtedly done +the two big boxes of material that came from Mr. Stormways' mill that +other day. + +He shook hands with each and every scout before leaving, and promised to +remember them always for what they had done. When he came to Paul, he +clung to his hand, and there were tears in the eyes of the little +professor as he, said: + +"I honestly believe that you saved my life, my boy, and I trust that +through your ability I may be spared a few more years. And depend on it, +I'm never going to let you get out of touch with me, Paul Morrison. I +hope to live to see you a great surgeon, some day." + +The scouts filled out the balance of their vacation at the lake, and +considered that they had had some of the strangest experiences that could +happen to a group of boys; but although at the time they could not +suspect it, there were still more interesting things in store for Paul +and his comrades of Stanhope Troop of Boy Scouts. What these were, you +will find related in the next volume of this series, to be called, "The +Banner Boy Scouts Snowbound; Or, A Tour on Skates and Iceboats." + +When the time came for them to start back, it was with more or less +anxiety that they came to the canal connecting the waters of the two +rivers flowing parallel for a few miles, and only a short distance apart. + +But they need not have borrowed trouble, for the Bushkill was still +higher than usual at this season of the year and all through the +disused canal they found plenty of water, so that neither of the boats +stuck in the mud. + +In good time, then, the Banner Boy Scouts arrived home, to thrill the +lads who had not been fortunate enough to accompany them on their trip +afloat, with wonderful accounts of all the remarkable things which had +happened to them while in camp on Cedar Island. + + + + + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's The Banner Boy Scouts Afloat, by George A. Warren + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT *** + +***** This file should be named 9948.txt or 9948.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/9/9/4/9948/ + +Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Mary Meehan, and the Project +Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/9948.zip b/9948.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..018e140 --- /dev/null +++ b/9948.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2a50ef9 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #9948 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/9948) diff --git a/old/bbsca10.txt b/old/bbsca10.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e96f1b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/bbsca10.txt @@ -0,0 +1,7956 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Banner Boy Scouts Afloat , by George A. Warren + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: The Banner Boy Scouts Afloat + +Author: George A. Warren + +Release Date: February, 2006 [EBook #9948] +[This file was first posted on November 3, 2003] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: US-ASCII + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT *** + + + + +E-text prepared by Juliet Sutherland, Mary Meehan, and the Project Gutenberg +Online Distributed Proofreading Team + + + + + + + +The Banner Boy Scouts Afloat + +OR + +The Secret of Cedar Island + +By GEORGE A. WARREN + +1913 + + + + + + + +CONTENTS + +CHAPTER + + + I THE MYSTERIOUS BOXES + + II GLORIOUS NEWS + + III FOR CEDAR ISLAND--GHOST OR NO GHOST + + IV LAYING IN THE STORES + + V JUST AFTER THE CLOCK STRUCK TEN + + VI THE GREAT CRUISE OF THE SCOUTS BEGUN + + VII STUCK FAST IN THE MUD + + VIII WHAT THE WATER GAUGE SHOWED + + IX ON THE SWIFT RADWAY + + X DODGING THE SNAGS AND THE SNARES + + XI THE CAMP ON CEDAR ISLAND + + XII WAS IT A BURSTING METEOR? + + XIII THE FOOTPRINTS IN THE SAND + + XIV TRYING TO FIGURE IT ALL OUT + + XV ORDERED OFF + + XVI UNDER COVER OF DARKNESS + + XVII PITCHING TENTS IN THE "SINK" + + XVIII WHAT LAY IN THE BRUSH + + XIX LAYING PLANS + + XX THE EXPLORING PARTY + + XXI A MYSTERY OF THE OPEN GLADE + + XXII THE WIGWAG MESSAGE + + XXIII STILL FLOUNDERING IN THE MIRE + + XXIV THE DISCOVERY + + XXV TIME TO GO BACK + + XXVI HONORABLE SCARS + + XXVII ANOTHER THREATENING PERIL + +XXVIII PREPARED FOR THE WORST + + XXIX LIFTING THE LID + + XXX GOOD-BYE TO CEDAR ISLAND + + XXXI A SCOUT'S DUTY + + XXXII CONCLUSION + + + + +PREFACE + + +Dear Boys:-- + +It is with the greatest pleasure that I present you with the third volume +of the "Banner Boy Scouts Series." This is a complete story in itself; +and yet most of the leading characters you, who have already read the +first and second volumes, will easily remember. I trust you will heartily +welcome the appearance once more on the stage of Paul, Jack, Bobolink and +all the other good fellows belonging to Stanhope Troop of Boy Scouts. + +Those of you who are old friends will recollect that while the Red Fox +Patrol was forming, the boys had a most strenuous time, what with a deep +mystery in their midst, and the bitter strife resulting from their +competition with rival troops belonging to neighboring towns. How the +beautiful banner was cleverly won by Stanhope, I related in the first +volume, called: "The Banner Boy Scouts." + +In the succeeding story the Stanhope Scouts went on their first long +hike, to camp in the open. The remarkable adventures they met with +while enjoying this experience; as well as the stirring account of how +they recovered a box of valuable papers that had been stolen from the +office of Joe Clausin's father, form the main theme of "The Banner Boy +Scouts on a Tour." + +And now, in this third book, I have endeavored to interest you in another +series of happenings that befell these wide-awake boys before their +summer vacation was over. I hope you will, after reading this story +through to the last line, agree with me that what the young assistant +scout master, Paul Morrison, and his chums of Stanhope Troop endured +while afloat all went to make them better and truer scouts in every sense +of the word. + +Cordially yours + +GEORGE A. WARREN. + + + + + +CHAPTER I + +THE MYSTERIOUS BOXES + + +"What are you limping for, Bobolink?" + +"Oh! shucks! I see there's no use trying to hide anything from your sharp +eyes, Jack Stormways. Guess I just about walked my feet off today, goin' +fishin' with our patrol leader, away over to the Radway River, and about +six miles up." + +"Have any luck, Bobolink?" instantly demanded the third member of the +group of three half-grown boys, who were passing after nightfall through +some of the partly deserted streets on the outskirts of the thriving town +of Stanhope; and whose name it might be stated was Tom Betts. + +"Well, I should say, yes. Between us we got seven fine bass, and a +pickerel. By the way, I caught that pickerel; Paul, he looked after the +bass end of the string, and like the bully chap he is divided with me;" +and the boy who limped chuckled as he said this, showing that he could +appreciate a joke, even when it was on himself. + +About everybody in town called him Bobolink; and what boy could do +otherwise, seeing that his real name was Robert O. Link? + +As the trio of lads were all dressed in the khaki suits known all over +the world nowadays as typifying Boy Scouts, it could be readily taken for +granted that they belonged to the Stanhope Troop. + +Already were there three full patrols enlisted, and wearing uniforms; +while a fourth was in process of forming. The ones already in the field +were known as, first, the Red Fox, to which these three lads belonged; +then the Gray Fox, and finally the Black Fox. But as they had about +exhausted the color roster of the fox family, the chances were that the +next patrol would have to start on a new line when casting about for a +name that would stamp their identity, and serve as a totem. + +An efficient scout master had been secured in the person of a young man +by the name of Mr. Gordon, who cheerfully accompanied the lads on their +outings, and attended many of their meetings. But being a traveling +salesman, Mr. Gordon often had to be away from home for weeks at a time. + +When these lapses occurred, his duties fell upon the shoulders of Paul +Morrison, who not only filled the position of leader to the Red Fox +Patrol, but being a first-class scout, had received his commission from +Headquarters that entitled him to act as assistant scout master to the +whole troop during the absence of Mr. Gordon. + +"How did you like it up on the Radway?" continued the one who had made +the first inquiry, Jack Stormways, whose father owned a lumber yard and +planing mill just outside the limits of the town, which was really the +goal of their present after-supper walk. + +"Great place, all right," replied Bobolink. "Paul kept calling my +attention to all the things worth seeing. He seems to think a heap of the +old Radway. For my part, I rather fancy our own tight little river, the +Bushkill." + +"Well, d'ye know, that's one reason I asked how you liked it," Jack went +on. "Paul seemed so much taken with that region over there, I've begun to +get a notion in my head he's fixing a big surprise, and that perhaps at +the meeting to-night he may spring it on us." + +"Tell me about that, will you?" exclaimed Bobolink, who was given to +certain harmless slang ways whenever he became in the least excited, as +at present. "Now that you've been and gone and given me a pointer, I c'n +just begin to get a line on a few of the questions he asked me. Well, +I'm willing to leave it to Paul. He always thinks of the whole shooting +match when trying to give the troop a bully good time. Just remember +what we went through with when we camped out up on Rattlesnake Mountain, +will you?" + +"That's right," declared Tom Betts, eagerly; "say, didn't we have the +time of our lives, though?" + +"And yet Paul said only today that as we had so long a time before +vacation ends this year, a chance might pop up for another trip," +Bobolink remarked, significantly. + +"Did, eh? Well, don't that go to prove what I said; and you just wait +till we get back to the meeting room in the church. Paul's just bursting +with some sort of secret, and I reckon he'll just have to tell us +to-night," and Jack laughed good-naturedly as he still led his two +comrades on toward the retired lane, where his father's big mill adjoined +the storage place for lumber; convenient to the river, and at the same +time near the railroad, so that a spur track could enter the yard. + +Besides these three boys five others constituted the Red Fox Patrol of +Stanhope Troop. In the first story of this series, which appeared under +the name of "The Banner Boy Scouts; Or, The Struggle for Leadership," +the reader was told about the formation of the Red Fox Patrol, and how +some of the boys learned a lesson in scout methods of returning good for +evil; also how a cross old farmer was taught that he owed a duty to the +community in which he lived, as well as to himself. In that story it was +also disclosed how a resident of the town offered a beautiful banner to +that troop which excelled in an open tournament also participated in by +two other troops of Boy Scouts from the towns of Aldine and Manchester; +the former on the east bank of the Bushkill, about six miles up-stream, +and the latter a bustling manufacturing place about seven miles down, and +also on the same bank as Aldine. + +In this competition, after a lively duel between the three wide awake +troops, Stanhope won handsomely; and had therefore been given the banner, +which Wallace Carberry proudly carried at the head of the procession +whenever they paraded. + +The second book, "The Banner Boy Scouts on a Tour; Or, The Mystery of +Rattlesnake Mountain," was given over almost exclusively to descriptions +of the wonderful things that came to pass when Stanhope Troop spent a +part of their vacation camping out in order that those who were backward +in their knowledge of how to take care of themselves when in the open +should have a good chance to learn many of the secrets of Nature. + +So many strange things happened to the boys when up on Rattlesnake +Mountain that it would be utterly impossible to even mention them here; +but if you wish to know all about the mystery they solved, and the +numerous other exciting events that befell them, you must get the +second volume. + +There was to be a special meeting, which the acting scout master had +called for this evening; and Bobolink, Jack, and Tom Betts expected to +be back from their errand in time to answer to their names when the roll +was called. + +It was only to oblige Jack that the other two had left home half an hour +earlier than was really necessary. Jack had asked them, over the +telephone, to drop around, as he had to go out to his father's mill +before he could attend the meeting in the church, where a room in the +basement had been kindly loaned to them by the trustees. + +"What's all this mean about you going to the mill at this queer old +hour?" Bobolink was saying, as the three boys continued to walk on +abreast, the speaker carrying the silver-plated bugle which he knew how +to manipulate so well when the occasion allowed its use. + +"Why, you see it's this way," Jack went on to explain. "My father knows a +man of the name of Professor Hackett, though what he's a professor of +you needn't ask me, because I don't know. But he's a bright little +gentleman, all right; and somehow or other he looks like he's just cram +full of some secret that's trying to break out all over him." + +Bobolink laughed aloud. + +"Well, that's a funny description you give of the gentleman, I must say, +Jack; but go on--what's he got to do with our making this trip to the big +mill tonight?" + +"I just guess it's got everything to do with it," replied the other. "You +see, the professor had a number of big cases sent up here on the train, +and they came today, and were taken to the mill; for my father promised +to keep them there a couple of days until the owner could take them away. +What under the sun's in those big boxes I couldn't tell you from Adam; +all I know is that he seems to be mighty much afraid somebody's going to +steal them." + +"Wow! and are we going there to stand guard over the blooming old +things?" exclaimed Bobolink in dismay; for he would not want to miss that +special meeting for anything. + +"Oh! not quite so bad as that," answered Jack, with a laugh. "But you +see, that professor wrote my father that he wanted him to hire a trusty +man who would stay in the mill over night until he could get up here +from New York and take the boxes away, somewhere or other." + +"Oh, that's it, eh? And where do we find the guardian of the treasure? Is +he going to bob up on the road to the mill?" Tom Betts demanded. + +"He promised father to be on deck at seven-thirty, and it'll be close on +that by the time we get there, I reckon," Jack continued. + +"And what have you got to do about it?" asked Bobolink. + +"Let him in, and lock the door after he's on duty," replied Jack, +promptly. "You see, ever since that attempt was made to burn the mill, +when those hoboes, or yeggs, thought they'd find money in the safe, and +had their trouble for their pains, my father has been mighty careful how +he leaves the office unfastened. He couldn't see this man, Hans Waggoner, +who used to work for us, but talked with him over the 'phone, and told +him I'd be there to meet him, and let him in. That's all there is to it, +boys, believe me." + +"Only, you don't know what's in those boxes, and you'd give a cookie to +find out?" suggested Bobolink. + +"It isn't so bad as that," replied the other. "Of course I'm a little +curious about what they might hold, that they have to be specially +guarded; but I guess it's none of my business, and I'm not going to +monkey around, trying to find out." + +"Say, d'ye suppose your dad knows?" asked Tom. + +"Sure he must," came from Jack, instantly. "He'd be silly to let anybody +store a lot of cases that might hold dynamite, or any other old +explosive, in his planing mill, without knowing all about 'em; wouldn't +he? But my father don't think it's any of my affair, you see. And +besides, I wouldn't be surprised if that funny little professor had bound +him not to tell anybody about it. They got the boxes in on the sly, and +that's a fact, boys." + +"Oh! splash! now you've got me worked up with guessing, and I'll never be +able to sleep till I know all about it," grumbled Bobolink. + +"You're just as curious as any old woman I ever heard of," declared Jack. + +"He always was," said Tom Betts, with a chuckle, "and I could string off +more'n a few times when that same curiosity hauled Bobolink into a peck +of trouble. But p'raps your father might let out the secret to you, after +the old boxes have been taken away, and then you can ease his mind. +Because it's just like he says, and he'll keep on dreamin' the most +wonderful things about those cases you ever heard tell about. That +imagination of Bobolink is something awful." + +"Huh!" grunted the one under discussion, "not much worse than some +others I know about right now; only they c'n keep a tight grip on +theirs, and I'm that simple I just have to blurt everything out. Both of +you fellers'd like to know nearly as much as I would, what that +mysterious little old man has got hid away in those big cases. Of course +you would. But you jump on the lid, and hold it down. It gets away with +me; that's all." + +"All the same, it's mighty good of you fellows, coming all the way out +here with me tonight; and even when Bobolink's got a stone bruise on his +heel, or something like that," Jack went on to say, with a vein of +sincere affection in his voice; for the boys making up the Red Fox Patrol +of Stanhope Troop were very fond of each other. + +"Oh! rats! what's the good of being a scout if you can't do a comrade a +little favor once in a while?" asked Bobolink, impetuously. "But there's +the mill looming up ahead, Jack, in the dark. Half a moon don't give a +whole lot of light, now, does it; and especially when it's a cloudy night +in the bargain?" + +"Well, I declare!" exclaimed Jack. + +"What is it; did you see anything?" demanded Tom Betts, hastily. + +"I'm not dead sure," admitted Jack; "you see, just as Bobolink said, the +light's mighty poor, and a fellow could easily be mistaken; but I +thought I saw something that looked like a tall man scuttle away around +that corner of the mill, and dodge behind that pile of lumber!" + +"Whew!" ejaculated Bobolink, showing the utmost interest, for excitement +appealed to him. + +"Say, perhaps Hans has arrived ahead of the half hour," suggested +Tom Betts. + +"No, it wasn't Hans, because I know him well, and he's a little runt of a +Dutchman, but a fighter from the word go; and my father knows nobody's +going to get away with those boxes of the professor while Hans and his +musket, that was used in the Civil War, are on guard. That was a tall +man, and he ran like he'd just heard us coming, and wanted to hide. I +guess somebody else is curious about those boxes, besides Bobolink." + + + + +CHAPTER II + +GLORIOUS NEWS + + +"Look! there he goes scooting away over past that other pile of lumber!" +said Tom Betts, pointing as he spoke; and both the others caught a +glimpse of a dim figure that was bending over while hurrying away, as if +anxious not to be seen. + +"Well, what d'ye think of the nerve of that?" ejaculated Bobolink, making +a move as though in his impetuous way he was sorely tempted to chase +after the disappearing figure of the unknown; only that the more cautious +Jack threw out a hand, and caught hold of his sleeve. + +"Never mind him, boys," remarked the son of the lumber man. "Perhaps it +was only a tramp from the railroad, after all, meaning to find a place to +sleep among the lumber piles. But I'm going to tell my father about it, +all the same. Seems to me he ought to have some one like Hans stay here +every night. Some of those hoboes will set fire to things, either by +accident, or because they are mad at the town for not handing enough good +things out to suit their appetites." + +They walked on, and in another minute were at the office door. There they +sat down on the stoop to rest and talk; but only a few minutes had passed +when they heard the sound of approaching footsteps; and a small but very +erect figure appeared, carrying an old-fashioned musket of the vintage of +'61 over his shoulder. + +"Hello! Hans, on time all right, I see!" called out Jack. + +"Dot is me, I dells you, every time. I am punctuality idself. I sets me +der clock, undt figure dot all oudt, so I haf yust der time to valk here. +Der sooner you obens der door, Misder Jack, der sooner I pe on der chob," +was the reply of the little man who had been hired to watch the mill, and +those strange boxes, during the night. + +Evidently Hans was "strictly business." He had been hired to watch, and +he wanted to be earning his wages as quickly as possible. + +So Jack used his key, and the four entered the office. It was quite a +good-sized room. The windows were covered with heavy wire netting, and it +seemed strong enough to resist any ordinary degree of force. After that +attempt to rob his safe, Mr. Stormways had taken precautions against a +similar raid. + +The watchman also carried a lantern, which he now lighted. No sooner had +this been done than Bobolink uttered an exclamation. + +"I reckon now, Jack, that these three big boxes are the ones the +professor wants watched?" he observed, pointing as he spoke to several +cumbersome cases that stood in a group, occupying considerable space. + +Tom Betts, also looking, saw that they were unusually well fastened. In +addition to the ordinary nailing, they were bound along the edges with +heavy twisted wire, through which frequent nails had been driven. When +they came to be opened, the job would prove no easy one. + +"Yes, those are the ones; and Hans is to spend most all his time right +here in the office," Jack went on to say. "I'm going to ask my father if +he ought not to hire you to be night watchman right along, Hans. This +plant of ours is getting too big a thing to leave unguarded, with so many +tramps coming along the road in the good old summer time. I suppose you'd +like the job, all right?" + +"Sure," replied the bustling little man, his eyes sparkling. "I always +did enchoy vorkin' for Misder Stormways. Undt it habbens dot yust now I +am oudt off a chob. Dot vill pe allright. I hopes me idt turns out so. +Undt now, off you like, you could lock der door some. I stay me here +till somepody gomes der mornin' py." + +"Oh! you keep the key, Hans," replied Jack. "You might want to chase out +after some one; but father told me to warn you not to be tempted to go +far away. You see, he's storing these cases for a friend, and it seems +that somebody wants to either get at 'em, or steal them. They're what +you're hired to protect, Hans. And now let us out, and lock the door +after we're gone." + +Anxious to get to the church before the meeting could be called to order, +the three scouts did not linger, although Hans was such an amusing little +man that they would have liked nothing better than to spend an hour in +his society, listening to stories about his adventures--for the Dutchman +had roamed pretty much all over the world since his boyhood. + +"Shucks! I forgot to examine those boxes," lamented Bobolink, when they +were on the way past the end of the lumber yard. + +Jack was glancing sharply about, wondering whether that tall, skulking +figure they had glimpsed could be some one who had a peculiar interest in +the boxes stored in the office of the mill until Professor Hackett called +for them; or just an ordinary "Weary Willie," looking for a soft board to +sleep on, before he continued his hike along the railroad track. + +But look as he would, he could see no further sign of a trespasser. Of +course that was no sign the unknown might not be within twenty feet of +them, right then. The tall piles of lumber offered splendid hiding-places +if any one was disposed to take advantages of the nooks; Jack had +explored many a snug hole, when roaming through the yard at various +times, and ought to know about it. + +"Oh! I took care of that part," chuckled Tom Betts. "I saw you were +talking with Jack and old Hans, so I just stepped up, and walked around +the boxes. There isn't a thing on 'em but the name of the professor, and +Jack's dad's address in Stanhope." + +"And they didn't look much like animal cages to me," muttered Bobolink; +upon which both of the others emitted exclamations of surprise, whereupon +the speaker seemed to think he ought to make some sort of explanation, so +he went on hastily: "You see, Jack, I somehow got a silly idea in my mind +that p'raps this little professor was some sort of an animal trainer, and +meant to come up here, just to have things quiet while he did his little +stunts. But that was a punk notion for me, all right; there ain't any +smell of animals about those boxes, not a whiff." + +"But what in the wide world gave you that queer notion?" asked Tom. + +"Don't know," replied Bobolink, "'less it was what Jack said about +the professor writing up from Coney Island near New York City; that's +the place where all the freaks show every summer. I've been down +there myself." + +"Listen to him, would you, Jack, owning up that he's a sure enough freak? +Well, some of us had a little idea that way, Bobolink, but we never +thought you'd admit it so coolly," remarked Tom Betts, laughingly. + +"And the wild animal show down there is just immense," the other went on, +not heeding the slur cast upon his reputation; for like many boys, +Bobolink had a pretty tough skin, and was not easily offended; "and I +guess I've thought about what I saw done there heaps of times. So Coney +stands for wild animal trainin' to me. But that guess was away wide of +the mark. Forget it, fellows. Only whenever Jack here learns what was in +those boxes, he must let his chums know. It's little enough to pay for +draggin' a lame scout all the way out here tonight; think so, Jack?" + +"I sure do, and you'll have it, if ever I find out," was the reply. +"Perhaps, after they've been taken away by the professor, my father +mightn't mind telling me what was in them. And we'll let it rest at +that, now." + +"But you mark me, if Bobolink gets any peace of mind till he learns," +warned Tom. + +Chatting on various matters connected more or less with the doings of the +Boy Scout movement, and what a fine thing it was proving for the youth of +the whole land, Jack and his chums presently brought up at the church +which had the bell tower; and where a splendid meeting room had been +given over for their occupancy in the basement, in which a gymnasium was +fitted up for use in the fall and winter. + +In that tower hung a big bell, whose brazen tongue had once upon a time +alarmed the good people of Stanhope by ding-donging at a most unusual +hour. It had come through a prank played upon the scouts by several tough +boys of the town whose enmity Paul Morrison and his chums had been +unfortunate enough to incur. But for the details of that exciting episode +the reader will have to be referred back to the preceding volume. + +Jack Stormways never glanced up at that tower but that he was forcibly +reminded of that startling adventure; and a smile would creep over his +face as he remembered some of the most striking features connected with +the event. + +In the big room the three scouts found quite a crowd awaiting their +coming. Indeed, it seemed as though nearly every member of the troop had +made it an especial point to attend this meeting just as though they +knew there was something unusual about to come before them for +consideration. + +As many of these lads will be apt to figure in the pages of this story, +it might be just as well to listen to the secretary, as he calls the +roster of the Stanhope Troop. Once this duty had devolved upon one of the +original Red Fox Patrol; but with the idea of sharing the +responsibilities in a more general way, it had been transferred to the +shoulders of Phil Towns, who belonged to the second patrol. + +RED FOX PATROL + +1--Paul Morrison, patrol leader, and also assistant scout master. +2--Jack Stormways. +3--Bobolink, the official bugler. +4--Bluff Shipley, the drummer. +5--Nuthin, whose real name was Albert Cypher. +6--William Carberry, one of the twins. +7--Wallace Carberry, the other. +8--Tom Betts. + +GRAY FOX PATROL + +1--Jud Elderkin, patrol leader. +2--Joe Clausin. +3--Andy Flinn. +4--Phil Towns. +5--Horace Poole. +6--Bob Tice. +7--Curly Baxter. +8--Cliff Jones, whose entire name was Clifford Ellsworth Fairfax Jones. + +BLACK FOX PATROL + +1--Frank Savage, patrol leader. +2--Billie Little, a very tall lad, and of course always called Little +Billie. +3--Nat Smith. +4--Sandy Griggs. +5--Old Dan Tucker. +6--"Red" Conklin. +7--"Spider" Sexton. +8--"Gusty" Bellows. + +Unattached, but to belong to a fourth patrol, later on: + +George Hurst. +"Lub" Ketcham. + +Thus it will be seen that there were now twenty-six lads connected with +the wide awake Stanhope Troop, and more coming. + +After the roll call, they proceeded to the regular business, with Paul +Morrison in the chair, he being the president of the association. It was +surprising how well many of these boyish meetings were conducted; Paul +and some of his comrades knew considerable about parliamentary law, and +long ago the hilarious members of the troop had learned that when once +the meeting was called to order they must put all joking aside. + +Many a good debate had been heard within those same walls since the +scouts received permission to meet there; and yet in camp, when the rigid +discipline was relaxed, these same fellows could be as full of fun and +frolic as any lads going. + +Tonight it had been whispered around that Paul had some sort of +important communication to make. No one could give a guess as to what it +might be, although all sorts of hazards were attempted, only to be +jeered at as absurd. + +And so, while the meeting progressed, they were growing more and more +excited, until finally it was as much as some of them could do to repress +a cheer when Paul, having made sure that there was no other business to +be transacted, arose with a smile, and announced that he had a certain +communication to lay before them. + +"Are you ready to hear it?" he asked; "every fellow who is raise +his hand." + +Needless to say, not a single hand remained unraised. Paul deliberately +counted them to the bitter end. + +"Just twenty-four; and as that is the total number present, we'll call it +unanimous," he said, just to tantalize them a little; and then, with an +air of business he went on: "Two splendid gentlemen of this town, by name +Mr. Everett and Colonel Bliss, happen to own motorboats. As they have +gone to Europe, to be away until late in the Fall, they thought it would +show how they appreciated the work of the Stanhope Troop of Boy Scouts if +they offered the free use of their two boats to us, to make a cruise +wherever we thought best during the balance of vacation time. Now, all in +favor of accepting this magnificent offer from our fellow townsmen +signify by saying 'aye!'" + +Hardly had the words fallen from the speaker's lips when a thunderous +"aye" made the stout walls of the building tremble. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +FOR CEDAR ISLAND--GHOST OR NO GHOST + + +"Three cheers for Colonel Bliss and Mr. Everett!" called out Bobolink, +almost too excited to speak plainly. + +Paul himself led the cheering, because he knew those delighted boys just +had to find some sort of outlet for the enthusiasm that was bubbling up +within them. And doubtless the walls of that sacred building had seldom +heard such cheers since away back in the time when a meeting was held +there at news of the Civil War breaking out in 1861 and the patriotic +citizens had formed a company on the spot, to volunteer their services to +the President. + +"Where will we go?" called out one scout, after the cheering had died +down, and they found time to consider ways and means of employing the +motorboats that had been so generously given into their keeping. + +"Down the Bushkill to the sea!" suggested one. + +"I suppose you think these motorboats can jump like broncos?" declared +Jud Elderkin, with a look of disgust; "else how would they ever get +around that big dam down at Seely's Mills? We could crawl a few miles +_up_ the Bushkill, but to go down would mean only a short cruise." + +"Let Paul say!" cried Bobolink, shrewdly reading the smile on the face of +the assistant scout master, as he listened to all sorts of wild plans, +none of which would hold together when the rest of the scouts started to +pick flaws. + +"Yes, Paul's got a scheme that'll knock all these wildcat ones just to +flinders, see if it don't," remarked Tom Betts, waving his hands to +enforce silence. + +"Go on and tell us, Paul; and I reckon I c'n give a right smart guess +that it's about that Radway River country," declared Bobolink. + +"Just what it is," said Paul. "Listen, then, and tell me what you think +of my plan. I've figured it all out, and believe we could make it a go. +If we did, we'd surely have the time of our lives, and find out something +that I've wanted myself to know a long while back. It's about a trip up +the Radway River, too, just as our smart chum guessed." + +"But, say, the boats are right here at Stanhope, and have been used in +running up and down the Bushkill; then how in the name of wonder can we +carry them over to the Radway, which is some miles away, I take it?" +asked William Carberry, soberly. + +"Wait and see; Paul's got all that arranged," declared the confident +Tom Betts. + +"Have 'em hauled over on one of his father's big lumber wagons, mebbe," +suggested Nuthin, who was rather a small chap, though not of quite so +little importance as his name would seem to indicate. + +"Oh, you make me tired, Nuthin," declared Bobolink; "why, those +motorboats weigh a ton or two apiece. Think of gettin' a wagon strong +enough to carry one; and all the slow trips it'd have to take to get 'em +there and back. I reckon the whole of our vacation'd see us on the dry +land part of the cruise. Now, let Paul tell us what plan he's been +thinking about to get over to the Radway with 'em." + +"Well, it's just this way," the chairman of the meeting went on to say, +calmly, with the air of one who had studied the matter carefully, and +grasped every little detail; "most of you know that there was a stream +known as Jackson Creek that ran into the Bushkill a mile below +Manchester. That was once dredged out, and made to form a regular canal +connecting the two rivers. For years, my father says, it was used +regularly by all sorts of boats that wanted to cross over from one +river to the other. But changes came, and by degrees the old canal has +been about forgotten. Still, it's there; and I went through it in my +canoe just yesterday, to sound, and see if it could be used by the +motorboats now." + +"And could it?" asked Bobolink, eagerly. + +"I think there's a fair chance that we'd pull through, though it might +sometimes be a close shave. There's a lot of nasty mud in the canal, +because, you see, it hasn't been cleaned out for years. If we had a good +rain now, and both rivers raised, we wouldn't have any trouble, but could +run through easy enough." + +"Well, supposing we did get through, how far up the Radway would we +push?" asked Bobolink, determined to get the entire proposition out of +Paul at once, now that they had him going. + +"All the way to Lake Tokala," replied Paul, promptly. "Some of you happen +to know that there's a jolly island in that big lake, known as Cedar +Island, because right on top of a small hill in the middle, a splendid +cedar stands. Well, we could take our tents along, and make camp on that +island, fishing, swimming, and having one of the best times ever heard +of. What do you say, fellows?" + +Immediately there was a clamor of tongues. Some seemed to be for +accepting Paul's suggestion with a whoop, and declared that it took them +by storm. A few, however, seemed to raise objections; and such was the +racket that nobody was able to make himself understood. So the chairman +called for order; and with the whack of his gavel on the table every +voice was stilled. + +"Let's conduct this meeting in a parliamentary way," said Paul. "Some of +you must have thought it stood adjourned. Now, whoever wants to speak, +get up, and let's hear what you've got to say." + +"I move that we take up the plan offered, and make our headquarters on +Cedar Island," said Wallace Carberry, rising. + +"Not on your life!" declared Curly Baxter, bobbing up like a +jack-in-the-box; "I've heard lots about that same place. It's troubled +with a _mystery_, and only last week I heard Paddy Reilly say he'd never +go there fishin' again if he was paid for it. He's dreadfully afraid of +ghosts, Paddy is." + +"Ghosts!" almost shouted William Carberry; "I vote to go to Cedar +Island then. I've always wanted to see a genuine ghost, and never yet +had a chance." + +"Now, I heard that it was a wild man that lived somewhere on that same +island," remarked Frank Savage. "They say he's a terror, too, all covered +with hair; and one man who'd been looking for pearl mussels in the river +up that way told my father he beat any Wild Man of Borneo he'd ever set +eyes on in a freak show or circus." + +"Oh, that's a fine place for honest scouts to pitch their tents, ain't +it--I don't think!" observed Joe Clausin, with a sneer. + +"H-h-huh! ain't there j-j-just twenty-six of us s-s-scouts; and ought we +b-b-be afraid of one l-l-little g-g-ghost, or even a w-w-wild man?" +demanded Bluff Shipley, who stuttered once in a while, when unduly +excited, though he was by degrees overcoming the nervous habit. + +"Put it to a vote, Mr. Chairman!" called out Bobolink. + +"Yes, and majority rules, remember," warned William Carberry. + +"But that don't mean a feller just _has_ to go along, does it?" asked +Nuthin, looking somewhat aghast at the thought. + +"Of course it don't;" Bobolink told him; "all the same you'll be on deck, +my boy. I just know you can't resist having such a jolly good time, ghost +or not. Question, Mr. Chairman!" + +"Vote! Vote!" + +"All in favor of trying to go through the old canal that used to connect +the Bushkill with the Radway, and cruising up to Cedar Island, camping +there for a week or ten days, say 'aye,'" Paul went on to remark. + +A thunderous response cheered his heart; for somehow Paul seemed very +much set upon following out the scheme he himself had devised. + +"Contrary, no!" he continued. + +There were just three who boldly allowed themselves to be set down as not +being in favor of the daring plan--Nuthin, Curly Baxter and Joe Clausin; +and yet, just as the wise, far-seeing Bobolink had declared, when it came +to a question of staying at home while the rest of the troop were off +enjoying their vacation, or swallowing their fear of ghosts and wild men, +these three boys would be along when the motorboats started on their +adventurous cruise. + +"The ayes have it; and the meeting stands adjourned, according to the +motion I can see Jack Stormways's just about to put," and with a laugh +Paul stepped down from the platform. + +For fully half an hour they talked the thing over. It was viewed from +every possible angle. Many objections raised by the doubters were +promptly met by the ready Paul; and in the end it was definitely decided +that they would give just one day to making all needed preparations. + +They had tents for the three patrols now, and all sorts of cooking +utensils; for frequently the scouts were divided into messes, there being +a cook appointed in each patrol. + +What was needed most of all were the supplies for an extended stay; and +when it was taken into consideration that a score of boys, with ravenous +appetites, would want three big meals each and every day, the question of +figuring out enough provisions to see them through was no light matter. + +But then they had considerable money in the treasury, and a numbers of +the boys said they would bring loaves of bread, and all sorts of eatables +from home; so Paul saw his way clear toward providing the given quantity. + +"Don't forget that the gasoline is going to eat a big hole into our +little pile of the long green," remarked Curly Baxter, still engaged in +trying to throw cold water on the scheme. + +"Oh, that makes me think of something I forgot to tell you, fellows," +declared Paul, his face filled with good humor. "One of the stipulations +connected with the lending of these two motor-boats by the kind gentlemen +who own them was that they insisted on supplying all the liquid fuel +needed to run the craft. The tanks are to be filled, and each boat +carries in addition another drum, with extra gasoline. We'll likely have +enough for all our needs that way, and without costing us a red cent, +either. So, you see how easy most of your objections melt away, Curly. +Chances are, you'll fall into line, and be with us when we start the day +after tomorrow." + +Several of the boys were feeling pretty blue. They wanted to accompany +the rest of the troop the worst way; but it happened that their folks had +planned to go down to the sea-shore for a month, until school began +again; and the chances were they would have to go along, though every one +of them declared they would choose the cruise up the Radway in the two +motorboats, if given their way. + +But it looked as though there was going to be a pretty fair crowd on each +boat. Paul counted noses of those he believed would be along, and found +that they seemed to number eighteen. If two of the three timid ones +concluded to throw their fears to the winds, and come along, it would +make an even twenty. + +"Of course, it will be hard to sleep so many aboard, because the boats +are small affairs, taken altogether," Paul observed; "but we hope to make +the journey in a full day, and be on Cedar Island by nightfall." + +"Whew! night on Cedar Island--excuse _me_ if you please!" faltered Curly +Baxter, holding up both hands, as though the idea suggested all sorts of +terrible things to his mind; but much as he seemed desirous of causing +others to back out, Paul saw no signs of any one doing so. + +"Meet here at noon tomorrow, boys, and I'll report what I've done. Then +we can figure on what else we have to lay in store, so as to be +comfortable. We must get everything down to the boats before evening, +because we start early on Wednesday, you hear. At eight A. M., Bobolink, +here, will sound his bugle; and ten minutes later we weigh anchor, or cut +loose our hawsers, as you choose to say it, for it means letting go a +rope after all." + +They started home in bunches, as usual, those who happened to live near +together naturally waiting for each other. Paul, Jack, and Bobolink +walked together. + +"And just as it happens so many times," Paul was saying, as they +sauntered on in the direction of home. "Mr. Gordon is away on the road +somewhere, selling goods; so we have to go without having our fine +scoutmaster along to look after us." + +"Guess nobody will miss him very much, although Mr. Gordon is a mighty +nice man and we all think a heap of him; but you are able to fill his +shoes all right, Paul; and, somehow, it seems to feel better not to have +any grown-up along. The responsibility makes most of the fellers behave, +and think for themselves, you see," Jack went on to say. + +Paul heaved a little sigh, for he knew who shouldered most of that same +responsibility. + +"But," remarked Bobolink, as he was about to separate from Jack and Paul +on a certain corner, where their ways divided; "I'd give something right +now to just know what's in those queer old boxes Professor Hackett has +stored in your mill, Jack; and why they have to be watched, just like +they held money or something that has to be guarded against an unknown +enemy! But I guess I'll have to take it out in wantin', because you don't +know, and wouldn't tell till you got the consent of your dad, even if you +did. Goodnight, fellows; and here's hoping we're going to have the time +of our lives up and around Cedar Island!" + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +LAYING IN THE STORES + + +Well, it was a busy day for the scouts of Stanhope Troop. + +There was the greatest running back and forth, and consultations among +the lads, ever known. Where a parent seemed doubtful about giving +permission for a boy to take part in the intended cruise, influence was +brought to bear on coaxing neighbors to drop in, and tell how glad they +were their boys were independent, as it was the finest thing that could +ever come to them; and also what slight chances there seemed to be of any +accident happening that might not occur when the lads stayed at home, +where they would go in swimming anyhow. + +And owing to the masterly way in which the objections of certain parents +were met and overcome, long before noon every boy who had a ghost of a +chance of sailing on the two motor-boats reported that he had gained +consent; even Curly Baxter admitted that his folks had been won over, +and that he "could go along, if so he he chose to shut his eyes to facts, +and just trust to luck," which, be it said, he finally did, just as Paul +had believed would be the case. + +Meanwhile Paul and Jack were making their purchases of provisions, using +a list that had been found useful on their other camping trip; although +several little inaccuracies were corrected. For instance, they had taken +too much rice on that other occasion; and not enough ham, and salt pork, +and breakfast bacon. + +Eggs they hoped to buy from some farmer over on the mainland; and +possibly milk as well. Jack even hinted that they might feel disposed, if +the money held out, to get a few chickens, and have one grand feed before +breaking camp. + +"And this time we'll try and make sure that none of our grub is hooked, +like it was when we camped up on old Rattlesnake Mountain," Jack had +declared, with emphasis, for the memory of certain mysterious things +that had happened to them on that occasion often arose to disturb some +of the scouts. + +"Oh! it ought to be easy to look out for that part of the job," Paul had +made answer; "because, you see, we'll have the two boats to store things +in, and they can be anchored out in the lake, if we want, each with a +guard aboard." + +By noon the whole town knew all about the expected cruise. Boys who did +not have the good luck to belong to Stanhope Troop became greatly excited +over it; and by their actions and looks showed how envious they were of +their schoolmates. + +Just about then, if the assistant scout master had called for volunteers, +he could have filled two complete additional patrols with candidates; for +the fellows began to realize that the scouts were having three times as +much fun as any one else. + +But Paul was too wise for that. He believed in selecting the right sort +of boys, and not taking every one who offered his name, just because he +wanted to have a good time. These fellows would not be able to live up to +the iron-clad rules that scouts have got to subscribe to, and which are +pretty much covered in the twelve cardinal principles which, each boy +declares in the beginning, he will try and govern his life by--"to be +trustworthy, loyal, helpful, friendly, courteous, kind, obedient, +cheerful, thrifty, brave, clean, and reverent." + +Some of the scouts were at Headquarters, as the room under the church was +called, getting the supplies there in order, to take down to the boats +later on, when they were surprised to have a visitor in the shape of old +Peleg Growdy. + +This man lived just outside the town limits, on the main road. He had +once kept his wagon yard in a very disgraceful condition, much to the +disgust of the women folks of Stanhope. The boys, too, looked upon Peleg +as a crusty old fellow, who hated their kind. + +He had done something to offend one of the scouts, and it was proposed +that they play some sort of trick on the old fellow in order to pay him +back; but Paul ventured to say that if the scouts went in a body to his +place, when he was asleep, and cleaned up his wagon yard so that it +looked neat, he would have his eyes opened to the debt he owed the +community. + +Paul, it seemed, had learned the main cause of the old man's holding +aloof from his neighbors. It came from the fact that some years back he +had lost his wife and children in the burning of his house; and ever +since had looked upon boys as especially created to worry lone widowers +who wanted only to be let alone. + +Well, the scouts certainly made a great friend of Peleg Growdy. He had +even tried to induce them to let him purchase their suits to show that he +was a changed man; but of course they could not allow that, because each +true scout must earn every cent of the money with which his outfit in the +beginning is bought. But in many ways had old Peleg shown them that he +was now going to be one of the best friends the boys of Stanhope Troop +had ever possessed. + +He had heard about their intended trip, when he came to town with some +produce; and rather than go back home with some things for which there +did not seem to be any sale at the price he wanted, he had come around +with his wagon to ask his boy friends to please him by accepting them as +his contribution to the cause. + +They could not disappoint the generous-hearted old man by refusing; and +besides the half-bushel of onions, and double the quantity of new +potatoes, looked mighty fine to the lads. + +About two o'clock, when it seemed that their list was about complete, +even though they would doubtless think of a lot of things after it was +too late to get them, Paul decided to send for the wagon that was to haul +the tents and other things, including blankets for the crowd, brought +from various homes to the meeting place, down to the waiting boats. + +"I wanted to get Ezra Sexton, but he was busy," Jack explained, when he +had carried out the errand given into his charge; "fact is, I hear, +Bobolink, that Ezra came early this morning with an order from the +professor, and took all those big cases away in his two wagons." + +"Well, that was quick work now, wasn't it?" grumbled Bobolink; "reckon I +won't ever have a chance to see what was inside those boxes. Say, see +here, d'ye happen to know where Ezra hauled 'em? Not to the railroad, I +should think, because they only came that way yesterday." + +But Jack shook his head. + +"Some distance off, I reckon, because the trucks don't seem to be back +yet, so I couldn't get to see Ezra," he remarked; "but when we come home +again, I'll ask my father about it, and relieve that curiosity of yours, +Bobolink." + +"Huh! that means mebbe two weeks or so I'm to go on guessing, I s'pose," +the other remarked, in a disconsolate way that made Jack laugh. + +"Funny how you do get a notion in that coco of yours; and it'd take a +crowbar to work it loose," he observed, at which the other only +grinned, saying: + +"Born that way; must 'a made a mistake and left the wrong article at our +house for the new baby; thought it was a girl; always wantin' to know +everything, and never happy till I get it. But Jack, I'll try and keep +this matter out of my mind. Don't pay any attention to me, if I look +cross once in a while. That'll be when it's got me gripped fast, and I'm +tryin' to guess." + +"I've known you to do the same when you had one of those puzzles, trying +to work it," chuckled Jack Stormways. "Fact is, I remember that once you +told me you sat up till two o'clock in the morning over that ring +business." + +"But I got her, Jack--remember that; won't you? If I hadn't I'd been +burning the midnight oil yet, I reckon. 'Taint safe to make _me_ a +present of a puzzle, because I'm just dead sure to nearly split my poor +weak brain trying to figger it out. And Jack, I'll never be happy till I +know what was in those boxes; and why did that sly little professor +believe someone wanted to steal his thunder and lightning?" + +It took several loads to carry all their traps down to the boats. But +finally, as the groceries had also been delivered, the scouts took count +of their stock, and it was believed they had about everything, save what +the boys might bring in the morning from home. + +Paul advised them to go slow with regard to what they carried along, as +they did not expect to be gone six months. If any garments gave out, why, +there would be plenty of soap and water handy; and the fellow who did not +know how to wash a pair of socks, or some handkerchiefs, had better take +a few lessons on how to play laundry woman in an emergency. + +"If things keep on multiplying much more," the scout master remarked, as +he looked around at the tremendous amount of stuff which the boys were +now beginning to stow away systematically; "why we won't be able to +navigate the boats through that shallow canal at all. They'll just stick +fast, because they'll be so low down in the water; and chances are we'll +have to spend all our vacation slobbering around in that mud trying to +coax them along. Go slow, fellows; bring just as little as you possibly +can in the morning. If there's any doubt about it being a real necessity, +why leave it at home. We're all scouts and true comrades, ready to share +and share alike; so, no matter what happens, no one will go without." + +Of course there were many persons who came down to watch the loading of +the supplies, for half of Stanhope was interested in the expedition; and +groups of envious boys could be seen in various nooks, taking note of all +that went on, while they wished they had such good luck. + +No one was allowed on board who had no business there. Of course when any +of the fathers or mothers of the boys who were going happened along, they +were only too proudly shown through both boats, and had everything +explained by half a dozen eager scouts. But a couple of guards stood at +the gangplank, and no boy was allowed aboard unless accompanied by his +parents; and even then a strict watch was kept, because there were some +pretty mean fellows in town, who believed in the motto of "rule or +ruin." When they were not allowed to play, they always tried their best +to see to it that no one else played, either. + +"There's Ted Slavin and Ward Kenwood sitting up on the bank over there, +Paul," remarked Jack, about half an hour before the time when the scouts +would have to be going home to their suppers. + +"I've been watching them," replied the scout master; "and from the way +they carry on, laughing when they put their heads together, I had just +about made up my mind that they were hatching up some mischief." + +"Mischief!" echoed Bobolink, who was close by at the moment, and heard +what was being said; "say, that's too nice a word to use when talking +about the pranks of that combination. Ward, he supplies some of the +brains, and all of the hard plunks; while that bully, Ted Slavin, does +the work, or gets some of his cronies to do it for him. Now, I wonder if +they'll try to come aboard here, and play hob with our stuff, like they +did once before when we were all ready to hike off on a jaunt?" + +"Don't bother yourself about that, Bobolink," said Paul, quietly. "I had +decided, even before I noticed Ward and Ted, that we must have a guard +stay on board all night. I'm going to see right now what fellows can be +spared. They can go home to supper, and some of us will wait for them to +come back." + +"Let me be one, Paul; won't you?" pleaded Bobolink. + +"But you are so quick to act, and it might bring on trouble," objected +the other. + +"Oh! I'll promise to think five times before I act once; and besides, +there'll be some fellow along, like Jack here, who can keep me quiet. Of +course, though, if you believe I'm not fit to do the work, why--" + +"That'll do for you, Bobolink," Paul broke in, "if your folks say you can +stay, come back ready to camp on board. I'll find you one or two +mates--four if possible--so you can sleep in relays of twos. And I'll +also try to fix up some dodge that will cool those fellows off, in case +they try to jump aboard between sunset and daylight." + +"Huh! I'd rather _warm_ their jackets for 'em," growled Bobolink; who, +having suffered before at the hands of the meanest boy in Stanhope, Ted +Slavin, had only the poorest opinion of him, and of those who trained in +his company. + +"When I come back tonight, after supper," continued Paul, "I'm going to +fetch my shotgun along. It might come in handy on the cruise in case we +ran up against a wildcat, or something like that. And I've known such a +thing as a double-barrel to be mighty useful, when fired in the air, to +make sneaking boys nearly jump out of their skins with alarm--but always +in the air, remember, Bobolink." + +"Oh! don't worry about me; my bite is not half as bad as my bark. I like +to make out I'm just fierce, when all the while, if you could look +inside, you'd find me chuckling to beat the band. I wouldn't shoot a gun +at anybody, unless it was to save another fellow's life; and then I'd try +to pepper his legs. Fetch the gun, Paul; it'll come in real handy." + +So, when Paul did come back after dark, he carried the weapon under his +arm in true hunter style; for Paul had been several times up in Maine, +and knew a good deal of woodcraft, having had actual experience, which is +better than theory, any day. + +These four scouts were left in charge of the two boats, when finally Paul +went back home to get some sleep before the eventful day that was to +witness the sailing of the motorboat expedition: + +Bobolink; Tom Betts; Spider Sexton, of the Black Fox Patrol and Andy +Flinn, who belonged to the Gray Foxes; and firmly did they promise Paul +to keep a bright lookout to make sure that no harm came to the boats +during the long night. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +JUST AFTER THE CLOCK STRUCK TEN + + +"Here we are, monarchs of all we survey," remarked Bobolink, as the last +of the other scouts went off, leaving the four guards to their task of +taking care of those two fine motorboats for the night. + +It was nine o'clock. + +The well-known sounds from the church steeple had told them that; and +somehow every fellow counted the strokes aloud, as though on this night +in particular they meant far more than at other times. + +Stanhope, not being a manufacturing town, like Manchester, was, as a +rule, rather quiet of nights; except when the Glorious Fourth was being +celebrated; or some other holiday kept the younger element on the move. + +Bobolink had been given the post of "Captain of the Guards;" while Tom +Betts was to be considered the second in command. They were to divide the +duties in such fashion that there would be two of them on deck at a time. + +"I'll take Andy for my mate; and you can have Spider to help out," +Bobolink had told Tom, when they were arranging the programme. + +"And how long will the watches be?" demanded Spider, who liked to sleep +about as much as any fellow in the troop; he had gained that odd name not +because he was artful and cruel; but on account of his slender legs, +which long ago some smart boy had likened to those of a spider; and it +only requires a hint like that to establish a nick-name. + +"Two hours each, divided into four," replied the chief, feeling the +responsibility of his position; for this was really the first time +Bobolink could remember being placed over any of his fellow scouts--Paul +wished to "try him out," and discover what sort of reliance could be +placed in the lad. + +"That's an awful short time to get a snooze," complained Spider, yawning. +"Why, you'd hardly get asleep before you'd have to wake up." + +"Then what's the use going to sleep at all, at all?" remarked Andy +Flinn, with a broad smile. "Let's draw lots to say who'll stand guard +the whole night" + +"Well, I guess not," objected Spider, vigorously. "Half a loaf is some +better'n no bread, they always say; and four hours ought to make a +fellow feel as though he hadn't been shut out altogether from his +needed rest." + +"Needed rest is good for you, Spider; the only trouble is you need too +much," Bobolink remarked. "But here's the way we'll fix it: Andy and me, +why, we'll be the pioneers on the job, starting in right now, while you +others curl up somewhere, and get busy taking your forty winks. At +eleven-ten we'll give you the foot, and take your places. Jack left me +his little watch, so we could tell how time goes; but sure, you can hear +the clock in the church steeple knock off the hours. And for the last +time, listen to me; not one wink must any sentry take while on duty. +Sleeping on post is the most terrible thing you can do. They shoot +soldiers in war time who betray their trust that way. Get your +instructions, fellows?" + +"I'm on to what you mean, all right," said Spider; "and I guess I know my +weakness, as well as anybody. To prove that I want to do the right thing, +I'm going to fix it up with my mate to give me a jab with this pin, every +time he gets a notion in his head that I'm drowsing." + +"Say, that sounds heroic all right," remarked Bobolink, doubtfully; "but +you don't want to get too gay with that same pin, Tom. It'd be a shame to +wake Andy and me up every ten minutes, making Spider give a yelp. Better +just shake him if he acts sleepy. And above everything else, keep a +bright watch along the shore." + +"Think they'll be apt to come from that direction, do you?" asked Spider. + +"Just as like as not," the other returned; "but that isn't saying you +ought not to keep an eye on the other side, and all around. I wouldn't +put it past that Ted Slavin to swim down this way from some place above, +thinking he could do his little trick by fooling us, and coming aboard on +the water side." + +"Whew! do you really think, then, he'd dare board these boats, knowing +that they belong to two of the richest and most prominent citizens of +Stanhope?" asked Spider, who occasionally liked to air his command of +fine language. + +"Well, you ought to be on to the curves of that Ted Slavin; and if you +just look back to things he's been known to do in the past, why, lots +of times he's played his pranks on people that had a pull. Why, didn't +he even sneak into the loft over Police Headquarters once, and rig up a +scare that came near breaking up the force. Ted fixed it so the wind'd +work through a knot-hole in the dark, whenever he chose to pull a +string over the fence back of the house, and make the awfullest +groaning noise anybody ever did hear. It got on the nerves of Chief +Billings and his men. They hunted that loft over and over, but of +course the groans didn't come when they were up there. Why, he had 'em +so badly rattled that they all just about camped out on the pavement +the rest of that night." + +"Sure, I remember that," declared Andy Flinn, laughing. "Three nights did +he play the same joke, and then they got on to him. Wan officer do be +sneakin' up to the loft, while the rist pretended to be huntin' around +downstairs. He discovered the sthring, cript downstairs again, wint out +on the sly, and, be the powers, followed it to the fince. Then he wint +around, and jumped on Tid while the bhoy was a pullin' his sthring like +smoke, makin' worse groanings than any time yit. Sure they thried to hush +the joke up, the police was that ashamed; but it cript out some way." + +"Well, get off to bed, Spider and Tom;" said Bobolink, "we'll wake you up +when it's time to change the watch. And remember what a nice little +surprise we've got ready for anybody who thinks he can meddle with things +that don't belong to him. Skip out now, both of you." + +The two motorboats had been lashed side by side. They were about of a +size, and something like twenty-four feet in length, with a rather +generous beam, because their owners went in for pleasure and comfort, +rather than racing. Still, one of the boats, the _Speedwell_, was said to +be capable of doing a mile in seven minutes, if pushed, on flat water; +while the other, called the _Comfort_, being broader, could not do +anything like that. + +It was easy to pass from one boat to the other, as they lay there. Each +had a canopy top, and curtains that could be dropped, and buttoned, +during a wet spell, or if the owner chose to sleep aboard; but on this +occasion Paul had believed it best that these latter should remain up, so +as to allow of free observation all around. + +A stout hawser secured the boat nearest the shore to a big stake that +had been driven deeply into the earth. Thus the boats lay close beside +a short dock that was called a landing stage. As the current of the +Bushkill was always pretty strong there must be more or less of a +strain on that hawser; but since it was comparatively new, the boys +felt that there could not be the slightest danger of its breaking, +unless some outside influence were brought to bear on it, such as a +keen-edged knife blade. + +In that case, as it was very taut, it would naturally part readily; and +with consequences disastrous to the safety of the two boats, which must +be carried off down-stream in the darkness, possibly to be driven ashore +on some rocks below. + +And so Bobolink, having been duly warned with regard to possible trouble +in connection with that same hawser, had mentally called the rope his +"dead line;" and he watched the shore above that point three times as +much as any other place. + +He and Andy had planned not to talk while on duty. If they found it +necessary to say anything at all, which was hardly likely, the +communication would be in the lowest whisper. + +Bobolink was not greedy, but he really hoped that if any sort of +trouble did come it would come along while he and Andy were holding the +post of guards. He had a little fear that Spider Sexton might not be +depended on, no matter what his good intentions, while Tom Betts was an +unknown quantity. + +In case Andy happened to be sitting in one boat, while Bobolink was +occupying the other, they had fixed it up so that by taking a lead +pencil, the "commander" could give a few little light taps on the side of +the craft, using his knowledge of the Morse code to send the message, and +in this way ask whether his assistant were wide awake, and on the job, +when Andy would send back a reply along the same order; for he aspired to +be a signal man of the troop, and was daily practicing with the wigwag +flags, as well as smoke and fire signals. + +The town clock boomed out the hour of ten. + +Bobolink had himself begun to feel rather sleepy, and more to arouse his +dormant faculties than anything else, he sent a message along the wooden +telegraph line. The reply was a bit slow in coming, which made him think +Andy might also be inclined to fall into a doze. + +So Bobolink decided that he must bestir himself, and give the signal more +frequently. He would not have this, his first important commission, turn +out poorly, for a good deal. Perhaps his whole future usefulness as a +scout who could be depended on in emergencies rested on the way he +accounted for the safety of the motorboats this night. + +When he found himself letting his eyes shut, even for a minute, he would +immediately try to picture the consternation that would ensue should a +fire suddenly envelope the boats that had been placed in the hands of the +scouts, and for which they would be held responsible. + +He knew Ted Slavin of old, and felt that the town bully would not +hesitate at even such a thing as that. + +Then there was such a thing as cutting the hawser, and letting the boats +drift down-stream, to bring up against some rocks that might stave a hole +in the delicate planking. Who could tell but what the rope had parted +under a strain? Sometimes a break may look like the work of a sharp +knife; and anyway, as darkness lay upon the scene, with a cloudy sky +overhead to hide the young moon, the identity of the vandal could never +be absolutely known. + +All these things Bobolink was turning over and over in his mind as he sat +there trying to keep awake. + +It is one of the hardest things to do, and especially when the subject is +only a half-grown lad, with but a dim idea of the responsibility +depending on the faithful discharge of his duty. + +Hello! what was that? Bobolink thought he surely heard a sound like +muttered conversation. But then, even in steady old Stanhope, there were +a number of happy-go-lucky chaps who tarried late in the saloons; and +when they finally started homeward, used to talk to themselves along the +way. Perhaps it was only one of these convivial fellows trying to find +the way home, and getting off his course, coming to the open place along +the river bank, intending to lie down and sleep his confusion off. + +Bobolink was thrilled, however, a minute later, when he felt sure he +could again hear the low mutter of voices. It struck him that several +persons might be urging each other on, as though inclined to feel the +need of backing. + +It came from up-river, too, the point he meant to watch more than any +other; and this fact increased the suspicious look of the case. + +"Oh! it's coming," whispered the eager boy to himself; "and I only hope +the water will be hot enough, that's all." + +His words were mysterious enough to suit any one; and even while he was +speaking in this manner Bobolink started to crawl under the canopy that +sheltered him from the dew of the night. He allowed the end of his pencil +to throb against the side of the boat, giving the one significant word: +"Come!" An immediate answer assured him that Andy heard, and understood. +Another minute, and the Irish boy came shuffling over from the other +boat, trying to keep from making any more noise than was necessary. + +"Take hold," Bobolink whispered in his ear, pulling the other's head down +close to his lips; "They're coming! Be ready to go at it licketty-split +when I say the word. Get that?" + +"Sure!" came in the faintest tone from the other; whereupon Bobolink, +feeling that his hour had arrived, started once more to crawl back to his +former position. + +But now he had something in his hands that looked very like a snake; or +since Bobolink was known to fairly detest all crawling creatures, it +might be a rope, although there are still other things that have that +same willowy appearance--a garden hose, for example. + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +THE GREAT CRUISE OF THE SCOUTS BEGUN + + +When Bobolink again reached the bow of the _Comfort_, and peered above +the side, he glued his eyes to the spot where he knew the rope lay that +held the boats moored to the shore. + +And as the half moon condescended to peep from behind the dark clouds +that had until now hidden her bright face, the scout could make out a +flattened figure, that seemed to be hugging the earth, while creeping +slowly forward. + +Not only one, but three more, did he see, all in a line, as though in +this way the conspirators had arranged to keep their courage up to the +sticking point. Each fellow might watch his mates, and see that no one +lagged behind. + +Bobolink was quivering with eagerness and excitement. He figured that +these night crawlers had only five more feet to cover before they would +be as close to his "dead line" as prudence would dictate that he allow, +since it might require only a single sweep of the knife to cut that rope. + +They kept on advancing as though anxious to get the job over with, now +that they had keyed their courage up to the proper pitch. + +Another foot was all that Bobolink meant to allow, and then his time +would come to act. Those last few seconds seemed fairly to crawl, so +wrought-up was the waiting scout; but finally he concluded that it was no +use holding off any longer. So he suddenly called out the one word: + +"Now!" + +Instantly a new sound broke the silence. Bobolink elevated the object +he was hold in his hands. There came a queer, whizzing noise, like +water squirting from the end of a nozzle; which was exactly what it +was, and _hot_ water in the bargain, not actually scalding, but of such +a temperature to make a fellow wince, if it happened to sprinkle +over-his face. + +It was all Bobolink's idea. He had brought a little garden pump aboard +during the afternoon, with the hose that went with it. There was a +kerosene cookstove aboard each boat, used when going ashore might be +unwise on account of rainy weather; and on this the artful schemer had +heated his water. Every time he went back to that quarter he tested its +temperature, to see whether it kept up to the pitch he meant it should +be. And Andy's part of the job was to manipulate the handle of the little +pump with all his vim and power. + +Imagine the consternation of four plotters, who, when just about to +carry out their pleasant little scheme, suddenly and without warning, +found a spray of hot water touching every exposed part of their skin! + +Do you wonder that they immediately let out a few yelps, and scrambling +to their feet, rushed headlong away, followed by the laughter and jeers +of Bobolink and his hard-working assistant. + +"Go it, you tigers! My! what sprinters you can be, when you only half +try! Come again, when you cool off a bit! Plenty more of the same kind on +tap! Don't be bashful, Teddy; let's hear from you again, and often. Whee! +just listen to 'em howl, would you?" + +Perhaps some of those who were with Ted Slavin in his little game were +more frightened than hurt by the hot water, but they certainly did +chatter as they kept on up the river bank. Little danger of them making +another try to injure the boats again that night! + +Of course Spider and Tom Bates had jumped up at the first outbreak, ready +to help repel boarders. Their assistance was not needed; but they enjoyed +the joke as much as their chums and for the next half hour all sat +around, talking, and comparing notes. + +But finally silence again rested over the scene; Spider and Tom +condescended to crawl under their blankets again for another "cat-nap," +as the former dubbed it, while Bobolink and his able assistant resumed +their duties as sentries. + +The night, however, was disturbed no more by any outbreak. Those would-be +jokers seemed to know when they had taken hold of what Bobolink termed +the "business end of a buzz-saw;" at any rate they were only conspicuous +during the remainder of the night by their absence. + +Of course every one of the boys on board the two motorboats was glad when +the first peep of dawn came. It had seemed about "forty-eleven hours +long," Spider admitted; though he also triumphantly asked Tom Betts +whether the other had had occasion to jab that pin into him even once, +which the second scout laughingly admitted he had not. + +"See there," Spider had declared, "can't I keep awake when duty +calls me? You needn't be afraid to trust a Sexton, when you need a +faithful watcher." + +Before the sun appeared Paul and Jack were on hand, to make sure that +everything was in shape for an early start, for they hoped to get away by +nine o'clock. + +Others of the scouts began to drop around, and from the appearance of +their eyes Paul was of the opinion that a full night's sleep had not been +enjoyed by many of the members of the troop. Of course, it was the +excitement of starting out on such a glorious cruise that kept them +awake; for it is not given to scouts very often to enjoy such a prospect, +afloat, with staunch motorboats given over into their keeping. + +Since so many things had been looked after on the preceding afternoon, +there was really little to be done that morning. Every fellow was +supposed to be on hand at a certain time, ready with his little blanket, +and his haversack, in which he would carry a towel, some soap, a brush, +an extra shirt, some socks and handkerchiefs; and if he could find a +spare bit of room, why, he was entitled to cram in all the crullers or +other dainties he could manage; for after that supply was gone there +would be only plain camp fare until they got home again. + +Paul was kept busy seeing that everything was stored away in the right +place. Of course the supplies of food and the tents, as well as the +numerous blankets, had to be divided as equally as possible, so that each +boat would have its fair cargo. + +When the roster of those who could go was taken, just before the time +came to start, and the others were ordered ashore, it was found that all +told there were just eighteen fellows lucky enough to be in the lot. + +Some of the boys who could not go looked pretty doleful as they watched +the preparations. There were the twins, William and Wallace Carberry, +whose parents insisted on their going to the sea-shore; and Horace Poole, +as well as Cliff Jones, of the second patrol, also compelled to obey the +parental injunction; when, if given their choice, they would ten times +sooner have remained at home, and had the chance of starting out on this +wonderful cruise with their chums. + +Sandy Griggs, the butcher's son, was laid up with a lame leg; while +George Hurst happened to develop a touch of malaria, and his parents +would not hear of him going on the water at such a time. As for Red +Conklin and Lub Ketcham, for some reason or other which they did not care +to explain, they had been positively refused permission to go along; +perhaps they were being punished for some misdemeanor; and if so, to +judge from the long faces they showed, the like would not be apt to +happen again very soon; for it pained them dreadfully to think that they +were to be debarred from all that glorious fun which the fortunate +eighteen had ahead of them. + +With nine to a boat there was considerable crowding; but this came mostly +on account of the tremendous amount of material carried. Why, one would +almost be inclined to think those boys were going off for a whole three +months, instead of not more than two weeks at most, to judge from the +stuff they carried. It takes boys a long time to learn to plan such trips +as this in light marching order, doing without everything save absolute +necessities. + +Why, there was Bobolink, who ought to have known better, actually trying +to get Paul to allow him to take along that little garden pump, with its +line of hose. Just because it had come in so happily when those jokers +meant to cut the hawser, and set the two boats adrift, Bobolink declared +there could be no telling how many times it would prove a blessing; but +Paul utterly refused to carry such a burden; and so in the end it was +put ashore, and given in charge of the twins to return in safety to the +Link garden. + +When nine o'clock struck, everything seemed to be ready. + +"I can't think of anything else; can you. Jack?" Paul asked his second in +command, and who was to take charge of the _Speedwell_, while Paul +himself ran the other craft. + +"I see you've got the extra gas aboard, and that was one thing I had on +my mind," replied Jack. "There's nothing else that I know. Look at +William Carberry, will you? I honestly believe he's figuring in his mind +right now whether he dares go, against his home order, and jump aboard, +to sail with us." + +"I wouldn't let him, now that I know he couldn't get permission," +remarked Paul, promptly. "We want to make a start with a clean record. No +fellow is going without the full permission of his folks. I'd hate to +think that any scout sneaked off, and came anyhow. He wouldn't have a +good time, because all the while he'd be thinking of what was coming when +he got back." + +"Bobolink is rubbing his chin every time he looks at that little garden +pump," Jack went on, chuckling mightily, as though he enjoyed watching +the faces of his comrades, and reading all sorts of things there. "He +just can't see why you wouldn't let him carry it along. I heard him tell +how it would be good for giving us all a clean-off shower bath, when we +went in swimming; and all that sort of thing. When he can't have what he +wants, Bobolink is a hard loser; isn't he, Paul?" + +"Well, he beats any one else in hanging on," replied the other. "Now +take those boxes that little old professor stored one night in your +father's mill--Bobolink just can't get them out of his mind; and he +never will be happy till you find out what was in them. After that he'll +forget all about the things. But if everything is ready, I guess we +might as well start." + +When the _Speedwell_, being on the outside, started to "popping," and +then moved off, there was a cheer from fully five score of throats; +and counting the girls who had also come down to see the beginning of +the motorboat cruise, there must have been nearly double that number +on the bank. + +Then the roomier _Comfort_ also made a start, and following in the wake +of the pilot boat, turned until her nose pointed down-stream. Flags were +flying from fore and aft of both boats; and the boys waved their +campaign hats, while they sent back hearty cheers in answer to the many +good wishes shouted after them by the crowd ashore, while Bobolink blew +cheery blasts on his bugle, and Bluff Shipley would have beaten a lively +tattoo on his drum, only it had been decided best to leave that +instrument at home. + +And with all this noisy send-off, the two boats began to chug-chug down +the Bushkill, bound for that far-away island in Lake Tokala, about which +so many strange stories had from time to time been told. + +"Well, we're off at last, Bobolink," said Jack, who had that individual +aboard with him. + +"That's right, and everything seems lovely, with the goose hanging high," +replied the other. "But seems to me the troop owes us guards a vote of +thanks for serving as we did. Just think what a lot of grunters we'd have +been this fine morning, if our boats had been set adrift, and brought up +on the rocks down below, with chances of holes being knocked in the +sides! Say, we've got a whole lot to be thankful for, Jack; and my old +garden pump stood up to the racket first-rate, too." + +"That's true, Bobolink; and as soon as we're settled in camp I'm going to +make sure that the troop acknowledges its indebtedness to you four +fellows by a vote of thanks, see if I don't." + +"Oh say, now, I didn't mean to hint that way," objected the other, +turning a little red in the face with confusion. "We only did our duty, +after all, if we did lose a lot of sleep. But then, I guess we got as +much as a lot of the fellows that went to bed at home. Yes, we're off at +last, and things look great. I'm as happy as a lark, and that free from +care--well, I would be, that is, if only somebody could up and give me +just a hint what those boxes had in 'em. It was so funny to have that +queer professor store 'em with your father in his mill; and then to have +somebody sneakin' around, wantin' to steal them. Needn't grin at me that +way, Jack; you know I'm a little weak in that quarter. I sure _do_ want +to know! Don't suppose you've heard anything new since I talked with you +last about it?" and as Jack shook his head in the negative, Bobolink +looked disappointed, and turned away. + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +STUCK FAST IN THE MUD + + +"About three mile's below Stanhope now; aren't we, Paul?" asked Jud +Elderkin, the leader of the second patrol, who, with Bluff, Nuthin, +Joe Clausin, Gusty Bellows, Old Dan Tucker, Phil Towns and Little +Billie, constituted the crew of the _Comfort_, commanded by the scout +master himself. + +Jack had been given charge of the other boat, because Frank Savage was +not feeling any too well, though probably he had not let his folks know +about it, lest he be kept at home. + +"More than that, Jud," answered the other; "and in the most ticklish part +of the river, too. I ought to signal the other boat to slow up some more. +You see, while there are no rocks around here, the eddies form sandbars +that keep changing, just as I understand they do away out in the big +Mississippi, so that a pilot on his way up-river finds a new channel cut +out, and bars that were never there when he went down a week before." + +"And notice, too, that Jack's given over the wheel to Bobolink, while he +is back looking after the motor. Now, Bobolink is a cracker-jack of a +fellow to get up all sorts of clever schemes for sprinkling creepers in +the night; but he's a little apt to be flighty when it comes to running a +boat. There! what did I tell you, Paul; they've run aground, as sure as +you live!" + +"You're right, Jud; and it looks like the _Speedwell_ might go over on +her beam-ends, the way she's tilted now. Good for Jack; he's ordering +them all over on the upper side! That may keep her from toppling over!" +Paul exclaimed, as he gave the wheel a little turn, and headed straight +for the boat in peril. + +"Wow! that was a right smart trick of Jack's!" cried Jud, in admiration. +"If he'd lost his head, like some fellows I know might have done, +nothing'd ever kept that boat on her keel. And just to think what a nasty +job we'd have on our hands, trying to right her again, and before our +great trip had hardly started." + +"Yes," added Old Dan Tucker, who happened to be close to them, "that +ain't the worst of it. You know the main part of the grub's aboard the +other boat Think of those juicy hams floatin' off down the Bushkill, with +not a single tooth ever bein' put in 'em; and all that bread and stuff +soaked. Oh! it gives me a cold shiver to even think of it," for Dan loved +the bugle call that announced dining time better than any other music. + +The greatest excitement prevailed aboard both boats. Jack seemed to be +keeping his crew perched along the upper rail, where their weight had the +effect of holding the boat with the narrower beam from toppling over on +her side. It looked like a close shave, as Jud Elderkin said, with that +swift current rushing past on the port quarter, and almost lapping the +rim of the cockpit. + +Of course, as soon as she struck Jack had shut off power, so that the +boat was now lying like a stranded little whale. + +Paul brought up alongside, looking out that he did not strike the same +unseen sandbar. + +"Take this rope, some of you, and make fast to that cleat at the stern," +Paul called out, giving a whirl that sent it aboard the tilted motorboat. + +"What are you meaning to do, Paul; give us a pull back?" asked Jack, who +did not seem to be one-half so "rattled" by the mishap as some of the +other fellows; simply because he had the faculty of keeping his wits +about him in an emergency. + +"That's the only way I can see," came the reply. "And as the stern +is under water, Jack, what's the matter with backing when we start +to pulling?" + +"Not a thing, that I can see," answered the skipper of the _Speedwell_; +"But I hope she slides off all right." + +"Have your crew get as far aft as they can," continued Paul. "That will +lighten the bow, more or less. And keep them all on the side they're on; +only as soon as she drops back on an even keel, they must get over, so +she won't swing to starboard too much. All ready, now?" + +"Yes, the rope's tied fast to the cleat, and unless you yank that out by +the roots, the boat's just _got_ to move! Say when, Paul," with which +Jack again bent over the three horse-power motor with which the faster +boat was equipped. + +Paul took one look around before giving the word. He wanted to make sure +that everything was in readiness, so there might be no hitch. A mistake +at that critical stage might result in bringing about the very accident +they were striving to avoid, and as a consequence it was wise to make +haste slowly. That is always a rule good scout masters lay down to the +boys under their charge. "Slow but sure" is a motto that many a boy would +be wise to take to himself through life. + +And when Paul had made certain that everything was in readiness he +started the motor of the _Comfort_, reversing his lever; so that every +ounce of force was exerted to drag the companion boat off its sandy bed. + +Jack complied with the requirements of the situation by also starting +his motor the same way; and with the happiest results. + +"Hurrah! she's moving!" cried little Nuthin, who was not in danger, but +just as much excited as though the reverse had been the case. + +"There she comes!" yelled several of the anxious scouts, as the +_Speedwell_ was seen to start backward. + +"One good pull deserves another; eh, fellows?" cried the delighted +Bobolink, who was wondering whether Jack would ever entrust the wheel to +his care again, after that accident; but he need not have worried, for +somehow the skipper did not seem to feel that it was his fault. + +And Bobolink, when he was again placed in charge of the wheel, felt that +he had had a lesson that would last him some time. In this sort of work +there could be no telling what was going to happen; hence, each scout +would be wise to remember the rule by which they were supposed to always +be guided, and "be prepared." That meant being watchful, wakeful, +earnest, and looking for signs to indicate trouble, so that should it +come they would not be caught napping. + +After a little while they came in sight of Manchester, with its smoking +stacks, and its busy mills. Possibly the news of the expedition of the +Stanhope Troop had been carried to the boys down here. At any rate, there +was a group of several fellows wearing the well known khaki-uniform, who +waved to them from the bank and acted as though wishing the expedition +success. They were pretty good fellows, those Manchester scouts, and the +Stanhope boys liked them much more than they did the members of the +Aldine troop up the river. Everybody knows there is a vast difference in +boys; and sometimes even the fellows in various towns will seem, to be +built along certain lines, having pretty much the same leading +characteristics. The Manchester lads had proven a straight-forward set in +what competitions the several troops had had so far. And hence every +fellow aboard the two boats swung his hat, and sent back hearty cheers. + +"What's the matter with Manchester? She's all right!" they called, in +unison, as Gusty Bellows took upon himself the duties which, on the ball +field, made him invaluable as the "cheer captain." + +His name was really Gustavus Bellows; but that was easily corrupted into +Gusty when the fellows learned on his first coming to Stanhope what a +tremendous voice he had. + +About a mile or so below Manchester, Paul had said, the mouth of what +had once been Jackson Creek, might be found. Several of the boys +could remember having heard more or less about that abandoned canal; +perhaps the Manchester lads knew about it, since it was closer to +their home town. + +Everybody, then, was anxiously scanning the shore on the left, because +they knew it must lie somewhere along there. + +"I see the mouth!" exclaimed Phil Towns, who had very keen eyesight. +"Just look on the other side of that crooked tree, and you'll glimpse +a little bar that juts out. That must be on the upper side of the +creek's mouth; because Paul said bars nearly always form there. How +about that, Paul?" + +"Go up head, Phil; you've struck the bull's eye," replied the other, with +a laugh, as he began to head in toward the crooked tree mentioned, and +which doubtless he took for his landmark when in search of the creek. + +The _Comfort_ was in the lead now. Jack was content to play "second +fiddle," as he called it. As Paul had gone through the disused canal in +his canoe, exploring it pretty thoroughly, he must act as pilot. + +Once they had pushed past the mouth of the creek they found a rather +disheartening prospect. The water seemed very low, so that they could see +bottom everywhere. Even Paul frowned, and shook his head. + +"It surely must have lowered several inches since I was here yesterday," +he declared, in dismay. + +"Think we'll get through safely?" queried Jud Elderkin, anxiously. + +"I hope we may," replied the scout master; "but we've just got to creep +along, and be mighty careful. You see, most of the bed of this canal is +mud, and not sand. Once the sharp bow starts to rooting in that, there's +no telling how far we'll explore before letting up. And it's surprising +how that same mud clings. I could hardly work my light canoe loose two or +three times. Just seemed like ten pair of hands had hold of her, and were +gripping tight. Easy there, Jack, take another notch in your speed, old +fellow! Crawl along, if you can. And have the poles ready to fend off, if +we get into any bad hole." + +The boys were strung along the sides of the slowly moving motorboats. +Every fellow came near holding his breath with nervousness. + +"Excuse me from getting stuck here in this nasty mess," remarked Nat +Smith, on board the roomier boat with Jack, Bobolink, Tom Betts, Andy +Flinn, Curly Baxter, Spider Sexton, Frank Savage and Bob Tice. + +"Why, we might stay here a week," observed the last mentioned, in a voice +that told plainly how little he would relish such a mishap, when they had +planned such splendid times ahead. + +"All summer, if it didn't rain, because the creek would get lower all +the time." Paul himself observed, with emphasis, wishing to make every +scout resolve to avoid this catastrophe, if it were at all possible. + +"Who'd ever think," remarked Jud, "that there was such a queer old +place as this not more'n seven miles away from home? And not one of us +ever poked a boat's nose up this same creek before Paul came down, to +spy out things." + +"Oh! well, there's a reason for that," replied Phil Towns, who knew all +about everything that had ever happened in and around Stanhope. "Until +lately, when the scouts organized in these three towns, the boys of +Stanhope and those of Manchester never had much to do with each other. +Many's the stone fight I've been in with those big mill chaps. Sometimes +we whipped them; and then again they chased us right home. So no Stanhope +boy ever dared go far down the river in the old days. That's the reason, +I guess, why none of us ever tried to explore this place. Say, we seem to +be getting in worse and worse, Paul. It isn't more'n a foot deep over +there on the right, and less'n ten inches here on the left." + +"I know it, Phil, and I'm beginning to be afraid we'll have to back out +of this the best way we can," replied the scout master, reluctantly; for +his heart had been set on carrying out this plan, and he hated to be +compelled to give it up. + +Hardly had he spoken than the boat brought up with a jolt that came near +throwing several of the scouts into the water and mud. They had run +aground after all! Paul turned the motor to the reverse, and the little +propeller fairly sizzled in its mad efforts to drag the craft back into +clear water, but it was just as Paul had said--there seemed to be +innumerable hands clinging fore and aft that refused to let go. And in +spite of all the work of the motor they did not move an inch. + +"Rotten luck!" exploded Jud Elderkin, as he looked helplessly around, as +if to see whether a fellow could at least jump ashore; but since ten feet +of that ooze lay on either side, he failed to get much encouragement. + +"Ahoy, _Speedwell_, you'll have to give us a lift!" called Paul, making a +megaphone out of his hands. + +"Y-y-yes, t-t-turn about's f-f-fair p-p-play," added Bluff, waving his +bugle. "We p-p-pulled you off, and n-n-now you g-g-got to return the +f-f-favor." + +"Listen!" said Paul, sharply; "Jack's calling something." + +And as they all lined up along the side of the _Comfort_ they heard +Jack's voice come across the forty feet of water and mud, saying: + +"Only wish we could, Commodore; but sad to say, we're stuck about as fast +in this lovely mess as you are, and can't budge her an inch!" + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +WHAT THE WATER GAUGE SHOWED + + +"Well, here is a pretty kettle of fish!" grunted the disgusted Jud. "We +seem to take to sandbars and mud flats today to beat the band." + +Paul had stopped the motor, since it seemed useless. But of course he did +not mean to give up trying to get the boat off. + +"One thing's sure," he said, positively, when the others gathered around +him, as if in this emergency they looked to the scout master to invent +some method of beating the sticky mud at its own game; "every minute we +stay here makes it all the worse for us." + +"Yes, because our weight is sure to make the boat sink deeper in her +nest!" declared Little Billie, leaning far over the side, as if to see +how far down in her muddy bed the boat lay. + +"Yes, that's one thing," added Paul; "but another is the fact that the +creek is falling all the time. Unless it rains, there'll soon be nothing +but mud around us. Now, every fellow crowd back here, and leave the bow +as free as we can. That might loosen the grip of the mud; and when I +turn on the motor at full speed again, let's hope she'll move." + +It was a sensible suggestion; and indeed, about the only thing possible, +since the other boat, being in the same fix, could not come near, either +to give a friendly tug, or take off the _Comfort's_ crew. + +When he had them all as far in the stern as they could get, with a +warning not to allow themselves to be shaken loose, unless they wanted a +mud bath, the skipper started his motor working. + +When it was going at full speed the boat quivered and strained, but did +not move, so far as any one could see; and they were all eager to detect +the first sign of motion. + +"No good!" sighed Jud. "Might as well look the thing in the face, +fellows. Here we stay, and eat up all our grub, day after day. Ain't it +fierce, though? How d'ye suppose we'll ever stand it? If anybody had a +pair of wings now, and could fly ashore, we might get help to pull us +out. But we couldn't use our wigwag flags, even if we tried, because +who'd see 'em? Oh! what tough luck!" + +Paul may have felt somewhat discouraged himself, but he was not the +fellow to betray the fact--so early in the game, at least. + +"Well, Jud," he said, soberly, "perhaps we may have to stick it out +here for a while, but I hope it won't be as bad as you say. And make +up your mind that if we do, it'll be a mighty strange thing, with +eighteen wide awake scouts to think up all sorts of schemes and dodges +that we can try." + +"That's the stuff, Paul!" exclaimed Phil Towns. "Every fellow ought to +get right down to hard pan, and try to think up some way of beating this +old sticky mud. What's the use of being scouts, if we let a little thing +like this get the better of us? If I could only wade ashore, I'd fix a +hawser to a tree back there, and then by workin' the engine p'raps we +might pull the boat off. I've seen 'em do that with a steamboat, away +down on Indian River, when I was with my folks in Florida last winter. +And it worked, too." + +"Well, try the wading; it looks fine!" laughed Joe Clausin. + +"Don't think of it," called out Gusty Bellows at that moment. "I stuck +this pole down in the soft slush, and my stars! it goes right through to +China, I reckon. Anyhow, I couldn't reach bottom. And if you jumped over, +Phil, you'd be up to your neck at the start. Let's tie a rope under your +arms first, anyhow." + +But Paul quickly put an end to all this sort of talk. + +"There's no use trying anything like that," he said. "Even if you did +reach the shore, we haven't got a rope long and strong enough to do the +business. Besides, we may have help soon." + +With that all the boys began craning their necks, as if they expected to +see some kind of a queer craft that could pass over mud as easily as +other boats did water, bearing down on them, with the design of dragging +them from the bank, + +"Say, what does he mean? For the life of me I can't glimpse anything +worth shucks; and the blooming old _Speedwell_ seems to be sticking tight +and fast, just the same way we are. Loosen up, Paul, and put us wise; +won't you?" pleaded Phil. + +"I didn't mean that any living thing was going to hold out a hand to +us," remarked the smiling scout master; "but look aloft, boys, and see +what's coming." + +With that they followed his instructions. + +A general shout went up. + +"Whee! rain a-comin' down on us! Get the curtains ready to button fast, +boys, or we'll have all our fine stuff soaked through and through." +Little Billie called, himself setting things in motion by seizing one of +the rolled curtains, and letting it come down, to be fastened around the +cockpit by means of gummets and screws. + +"But Paul meant something else," declared Jud Elderkin, wisely. "You see, +if only that rain does come, and it's heavy enough, there's going to be +a lot more water in this old canal than we need to pull through with. You +know how quick the Bushkill River rises; and I guess it's the same way +with the Radway." + +"Oh! don't we wish that there'll just be a little old cloud-burst!" cried +Gusty Bellows. "I could stand anything but staying here seven or ten +days, doin' nothing, only eat, and stare at this mud, and wish I was back +home. Come on, little clouds; get a move on you, and let's hear you growl +like thunder." + +They had by now called the attention of the others to the prospects for +rain. Indeed, as soon as the first curtain fell, some of Jack's crew took +note of the significant fact, and they could be seen looking up at the +blackening heavens. There had been very few times in the past when those +boys had hoped it would rain. Perhaps, when they were kept home from a +picnic--for reasons--some of them may have secretly wished the clouds +would let down a little flood, so that those who had been lucky enough to +go, might not have such a laugh on them after all. + +But certainly they never felt just as they did now, while watching the +play of those gathering storm clouds. + +"And the best of the joke is," commented Jud, with a grin, "that lots of +the good folks at home right now are looking up at those same black +clouds, and pitying us boys. They don't realize how we're just praying +that the rain won't turn out a fizzle, after all. Wasn't that a drop I +felt?" + +[Transcriber's note: Beginning of sentence missing from original text] +till that gray gets nearly overhead," remarked Paul, pointing up +at a line marked across the heavens about half-way toward the horizon, +and in the direction of the wind. + +"It's getting dark, anyway," remarked Nuthin, rather timidly; for truth +to tell, the small boy had never ceased to remember how, earlier in the +season, when in camp up near Rattlesnake Mountain, a terrible storm had +struck them and as he clung desperately to the tent they were trying to +hold down, he had actually been carried up into the branches of a tree, +from which position only the prompt work of his fellow scouts had finally +rescued him. + +"And look at that flash of lightning, would you?" echoed Joe Clausin. +"Wow! that was a heavy bang; wasn't it? Tell you now, that bolt must 'a +struck somethin'! Always does, they say, when it comes quick like that." + +"How's the cover; just as snug as you can make it, boys?" demanded Paul; +"because we'll likely get a bit of a blow first, before the rain comes, +and it'd be a bad job if we lost this whole business. Stand by to grab +hold wherever you can. After that, if we weather it all right, there'll +be no trouble." + +"And say, she's coming licketty-split, believe me," called Jud. "I c'n +hear it hummin' through the trees over there like the mischief. Take +hold, everybody; and don't let it get away from you!" + +"We'll all go up together this time, then!" muttered little Nuthin; but +with the grit that seemed a part of his nature, once he started in to do +anything, he also seized the canvas covering at the bottom, and set his +teeth hard. + +With a roar the wind struck them. Had it come from the right quarter Paul +believed it might have helped work them loose; but it happened +unfortunately that just the reverse was the case. If anything, they were +driven on the mud-bank all the harder. + +But at any rate the tarpaulin canopy did not break loose, and that was +something to be satisfied with. + +The wind whooped and howled for perhaps three minutes. Then it died down, +as if giving up the attempt to tear the boat's top out of the hands of +the determined boys. + +"The worst's over, fellows!" called Paul, breathing hard. + +"Hurrah! that's better'n saying it is yet to come. How'd the _Speedwell_ +make out?" Jud asked, sinking back on a thwart, the better to find some +place to peep out. + +"Seems to be all there," replied Nuthin, who had been quicker to look +than the more clumsy Jud. "She's got her cover on, and I guess that means +they're safe and sound; but she don't seem to be floatin' worth a cent. + +"No more are we; but listen, there comes the rain. Now for it," observed +Paul, as with a rush the water began to descend, rattling on the roof of +the canopy cover. + +"Fine! Keep right along that way for a while, and something's bound +to get a move on it, which I hope will be our two boats!" cried +Gusty Bellows. + +"Did you ever hear it come down heavier than that?" demanded Old Dan +Tucker, as he looked anxiously around to see that none of the cargo was +exposed to the flood. + +"Wonder if this old thing sheds water?" suggested Jud, looking up at the +heavy canopy as though he fancied that he felt a stream trickling down +the back of his neck. + +"You can bank on it," declared Joe Clausin. "Anything Mr. Everett owns +has got to be gilt-edged. And he'd never stand for a leaky canopy. +What're you lookin' at out there, Paul?" for the scout master was leaning +a little out on the side away from their companion boat in misery. + +"Why, you see," replied the scout master, drawing his head back, "I +fixed a little contrivance here, just before the storm broke, and I'm +looking now to see whether it shows the least gain in water. I marked +this pole with inches, and rammed it just so far in the mud. If the water +starts to rising any, I can tell as soon as I look." + +"And is she going up yet?" asked Jud, eagerly, + +"Well, it wouldn't be fair to expect that for some time yet," replied +Paul. "At the best I expect we'll have to stay here an hour or so, until +the water up-stream has a chance to come down. I hope it may surprise me, +and get here quicker than that. And boys, if we have to spend all that +time doing nothing, why we might try that little oil stove Mr. Everett +has, and see how it can get us a pot of coffee, with our cold lunch." + +"What time is it now?" asked Jud; while Old Dan Tucker pricked up his +ears, at the prospect of "something doing" along his favorite line. + +"Going on eleven; and I had my breakfast awful early!" remarked +Little Billie. + +"And I had hardly a bite--reckon I was too much excited to eat--so I'm +mighty near starved right now," declared Dan Tucker; but then the boys +had known him to put up that same sort of a plea only an hour after +devouring the biggest meal possible, so they did not expect to see him +collapse yet awhile from weakness through lack of food. + +All the same, Paul agreed that it might serve to distract their minds if +they did have lunch. He also asked Jud to get in communication with those +on the other boat, if the rain had let up enough for them to exchange +signals, and by means of the flag, tell them what those on the _Comfort_ +meant to do. + +Just as Bobolink, who answered, had informed them that those under Jack +were about to follow the same course, Paul took another glance at his +rude water gauge. + +When he drew in his head, Jud, who had been waiting to tell what the +others reported, saw that Paul was smiling as though pleased. + +"What's doing, Commodore?" he asked. + +"The water has risen half an inch, and is still going up," replied Paul. + +At that there was a roar of delight--only Old Dan Tucker was so busy +watching the lunch being got ready, he did not seem to hear the +joyous news. + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +ON THE SWIFT RADWAY + + +"Let me work my flags a little, and tell the other boat the news!" +suggested Jud; and as no one objected he got busy. + +It was good practice, and he had something worth while to communicate, so +Jud enjoyed the task. + +By the time he was through, lunch was ready, the coffee having boiled +enough to please the most critical among the boys. + +"Rain seems to be letting up some," remarked Gusty Bellows, as they +gathered around to discuss what was to be their first meal of the trip. + +"Oh! I hope it isn't going to tantalize us, and raise our hopes only to +dash 'em down again," said Gusty. + +"From the signs I don't think we're through with it all yet," Paul +observed; and as they had considerable faith in the acting scout master +as a weather prophet, there arose a sigh of satisfaction at this remark. + +"Take a look, and see if she's still moving up the scale, Paul," begged +the anxious Phil Towns. + +When this had been done, there was a look of eager expectancy on +every face. + +"Over a full inch since the start," Paul reported. + +"And that's nearly half an hour back," complained Gusty. "Gee! if it goes +up as slow as that, we'll be camping here at sun-down, sure, fellers." + +"Oh! I don't know," Paul put in, confidently; "you must remember that +the rain has fallen all over the watershed that supplies both these +rivers; and this canal now serves as a link between the two. If either +one rises a good deal, we're just bound to get the benefit of that +little flood. Even at an inch an hour we could be moving out of this +before a great while. And I expect that the rise will do better than +that, presently. Just eat away, and wait. Nothing like keeping cool when +you just have to." + +"Yes, when you tumble overboard, like I did once on a time," chuckled +Jud. "I kept perfectly cool; in fact, none of you ever saw a cooler +feller; because it was an ice-boat I dropped out of; and took a header +into an open place on the good old Bushkill. Oh! I can be as cool as a +cucumber--when I have to." + +An hour later Paul announced that the rise had not only kept up as he +predicted, but was increasing. + +"Here's good news for you, fellows," he remarked, after examining his +post, "if it keeps on rising like it's doing right now, we'll be starting +in less than another hour!" + +"Whoopee! that suits me!" cried Gusty, enthusiastically. + +"Ditto here," echoed Jud. "I never was born for inaction; like to be +doing something all the time." + +"So do I," Paul observed, quietly; "but when I find myself blocked in one +direction I just turn in another, and take up some other work. In that +way I manage not only to keep busy, but to shunt off trouble as well. Try +it some time, Jud, and I give you my word you'll feel better." + +But that next hour seemed very long to many of the impatient boys. They +even accused the owner of the watch of having failed to wind it on the +preceding night, just because it did not seem inclined to keep pace with +their imagination. + +The water was rising steadily, if slowly, and some of them declared that +there was now a perceptible motion to the boat whenever they moved about. + +Urged on by an almost unanimous call, Paul finally agreed to start the +motor again, and see what the result would be. So Jud sent the order to +the second boat by means of his signal flags. + +When the cheerful popping of the _Comfort's_ exhaust made itself heard, +there was an almost simultaneous cheer from the scouts. + +"We're off!" they shouted, in great glee. + +"Goodbye, old mud bank!" cried Gusty, waving his hand in mock adieu +to the unlucky spot where so much precious time had been wasted. "See +you later!" + +"Not much we will!" echoed Joe Clausin. "I've got that spot marked with a +red cross in my mind, and if this boat ever gets close to it again, +you'll hear this chicken cackle right smart. It's been photographed on my +brain so that I'll see it lots of times when I wake up in the night." + +"How about the other boat?" asked Paul, who was stooping down to fix +something connected with the motor at the time, and could not stop to +look for himself, although he could hear the throbbing of the +_Speedwell's_ machinery. + +"Oh! she slid off easier than we did, I reckon," remarked Old Dan Tucker, +now snuggled down comfortably, and apparently in a mood to take things +easy, since it would be a long time between "eats." + +"Tell them to go slow, all the same, Jud," Paul remarked. + +"You don't seem to trust this creek as much as you might, Paul?" +chuckled Gusty, who was handling the wheel, during the minute that +Paul was busy. + +"Well, after that experience I confess that I'm a little suspicious of +all kinds of mud banks. They're the easiest things to strike up an +acquaintance with, and a little the hardest to say goodbye to, of +anything I ever met. Give her a little twist to the left, Gusty. That +place dead ahead don't strike me as the channel. That's the ticket. I +guess we missed another slam into a waiting mud bank. Now I'll take the +wheel again, if you don't mind." + +"Rain's over!" announced Little Billie. + +"Looks like it, with that break up yonder," Jud remarked, glancing aloft. +"Hope so, anyhow. We've had all the water we needed, and if it kept on +coming we'd be apt to find things kind of damp up there at the island." + +The mention of that word caused several of the boys to glance quickly at +each other. It was as though a shiver had chased up and down their spinal +columns. For Joe and Little Billie, and perhaps Gusty Bellows, were not +quite as easy in their minds about that "ghost-ridden" island as they +might have been; although, if taken to task, all would doubtless have +stoutly denied any belief in things supernatural. + +The _Comfort_ acted as the pilot boat, and led the way, slowly but +surely, with the _Speedwell_ not far behind. The latter had one or two +little adventures with flirting mud banks, but nothing serious, although +on each occasion the cries of dismay from the crew could be plainly heard +aboard the leading craft. + +And so they came in sight of a river that had a decided current, after +the smart shower had added considerably to its flow. By now the sun was +shining, and the rain clouds had about vanished, being "hull-down" in the +distance, as Jud expressed it; for since they were now on a voyage, he +said that they might as well make use of such nautical terms as they +could remember. + +"That's the roaring Radway, I take it," observed Gusty, as all of them +caught glimpses of the river through the trees ahead. + +"Just what it is," replied Paul; "and as it has quite a strong current, +we're going to have our hands full, pushing up the miles that lie between +here and our camping place." + +"But we c'n do it before dark; can't we, Paul?" asked Phil Towns. + +"Sure we can, if nothing happens to knock us out," said Gusty, before the +other could reply. "Why, we've got several hours yet, if we did have such +tough luck in the blooming old canal." + +"We ought to be mighty glad we got off as as easy as we did, that's +what!" declared Old Dan Tucker, who was something of a philosopher in +his way, and could look at the bright side as well as the next one, +always providing the food supply held out. + +Ten minutes later the _Comfort_ was in Radway River, headed +up-stream. Just as Paul had said, the current proved very swift, and +while the little motor worked faithfully and well, their progress was +not very rapid. + +Besides, it kept them always on the watch. No one was acquainted with +the channel, and the presence of rocks might not always be detected from +surface indications. Some of the treacherous snags were apt to lie out +of sight, but ready to give them a hard knock, and perhaps smash a hole +in the bow. + +And so Paul stationed two boys in positions where they could watch for +every suspicious eddy, which was to be brought to his attention +immediately it was discovered. + +An hour passed, and they were still moving steadily up the river. Paul, +in reply to many questions by his impatient comrades, announced that to +the best of his knowledge they ought to arrive at their destination an +hour and more before dark; which pacified the croakers, who had been +saying the chances were they would have to spend their first night on the +bank, short of the island by a mile or more. + +"That's all right," Old Dan Tucker had remarked; "just so long as we get +ashore in time to build our cooking fire, it suits me." + +Everything seemed to be moving along with clock-like regularity, the +boat breasting the current and throwing the spray in fine style, when +Jud gave a cry. + +"Something's happened to the _Speedwell_!" he announced. + +Of course every eye was instantly turned back, and they were just in time +to see something that announced the truth of Jud's assertion. + +Andy Flinn stood up in the bow of the second boat, which no longer +chugged away as before, and he threw something out that splashed in +the water. + +"It's their anchor!" cried Jud. "Either somebody's overboard, or else +their motor's broken down!" + +"It's the motor, I guess," Paul observed. "Get out our anchor, and +follow suit." + + + + +CHAPTER X + +DODGING THE SNAGS AND THE SNARES + + +A minute later both motorboats lay anchored in the middle of the +swift-flowing Radway, and about sixty feet apart. + +"What's the matter?" shouted Jud, taking it upon himself to learn the +facts in the quickest possible time, so that signal flags were not used. + +"Something's happened to our motor; but Jack thinks he can fix her up, +given a little time," came in the voice of Bobolink. + +"Well, call on us if we can help out any," Paul shouted; for the slapping +of the water against the sides of the boat, as well as over the stones on +either hand, made it hard to hear plainly. + +"What if they can't fix the motor up?" remarked Phil Towns; "I hope that +won't mean we've got to spend the whole night out here in the middle of +the river." + +"Oh I if it comes to the worst, we can tow her ashore; and then it's camp +on the river bank for ours," announced Paul, cheerfully. He always seemed +to have plans made up in advance, as though anticipating every trouble +that could arise, and getting ready for it. + +"Huh! that mightn't be so bad, after all," grunted Joe Clausin; and even +Gusty Bellows and Little Billie nodded their heads, as if agreeing that +there were things less desirable than camping on the bank. + +The minutes dragged along, until half an hour had gone. Even Paul began +to show signs of restlessness. He finally made a megaphone of his hands, +and called to Bobolink: + +"Tell Jack to step up; I'd like to ask him a question or two." + +"Ay, ay, sir," replied the other, touching his forelock in true +man-o'-war style, and immediately the head of Jack appeared. + +"What's the good word, Jack?" asked the Commodore of the expedition. "Can +you make the mend, d'ye think; and just about how long is it going to +take you?" + +"Between five and ten minutes, not more," came the reply; "I've got the +hang of it now, and the end's in sight." + +"Whoopee! that sounds good to me!" shouted Gusty Bellows, waving his hat. + +Five minutes had hardly passed before they heard the familiar pop-pop-pop +of the _Speedwell's_ motor exhaust. + +"How is it?" called Paul once more. + +"Fine and dandy," answered Bobolink, waving his bugle; and giving a few +vigorous blasts to indicate that victory was nigh. + +"They're hauling in the anchor, which is a good sign," declared Nuthin. + +Presently both boats were again breasting the stream. Apparently no +serious result had come from the accident, save that more than a good +half-hour had been wasted. But still Paul declared that he had hopes of +making their destination before darkness set in. + +The sun was getting very low, and the river looked desolate indeed. It +was bordered by swampy land; and where the ground showed, there seemed to +be such a vast number of rocks that farming had never been attempted. + +"What d'y'e suppose is in those marshes?" Gusty asked, after they had +passed about the fifth. + +"I understand that a lot of cranberries are gathered here every Fall, and +sent down to the cities for the market," Jud Elderkin replied. + +"And seems to me a bear was killed last year somewhere up here," Nuthin' +put in, rather timidly. "So I'm glad you brought that gun along, Paul. We +are not lookin' for a bear, because we never lost one; but if he _did_ +come to camp it'd be nice to feel that we could give the old chap a warm +reception." + +"Huh! I can see the warm reception he'd get," chuckled Jud. +"Seventeen trees would each one have a scout sitting up in the +branches as quick as hot cakes. Guess Paul would have to be the +reception committee all alone." + +"Don't you believe it," remarked Gusty Bellows; "You'd see me making for +the axe in a _big_ hurry, I believe in an axe. It makes one of the +greatest weapons for defence you ever saw. I've practiced swinging it +around, and I know just how to strike." + +"Well, we'll remember that; won't we, fellows?" remarked Jud, with a +laugh. "Plenty of axe exercise Gusty needs, to keep him in trim for +bears; and I can see now how our firewood is going to be attended to." + +They kept pushing on all the while; and there was never a time that the +lookout did not have to keep his eyes on the alert, because of the traps +and snares that lay in wait for the voyagers up the rough Radway. + +"Great river, I don't think!" Joe Clausin ventured to remark, after they +had done considerable dodging, to avoid a mass of rocks that blocked the +way in a direct line. + +"Still, you'll notice that there's always a passage around," said Paul. +"It's that way with nearly everything. Lots of times we don't see the +opening till we get right on it, and then all of a sudden, there's the +path out." + +"I guess you're right, Paul," observed Joe. "Things do happen to a fellow +sometimes, in a funny way, and just when he feels like giving up, he sees +the light. You remember a lot of trouble I had once, and how it turned +out splendidly? And so I learned my lesson, I sure did. I look at things +different now. It showed me how silly it is to worry over things that you +can't help." + +"But all the same," remarked Gusty, "I wish we had a squint at that same +old lake ahead. It's getting sunset, and beyond, Paul." + +"I know it, and we must be pretty near the place now," replied the scout +master. "Unless we see it inside of ten minutes I'll have to give the +word to turn in to the shore at the next half-way decent landing, where +there seems to be enough water to float our boats." + +"There's a good place right now," declared Joe, pointing; "and we +mightn't run across as fine a landing again." + +"Ten minutes, I said," repeated Paul, positively; because he believed +that there were certain signs to tell him they would come in sight of +the big lake, from which the Radway flowed, after they had turned the +next bend. + +Somehow the others seemed to guess what he had in mind, and all were +anxiously watching as they drew near the bend. + +As the trees ceased to shut out their view, they gave a shout of delight, +for the lake was there, just as Paul had anticipated. + +"Whew! she's a big place, all right!" declared Jud, as they looked toward +the distant shore, where the trees seemed lost in the shadows. + +"I never dreamed there was a lake like this so near Stanhope," declared +Joe, as he stared. "That one up by Rattlesnake Mountain could be put in a +corner of Tokala, and wouldn't be missed. And say, that must be the +island over yonder; don't you think so, Paul?" + +"Look and see if you can sight a cedar growing on the top of the hill +that they say stands in the middle of the island," suggested the scout +master, still busy at the wheel; for the danger was not yet all over, as +they had not entered the lake itself, though very near. + +"It's there, all to the good!" announced Jud. + +"Anybody could see that" added Gusty, who was a little jealous of the +superior eyesight of several of his comrades, he being a trifle +near-sighted. + +"Well, if we are going to make a job of it, the sooner it's over the +better," was the queer remark Joe made; but no one paid any particular +attention to his words, they were so taken up with watching the island. + +And so the leading motorboat left the noisy waters of the Radway, and +glided into the smoother lake, much to the satisfaction of the crew; for +the boys had grown tired of the constant need of watchfulness in avoiding +reefs and snags. + +Paul shut off power, and waited to see whether the companion boat +succeeded in reaching the calm waters of the big lake as successfully as +they had done. As it was now pretty close to dark, in spite of the +half-moon that hung overhead, seeing the partly hidden rocks was not an +easy task. + +And so he watched with not a little concern the progress of the +_Speedwell_ during those last few minutes. But Jack was alive to the +situation; and managed to bring his boat safely through, being greeted +with a cheer from those on board the waiting _Comfort_. + +"Now it's straight for the island!" called out Bobolink, as the boats +drew together, and the motors started as cheerfully as if they had not +undergone a hard day's work from the time the voyagers left Stanhope. + +"We'll have to make camp by firelight, that's plain," grumbled Gusty. + +"What's the odds, so long as we get fairly comfortable for the night?" +Bobolink retorted, being one of the kind who can make the best of a bad +bargain when necessary. "All we want to do is to get the tents up and a +fire going, so we can cook something. Then in the morning we'll do all +the fancy fixing you can shake a stick at, and try out all the new +wrinkles every fellow's had in mind since our last camp. This is what I +like. A lake for me, with an island in it that nobody lives on, but +p'raps an old wildcat or a she bear with cubs." + +"But they say something _does_ live on it, and that he's a terror too; a +real wild man that's got hair all over him like a big baboon--I heard it +from a man that saw him once, and he wouldn't lie about it either," Joe +Clausin called out. + +Although the rest of the scouts mocked him, and pretended to jeer at the +idea of such a thing as a wild man existing so near Stanhope, +nevertheless, as the two motorboats gradually shortened the distance +separating them from the mysterious island, they gazed long at the dark +mass lying on the still water of the big lake and its gloomy appearance +affected them. + +Just as Joe Clausin had said, it had a real "spooky" air, that, at the +time, with night at hand, did not impress them very favorably. + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +THE CAMP ON CEDAR ISLAND + + +It was with extreme caution that the two motor-boats crept along the +shore of the island, with numerous eyes on the lookout for a good +landing place. + +"Seems to be plenty of water right here," remarked Jud, who was sounding +with one of the poles. "Eight feet, if an inch, Paul." + +Paul shut off the power immediately. + +"And this looks like the best sort of place to make our landing," he +said. "If we don't like it, or find a better for a permanent camp in the +morning, we can change. Get busy with the poles, fellows, and shove the +boat alongside that bank there." + +This was readily done, and Jud was the first to jump ashore. He wanted to +be able to say that of the whole troop he had landed before any one else, +ghost or no ghost. + +Soon the others followed suit, even if Joe and Little Billie--and yes, +Gusty Bellows also looked timidly around. There was Nuthin, always +reckoned a rather timorous chap, showing himself indifferent to spirits, +and all such things. What bothered Nuthin concerned material things, like +cats, and dogs, and wandering bears; he snapped his fingers at spooks, +because he had never seen one, and did not believe in "fairy stories," as +he called them, anyway. + +As the second boat came alongside, and her crew swarmed over the side, +there were plenty of hands to do things, though they naturally looked to +Paul for orders. + +"A fire, first, fellows!" called out the scout master; "so we can see +what we're doing. Because it's getting pretty dark around here, with +these trees overhead. Jud, you take charge of that part, and the rest +gather wood." + +Many hands make light work, and in what Bobolink called a "jiffy" there +came plenty of wood of all kinds, from dead branches to small-sized logs. + +Jud, like every true scout, knew just how to go about starting a fire. +True, the recent rain had wet pretty much all of the wood, so that a +tenderfoot would have had a difficult task getting the blaze started, +though after that trouble had been surmounted it would not be so bad. But +Jud knew just how to split open a log, and find the dry heart that would +take fire easily; and in a brief time he had his blaze springing up. + +Then others began to bring some of the things ashore, particularly the +tents, in which they expected to sleep during their stay. + +Most of the boys were deeply impressed by the size of both the lake and +the island; since they had not dreamed that things would be upon such a +large scale. + +Then there was that strange silence, broken only by the constant murmur +of the water passing out, where the Radway River had its source; and +perhaps, when a dry spell lowered the water of the lake, even this might +not be heard. + +It seemed to some of the scouts as though they were isolated from all the +rest of the world, marooned in a desolate region, and with many miles +between themselves and other human beings. + +However, when the white tents began to go up, as the several squads of +workers took hold in earnest, things began to look more cheerful. There +is nothing that chases away the "blues" quicker than a cheerful fire, and +the sight of "homey" tents. + +"In the morning, if we feel like it, we can put up a flagstaff in front, +and fly not only our banner, but Old Glory as well," Paul observed. "And +now, suppose some of you fellows give me a hand here." + +"What you going to do, Paul?" asked Old Dan Tucker, eagerly. + +"Begin to get supper," came the answer. + +"I'll give you a hand there," said the other. + +"Me too," said Nat Smith, who was a clever cook. + +And when the odor of coffee began to steal through the camp, the boys +felt amply repaid for all they had undergone in the rough trip from +Stanhope. They sniffed the air, and smiled, and seemed ready to declare +the expedition a great success. + +More than that, the cooks being blessed with healthy appetites +themselves, had cut generous slices from one of the fine hams, and these +were also on the fire, sizzling away at a great rate, and throwing off +the most tempting odors imaginable. + +It was a happy sight about that time, and showed the best side of camp +life. All of the boys belonging to the Red Fox Patrol at least, had been +through the mill before, and knew that there was another side to the +picture; when the rain descended, and the wind blew with hurricane force, +possibly tearing the canvas out of their hands, and leaving them exposed +to the storm, to be soaked through. + +But of course they hoped nothing of that sort was going to happen to them +on this trip. Once a year ought to be enough. + +If the season of preparation was delightful, what shall be said of that +time when the eighteen boys sat around in favorite attitudes, each with a +cup of steaming coffee beside him, to which he could add sugar and +condensed milk to suit his taste; while on his knees he held a +generous-sized tin pannikin, upon which was heaped a mess of friend +potatoes and ham, besides all the bread he could dispose of? + +"This is the stuff; it's what I call living!" Bobolink remarked. + +"You never said truer words." mumbled Old Dan Tucker, who was about as +busy as a beaver, his eyes sparkling with satisfaction. + +"One thing sure!" declared Spider; "when Dan stops eating, he'll +quit living." + +"Huh! guess all of us will," added Curly Baxter. + +They were in no hurry to finish the feast; and when the end did arrive, +it would take a microscope to discover any crumbs left over. + +"The worst is yet to come," announced Jud, "and that's washing up." + +But all these things had been arranged for beforehand, so that in due +course of time every fellow would have his share of camp duties. Today he +might have to assist in the cooking; tomorrow help wash dishes; the next +day be one of the wood-getters; and then perhaps on the fourth blissful +day, he would be at liberty to just loaf! + +And no doubt that last day was the one most of them would be apt to +enjoy above all else; for otherwise they would hardly have been flesh +and blood boys. + +While those whose duty lay in cleaning up after the meal were engaged, +some of the others joined Paul in bringing the blankets ashore, and +distributing them to the various tents. + +There were three of the latter, which would allow of six boys to each, +perhaps a rather "full house"--but then they could curl up and not take +much room. + +"Aren't we going to keep any watch, Paul?" asked Joe Clausin, when later +on some of the more tired talked of turning in. + +"Watch for what?" demanded Bobolink. + +"Guess Joe thinks Ted Slavin and his crowd might get over here, and throw +stones at our tents, like they did once before," suggested Nuthin. + +"Well, they do say there's a wild man around here," declared Joe, in a +half hesitating way; for he was actually ashamed to expose his belief in +supernatural things for fear of being laughed at. + +"Let Mr. Wild Man come around; who cares?" sang out Bobolink. "Why, the +circuses are always wantin' wild men, you know; and I guess we'd get a +pretty hefty sum now, if we could capture this wonderful critter that's +been living here so long covered with the skins of wild beasts he's ate +up. It's me to hit the rubber pillow I fetched along. And Joe, if you +want to watch, nobody is going to keep you from doing it" + +And with these words Bobolink dodged into the tent that he knew his mess +belonged to; in which action he was followed by numerous other scouts. +Joe, finding himself left in the lurch, cast a fearful glance around at +the heavy growth of timber on one side the camp, the lake being on the +other; after which he shook his head as though the prospect of sitting +there by the dying fire did not appeal very much to him--and crawled +under the flap, too. + +Perhaps it could hardly be said that silence rested on the scene; for +with a dozen and a half boys trying to get to sleep there is always more +or less horseplay. But an hour later, something like quiet settled down. +The fire was dying out, too, since they had no reason for keeping it +going, the night air being balmy. + +Midnight came and went, and it must have been toward two o'clock in the +morning when every boy suddenly sat upright, as though a galvanic shock +had passed in and out of every tent. + +So it had, for the very earth trembled under them, as a terrific +detonation sounded, just as though a bolt of lightning had struck a +nearby tree. And some of the scouts were ready to declare that the +shock had been accompanied by a brilliant electric flash, that almost +blinded them. + +Immediately there began to be an upheaval, as blankets were tossed aside +and the scouts crawled or scrambled from under, uttering all sorts of +exclamations, and apparently too dazed to account for the phenomenon. + +They began to swarm out of the tents, and loud were the outcries of +astonishment when they discovered not a cloud as big as a hand in the +starry heavens. + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +WAS IT A BURSTING METEOR? + + +"Who hit me?" exclaimed Bobolink, rubbing his eyes as he gained his feet +and looked around at the dimly-seen forms of the other scouts; for the +moon had by now sunk behind the horizon. + +"What busted?" demanded Nuthin. "I bet it was that bottle of raspberry +vinegar my sister put in my knapsack. It's gone sour, and exploded, sure +as anything." + +Strange to say, none of the others even bothered laughing at such a +foolish remark as this. They stared at the clear sky overhead, and the +twinkling stars looking down upon them, just as though winking to each +other, and enjoying the confusion of the valiant scouts. + +Even Paul, who generally knew everything, seemed mystified. + +"I declare if I can tell what it was," he said upon being appealed to by +some of the others in the group. "I was sound asleep, like the rest of +you, when all of a sudden it seemed as if the end of the world had come. +I felt the ground shake under me and as I opened my eyes it seemed as if +I was nearly blinded. The flash came and went just like lightning, and +that bang was what would pass for thunder in a storm; but for the life of +me I can't see any sign of trouble up there." + +"And we don't hear anything more; do we?" demanded Jud. + +"Sounded like a big cannon to me," remarked Jack. + +"Couldn't be that the State troops are out, and having manoeuvres, with a +sham battle, could it?" questioned Gusty Bellows. + +"Well, hardly, without somebody knowing about it. And they generally take +up that sort of thing later in the year. There's only one explanation +that sounds a bit reasonable to me," Paul went on. + +"Tell us what that is, then?" asked Bobolink. + +"I've heard about meteors falling, and exploding when they hit the +earth," the scout master went on to say. + +"That's right!" echoed Jack; "and say, they're always accompanied by a +dazzling light, as they shoot through space, burning the air along with +them. Yes, siree, that must have been a big meteor stone." + +"Then it struck the earth right close to our camp, mark me," vowed Jud. + +"Ain't I glad it didn't pick out this spot to drop on," crowed +Nuthin. "Whew! guess we'd have been squashed flatter than that pancake +you hear about." + +"What are meteors made up of--they drop from stars; don't they?" +asked Bob Tice. + +"Oh! there's just millions and billions of 'em flying around loose," said +Phil Towns, who liked to read of astronomy at times. "Lots of 'em happen +to get caught in the envelope of air that surrounds the earth. Then they +fall victims to the force of gravitation, and come plunging down at such +speed that they do really burn the air, just like Jack said. You see, +they're made up for the most part of metals, and our old earth draws 'em +like a monster magnet." + +"Is that what shooting stars are?" Bob went on to ask. + +"Why, yes, they're really small meteors. We often pass through a mess of +'em. I've counted hundreds in a single night," Phil continued, always +willing to give any information he could along his favorite study. + +"Well, they say lightning don't strike in the same place twice; and that +goes with your old buzzing meteors too, I reckon; so what's the use in +our staying up any longer?" remarked Bobolink, who seemed quite satisfied +with the explanation Paul had given of the queer noise, and the flash of +brilliant light. + +So they crawled back into their snug nests, and tried to compose +themselves for sleep. But it is extremely doubtful whether a single one +of those eighteen boys secured so much as a decent cat-nap between that +hour and dawn. + +Despite their apparent belief in the explanation of the phenomenon +advanced by Paul, the boys could not get rid of the notion that that +tremendous crash had something to do with the strange things told about +the haunted island, and which helped to give it its bad name. + +They were up pretty early, too. The first birds were beginning to chirp +in the brush when figures came crawling out of the tents, with a great +stretching of arms, and long yawns. + +Then the lake tempted many of the boys, and a great splashing announced +that those who could swim were enjoying a morning dip while others were +taking a lesson in learning the first rudiments in the art; for Paul +wanted every scout in Stanhope Troop to be able to swim and dive before +the Fall came on. + +The scout master himself watched the proceedings, hardly able to get his +own dip because of his anxiety concerning those who, for the time being, +had been placed in his charge. + +This thing of being responsible for seventeen lively boys is not all that +it may be cracked up to be; especially if the acting scout master is a +conscientious chap, alive to his duties. Paul felt the weight of the +load; but he did not shrink. + +Breakfast was presently under way, and nobody found any fault when +Bobolink announced that he meant to instruct Nat Smith and another boy +just how to go about making those delicious flapjacks for which he +himself had become famous. + +In the cooking contests, at the time the Stanhope Troop carried off their +banner in competition with the troops of Manchester and Aldine, Bobolink +had easily outclassed all rivals when it came to the science of camp +cookery, and his flapjacks were admitted without a peer, so that ever +since, when the boys had an outing, there was always a shout when it was +found that Bobolink was willing to get a mess of cakes ready for their +attention. + +Although most of the boys had looked a bit peaked, and even haggard, when +they first issued from the tents, this had long since vanished. The +frolic in the cool water, and now this feast in the open, proved the +finest tonics possible. + +They were now filled with new energy and pluck. Nobody dreamed of being +frightened away from camp by such a little thing as a meteor bursting +near by, or any other strange happening. Perhaps, when night came around +again, this buoyant feeling might take wings, and fly away; but then, +there would be fourteen and more hours before darkness again assailed +them, and what was the use fretting over things so far removed? + +All had made up their minds to do a lot of things while up at camp, +according to their various tastes. One began to look around for subjects +he could take snapshots of, having a liking for photography. Another got +a companion to take up a station along the shore, so that they could +exchange messages, using the flags and the code. + +Then there were several who evinced a decided interest in finding the +tracks of wild animals, like a raccoon, or a rabbit, or even a squirrel, +when nothing better presented itself. These they minutely examined, and +applied all sorts of theories in forming the story of the trail. In many +cases these proved very entertaining indeed, and Paul was always pleased, +with Jack's assistance, to pass on such things, being adapted through +practical experience to correct errors, and set the beginner straight on +certain facts that he had mixed. + +There were numerous other things to do also. One boy loved to hunt wild +flowers, and as soon as he could coax a mate to accompany him, since Paul +would not allow the scouts to go off alone, he busied himself in the +undergrowth, looking in mossy spots for some of the shy blossoms that +appealed to his collecting taste. + +Another seemed to have a love for geology. He wanted to find specimens +of every sort of stone, and hinted of certain stories of mining having +been carried on in these regions a century or two ago. But as he did not +find any ore that contained precious minerals in paying quantities, +during their stay on Cedar Island, the chances are that his father will +still have to go right along paying his bills, even after he gets into +college later in life. + +The morning was slipping away fast, and they had not found any better +place to settle on for a camp. It seemed that, by the merest chance, they +had hit upon the best spot for a short stay on the island. + +Three of the boys wandered along the shore, fishing. Paul had seen them +pull in several good-sized bass, and began to make up his mind that after +all they were going to have a fish dinner, if the luck held. He was even +debating whether he dared leave camp for a while, and taking his jointed +rod, joined the trio who had wandered around the bend of the eastern +shore of the island; for Paul certainly did love to feel a lively fish at +the end of his line, and could not think of leaving Lake Tokala without +giving its finny inhabitants a chance to get acquainted with him. + +Just as he had about decided that he could be spared for the hour that +still remained until noon, Paul thought he heard a shout. Now, the +scouts had more than a few times given tongue during the morning, when +engaged in some boisterous game; but it struck Paul, whose nerves were +always on the alert for such things, while this responsibility rested on +his shoulders, that there was certainly a note, as of alarm, about this +particular outcry. + +It seemed to come from around that bend, too, where he had seen the three +boys disappear. Even as he looked in that direction, he saw something +come in sight among the rocks that lay so thickly around. It was Gusty +Bellows, one of the anglers; yes, and there was Little Billie just behind +him, taking great leaps that promised to speedily leave the other far in +the lurch. + +Paul's heart seemed to stand still. Where was Jud, who had been in the +company of the two? What could have happened? + +The scout master dropped his rod, which he had been in the act of +jointing, and started on a run to meet the two fishermen; for he +could hear them shouting, though unable to distinguish just what they +were saying. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +THE FOOTPRINTS IN THE SAND + + +Then Paul felt a sensation of sudden relief pass over him. He had +discovered a third figure running, some distance in the rear of the other +scouts; and when he recognized this as Jud Elderkin, he knew that +whatever might have happened to frighten the fishermen, at least none of +them seemed to be in any immediate danger. + +Of course, by this time scouts were springing up all around, and all +heading toward the common centre, which would be where Paul and the +fishermen must meet. + +Little Billie was the first one to arrive, for, being possessed of long +legs, in spite of his name, he could get over ground at a prodigious +rate, given cause. And judging from his ashen face, he had plenty of that +right now. + +"What is it?" demanded Paul, as the other came panting along. + +"Wild man!" gasped Little Billie. + +"Whee!" exclaimed Bobolink, who had managed to get near enough to catch +what was said. + +"'Fraid he nabbed poor Jud!" said Gusty, now reaching the spot, and just +about at his last gasp. + +"Not much he didn't, because there he comes now!" ejaculated Bobolink. + +"Oh! mercy!" exclaimed Little Billie, evidently thinking he meant +the wild man. + +"It's Jud, and all to the good; but even he looks white around the gills, +too, Paul. They must have seen _something_, to give 'em all such a +scare," Bobolink went on to say. + +"You just bet we did; ask Jud!" declared Gusty, just as though he +imagined the others might question their veracity, but would believe the +patrol leader, who was now coming along with great leaps and bounds. + +And presently Jud Elderkin halted at the group. He looked first at Gusty, +and then at Little Billie. There was a question in his eye. + +"Sure, we saw it, too, Jud!" declared Gusty, holding up his quivering +hand just as though he were in the witness box; but then, as his father +was a lawyer, possibly Gusty often experimented on himself, since he +meant to either take up the same pursuit in life, or give his magnificent +voice a chance to earn him a living in the role of an auctioneer. + +"Me too; and say, wasn't it a terror, though?" the tall scout declared. + +"Well, I didn't wait long enough to have any words with the Thing," +admitted Jud. "You see, I happened to be further away from home than the +other fellows, and I knew I'd have more space to cover. So, after letting +out a yell to sort of warn 'em, why I just put for cover. Never ran +faster even between bases. Thought he'd get me sure before I rounded that +bend; but when I looked back, blessed if he wasn't grabbin' up our +strings of fish like fun, and making off with 'em. I don't know right now +whether I'm just scared, or only boiling mad. Tell me, somebody!" + +"A little of both, I guess!" declared Bobolink, grinning. + +"Say, then, it wasn't just a big yarn about that wild man, after all; was +it?" said Tom Betts. + +"How about that, Little Billie; did you see him?" demanded Jud. + +"Did I? Think I was runnin' for my health? Why, he looked all of seven +feet high to me, and covered with long hair. Talk about your Robinson +Crusoe making him a coat of an old nanny goat, that feller was in the +same class; eh, Gusty?" loudly asserted the tall boy. + +"I saw him, all right, don't you forget it," declared the one +addressed. "And I certain sure thought he was after _me_. But if Jud +says he took our nice string of bass, why that changes the thing, and +makes me mad as hops. Think of us workin' all that time, only to fill +up a crazy crank. Next time I go fishin' I'm meanin' to sit home, and +do it off the door step." + +Paul was revolving many things in his mind and trying to understand. + +"I want several of you to go back with me," he said, presently; "the rest +head for camp or go about whatever you were doing." + +"Want to take a squint at his tracks; eh, Paul?" asked Jud. + +"No harm done if we do," remarked Bobolink, thus declaring his intention +of being one of those who were to accompany the leader. + +Jack also went along, and Jud, making four in all; but the last mentioned +refused to budge a foot until he had obtained a healthy-looking club, +which he tucked under his arm. + +"Now, I want to warn that same critter to keep his distance from me," Jud +said, as he led off with long strides. "He gave me one scare, and I +promise you that if he tries that game again there's going to be a warm +time around these regions. But I reckon he's satisfied with all our nice +fish, and we won't see anything of him until he gets good and hungry +again. Wonder if he eats 'em raw, Chinese fashion, or has some way of +making a fire?" + +"What's that over yonder?" asked Paul. + +"Where?" gasped Jud, brandishing his club. + +"Looks like a string of fish; and so, you see, the wild man didn't get +_all_ you fellows caught. We'll just pick that lot up, and trot along," +observed Paul. + +"He got mine, all right; these must have been what one of the other +fellows had. You see, they were so badly rattled they just cut and run, +and held on to their rods only. Yep, there's a second string of fish, and +that accounts for both; but you needn't think mine'll be laying around, +for he got 'em. + +"Well, show me just about where he was when you saw him last," +Paul demanded. + +Jud could easily do this. They found the print of human feet in the +earth. It must have been an unusually large foot that made the marks; and +this tallied with what had been said about the height of the wild man. + +"You're not goin' to try and follow him, I hope, Paul?" asked Jud, +uneasily, as if he drew the line at certain things, ready and willing as +he might be to back the scout master in most ventures. + +"Oh! it wouldn't pay us," retorted Paul. "As one of the boys said, we +haven't lost any wild man; and so far as I know there's no one missing +around Stanhope, so it can't be some man from there. I think we'd do well +to mind our own business in this affair; don't you, fellows?" + +"Yes, I do," replied Jack, "but I was wondering whether this thing will +crop up to give us a heap of bother while we're camping up here." + +"How's that?" asked Bobolink. "There's only one thing that gives me any +carking care, and you know what that is, Jack, old boy. If I only knew +about those boxes, I'd be so much easier in my mind." + +"Well," said Paul, "if this crazy man would steal our fish, he'd just as +lief take anything else we've got that's good to eat. When he smells our +coffee cooking it'll call up some long-forgotten craving for the Java +bean; and first thing you know he'll be invading our camp every night, +hunting around for any old thing he can steal." + +"Now, I like that," said Bobolink, satirically. "Nice prospect, ain't it, +not to be able to step out of the tent of nights, without bumping noses +with that awful Man Friday in wild animal shows? P'raps in self-defense +we may have to do that grand capture act after all, Paul." + +"Well, there's nothing more to learn here, so we might as well turn back +again. As I don't see anything of your string of fish, Jud, I calculate +that he must have gotten away with 'em. We can add a few more to these, +and have enough for a regular feast. Come on, boys, back to camp for us." + +Some way or other it was noticed that during the early afternoon most of +the boys hung around the camp. It seemed to have an especial attraction +for them all. One busied himself sorting over the collection of the +morning in the way of plants. A second was polishing up certain specimens +of quartz he had found, after cracking some of the round stones that had +washed on the island during a flood, possibly many years back. A third +developed his pictures, having brought along his daylight tank. + +And so it went, until Paul smiled to observe what a busy colony he had in +his charge. On his part, he took a rod and line, with some bait, and went +off with Jack to add to the number of fish, so that there would be enough +for all at supper time. And as the others had fished in one direction, +Paul and his chum decided to move in the other. + +They put in an hour with very fair success, considering that it was not +the best part of the day for fishing. + +Of course, as they walked along, keeping close to one another, +occasionally Paul and Jack would chat on various subjects. They also kept +their eyes open, not wishing to be taken by surprise, should that hairy +individual, who seemed to have a craving for fish, rush out at them. + +And more than that, Paul had copied the example set by Jud. It was +fashionable about that time not to walk forth without a nice little Irish +shillelah under one's arm, with which a head could be made to sing +unmercifully, in case of necessity. + +Paul had just had a pretty lively time with a good fish, and had +succeeded in bringing his prize to land, when he happened to look down at +the beach on which he was standing. Bobolink and Tom Betts were coming +along, as though curious to see how fast the stock of provisions for +supper was increasing. + +So Paul bent down to examine something that had caught his attention. The +other three coming up, Jack having joined Bobolink and Tom, found the +scout master still on his hands and knees. + +"Hello! found something, have you?" asked Bobolink. + +"Mebbe the footprints of the ghost!" chuckled Tom, meaning to be +humorous. + +But Jack saw that his chum was very serious; and as he dropped down +beside Paul, he let his eyes fall upon the sand. + +"What's this, Paul?" he remarked, immediately. "Looks like the prow of a +rowboat had been pulled up here--why, that's a dead certainty, because +look at the plain prints of boots here, and several different kinds, +too. Shows that somebody landed here on the island; and Paul, it must +have been _after_ that rain storm, for these marks don't seem to be +washed, as they would be if the rain had beat down on them. What in the +world d'ye suppose it means? Are there people on this queer old Cedar +Island? If there are, who can they be, and why should they hide from +everybody like this?" + +As Jack said this he looked up. Bobolink and Tom were staring at the +plain marks in the sand, with wonderment written on their faces; and even +Paul shook his head. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +TRYING TO FIGURE IT ALL OUT + + +"We'll have to look into this thing," said Paul, finally, seeing that his +three chums were waiting for an opinion from the one they looked up to as +their leader. + +"But what I said was pretty close to the truth; wasn't it, Paul?" +Jack asked. + +"Every word of it" came the ready response, for Paul was always willing +to give every fellow his meed of praise. "The only trouble is, it stops +right where you left off. None of us can say a word after that." + +"How many men were there in the crowd?" asked Tom Betts. + +"I could make out four," replied Jack; "you take another look, Paul, and +see if that's correct." + +"I know it is," remarked the scout master, nodding, "because I counted +them before I called you. And they seemed to lift something heavy from +the boat, which they carried away into the bushes here." + +"Whee! something heavy, eh?" burst out the impetuous Bobolink; "and they +carried it between them, two and two; was it, Paul?" + +"Why, yes, two on each side; if you look close, you can see where they +stepped into each other's footprints," assented the patrol leader. + +"That's so," agreed Bobolink, after bending down hastily; "just +like--er--you've seen the pall-bearers at a funeral!" + +"Oh!" exclaimed Tom, turning a little white at the idea. + +"Of course, that isn't saying it _was_ a funeral," remarked Bobolink, +hastily, as he noticed that Paul glanced at Jack, and the two shook their +heads a trifle, as though the idea failed to impress them favorably. "But +whatever it was, they seemed to find it heavy, the way their toes dug +into the sand here." + +"Yes, it was heavy, all right," admitted Paul. "I think, from the way the +rear men stepped into the prints of the one up head, that whatever they +were carrying could not have been very lengthy; in fact, it must have +been short, but rather broad." + +"Well, that's a smart idea of yours, Paul, and I c'n see how you hit on +it," Bobolink was quick to say, with a look of sincere admiration. + +"But whatever do you reckon would bring four men up here to this lonely +island, carrying some heavy object in a rowboat?" Tom Betts went on. + +"That's where we have to do our guessing," Paul replied. "We don't know; +and as they haven't been obliging enough to write it out, and fasten the +card to a tree, why, we've just got to put on our thinking caps, as my +mother would say." + +"Well, we've had some experience in the past with hoboes; think they +could be a batch of Weary Willies, Paul?" remarked Tom Betts. + +"I'm not ready to say off-hand that they're not," replied the other, +slowly; "but it hardly seems likely. In the first place, every one of +them seemed to be wearing sound shoes. Did you ever know four tramps +to do that?" + +"Well, I should say not," replied Bobolink, scornfully. "It'd be a wonder +if one out of four had shoes that'd hold on without a lot of rope. You +clinched that idea the first thing, Paul." + +"Then what'd you say they were?" demanded Tom. + +Bobolink rubbed his chin reflectively. + +"A heap of difference between plain tramps, and the kind they call yeggs; +isn't there, Paul?" he asked, presently. + +"Everybody says so," came the answer. "Yegg-men are supposed to be the +toughest members of the tramp tribe. They're really burglars or +safe-blowers, who pretend to be hoboes so they can prowl around country +towns, looking up easy snaps about the banks and stores that ought to be +good picking. And so you think these four men might belong to that crowd, +do you, Bobolink?" + +"It's barely possible, anyhow," the one addressed went on, doggedly. "And +I was just trying to remember if I'd heard of any robbery lately. There +was a store broke into over at Marshall two weeks ago, and the thieves +carried off a lot of stuff. But seems to me, the men got nabbed later on. +I'm a little hazy about it, though. But supposin' now, that these four +men had made a rich haul somewhere, and wanted to hide their stuff in a +good place, could they find a better one than up here on Cedar Island?" + +The other three exchanged glances. + +"I guess that's about right," admitted Tom. + +"It's certainly quiet enough to suit anybody; and chances are they +wouldn't be disturbed in a coon's age," declared Jack. "Our coming here +was a freak. It mightn't happen again in many years." + +"And this old island's already got a bad name; hasn't it?" +Bobolink went on. + +"That would help keep people away," admitted Paul. "I've heard of men +coming up in this region winters, trapping the muskrats that swarm in the +marshes; but up to cranberry picking time it's almost deserted." + +"Jack, you must have had an idea, too?" remarked Bobolink. + +"Well, I did; but perhaps the rest of you'll only give me the laugh if I +mention it," replied Jack. + +"All the same, it isn't fair to keep anything back," Tom declared. "My +guess didn't pan out much, and you couldn't have worse luck than that. +So tell us." + +"Yes, go on, Jack, and give us the benefit of your think-box. I've known +you to get away up head more'n a few times, when it came to a live race. +And mebbe some of the rest of us mightn't think so badly of your idea as +you do yourself," and as he said this Bobolink sat down on the sand to +listen, all the while eyeing those mysterious tracks as though he half +expected them to give tongue, and tell the true story of their origin. + +"Oh! well, that seems only fair, so here goes," Jack began. "Somehow I +happened to remember that once on a time I read about some counterfeiters +who had their nest in an old haunted mill, away up in the country." + +"Whee!" Bobolink said, sitting bolt upright. + +"None of the country people would ever go near the place, you see; and +when a light happened to be seen in it at night time, they talked about +the ghost walking, and all that," Jack continued. + +"Huh! that must have been when the boss was paying off his hands," +chuckled Bobolink. "I always heard that was the time the ghost walked." + +"In this case the truth was only found out by some accident," Jack went +on to say, without paying any heed to the interruption. "I think a hunter +was overtaken by darkness, having lost himself in the woods. He was a +stranger, and had never heard about the haunted mill. So, seeing a light, +he went up to ask his way, or if he could get a chance of a bed that +night, I forget which. He saw enough to give him a suspicion; and when he +did get back to the tavern he was stopping at, he sent word to the +Government authorities. A raid resulted, and they caught four +counterfeiters hard at work." + +"_Four,_ you said, Jack!" echoed Tom. + +"Yes, just the same number there seems to be here; but then that's only a +coincidence, because those others are serving ten-year sentences in the +penitentiary. Now, you see, I guess the fact of Cedar Island being said +to have a real ghost got me into the idea of thinking about that story I +read in the paper. Of course it's a silly idea all around." + +"Well, I don't know," said Paul, slowly. + +"You don't mean to say you think it might happen that way here?" demanded +Jack, seeming to be the only one desirous of "shooting holes" in the +proposition he had himself advanced, as Bobolink expressed it later on. + +"It's possible," Paul said, simply. + +"Huh! for my part," spoke up Bobolink, "I think it's more than that, +even. If you asked me straight now, I'd be inclined to say it's +probable." + +"Same here," remarked Tom Betts, eagerly. + +Jack laughed as if pleased. + +"I declare, I really expected to hear you knock my idea all to flinders," +he remarked. + +"But what under the sun could they be carrying in that big box?" asked +Tom Betts. + +"Box!" muttered Bobolink, frowning, as though the word recalled to his +mind a matter that had been puzzling him greatly of late; but he did not +think to say anything further on that subject. + +"Well, sometimes machinery comes that way," suggested Paul. "If these +strange men did turn out to be what Jack said, they might be getting +a press of some kind up here, to do their printing with. I never saw +an outfit, but seems to me they must have such a thing, to make the +bogus bills." + +"That's right," added Tom. "I read all about it not long ago. Wallace +Carberry's so interested in everything about books and printing, that he +clips all sorts of articles. And this one described a kind of press that +had been taken in a raid on some bogus money-makers. Yep, it must have +been machinery they were lugging off here. Whew! just to think of us +bein' mixed up in such a business. I wonder, now, if the Government ever +pays a reward for information about such things." + +"Oh! rats! that's the last thing a scout should bother his head about," +said Bobolink, scornfully. "He ought to see his duty, and do it. Though, +of course, if a nice little present happens along afterwards, why, I +guess there's no law against a scout acceptin' it; eh, Paul?" + +"Certainly not," replied the other, "you've got the idea down pretty +fine, Bobolink. But let's see if we can guess anything else. Then we'd +better go back to camp, and start the rest of the fellows thinking about +it. Perhaps Jud or Andy or Nuthin might dig up something that never +occurred to any of us." + +But although they talked it over for some little time they did not seem +able to conjure up any new idea; everything advanced proved to hinge upon +one of the explanations already spoken of. And in the end they were +forced to admit that they had apparently exhausted the subject. + +"Let's pick up our fish, and stroll back, fellows," proposed Paul, +finally. + +"Lucky to have any fish, with that hog around," remarked Bobolink. + +"Now you're meaning the wild man, I take it?" said Jack. + +"No other; the fellow that drops in on you when you ain't expectin' +company, and just swipes your string of fish like he did Jud's. I might +'a thought Jud was giving us a yarn to explain why he didn't have +anything to show for his morning's work; but both Little Billie and Gusty +saw the same thing. Say, that's another link we got to straighten out. +What's a crazy man doing up here; and is he in the same bunch that made +these tracks?" + +"That's something we don't know," admitted Paul. + +"But we mean to find out," asserted Bobolink, with a determined snapping +of his jaws. + +"Perhaps so--anyhow, we'll make a brave try for it," Paul declared. + +"He wasn't one of these four, that's flat," said Tom Betts. "We all saw +what a big foot the wild man had; and besides, he goes without shoes." + +"Glad to see you noticed all that," commented Paul, who always felt +pleased when any of the troop exhibited powers of observation, since it +proved that the lessons he was endeavoring to impress upon their minds +had taken root. + +They turned their faces toward the camp, and Paul made sure to pick up +the fish he and Jack had caught. + +"With what we'e already cleaned, they'll make a fine mess for the +crowd," he remarked, pointing out an unusually big fellow that had given +him all the fun he wanted, before consenting to be dragged ashore. + +"I notice that you both kill your fish as you get 'em," remarked Tom. + +"I wouldn't think of doing anything else," replied Jack. "It only takes a +smart rap with a club on the head to end their sufferings. I'd hate to +think of even a fish dying by inches, and flapping all over the boat or +the ground, as it gasps its life away. That's one of the things scouts +are taught--to be humane sportsmen, giving the game a chance, whether +fish, flesh or fowl, and not inflicting any unnecessary suffering." + +"Wonder if anything's happened in camp since we came away; because +Bobolink and I have been gone nearly an hour," remarked Tom Betts, to +change the subject; for his conscience reproved him with regard to the +matter Jack was speaking about. + +"What makes you think that?" asked Paul, suspiciously. + +"Oh! nothing; only things seem to be on the jump with us right now; and a +fellow can't turn around without bumping into a wild man, or some bogus +money-makers, it seems. P'raps the ghost'll show up next. Listen! wasn't +that somebody trying to blow your bugle, Bobolink, that you left hung up +in the tent?" + +"It sure was, for a fact. Let's start on a run, fellows. Mebbe they've +gone and grabbed that wild man! P'raps he was bent on carryin' off the +whole outfit this time. You never can tell what a crazy man'll do next; +that's the hard part of being a keeper in a queer house, where they keep +a lot of that kind; anyhow a man told me that once who'd been there. But +listen to that scout trying to sound the recall, would you? Whoop her up, +boys; there's _something_ happened, as sure as you live!" + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +ORDERED OFF + + +It was about four o'clock in the afternoon of this, the first day of +their intended stay on Cedar Island, when Paul and his three comrades +came running around the bend of the shore above the camp, and saw some of +the scouts beckoning wildly to them. + +"They've gone and grabbed him, sure as shooting!" gasped Bobolink, +exultantly. + +But Jack and Paul noted that while there teemed to be a cluster of the +boys no strange form could be seen among them. In fact, they appeared to +be greatly excited over something Jud Elderkin was holding. + +And in this manner then did the quartette reach the camp. + +"Where is he; got him tied up good and hard?" demanded Bobolink, speaking +with difficulty, from lack of breath. + +Nobody paid the slightest attention to what he was saying; and so +Bobolink, happening to notice that it was Curly Baxter who had been +taking liberties with his precious bugle, quietly possessed himself of +it, and examined it carefully, to make sure that it had not been dented. + +"Take a look at this, Paul," said Jud, as he held out the fluttering +piece of paper that had evidently caused all the excitement. + +Written upon this the scout master saw only a few words, but they +possessed considerable significance, when viewed in the light of the +strange happenings of the recent past. + +"_Leave this island at once_!" + +Just five words in all. Whoever wrote that order must be a man who did +not believe in wasting anything. There was no penalty attached, and they +were at liberty to believe anything they chose; just the plain command to +get out, and somehow it seemed more impressive because of its brevity. + +Paul looked at Jack, and then around at the anxious faces of the other +scouts. He saw only blank ignorance there. Nobody could imagine what this +strange order meant. The island might have an owner, but at the best it +was only a worthless bit of property, and their camping on its shore for +a week could not be considered in the light of trespass. + +"Where did you get this, Jud?" asked the scout master. + +"Why, Old Dan Tucker brought it to me," replied the leader of the Gray +Fox Patrol, promptly. + +"And where did _you_ find it, Dan?" continued Paul, turning on the scout +in question, who seemed only too willing to tell all he knew--which, it +turned out, was precious little at best. + +"Why, you see, I had a dispute with Nuthin about the number of hams +fetched on the trip. He vowed there was two, and I said three, countin' +the one we'd cut into last night. So to prove it, I just happened to step +into the tent where we've got some of the grub piled up. It was three, +all right, just as I said. But I found this paper pinned to one of the +whole hams, which, you know, are sewed up in covers right from the +packers. I couldn't make out what it meant. First I thought Nuthin was +playin' a joke on me; but he denied it. So I took the paper to Jud, +seein' that you were away, Paul." + +"It was pinned to one of the hams, was it?" asked the scout +master, frowning. + +"Sure, and the pin's still stickin' in it," answered Dan, positively. + +Paul looked around. + +"I want to settle one thing right at the start, before we bother any more +about this matter," he remarked. "Did any one of you write this, or have +you ever seen it before Dan brought it to Jud?" + +"He showed it to me," exclaimed Nuthin; "but it was the first time I +ever glimpsed that paper or writin', Paul, I give you my word." + +"If anybody else has seen it before, I want him to hold up his hand," +continued the scout master, knowing how prone boys are to play pranks. + +The boys glanced at each other; but not a single hand went up. + +"Well, that settles one thing, then," declared Paul. "This note came +from some one not belonging to our camp. He must have crawled into the +tent from the rear, taking advantage of our being busy. Yes, there's a +bunch of scrub close enough to give him more or less shelter, if he +crawled on all fours. Let's see if one or two of the tent pins haven't +been drawn up." + +Followed by the rest, Paul strode over to the tent where a quantity of +the provisions were kept. Entering this, he quickly saw that it was +exactly as he had suggested. Three of the tent pins, which the boys had +pounded down with the camp axe, had been pulled up, and this slack +allowed the intruder to crawl under the now loose canvas. + +"I can see the place he shuffled along, and where his toes dug into the +earth," declared Jack, as he bent over. + +"We'll try and follow it up presently, and see where he got on his feet +to move off," Paul remarked. "I'd like to find out whether his shoes +make a mark anything like some of those we were looking at up the +shore, Jack." + +"Whew!" exclaimed Bobolink, who was again deeply interested in what was +going on, since he had found his precious bugle unharmed. + +"Let's look at that paper again," resumed Paul. "The writing was done +with a fountain pen, I should say. That seems to tell that the owner was +no common hobo. And the writing is as clear as the print in our copybooks +at school. The man who did that was a penman, believe me. 'Leave this +island at once!' Just like that, short and crisp. Not a threat about what +will happen if we don't, you see; we're expected to just imagine all +sorts of terrible things, unless we skip out right away. One thing sure, +Jud, your wild man never wrote that note, or even pinned it on our ham, +because the crawler wore shoes." + +"That's right," muttered Jud, his face betraying the admiration he felt +for the scout master who knew so well how to patch things together, so +that they seemed to be almost as plain as print. + +"Now, the rest of you just stay around while I take Jack and Bobolink +with me along this trail. We want to settle one thing, and that'll come +when we hit the place where this party got up on his feet to move off." + +So saying, Paul himself got down and deliberately crawled under the +canvas the same way the trespasser had. Jack and Bobolink hastened to +follow his example, only too well pleased to be selected to accompany +the leader. + +It was no great task to follow the marks made by the crawling man. His +toes had dug into the soil, going and coming, for apparently he had used +the same trail both ways. + +"Here we are, boys; now, take a look!" said Paul, presently. + +They were by this time in the midst of the timber with which this end of +the island was covered. Glimpses of the tents could be seen between the +trees; but any intruder might feel himself reasonably justified in rising +to his full height when he had made a point so well screened from +inquisitive eyes. + +This man had done so, at any rate. The plain print of his shoes was +visible in a number of places. Both Jack and Bobolink gave utterance to +exclamations as soon as they saw these. + +"One of the four, that's dead sure!" the former declared, positively. + +"I'll be badgered if it ain't!" muttered Bobolink, staring at the tracks. + +"So you see, we've settled one thing right at the start," said Paul. + +"That's what we have," observed Bobolink. "It's those fellows who carried +the heavy load from the rowboat, after landin' on the island, after the +rain storm, that want our room more'n our company. The nerve of that +bunch to tell us to clear out, when chances are we've got just as much +right here as they have--p'raps a heap sight more." + +"That doesn't sound much like you wanted to make a change of base, +Bobolink?" remarked Paul, smiling. + +"No more do I," quickly replied the other. "I'm not used to bein' ordered +around as if I was a slave. What if there are four of them, aren't +eighteen husky scouts equal to such a crowd? No, siree, if you left it to +me, I'd say stick it out till the last horn blows. Give 'em the defi +right from the shoulder. Tell 'em to go hang, for all we care. We c'n +take care of ourselves, mebbe; and mind our own business in the bargain." + +"But it's something else that makes you want to stay?" Paul suggested. + +"How well you know my cut, Paul," declared the other. "You reckon I never +can stand a mystery. It gets on my nerves, keeps me awake nights, and +plays hob with my think-box all the time. Now, there was those boxes--but +I guess I'll try and forget all about that matter now, because we've got +a sure enough puzzle to solve right on our hands. Who are these four men; +what are they hiding on Cedar Island for; why should they want to chase +us away if they weren't afraid we'd find out _somethin_' they're a-doin' +here, that ain't just accordin' to the law?" + +"You've got it pretty straight, Bobolink," admitted Paul. "But since +we've learned all we wanted to find out, suppose we go back to the rest +of the boys. We must talk this thing over, and decide what's to be done." + +"Do you mean about skipping out, Paul?" Bobolink exclaimed. "Oh! I hope +now, you won't do anything like that. I'd feel dreadfully mean to sneak +away. Always did hate to see a cur dog do that, with his tail between +his legs." + +"Still, it might seem best to leave here by dark," said Paul. + +Something in his manner gave Jack a clue as to the meaning back of these +words. He knew the scout master better than did any other fellow in the +troop, and was accustomed to reading his motives in his look or manner. + +"I take it that means we might _pretend_ to clear out, and come back +under cover of the night, to make another camp; eh, Paul?" Jack now +remarked, insinuatingly. + +"That was what I had in mind," admitted the other; "but of course it'll +be up to the boys to settle such a question. I believe in every fellow +having a voice in things that have to do with the general business of +the camp. But majority rules when once the vote is taken--stay, or go +for good." + +"Glad to hear you say so," ventured Bobolink. "Because here's three votes +that will be cast for sticking it out; and if I know anything about Jud +and Nuthin and Bluff, together with several more, the majority will want +to stick. But I mean to give them a hint that we think that way. Several +weak-kneed brothers are always ready to vote the way the leaders do. When +the scout master takes snuff they start to sneezing right away." + +"And for that very reason, Bobolink, I don't want you to say a word in +advance to any of the fellows. When we have a vote, it should be the free +opinion of every scout, without his being influenced by another. But what +do you think of the idea, Jack?" + +"I think it's just great," answered his chum. "And by the way, if we +should conclude to come back to the island again in the night, I know the +finest kind of a place where we could hide the motorboats." + +"Where is that?" asked the scout master, quickly. + +"You haven't been around on the side of the island where the shore curves +into a little bay, like. The trees grow so close that their branches +overhang the water. If the boats were left in there, and some green stuff +drawn around them, I don't believe they'd ever be noticed, unless some +one was hunting every foot of the island over for them." + +"Yes, I think I know where you mean," said Paul. "I wasn't down by the +little inlet you speak of; but back on the shore there's a dandy place +among the rocks and trees, where we could pitch a new camp, and keep +pretty well hidden, unless we happened to make a lot of noise, which +we won't do if we can help it But everything depends on how the boys +look at it." + +"Anyhow," said Bobolink, resolutely; "I feel that we ought to put it up +to them that way; tell 'em how easy it will be to screen the boats, and +have a hidden camp. You'll let me tell about that, Paul, I hope, even if +I mustn't say you mean to vote to come back?" + +"I suppose that would be fair enough, because we ought to hold up our +side of the question," the scout master replied, as they drew near the +place where the three tents stood, and several groups of chattering +scouts could be seen, doubtless earnestly discussing this mysterious +thing that had come about; for, of course, Tom Betts had already told all +about the suspicious tracks of the four men who had carried a heavy +burden into the brush. + +They looked eagerly toward the advancing three, as though expecting that +Paul would now take them fully into his confidence. + +This he proceeded to do without further delay; and it was worth while +observing the various shades of emotion that flitted across the faces of +the listeners while the scout master was talking. Some seemed alarmed, +others disposed to be provoked, while not a few, Bobolink noted with +secret glee, allowed a frown to mark their foreheads, as though they were +growing angry at being so summarily ordered off the island by these +unknown men, who did not even have the decency to present their command +of dismissal in person. + +He knew these fellows could be counted on to vote the right way when the +question came up as to what they should do. + +When the entire thing had been explained, so that they all understood it, +Paul asked for a vote as to whether they clear out altogether, or appear +to do so, only to come back again. + +And, just as the sanguine Bobolink had expected, it resulted in thirteen +declaring it to be their idea that they should come back, and try to find +out what all these queer goings-on meant. When the result of the vote was +made known, even the five who had voted to go moved that it be made +unanimous. + +Perhaps they came to the conclusion that since a return was decided on it +would be safer to be with the rest on the haunted island, than off by +themselves in a lone tent on the distant shore, where no assistance could +reach them. + +"Well, we'd better have an early supper, then, and get away; or since it +is getting dark now, perhaps we'll have to put off the eating part until +later," Paul suggested. + +"Any old time will do for that," declared Bobolink, carelessly, whereupon +Old Dan Tucker gave him a look of dismay, and sadly shook his head, as +though he did not indorse such a foolish theory at all. + +So, when the others were carrying things to the boats, and showing +considerable nervousness while doing it, Old Dan managed to fill his +pockets with crackers, which he hoped might stave off starvation for a +little while at least. + +Acting on the suggestion of Jack, the scouts gave all sorts of +exhibitions of alarm as they busied themselves taking down the tents, and +loading their traps aboard the two motorboats. Every now and then one of +them would point somewhere up or down the shore, as though he thought he +saw signs of the enemy coming, whereupon a knot of the boys would gather, +and stare, and then scatter, to work more feverishly than ever. + +They really enjoyed acting the part, too. It seemed to appeal to their +fondness for a joke. And the best of it was, they always fancied that +somewhere or other at least one pair of hostile eyes must be observing +these signs of panic with satisfaction. + +Just as darkness began to creep over water and island, clouds shutting +out the moonlight again, all was pronounced ready. And then the cheery +"chug" of the motors sounded, for the boys purposely made all the noise +they could, under the impression that it might seem to add to the +appearance of a hasty flight. + +In this manner did the troop of scouts break camp before they had been on +Cedar Island more than twenty-four hours; and, so far as appearances +went, deserted the place of the evil name for good and all. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +UNDER COVER OF DARKNESS + + +Paul had settled it all in his mind as to what their course should +be. He drew a mental map of the island, and its surroundings; and +also remembered certain conclusions he had previously entertained +connected with the depth of water on all sides, between their late +camp and the mainland. + +So the _Comfort_ set the pace, which was not very fast; for they wanted +darkness to settle fully over the lake, in order that they might move +around without being seen from the island. + +"Tell me when the island is out of sight, Jud," remarked Paul; for some +of the time the two boats were side by side, and nothing interfered with +a clear view in the rear. + +"Why, it's swallowed up already in the night mist; I can just make out +that old cedar that stands on top of the little hill," came Jud's reply. + +"Good. Then we'll have an easy time slipping back, I reckon," said Paul. + +"Going all the way over to the shore; are you?" asked the other. + +"Might as well; though we'll have to feel our way. Pretty shallow; ain't +it, Jud?" for the scout master had set the other to work sounding with +one of the setting poles, by dropping it over every little while. + +"Touch bottom every time but seems to be plenty of water. Guess this +lake ain't near so deep as that other one up by Rattlesnake Mountain," +Jud remarked. + +"Oh! it's many times deeper on the other side of the island," observed +Paul. "I picked out this way across for a good reason." + +"I suppose you did," Jud said, with a sublime confidence that was +refreshing. + +"Because, you see," added Paul, "when we start back again, we'll have to +do without the help of our motors, for, muffle them as we might, they'd +make enough noise to betray us." + +"Oh! I see now," declared Jud, chuckling. "In place of the motor business +we'll use good hard muscle with these setting poles. And so long as we +can touch bottom right along, it ain't going to be a very hard job +getting back to the island. You don't think it's more'n half a mile; do +you, Paul?" + +"Not much more, and we can take our time, Jud. The one thing above all +others we've got to keep in mind is silence. Nobody ought to knock a +pole against the side of a boat under penalty of being given black marks. +And as for talking, it'll have to be in whispers, when at all." + +"S-s-sounds g-g-good to m-m-me," said Bluff, who somehow seemed to have +gone back to his old stuttering ways; though it might be the excitement +that caused the lapse. + +Nothing more was said on the way over, though doubtless the boys kept up +considerable thinking. They were tremendously worked up over the +situation. This scheme proposed by the scout leader seemed to appeal to +the spirit of adventure which nearly every boy who has red blood in his +veins feels to be a part of his nature. + +There was one among them, however, who was silent because of another +reason; for Old Dan Tucker always declared it a very bad and injurious +plan to try and converse when one's mouth was crammed full; and crackers, +too, being apt to get in the wind-pipe, may do all manner of choking +stunts. So he said never a word. + +They presently could see the other shore looming up, though it was +getting very dark, just as though a storm might be threatening to again +demoralize them. + +"Getting more shoal, Paul," warned the pole heaver. + +"How much water have you now?" demanded the leader, ready to give the +signal for bringing both motorboats to a stop, when it seemed necessary. + +"Eight feet, last time; now it's about seven, short," announced Jud. + +"Keep on sounding, and when it gets down to three, let me know," +ordered Paul. + +They were creeping along at a snail's pace now, so even should either +boat strike mud bottom, which Jud had declared it to be, no particular +damage would result. + +The shore was very close, and still Jud admitted that there was +plenty of water. + +"Keeps up in great shape, Commodore," he remarked, "reckon we could go +ashore here if we felt that way." + +"Which we don't," declared Gusty Bellows, in a low tone. + +And not a single voice was raised in favor of such a proceeding; if there +were any timid souls present, they failed to exhibit their weakness, +either through fear of boyish ridicule, or some other reason. + +Then Paul shut off power, and when he no longer heard the sound of the +_Comfort's_ exhaust, Jack followed suit. + +"We'll hang out here for half an hour, and then head back," +explained Paul. + +"The outlet isn't far away from here; is it?" Joe Clausin asked. + +"Not very far--on the right," Paul replied. "I had that in mind when +choosing to come this way. You see, if we were intending to only go +ashore, they'd expect to see a fire burning somewhere. As it is, they'll +be sure to think we've dropped down into the Radway, preferring to risk +all sorts of danger from the rocks and snags there, rather than stay here +another night." + +"Makes me think of Napoleon's retreat from Moscow," remarked Nat Smith in +the other motorboat. + +"Oh! come off, will you?" ridiculed Bobolink. "Napoleon was a good one, +but not in the same class with _us_. He never came back, like we're going +to do. This retreat is only a fine piece of strategy, remember, while his +was in deadly earnest." + +They talked in low tones that were cousins to whispers, and certainly +could not be heard half way over to the mysterious island, even +though water does make the finest conductor of sound possible, as +every boy knows. + +Finally, when about half an hour had gone, Paul said it was time to make +a fresh start. He had thought it all out, and while taking one pole +himself, asked the expert, Jud, to handle the other in their boat. + +Jack and Tom Betts were to look after those in the _Speedwell_; for the +scout master knew that Tom could be very careful, given a job that +required caution. + +They took their time, and by degrees Paul led the way across the shallow +part of the lake. Bobolink had aptly described their movement, when he +said it reminded him of the words in the song: "He came right in, and +turned around and walked right out again." + +Now it was so dark that most of the scouts found themselves confused as +to their bearings, the minute they lost sight of the trees along the +shore. Some wondered how Paul was going to go straight back over their +recent course, when he did not have even the stars to guide him. + +But then, there were many other things he did have, one of which was the +slight breeze that blew in his face, and which had been directly behind +them at the time they left the island. + +Slowly and laboriously, in comparison with their other trip, the scouts +crossed the stretch of water. And when finally those who were so eagerly +watching out for that cedar on the top of the little elevation in the +middle of the island whispered to Paul that it was dead ahead, they +realized with wonder that the pilot had led them in a direct line back +over their course. + +Now they altered the line of advance a little. This was in order to +approach the island about the place where the little bay extended into +its side, as described by Jack. And Paul allowed the other to take the +lead, since Jack would be more familiar with the locality than he himself +might feel. + +Noiselessly did the two boats enter that miniature bay, and glide along +until close to the bank, where the overhanging trees afforded the +protection they wanted, in order to conceal the craft. + +Landing was next in order, and then all their things must again be taken +ashore, from tents and blankets, to cooking kettles and eatables. + +By now the scouts had reduced many of these things to a system. Every boy +knew just what was expected of him; and presently there was a procession +of burden bearers carrying things into the brush along a certain trail, +once in a while perhaps stumbling a little, but keeping strict silence. + +They seemed to enjoy it hugely, too. Their nerves tingled while carrying +out this part of the programme--at least, Bobolink said he had such a +feeling, and doubtless several more were in the same condition. + +Of course there were those who trembled with anticipation of some sudden +alarm. And then again, others might be beginning to think they would soon +nearly "cave away" with the empty feeling they had; that was what Old +Dan Tucker confided in a whisper to Joe Clausin, resting firm in the +belief that none of the others knew about the pocket full of crackers, +that he called "life preservers"--which, alas, were all gone now, to the +last crumb. + +Paul led the line and picked out the easiest method of reaching the +place he had selected for the new camp among the rocks and trees. It was +in a depression, too, the others noticed, when he told them to drop +their bundles. That would enable them to have a little fire, since it +could not be seen as it would be if they were on a level, or an +elevation. And really, a fire was necessary, if Paul meant they should +have any supper at all. + +"As we brought about all we need, there's no use of making another trip +to the boats," Paul remarked in a low tone; from which the others judged +that conversation was not going to be entirely cut out, only they must +not elevate their voices above a certain pitch, so long as things were as +quiet as at present. + +Now began the task of getting the three tents in position again. And well +had the scouts learned their lesson in this particular; some of them even +going so far as to declare that they could do the job with their eyes +blindfolded, so familiar were they with every part of the operation. + +"Like learning type-writin' by touch in school," Bobolink had said. + +After all the tents had been raised, and the blankets placed inside, Paul +gave permission for a small cooking fire to be made. + +To some boys a fire is always a fire, no matter what its intended use; +but the scout who has camped out soon gets to know that there is a vast +difference between a camp fire, for instance, and one meant only for +getting meals over. + +The former may be composed of great logs and branches that send up a +cheery and brilliant blaze; but which is next to useless when the cook +wants to get close in, and attend to his various kettles and frying pans. + +Sometimes a hole is scooped out of the ground, and the fire for cooking +made in that, especially when on level ground, and danger exists of +hostile eyes discovering the blaze, however small. + +As a rule, however, such a fire is made about after this fashion: Two +logs may be used, if they have flat surfaces, having been more or less +squared off; but when stones can be procured they are to be preferred. +Two sides are fashioned out of flat stones, somewhat in the shape of the +letter V, only not having the line quite so pronounced. Thus a coffeepot +will rest snugly over the smaller end, while the big frying pan cozily +covers the larger. + +The fire need only be small, but when the cooking commences, there +should be for the most part red embers in the fireplace, capable of +sending up great heat, with but a minimum of blaze. And there a cook +can work in comfort, without dodging back every time a fierce blaze +darts toward him, threatening to singe his eyebrows, and shorten his +crop of hair. + +Jud knew just how to make such a fire, and as they would need several, in +order to cook for such a host, some of the other boys busied themselves +in copying what he did. They had seen him make such a stone fireplace +before, any way, and some of them had practiced the art in private, being +desirous of knowing how to do many of the things the leaders were so +proficient in. + +Soon they had more light, when Jud got his fire started; and it was +then that the boys realized just how fitting that spot was for a hidden +camp. Their tents could not be seen thirty feet away; and as for the +small amount of light made by the three cooking fires, little danger of +it being noticed, unless some one were close by, and actually stumbled +on the spot. + +In fact, the greatest chance they had of being discovered, as Paul well +knew, did not come from any sense of sight or hearing, but that of smell. +Should the odors from their supper chance to be carried across the +island, and in the direction of where these men were staying, they might +begin to suspect something was wrong, and start an investigation that +would lead to the discovery of the new camp. + +But Paul had also noticed that the night breeze was doing them another +good service; it had helped him find his way back to the island through +the darkness resting on the big lake; and now, blowing toward the distant +shore, the odors of cooking coffee, and frying bass would be taken +entirely away. + +And anyhow, there were eighteen half-starved scouts who had to be fed, +come what might. So the cooking went on apace, and in due time supper was +announced as ready. At which more than a few of the waiting lads heaved +sighs of satisfaction, and Old Dan Tucker, as usual, managed to be the +first to sit down. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +PITCHING TENTS IN THE "SINK" + + +"This thing is giving us lots of good practice at making camp, and that's +something," Bobolink remarked while he ate, always taking care to keep +his voice down to a low pitch, so it would not carry far on the night +air; though for that matter the wind had increased by now and was making +quite some noise through the tops of the trees around them. + +"I'd like to see anybody put up tents faster and better than we did right +here," declared Frank Savage; who had by now about recovered from the +feeling of sickness which came so near keeping him at home, when the +expedition was formed. + +"And as for fires, these couldn't be beat," observed Spider Sexton, as +he began to catch glimpses of the bottom of his tin platter, after +making away with some of the food that had been piled high on it by the +cook of his mess. + +"And talk about the grub--it just takes the cake," admitted Old Dan +Tucker; though no one seemed to pay the least attention to what he +thought, for they knew him of old, and that the present meal was always +the "best he had ever eaten, barring none." + +Of course it was only natural that while the scouts were enjoying +their meal in this fashion, many looks betrayed an uneasiness on the +part of some among their number. Possibly they were wondering whether +it could be that hostile eyes were fixed upon them then and there, and +if so, what those strange, unknown men, who seemed to want to rule the +island, would do when they discovered that the scouts had disobeyed +their order to leave. + +Would they resort to violence? It would not be an easy task to banish a +dozen and a half lively boys, they were thinking. + +Paul had made up his mind with regard to certain things that must be +done. First of all, they ought to get their heads together, and decide on +a plan. Should they make any sort of attempt that night to explore the +island? He owned a splendid little hand electric torch, into which he had +slipped a fresh battery before starting out on the voyage along the two +rivers; and this might prove very useful in searching dark and gloomy +parts of the island. But on the whole, it seemed so foolish to think of +such a thing, Paul wanted the rest to settle the matter. + +So, still cautioning them to speak only in whispers at the most, he +placed the whole matter before them; much as might the chairman of a +meeting, after which he asked in so many words: + +"You've heard all I know about it; now, what is your pleasure, fellows?" + +"So far as I'm concerned," said Bobolink, always the first to speak; "I'm +willing to do anything the rest say, or go wherever they want to head; +but to be honest, boys, I'd think we were off our base if we went +prowling around this queer old island at night time. There are a heap of +things about it that some people don't want us to know, it seems; and we +ought to take daylight to spear such facts." + +Others were of the same opinion; and when Paul put the vote, it was +overwhelmingly the sentiment of the meeting that they simply take things +as easy as they could until dawn came, and then, with fourteen hours of +light ahead, do all the exploring they liked. + +That settled it, since there could be no going behind the returns when a +majority favored any move. Accordingly, they made preparations for +passing the night as the conditions best allowed. + +"Of course, we must have sentries posted to keep watch?" remarked Jack. + +"All through the livelong night. They will have to be changed every +hour; and four can be on guard at a time. That'll give about two +turns to every scout, with a chance to get four hours sleep between +times on duty." + +And having said his, Paul, as the acting scout master, proceeded to +assign each one to his post number. There was no confusion. They had +practiced this same movement many a time, and now that it was to be +carried out, the boys profited by their experience. + +It could be seen that there was a condition of almost feverish excitement +under the surface, try as they might to conceal the fact by an appearance +of coolness. A real peril seemed to be hovering over them, since they had +chosen to disobey the mandate of the unknown who seemed to claim the +island as his private property. And if they were discovered during the +night, there would be no telling what might happen. + +At the same time the boys were enjoying the novel experience. It seemed +to give them a peculiar thrill, not unlike that of a daring skater who +shoots boldly over thin, new ice, that crackles under him, and bends in a +dreadful way, but does not break, because his passage has been too swift. + +In the morning Paul would pick out several of them, as he thought best; +and with this exploring party set out to learn what the island contained. +Meanwhile they would rest quietly in that rocky retreat, in the hope that +their return had not been noted by any observing eye, and that their +presence on the island was utterly unknown. + +The sentries had been selected, and every boy knew just when his turn to +take a post would come around. Those who were ready to lie down and get +some rest were expected to arouse their successors, so that the thing was +calculated to run along as smoothly as though on a greased track. + +If anything out of the ordinary came to pass, and there was time to +arouse the scout master, Paul wanted it done. He could not remain awake +himself more than any one of the others, much as he might wish to be on +the job all the time; but that need not prevent his keeping in touch with +whatever happened. + +Paul still had his shotgun, and had of course made sure to bring it from +the motorboat when he led his column of burden-bearers trailing through +the timber and rocks to that little sink in which the new camp had been +pitched. It had served him often and well, and he was accustomed to +placing the utmost confidence in the trusty little weapon. But he hoped +he would find no occasion to use it now, and against human beings. Only +as the very last resort would he turn to this. + +Still, there are times when the presence of an empty gun has done +wonders; since imagination invests it with all the attributes of a loaded +weapon. And that was one of the many reasons why Paul kept the +double-barreled gun close to him, even when he crept into the tent to +which he was assigned, and lay down on his blanket to try and get a +little sleep. + +Some of the other boys whispered for a while, as they lay with their +heads close together; but they were too sleepy to keep this up for long; +so that one by one they dropped off, until from their regular breathing +it was easy to guess that all had surrendered to the heavy hand of sleep. + +Those on guard duty were not supposed to move about very much. They had +been posted at what might be called the four corners of the camp. Here +they could, between them, about cover all the space around the sink, for +their positions were on the more elevated ground. + +And as the clouds were breaking at the time Paul crawled under the +tent, he felt pretty sure that before long they would have the +assistance of the moon, now more than half full, and which would not +set until after midnight. + +Those who were the first on duty fulfilled their part of the programme +faithfully. After standing out their "spell," they proceeded to quietly +awaken those who were scheduled to follow after them. Each fellow knew +who his successor was, and it had been made a part of his duty to see +that this scout was not only awakened, but on the job; after which he +himself could crawl in under his blanket, and take it easy until his +second turn came, hours later. + +Thus Bobolink was one of the second watch. In turn he would have the +pleasure of arousing the commander, and seeing that Paul took up his +duty; for in laying out the schedule Paul had not spared himself in +the least. + +Bobolink was an imaginative boy. He could see many things that others +were apt to pass by without discovering anything out of the ordinary. It +was a weakness which Bobolink had to guard against; lest he discover +things that had no foundation in fact. + +He sat there, listening and looking, for a long time. The music of the +breeze in the tree-tops made him a little nervous at first; but presently +he seemed to get more accustomed to the sounds, and then they made him +drowsy, so that he had to take himself sharply to task more than once +because his eyes found it so easy to shut. + +Wishing to have something to think about, so as to keep his wits aroused, +Bobolink began to try and figure out just where his fellow sentinels were +located and imagine what they were doing. Could they be struggling, as he +was, to keep awake, one of the hardest things a boy can battle with? + +What was that? Surely something moved out yonder among the scrub! + +Bobolink sat straight up. He was no longer sleepy. This thing seemed to +have made his eyes fly wide open; and with his heart pumping at a +tremendous rate, sending the hot blood bounding through his veins, surely +he was now in no danger of sleeping on his post. + +He watched the spot from which the sound had seemingly come. The moon +penetrated the bushes only faintly, because it was now nearing the +western horizon, its journey for the night almost done. Strive as +Bobolink might to see whether any one was crawling along there, he could +not for a time make sure. + +Then he detected a movement that must mean something. And at the same +time he discovered what seemed to be twin glowworms in the darkness. + +Bobolink had had some little experience in such things, and had read a +good deal on the subject. He knew that in the night time the eyes of many +wild animals, particularly of the cat tribe, can appear luminous, so +that, seen in a certain kind of gloom, they seem to be like yellow +globes. And that was what these were. + +"Huh!" said Bobolink to himself, after he had watched these queer glowing +balls of fire move several times, that proved in his mind they must be +the eyes of an animal: "Guess I better give Paul the high sign, and let +him figure out what it is." + +And with that he started to creep into the camp, leaving his post for +the time being unguarded; for with three other sentries on duty +Bobolink did not imagine there could be any danger in his withdrawing +from the line. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +WHAT LAY IN THE BRUSH + + +"Wake up, Paul!" + +Bobolink accompanied these whispered words by a gentle shake. He seemed +to know instinctively just where the scout master was lying; or else it +must have been, that all this had been systematically laid out +beforehand; and every fellow had a particular place where he was to curl +up in his blanket when not on duty. + +Paul was awake instantly, even though he had been far gone in sleep at +the moment that hand touched his arm. + +"All right, Bobolink," he said, in a low tone, so as not to arouse any of +the others. "I'm with you. Time up?" + +"Not quite, Paul; but there's some sort of beast creeping around the +camp; and I thought you ought to know." + +Paul sat up at once. + +"You did the right thing, Bobolink," he remarked, quietly. + +The sentry could hear him groping around, as if for something. Presently +Paul seemed to have found what he sought. Of course it was his shotgun. + +Wildcats were to be found in some of the woods not many miles from +Stanhope. The scouts knew this, because they had experience with these +bold pests, who had been attracted by the smell of food in their camp. +Besides, there were sometimes packs of wild dogs roaming the woods +that might need to be taught a lesson, in case they gave the campers +any trouble. + +So Paul had been wise to bring that double-barreled gun along. In a +pinch it would prove a handy thing to have with them. And no doubt it +gave Bobolink considerable satisfaction to realize that Paul had such a +weapon handy. + +Immediately the sentry started to crawl out of the tent again, with Paul +close at his heels. A head was raised, and one of the supposed sleepers +watched the dim figures retreating. + +It was Nuthin, who had chanced to be restless, and was awake at the time +Bobolink came in to arouse the scout master. He had heard all that passed +between them, and of course felt a thrill at the idea of some ferocious +wild beast prowling around the tents. + +Hardly had the other pair withdrawn before Nuthin started after them. He +might be a rather timid boy by nature; but when there was anything going +on Nuthin could not rest content unless he placed himself in a position +where he could see or hear--perhaps both. + +Bobolink led the way back to the post he had been occupying at the time +he made his discovery. He hoped those luminous eyes would still be +there, because it might not look just right should he be able to show no +proof of his story; and boys will take occasion to make all sorts of +jeering remarks about a fellow falling asleep on his post, and dreaming +wonderful things. + +So it was with considerable anxiety that the sentry crept along to the +very spot which he remembered he had been occupying at the time. + +Considerably to his dismay he could see nothing. There was the patch of +brush in which he had discovered those gleaming orbs, and from which had +arisen a low, threatening growl when he first moved off; but look as he +might Bobolink was unable to detect the first sign of a hostile presence. + +He felt disgusted with himself. Luck seemed to be playing him all +manner of tricks of late, and nothing went right. There was that affair +of the queer boxes which had been bothering him so long; then the +mystery of the unknown men who had ordered the scouts to leave the +island in such a peremptory fashion, without giving the least reason +for their churlishness. And now, here, even this little matter could +not work straight. + +"It's gone, Paul!" he felt compelled to mutter, after striving several +times to detect some sign, however faint, of those terrible yellow eyes. + +"Just where did you see it, Bobolink?" asked the scout master, knowing +from his chum's manner how disappointed the sentry must feel that he was +thus unable to prove his assertion. + +"Right in that brush yonder; you c'n see it looks darker than anything +else," replied Bobolink, eagerly; as if hoping that after all Paul's eyes +might prove better than his own, and pick up the lost glow. + +"Well, it seems to have gone away, then," said the scout master. + +"I'm afraid so," grumbled Bobolink, for all the world as though his whole +reputation for veracity depended on his showing the other that he had not +been imagining things when he gave his alarm. + +"What did you see?" continued Paul. + +"Two yellow eyes, and say, weren't they just awful, though? But seems +like the varmint has side-stepped, and vamoosed. Just my luck, hang it! I +wanted you to see 'em the worst kind, Paul." + +"A pair of shining eyes, eh? When you moved, did you hear anything, +Bobolink?" + +"Sure I did. It growled just like our dog does at home, when he's got a +bone, and anybody gets too near him," the sentry hastened to explain. + +"Made you think of a dog, did it, and not a cat?" asked Paul, quickly. + +"Why, yes, I reckon it did," replied Bobolink; "leastways, that's what +came into my mind. But then a big cat, a regular bobcat, I take it, could +growl that way, if it felt a notion to." + +"You came straight in to wake me up, of course?" continued Paul, +wishing to figure on the time that might have elapsed since Bobolink +left his post. + +"Crawled right in, and we got back here in a jiffy; but you see it was no +use when that jinx is on my trail, meanin' to loco everything I do. Now, +I reckon if it'd been any other feller in the bunch, the critter'd just +stood its ground, and I'd be vindicated. But me--I'm hoodooed of late, +and can't do a thing straight." + +"Listen!" said Paul, a little sharply, as though he had no sympathy with +such talk. + +They strained their hearing for possibly a full minute. Then Bobolink, +who liked to talk, could no longer hold in. + +"What'd you think you heard, Paul?" he whispered. + +"A little rustling sound just alongside the brush you pointed out," the +scout master replied. + +"But you didn't get it again; did you?" urged the other. + +"No. But that needn't be proof that something isn't there, and watching +us, even if we don't glimpse his eyes," replied Paul. + +"Oh!" ejaculated Bobolink, with a sudden sense of relief in his voice. + +"You heard the rustling then; didn't you?" Paul demanded. + +"I sure did, and right over back of the brush it seemed to be. P'raps +he's givin' the camp the shake, Paul; mebbe he's made up his mind it +ain't as healthy a place as he thought, after all." + +"It couldn't be one of the other sentries moving around, I suppose?" +ventured Paul, at which his companion gave a low chuckle. + +"With those glaring yellow eyes? Well, hardly, Paul. My stars! but if +you'd only seen 'em, you'd never say that. And besides, the boys were +ordered not to leave their posts, only to wake up the fellow that +came after 'em. Oh! put it down for me that isn't any of our bunch +stirring around." + +"Then I must find out what it is!" said Paul, with a ring of +determination in his voice. + +"Wow! d'ye mean to rush the beast, Paul, and try to knock him over with a +charge of Number Sevens?" demanded Bobolink. + +"I've got something better than that to scare him off," replied Paul. +"You know we don't want to shoot a gun, if we can help it; because the +report would tell the men that we'd come back, and might bring trouble. +I've got my little electric hand torch with me, and if I flash that into +the face of any wild animal the chances are it'll give him a scare +that'll send him off about his business." + +"Oh! I forgot all about that," said Bobolink. "It's just the thing, too. +How lucky you brought it along, Paul." + +Bobolink looked on a good many things as "luck," one way or the other, +when of a truth they were really planned ahead. The scout master had +realized that such a useful little contrivance would be apt to come in +handy on many occasions, when camping out, and had made it a particular +point to put the torch in his pack before leaving home. + +He had it beside him as he slept, but did not consider it wise to press +the button when awakened, lest the flash arouse the others who were +sleeping in the same tent. + +Bobolink could feel him moving away, and not meaning to be left behind, +he started after. Bobolink possessed courage, even if he lacked +discretion. The possibility of an encounter with this doubtless savage +animal did not deter him from following his leader. + +Again they heard that suspicious rustling in the bushes ahead, this time +louder than before. And quickly on the heels of this sound came a low, +threatening growl that, strangely enough, made Bobolink chuckle softly, +he was so pleased over having his announcement proven true to the +Commodore of the motorboat fleet. + +"Look out, Paul," he whispered; "he's laying for you in those bushes. +Better keep your gun handy, and be ready to give him Hail Columbia!" + +Paul did not answer. He had his gun held in such a way that it could be +fired with a second's warning. At the same time his left hand was +gripping the little electric torch, with his thumb pressed against the +trigger that would connect the battery, and send an intense ray of light +wherever he pointed. + +When he heard another rustle, and a growl even more vicious than before, +he judged about the position of the sounds, and pointing the end of the +torch straight ahead, pressed the button. + +As the vivid flash followed Paul saw something that looked like a +crouching panther staring at the dazzling glow of his torch--a hairy +beast that had rather a square head, and a tail that was lashing to and +fro, just as he had seen that of a domestic cat move with jerks, when a +hostile dog approached too close to suit her ideas of safety. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +LAYING PLANS + + +"Whee!" + +That, of course, was Bobolink giving expression to his feelings when he +too saw the crouching figure of the ugly beast in the pile of brush. + +He fully expected that Paul would now feel it necessary to raise his gun +to his shoulder, and fire, on the spur of the moment. Contrary to his +belief, he found that the scout master did nothing of the sort. Instead, +Paul took a deliberate step forward, straight toward the animal that lay +there, staring at the blinding light. + +"Oh I my stars! he's going to scare him off with only that light!" said +Bobolink, talking to himself; and yet, strange to say, he followed close +at the heels of the advancing scout master, clutching his club tightly, +and doubtless fully determined that if they were attacked, he would make +the stout weapon give a good account of itself. + +For a brief space it seemed an open question whether the animal would +turn tail and slink away, or openly attack the advancing boys. But there +was evidently something in that approaching dazzling light, and the +presence of human beings behind it, that proved too much for the beast. +He gave a sudden turn, and bounded off, vanishing in the denser scrub +beyond; and for a short time the listening Bobolink could hear the sound +of his retreat. + +"Whew I that was the stuff, Paul!" cried Bobolink. "He just couldn't look +you in the eye; could he? That fierce little staring orb was too much for +him. But what was it, Paul, a panther?" + +Some one laughed back of them, and turning, light in hand, Paul +saw Nuthin. + +"What ails you, and how did you get here?" demanded Bobolink. + +"Heard what you said to Paul in the tent, and wanted to see what was up, +so I just crawled out," answered the smaller scout, still grinning, as +though he had discovered something comical in the adventure. + +"Well, what ails you?" Bobolink demanded again, feeling irritated +somehow. + +"Panther! Well, I guess he hasn't got that wild, yet!" ejaculated Nuthin. + +Paul began to understand something about it. + +"See here, Nuthin," he said, sternly; "you know that was a dog, as well +as I do; have you ever seen him before? Do you know him?" + +Nuthin laughed softly. + +"Guess you fellows must have forgot that old mongrel dog, Lion, we used +to have," he went on. "Well, he disappeared a long time ago, and we never +knew what did become of him. There always was a sorter wild streak in the +critter. And now it seems that he's found, it nicer to live like a wolf +in the woods, than stay at home and be tied to a kennel. Because that was +Lion, I give you my word for it!" + +"Mebbe he smelled you here, and wanted to make up again?" +suggested Bobolink. + +"Don't you believe it," retorted Nuthin. "He never did like me, and my +dad wouldn't let me go near his kennel. When he skipped out we all felt +glad of it. And to think he'd show up here, of all places! What d'ye +reckon he's doin' over here on this island, Paul?" + +"Listen. When he got away from you did he have a rope around his neck, +with six feet of it trailing on the ground?" Paul asked. + +"Did he? Not any that I know about. We always kept him fastened with a +chain; and when he broke away, it was his collar that busted. I've got it +home yet," was the response. + +"Well, that dog had the rope, just as I described. He's been tied up, +of late, and broke away," the scout master observed, with conviction in +his voice. + +"Then he must have been in the keep of these men who're doin' somethin' +queer over here on Cedar Island, and don't want a parcel of peepin' +scouts around; looks that way, don't it, Paul?" Nuthin inquired. + +"I was wondering whether it could be that crowd, or the other," Paul +replied, musingly. + +"D'ye mean the wild man?" asked Bobolink. + +"It might be," replied Paul. "If your old dog, Nuthin, has taken to the +free life of the woods--gone back to the type of his ancestors, as I've +heard of dogs doing many a time--why, you see, he'd just seem to fit in +with a wild man who lived about like the savages used to away back." + +"Wonder if he'll come again to bother us?" queried Bobolink. + +"Honestly now, I don't think he will," Paul made answer. "That little +evil eye of the torch threw a scare into him he won't forget in a hurry. +I suppose he must have been roaming around, and got a sniff of our +cooking. That made him feel hungry, and he was creeping in closer and +closer, in hopes of stealing something, when we broke up his game. And +now, if it isn't time for me to go on duty, I'll crawl in again, and get +a few more winks of sleep." + +"Say, Paul, don't you think it'd be about right to leave that little +flashlight with me, in case the dog comes around again?" asked Bobolink. + +"I was going to say that very same thing; and when my turn comes you can +hand it over again. Here you are, Bobolink; and don't go to fooling with +it, unless you really hear something." + +"I won't, Paul," replied the other. "But chances are, I'd better make the +rounds and tell the other fellers about what happened; because they must +have seen the flash, and heard us talkin' over here; which will throw 'em +into a cold fit, wantin' to know all about it." + +"A good idea, Bobolink," observed the other, as he and Nuthin moved +toward the tents again. + +The balance of the night passed without any further alarm. If the wild +dog came prowling around again, attracted by the presence of good things +to eat, which may have reminded him of other days when he was content to +remain chained up in the Cypher back yard, and take the leavings from his +master's table, he certainly did not betray his presence nor could he +muster up enough courage to crawl into the camp, when it was guarded by +such a terrible flashing eye. + +Morning arrived in good time, and the boys were on the alert. This novel +experience was having its effect on them all. They showed that their +sleep could not have been as sound as appearances might indicate, for +many had red eyes, which were the cause of considerable comment, and not +a little good-natured chaff on the part of those who betrayed no such +telltale signs of wakefulness. + +Breakfast was prepared about in the same fashion as the supper had been +on the preceding night. Fires were carefully lighted, and such fuel +chosen, which, in the opinion of the best judges, would be least apt to +send up heavy smoke, such as might betray their presence on the island. + +All these little things were supposed to be a part of their education as +scouts and woodsmen. They aroused considerable interest among the boys, +many of whom had never bothered their heads before to discover that kinds +of wood burned in various ways; that one might give out only a light +brown smoke, hard to discern, while another would send up a dense smudge +that could not fail to attract the eye of any watcher. + +Paul showed them that when they wanted to signal with smoke, as all +scouts are taught to do when learning the wigwag code, they must be +careful to select only this latter kind of wood, since the other would +not answer the purpose. + +He had been thinking deeply over the matter, and had about made up his +mind as to what course they should pursue. Like most of his comrades, +Paul was averse to being driven away from Cedar Island by unknown +parties, without at least another effort to explore the mysterious +place, and making an attempt to discover what sort of business these men +were engaged in. + +That it was something unlawful he was convinced, as much as any of his +chums. Indeed, everything would seem to point that way. Men do not often +hide themselves in an unfrequented section of the country, unless they +are engaged in some pursuit that will not stand the light of day. + +At one time Paul had even suspected that these men might be some species +of game poachers, who wishing to defy the law that protected partridges, +and all feather and fur-bearing creatures in the woods, during the summer +season, had taken up their dwelling on lonely Cedar Island. + +This was in the beginning. On thinking it over, however, he came to the +conclusion that there was hardly enough game of all kinds within fifty +miles of Stanhope to pay several men to spend their time snaring it; and +so on this account he had thrown that theory overboard. + +As they ate their breakfast the boys talked of nothing else but the +mystery of the island, and many were the expressions of opinion that they +must not think of leaving without doing everything in their power to lift +the curtain. + +They wanted to know who the strange men were who had brought some bulky +object across from the mainland in a rowboat; what business they were +engaged in there; who the wild man might be, and last of all whether he +had any connection with the others. + +"You see," declared Bobolink, in his customary impressive way of talking, +"it looks to me as if they had him here to scare meddlers off. Who wants +to rub up against a wild man? Everybody would feel like giving the hairy +old fellow a wide berth, believe me. But Paul, if you make up a bunch to +explore this bally old island, please let me go along." + +There were others just as anxious and then again some gave no expression +to indicate how they felt about it. So the wise scout master, not wishing +to have any half-hearted recruits with him on such an errand, observed +these signs, and made sure to pick only such as had pleaded for +recognition. + +"You can go along, Bobolink," he said, presently; "and I shall need five +others in addition. Jack, you're one; then there's Bluff, Tom Betts, +Phil, and Andy. Jud Elderkin will be left in full charge here, and every +scout is expected to look to him as the chief while I'm gone. Is that all +understood, fellows?" + +Everybody looked satisfied--those who had been selected because they +wanted to be with the party of exploration and the scouts who would +remain behind because they had no particular desire to prowl through that +dense undergrowth, looking for what might prove to be a jack-o'-lantern. + +And as they continued to devour the food that had been cooked over the +little fires they exchanged confidences, all sorts of queer theories and +plans being suggested. For when eighteen wide awake scouts put their +heads together, it can be set down as positive that little remains unsaid +after they have debated any subject pro and con. + + + + +CHAPTER XX + +THE EXPLORING PARTY + + +Soon after breakfast was over, Paul began to make his arrangements. Like +a wise general he wanted to have all the details arranged beforehand, so +far as he could do so. + +"I hope you'll take the gun along, Paul," remarked Bobolink, when those +who had been selected to accompany the leader were stowing some crackers +and cheese in sundry pockets, so that they might have a little lunch, in +case they were delayed longer than seemed probable. + +"Yes, because we're more apt to find need for it than those who stay in +camp," the scout master had replied; which fact seemed to give Bobolink +considerable satisfaction. + +He had not liked the looks of that big fellow which Nuthin claimed to +have recognized as his old Lion. If they chanced to run across the beast +again, it might feel disposed to attack them; and nothing would please +Bobolink more than to have Paul bowl the creature over with a single +shot. Any dog that did not have the sense to stay at home, and feed at +the hands of a kind master, deserved to get the limit, he thought. + +"It isn't that alone," Bobolink had protested, when Paul took him to +task for showing such a bloodthirsty spirit; "I've been hearing lately +that some of the farmers up this way are complainin' about dogs killin' +their lambs this last spring. And chances are, this same Lion's been one +of the pack that did the mischief. Once they start in that way, nothin' +can cure 'em but cold lead. My father said that right out at table. So +you see, when dogs take to runnin' loose, they're just like boys, an' +get into bad ways." + +Paul thought this was a pretty good argument. He had himself made up his +mind that should they ever meet that animal again, and he showed a +disposition to attack any of the scouts, there was only one thing to do. + +"How about getting into communication with you while you're gone?" asked +Jud, who was naturally feeling the new responsibilities of his position +more or less, and wished to be posted. + +"It might be found a good thing," replied the scoutmaster; "and we could +do it easy enough by flags, if we managed to get to the top of that hill +where the lone cedar grows. So all the time we're away, Jud, be sure and +have a scout posted in a tree, where he can watch that cedar, keeping his +flag handy to answer, if he gets the signal. + +"Guess that can be fixed, all right," declared Jud. + +"Have him keep his eye out for smoke at the same time," continued Paul. +"We might want to tell you something, even without getting up to that +cedar tree. And in case you felt like sending back an answer, you'd +better have the boys collect a lot of that wood I showed you, that makes +a black smoke. You know our smoke code, Jud; no danger of our failing to +make good while you're handling the other end of the line." + +That made Jud smile, and feel like doing everything in his power to +satisfy the scout master. A few drops of oil prevents a vast amount of +friction. Paul knew there are few boys who do not like to be appreciated; +and they will do double the amount of work if they feel that they possess +the full confidence of the one who has been placed in command over them. + +When the word was finally given for the little expedition to leave camp, +and start into the unknown depths of the island, those who were to +remain behind insisted on shaking hands all around, and wishing them the +best of luck. Bobolink pretended to make light of it, and to laugh at +the fellows. + +"Great Scott! you'd think we were going away off to Hudson's Bay, not to +come back again for many moons, if ever!" he scoffed. "Talk about +Stanley's farewell to Livingstone in the African jungle, why it wasn't +in the same class as this. Don't you dare try to embrace me, Dan Tucker. +What d'ye think I am, the pretty new girl that's come to town, and who +danced with you at our class spread? Hands off, now! And don't any of +you cry when we're gone. I declare if you aren't turnin' into a lot of +old women." + +So the seven scouts strode away from the hidden camp in the sink, +plunging into the heavy growth of timber that covered most of the island. +Once only did they turn, to wave a goodbye to their watching companions, +who flourished their hats in response, but dared not give the cheer that +was in their hearts, because Paul had enjoined the strictest silence. + +Paul and Jack had more than once tried to figure out what Cedar Island +must look like; but at the best it was only guess work. None of them had +ever been here before, and so far they had only roamed over a small +portion of one end of the island, so that they could not tell even its +general shape. + +That was one of the reasons why Paul wanted to climb the little hill on +which grew the cedar from which the island must have taken its name. +Once they gained this point, he fancied they might be able to see all +parts of the place, and in this manner get a comprehensive idea as what +it was like. + +They kept pretty well together as they pushed through the brush and +timber. Paul instructed them to watch constantly on all sides, so that +nothing might escape their scrutiny; and as the little band of scouts +pushed deeper into the unknown depths of the mysterious island, they felt +more than ever a sense of the responsibility that rested upon their +shoulders. + +As one of the boys had remarked before, this was good training. They +could look back to other occasions when they had roamed the woods, once +in search of a little chap who had been lost; but somehow these incidents +lacked the flavor of mystery that surrounded them now. + +If these men should turn out to be what they already suspected, lawless +counterfeiters, would they not be apt to show a revengeful spirit if the +persistent boys interfered with their business to any extent? + +Just how far he would be justified in leading his companions on, when +there was this element of danger in the affair, was a serious question, +which Paul had as yet not settled in his mind. He was waiting until +something more definite turned up, and when that occurred he expected to +be governed by circumstances to a great extent. + +Of course they had frequent little shocks. These came when some small +animals rustled the bushes in fleeing before them, or a bird started out +of the thick branches of a tree. + +The boys were keyed up to such a pitch that their nerves were on edge. +When a crow, that had been watching their coming with suspicious eye, +gave a series of harsh caws, and flapping his wings, took flight, Andy +caught hold of Bluff's sleeve, and gave it a tug. + +"Q-q-quit t-t-that!" exclaimed Bluff, in a shrill whisper. "G-g-guess I'm +k-k-keyed up enough, without m-m-akin' me j-j-jump out of my s-s-skin!" + +"Arrah but I thought it was that ould dog a-goin' to lape at us, so I +did!" muttered the Irish lad, shaking his head, and grasping his cudgel +more firmly. + +All of them had been wise enough to arm themselves in some way before +starting out. And when seven fairly muscular boys wield that many clubs, +that have been tried and found true, they ought to be capable of doing +considerable execution. But in truth there were but six of the cudgels, +for Paul carried his gun only. + +They had by now cleared quite considerable ground, even though their +progress was in anything but a direct line. On account of dense patches +of thorn bushes Paul found it necessary to make various detours; but then +this did not matter to any great extent; for while it added to the length +of their journey, at the same time it promised to reveal more of the +island to their search. + +One thing surprised Paul. They found the trees so dense that most of +the time it was possible to obtain only glimpses of the sky above. +Fortunately the sun continued to shine. He thought it must be pretty +dingy here on a cloudy day. And the more he saw of Cedar Island the +less he wondered that some of the ignorant country people believed it +to be haunted. + +Bobolink must have been allowing his mind to run in a similar groove, for +presently pushing up alongside Paul, he remarked in a whisper: + +"Gee! did you ever see a more spooky place than this is, Paul? Now, if a +fellow _did_ believe in ghosts, which of course I don't, here's where +he'd expect to run across some of them. Look at that hollow over yonder, +would you? There goes a woodchuck dodging back into his hole in the bank. +Ain't it queer how all these animals ever got across from the mainland to +this island? Why, seemed like all of half a mile to me." + +"Wait till we get on top of that hill, and perhaps the thing won't seem +so queer, after all," replied Paul. "I was thinking the same way; and +then it struck me that the land might be a whole lot closer to the island +on the northern side. Why, how do we know but what it's only a narrow +strait there?" + +"I wonder, now," mused Bobolink, who always found much food for thought +in what information he extracted from the scout master. + +They kept on for some five minutes longer, under about the same +conditions. Paul, however, began to believe that they must by now be +drawing somewhere near the foot of the little hill that arose near the +center of the island, as closely as they could figure from their camp at +the southern end. + +The result of their watchfulness was made apparent when Tom Betts +suddenly declared that he had seen something that looked like a +blacksmith's forge just beyond a screen of bushes ahead of them. + +Cautiously advancing, the seven scouts presently found themselves looking +upon the exact object Tom had mentioned, which proved that his powers of +observation were good. It was a forge of some sort, with a bellows +attached, and a wind screen, but no shelter over the top; which fact +would seem to indicate that it must be in the nature of a field smithy, +used for certain purposes to heat or melt metal. + +There being no sign of life around, Paul and his six followers swarmed +out of the brush, and surrounded the forge, which was about as unlikely a +thing to be run across, away in this forsaken quarter of the country, as +anything they could imagine. + +And as Paul examined the portable forge closer he made an interesting +discovery. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +A MYSTERY OF THE OPEN GLADE + + +"This has been used since we had that hard rain, fellows," Paul observed. + +Some of the others had noticed him handling the ashes that marked where +the fire had been. + +"Say, they are not warm, now, are they?" asked Phil, looking uneasily +around, as if half expecting to see some rough men come swarming out of +the bushes. + +"Oh! I didn't mean that," replied the scout master. "But you can see +for yourselves that when it rains there's nothing to keep the water +from running down over this forge. In that case the ashes would be +soaked. If you look again you'll see these are perfectly dry, and have +never been wet." + +Several of the scouts picked up some of the ashes, and found that it was +exactly as Paul stated. They were as dry as powder; and could certainly +never have been rained upon. + +"That means the forge has been used since the storm that helped us get +through that muddy canal of Jackson's Creek; is that what you mean, +Paul?" asked Bobolink. + +"Nothing else," replied the other, still continuing his investigations, +as if he hoped to make some further discovery, that might tell them what +the field forge was intended for, when these unknown men carried it to +this secluded island. + +"Great governor, Paul!" + +Bobolink had stooped, and picked something from the ground. This he was +now holding in his hand, and staring at it, as though he could hardly +believe his eyes. + +The other scouts crowded around him, and their eyes, too, widened when +they discovered what it was. + +"A quarter of a dollar!" exclaimed Jack. + +"And a shining new one in the bargain," declared Tom Betts. + +"What d'ye think of that, now?" said Phil. + +Paul reached over, and took possession of the coin. + +"Did you find that, Bobolink?" he asked, for sometimes the other was +known to play tricks. + +"I sure did, Paul, right like this," and stooping over, Bobolink was +about to pretend to pick up something when he uttered a gasp. + +"Another one!" + +He was holding a second coin in his hand, the exact duplicate, so far as +they could see, of the first one. + +"Must grow here in flocks!" exclaimed Phil; "let's see if we can dig up a +whole bunch of 'em, boys!" But although they all started digging with the +toes of their shoes, no more shining coins came to light; and it began to +look as if Bobolink had been fortunate enough to pick up all there were. + +Paul closely examined the two bright quarters. + +"If those are queer ones then they'd fool me all right, let me tell you!" +declared Bobolink. + +"I never saw better in my life," Paul admitted. + +The boys were looking pretty serious by now. It began to seem as though +that guess made by one of their number could not have been so wide of the +mark as at the time some of them believed. Here was pretty strong +evidence that these men were engaged in manufacturing spurious coins. + +Ought they to consider they had gone far enough, and give up the +exploration of the island, returning home to sound the alarm, and +send word to the authorities, so that these men might be trapped as +they worked? + +Paul was tempted to consider that his duty lay that way. Still, there +were some things that puzzled him, and made him hesitate before +concluding to follow that idea. + +Why should they keep the forge out here in the open, when some shelter +would seem to be the proper thing, if, as the scouts now believed, they +were using the fire to smelt metals, and blend them to the proper +consistency for the bad coins? + +That was something that puzzled Paul greatly. It caused him to look +around in the neighborhood of the forge, in the hope that he might pick +up some other clue. + +The ground was pretty well trampled over, as though a number of men had +been walking back and forth many times in their occupation, whatever it +could have been. Paul also saw a number of indentations in the earth, +which made him think some heavy object had rested in that open space. + +"Whatever they brought here," remarked Jack, presently, "it looks like +they must have used some sort of vehicle to carry it; because these +tracks have the appearance of ruts made by wheels." + +"Rubber tires, too," added Phil. "I've seen too many of 'em not to know; +for my father has a garage." + +"Is that so?" exclaimed Bobolink, shaking his head, as if to say that +with each discovery the mystery, instead of getting lighter, only grew +more dense. + +"And look how close together they seem to be, would you; a pretty narrow +bed for a wagon, don't it seem?" asked Tom Betts. + +"But they run off that way," observed Bobolink, "and there are so many of +the tracks you can hardly tell which are mates. There's Paul followin' +'em up; reckon we'd better keep with him, boys. We don't want to get +separated." + +Paul soon came to a stop, and was joined by the others. + +"Queer how the marks all seem to knock off about here," he remarked, +pointing to the ground. "You can't find one further on. And it isn't that +the ground suddenly gets hard, either. This looks the queerest thing of +them all. What do they run that thing with wheels up and down here for? +Anybody know?" + +But silence was the only answer he received, since every one of the six +other scouts seemed to be scratching his head, and wrinkling his +forehead, as though deep in thought, yet unable to see light. + +So they went back to the field forge, to look around again, though their +labor was all they had for their pains. + +"Not even another lovely quarter to be picked up where it got spilled +when they made 'em here, p'raps by the bushel," grumbled Bobolink, +scratching the earth with his toe in vain. + +He had recovered the coins from Paul, and jingled them in his pocket; +though the envious Bluff warned him that they might get him into a peck +of trouble, should he be caught by Secret Service men. + +"Huh! guess you think you c'n scare me into droppin' them," declared +Bobolink, thrusting out his chin at Bluff. "Let me know if you see me +doin' it; will you? I c'n just see you falling all over yourself, tryin' +to grab these dandy coins, if I let 'em slip by me. Shoot a ball up +another alley, Bluff. Go hunt a fortune for yourself, and don't want to +grab mine. Hands off, see?" + +"Do we go back now, Paul; or had we better keep on to the hill?" Jack +asked, as though he knew the other must have been settling this important +matter in his mind. + +"I think as we've come this far, with the hill just ahead of us, it would +be a disappointment not to get up to that cedar tree," Paul replied; at +which every one of the other scouts nodded his head. + +"W-w-want to s-s-see what the old p-p-place l-l-looks like," remarked +Bluff, in his positive way. + +"And there's no use in our staying around here any longer, either, I +should think," ventured Phil. "How do we know but what some of the men +may just happen to butt in on us, while we're looking their old forge +over? And if they did, I just guess they'd make things hum for us. So I +say, into the woods again for me--the sooner the better." + +"I hope we're doing the right thing by keeping on," Paul observed, +looking at his companions in a way they took as an invitation to +back him up. + +"Who's got a better right to go where we feel like?" demanded Bobolink. + +"Honest men wouldn't have any kick coming, just because a troop of Boy +Scouts happened to camp on their island; and it only goes to show +they're doing something shady, that's what. I say go on," Phil gave as +his opinion. + +Jack, Andy, Bluff and Tom were quick to declare themselves opposed to any +change of plan, at least, until after they had reached their goal, which +was the foot of the cedar on top of the hill. + +This decision seemed to give Paul more heart, and when they left the open +space he cast a last glance back at it, as though still puzzled. + +The trees grew even more dense as they drew nearer the foot of that +peculiar rise in the ground which went to make up what they called a +hill. Indeed, the boys were astonished to find such an almost +impenetrable jungle. + +"Isn't that some sort of shack you can see over yonder?" asked Phil, +presently. + +As the rest looked, they agreed that it looked like a rude shelter, made +out of branches, and some boards fastened together in a crude way. + +There was no sign of life about the place, and after making sure of this +the scouts grew bold enough to advance upon it from what seemed to be the +rear, though this could be settled only by the fact that the entrance to +the rustic hut appeared to be on the other side. + +Creeping noiselessly up until they were alongside the shelter, the scouts +set about finding loopholes through which they might obtain a glimpse of +what lay on the other side of those frail walls. + +Then one by one they drew back, and the looks they cast at each other +indicated that what they had seen was not a pleasant sight. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII + +THE WIGWAG MESSAGE + + +The other side of the rough shack was partly open, so that +considerable light managed to gain admittance. This had enabled the +scouts to see a figure lying on some old blankets, together with the +skins of several animals. + +It was without doubt the wild man who had given some of their troop such +a bad scare when he turned up near the camp soon after their arrival on +the island. + +He seemed to be sound asleep, and none of them were at all anxious to +make any sound calculated to arouse him. Indeed, more than one put a +finger to his lips to indicate that they were sealed, as he turned and +looked anxiously at his comrades. + +Paul made motions to let them know it would be just as well if they quit +the vicinity of that queer shack, where the crazy man, as they now deemed +him, had his home. + +A few minutes later, when they had put enough distance between themselves +and the rude shelter to permit conversation, Bobolink could no longer +keep his opinions to himself. + +"He was a jim-dandy, all right, and a genuine wild man of the woods!" he +remarked. "What are the circus fellows thinkin' of, to let such a fine +chance slip by to get a real 'What-is-it,' fresh from the jungles of +Borneo, half man, and the rest gorilla?" + +"And he had Nuthin's dog, after all," observed Paul, quietly. + +"What makes you say that, Paul?" asked Jack. + +"Because, in the first place, I saw a lot of bones, picked as clean as a +whistle, lying on the ground over in a corner. Then there was a lair that +looked as if an animal slept in it. And if that wasn't enough, I noticed +a piece of broken rope fastened to a stake, close by that corner. You +remember I said the dog was dragging a piece of rope around with him, +when he came creeping up near our camp last night? He broke away, all +right; and I guess the wild man will be minus his dog after this." + +"Well, that's one thing settled," asserted Phil "We know now, for sure, +there _is_ a wild man up here; and some of the officers will have to come +and capture him. My father is one of the county freeholders, and he's +overseer of the poor in the bargain; so I suppose it'll be up to him to +carry out the job. They can't afford to have people say there's a crazy +wild man at large, in our district, you see." + +"Did any of you notice that there was a rude sort of table in the shack?" +asked Paul, as they kept on moving forward, wondering if a third +discovery might be made at any minute. + +"Well, now, that's a fact," replied Bobolink. "I did see that, but +somehow didn't think it queer at the time, not enough to mention it, +anyhow. But come to think of it, it was kind of out of the way in the +shack of a wild man, eh?" + +"There was something on the table that would seem stranger, if you'd +noticed it. I saw a battered old coffeepot there!" observed Paul, +smiling grimly. + +"What?" ejaculated Bobolink. "A wild man liking coffee! Where d'ye +suppose he gets the roasted bean? It don't grow on the bushes up here; +and he sure don't look as if he had the cash to buy it. Oh! p'raps they +use him to pass some of this bogus coin they make! Mebbe he goes to +towns, and buys their supplies, all the time they're workin' like beavers +up here, makin' the stuff." + +"I don't just agree with you there, Bobolink," said Paul. "In the first +place, as Phil will tell you, if such a scarecrow ever came into +Stanhope, or any other town in the country, the officers would be sure +to arrest him, and examine him to see if he oughtn't to be shut up in the +asylum. If he got the old pot and the coffee to go with it from these +men, then it was in the nature of a bribe not to interfere with their +business, as they wanted to stay here on his Island." + +"Great brain, Paul; you seem to hit the right idea every time. And +chances are, that's just what happened," Bobolink remarked. + +"That dog didn't come back," observed Tom Betts. + +"And therefore he's still loose," added Phil, uneasily. "Hope we don't +run across the beggar again; but if we should, remember Paul, the country +expects you to do your duty. You must bag him, no matter what noise you +have to make doing it" + +"Leave that to me," remarked the scout master. "Now that we know pretty +well how the land lies, and whose dog it is, perhaps I won't be so +squeamish about shooting the beast if the chance comes along." + +"Here's the foot of the rise," Jack broke in. + +"And the trees grow more thin as the ground ascends, you notice," Paul +went on. He called their attention to all such things, because he was +acting as scout master of the troop, and it seemed to him that he should +not allow any chance to pass whereby he might enlarge the horizon of +scout lore of the lads under him. + +"Then it strikes me that we ought to be a bit careful not to show +ourselves too plain, as we go up," Jack suggested. + +"You're right," added Bobolink. "For all we know, these fellows may +have a lookout in a tree, as well as we have, and he'd see us if we got +careless. That means we must dodge along, taking advantage of every +sort of shelter that crops up. Great fun, boys, and for one I'm just +tickled to death over the chance to prove that we learned our little +lesson O. K." + +All were presently stooping at one moment, where the bushes grew sparse; +crawling in among some sheltering rocks at another, and even getting down +to wriggle along like so many snakes, when not even so much as a bush +offered a means of hiding from observation, in case hostile eyes happened +to be turned upwards toward the hilltop at the foot of the lone cedar. + +It was not a great distance to cover, and before long they found +themselves close to their goal. + +Already could they see over the southern side of the island; and after +they gained the cedar it would probably be easy to also survey the +northern half, the part which doubtless held more of interest to them +than any other, since they had reason to believe that the mysterious +dwellers on the isle were somewhere there. + +"Five more minutes will do it," remarked Paul, when they had gathered in +a shallow depression which afforded shelter until they caught their +breath again for another climb. + +Paul was looking hard at something far beyond the lake. Bobolink, of +course, being attracted by his scrutiny, also allowed his gaze to wander +in that quarter; but all he saw was what he took to be a buzzard, almost +out of sight--a dim speck in the heavens, and about to pass out of sight +altogether where clouds hovered above the southern horizon. + +"I c'n see about where our camp is," Phil was saying, "and I think I know +which tree the signal corps is stationed in. Anyhow, I seem to glimpse +something white moving among the green leaves, which, I take it, is a +flag being held ready to wave at us." + +"I reckon Paul will soon let 'em know we're still on the map," observed +Bobolink. "But won't they be s'prised when they learn that we saw the +terrible wild man in his own den; and ran across the plant where those +rascals make their bogus coin, that looks as bright and good as any Uncle +Sam stamps out?" + +Just then the leader gave the signal for another advance, and the six +scouts who followed set about completing the last leg of the climb. + +They finally found themselves at the roots of the cedar tree that crowned +the elevation, and which proved of a size far beyond what any of the +scouts had imagined. + +"Well, here we are at last," said Phil, breathing hard after his +exertions. + +"And," added Bobolink, also badly winded, though he would chatter; "now +to see Paul get one of the other fellows on the line, to wig his wag at +us, or do something that sounds that way. There he goes at it. And looky +there, they've been watching us climb, I reckon, because almost before +Paul made the first sign, that other fellow began sendin'." + +They watched the fluttering red flag with the white centre. Some of them +had taken more or less interest in sending and receiving messages; but +the boy in the tree proved too fast for any of them to follow. They +suspected that it was Jud Elderkin himself; for outside of Paul and Jack, +he was the best hand at that sort of thing. + +"My stars! he keeps right along doing it; don't he?" muttered Bobolink. + +"Must be some message, too, believe me," added Phil. + +"N-n-now, what d'ye s-s-suppose has happened at c-c-camp since we +q-q-quit?" remarked Bluff, anxiously waiting for the message to be +translated. + +Not once did Paul break in on the sending of the message. He sat there, +close to the base of the big cedar which sheltered his back from the +north side of the island; and seemed to be wholly engrossed in +transcribing the various signs of the flag code. + +They could not see the boy in the branches of the tree; but from their +elevated position the white and red flag was in plain view. Up and down, +and crosswise, it continued to write its message, that was doubtless like +printed letters to Paul and Jack, while unintelligible to those who had +never taken lessons in wigwagging. + +Finally came the well known sign that the message was done; and that the +sender awaited the wishes of the party with whom he was in communication. + +Paul turned upon his comrades. They saw that the frown had come back +again to his usually smooth forehead, as though he had learned +something to add to the perplexities of the problem they were trying so +diligently to solve. + +"It's Jud," he said, simply, "and he's just sent an astonishing +message. This is the way it ran, boys: 'Presence here known. Man in +aeroplane passed over camp. Went down lake half hour ago. Out of sight +now. Answer!'" + +No wonder Bobolink fairly held his breath, and the other five scouts +looked at each other, as though they could hardly believe their ears. For +a full minute they sat there and stared; while Bobolink remembered the +far-away black object that, at the time, he had thought to be a buzzard. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII + +STILL FLOUNDERING IN THE MIRE + + +"Whee!" + +It was, of course, Bobolink who gave utterance to this characteristic +exclamation. + +Like most of the others, he had been so stunned by the message +read by Paul, that for the moment he failed to find words to +express his feelings. + +An aeroplane had passed over the camp! And heading south, which would +take it toward the quarter where Stanhope lay! + +Here they had thought themselves so far removed from civilization that +the only persons within a range of miles might be set down as a wild man +and some lawless counterfeiters, who had chosen this region because of +its inaccessibility. + +And now they had learned that one of the latest inventions of the day had +been moving above the island, with the pilot actually looking down on the +camp, and so discovering the fact of the Boy Scouts having returned after +their banishment from the place. + +No wonder they all stared at each other, and that speech was denied them +for a time. + +Jack was the first to speak. He had read the message, being nearly as +good a signalman as Paul or Jud. + +"Things seem to be picking up at a pretty lively clip for us; eh, +fellows?" was the way he put it. + +"Picking up?" gasped Bobolink; "Seems to me they're getting to the red +hot stage about as fast as they can. An aeroplane! And up here on our +desert island at that, which folks said was given over to spooks and +wild men! That _is_ the limit, sure! Hold me, somebody; I think I'm +going to faint!" + +But as nobody made any movement in that direction, Bobolink +changed his mind. + +"Let's look into this thing a little closer, fellows," said Paul, always +prompt to set an investigation going. + +"That's what!" echoed Bluff, surprising himself by not stammering a +particle, even though he was still quivering with excitement. + +"Jud says an aeroplane passed over the camp; but he didn't tell whether +it rose from the island or not, though the chances are that it did," Paul +continued. + +"Why do you say that as if you felt sure?" demanded Tom Betts. + +"Yes," put in Phil, eagerly, "you've got on to something, Paul; give us +a chance to grab it, too, please." + +"Sure I will," complied the scout master, cheerfully. "And I'm only +surprised that one of you, always so quick to see such things, hasn't +jumped on to this little game as soon as I have. Look back a short time, +and you'll remember how we were scratching our heads over the tracks of +wheels down in that big opening!" + +"Wheels!" exclaimed Bobolink, with fresh excitement. "Well, I should say +yes; and looks to me like we had 'em in our heads too, where the brains +ought to be. Wheels, yes, and rubber-tired wheels too! Remember how they +seemed to run up and down a regular track, and just went so far, when +they gave out? Whoop! why, it's as easy as two and two make four. Anybody +ought to have guessed that." + +"Huh!" remarked Tom Betts, scornfully; "that's what they said, you +recollect, when Columbus discovered America. After you know, everything +looks easy. In my mind Paul goes up head. He's in a class by himself." + +"And that forge might have been used, among other things, for doing all +sorts of mending metal pieces connected with an aeroplane," Paul went on, +smiling at Tom's tribute of praise. + +"Not forgetting these sort of things," Bobolink observed, positively, +as he took out a pair of bright new quarters, and jingled them +musically in his hand. + +"Well, we haven't had any reason to change our minds about that +thing,--yet," said Paul. "But what strikes me as the queerest of all is +the fact that while we must have been pretty close by when that aeroplane +went up, how was it none of us heard the throbbing of the engine?" + +They looked at each other in bewilderment. Paul's query had opened up a +vast field of conjecture. One and all shook their heads. + +"I pass," declared Tom. + +"Me too," added Phil. + +"Must 'a got some new kind of motor aboard that is silent," +suggested Jack. + +"J-j-just a-goin' to s-s-say that, when Jack t-t-took the w-w-words out +of m-m-my m-m-mouth," Bluff exploded. + +"No trouble doin' that, Bluff," laughed Bobolink. "If that aeroplane did +climb up out of that field, while we pushed through the heavy timber, and +none of us heard a thing, let me tell you, boys, they've got a +cracker-jack of a motor, that's what!" + +"But arrah! would ye be thinkin' that a lot of bog-trottin' +counterfeiters'd be havin' a rale aeroplane?" burst out Andy Flinn, who +had up to now been unable to give any expression to his feelings. + +"I'd say these fellers must be a pretty tony lot, that's all," +Bobolink declared. + +"Whatever do you suppose they use such a machine for?" asked Tom. + +Again all eyes were turned upon Paul, as the oracle of the group of +wondering scouts. He shrugged his shoulders, as if he thought he had as +much right as any of the others to admit that he was puzzled. + +"Well, we'd have to make a stab at guessing that," he observed. "Any one +thing of half a dozen might be the truth. An aeroplane could be used for +carrying the stuff they make up here to a distant market. Then again, it +might be only a sort of plaything, or hobby, of the chief money-maker; +something he amuses himself with, to take his mind off business. All men +have hobbies--fishing, hunting, horse racing, golf--why couldn't this +chap take to flying for his fun?" + +"That sounds good to me," declared Bobolink; "anyhow, we know he must be +a kind of high-flier." + +"Seems like our mystery bulges bigger than ever," remarked Phil, +frowning. + +"It does, for a fact," admitted Tom; "instead of finding out things, +we're getting deeper in the mud all the time." + +"Oh! I don't know," Paul said, musingly; and although the rest instantly +turned upon him, fully expecting that the scout master would have some +sort of communication to make, he did not think it worth while, at that +time, to explain what he meant. + +"Say, I wonder, now, if we could see anything of those fellows from up +here?" remarked Bobolink, suddenly. + +"That's so," echoed Phil, perceiving what the other intended to convey; +"we can see the whole of the island now; and if they're camped somewhere +on the north end, perhaps we might get a glimpse of canvas." + +"What makes you think these men have their headquarters on the north end, +rather than anywhere else?" asked Paul, quickly. + +"Why, when we got up here, I noticed that smoke was climbing up over +there; and smoke means a fire; which also tells that some person must be +around to look after it," replied Phil, promptly. + +"Pretty good reasoning," said Paul, nodding his head toward Phil; for if +anything gave him pleasure as scout master of the troop, it was to see a +boy using his head. + +All now looked over the crown of the hill, toward the upper end of the +island. The first thing they saw, of course, was the thin column of +smoke which Phil had mentioned. Then Bobolink burst out with: + +"And you were right, Paul, when you said that the chances were the island +was close to the north side of the lake, so animals could swim across. +Why, only a narrow streak of water separates 'em there, sure enough." + +"Oh! that was only a guess on my part," Paul confessed. "I saw about how +far away the mainland trended up there, and supposed that our island must +run near it in places. I'm pleased to see that I hit the mark, for once +at least, in this mixed-up mess." + +Paul was evidently more or less provoked because he had been unable to +understand many of the strange things that had happened since their +arrival on Cedar Island. And the others knew that he was taking himself +to task because of his dullness; but what of them, if the scout master +needed to be wakened up--where did they come in? + +"I can't be sure about it," observed Phil, who had been looking intently +at one particular spot; "but it seems as if I could make out the roof of +a shed of some kind, over yonder, close to where the smoke rises." + +This set them all to looking again. Andy, who had very good eyes, +declared he could make it out, and that it was a roof of some kind; one +or two of the others, after their attention had been called to the spot, +also admitted that it did look a little that way, though they could not +say for a certainty. + +"Anyhow, I reckon that's where these men live," Paul declared; "and now +the question is, are we going to turn back here; or keep right on +exploring this queer old Cedar Island?" + +Bobolink, who was busy cutting his initials in the bark of the big cedar +that topped the squatty hill, spoke first of all; for being an impetuous +fellow, he seldom thought twice before airing his opinions. + +"Me to push right on," he said. "What difference does it make to us that +some other fellows chance to be camping on the same island? It's free to +all. We aren't going to bother them one whit, if only they leave us +alone. But they began wrong, you see, when they told us to get off the +earth. That riled me. I never did like to be sat on by anybody. It just +seems like something inside gets to workin' overtime, and all my badness +begins to rise up, like mom's yeast in a batch of dough. Count my vote to +go on ahead, Paul." + +"Well, who's next?" asked the scout master "and remember, that when +it comes to a matter like this, I always try and do what the +majority wants." + +"I'm willing to do what the rest say," came from Jack. + +"Go right on, and make a clean job of it," said Tom Betts, grimly. + +"S-s-same here!" jerked out Bluff. + +"That spakes my mind to a dot, so it do," Andy followed. + +Paul threw up his hand. + +"Enough said; that makes four in favor already, and settles the matter. I +won't tell you which way I would have voted, because the thing's been +taken from my hands. And besides, I would only have considered your +welfare in making my decision, and not my own desire." + +"Which manes he would have said yis for himsilf, and no for the rist of +us," declared the Irish boy, exultantly; "so it's glad I am we've made up +our minds to go on. Whin do we shtart, Paul, darlint?" + +"Right away," replied the one addressed. "There's no use staying any +longer up here, unless you think I'd better get Jud again, and wigwag him +all that we've learned up to now." + +"It'll keep," said Phil, hastily, for he wanted to see the faces of those +other scouts when the several astonishing pieces of news were told; +especially about the finding of the real wild man asleep, the discovery +of the field forge in the open glade and the picking up of the two silver +quarters, which last he felt sure would give them all a surprise. + +"A11 right!" the scout master announced, "I think pretty much the same +way; and besides, it would take a long while sending all that news. +But perhaps I ought to let the boys know we're going on further; and +that they needn't expect us much before the middle of the afternoon. +That'll give us plenty of time to roam around, and perhaps come back +another way." + +So he started once more to catch the attention of Jud, perched high up in +that tree above the sink near the lower end of the island, where he could +have an uninterrupted view of the cedar on the top of the hill. + +Then there was a fluttering of the signal flag and briefly the scout +master informed the other as to what their intentions were. + +"That job's done," Paul remarked, presently, when Jud replied with a +gesture that implied his understanding the message; "and now to move +down-hill again. We're taking some big chances in what we're expecting to +do, fellows, and I only hope it won't prove a mistake. Come along!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV + +THE DISCOVERY + + +"There's one thing that I think we haven't bothered our heads much about, +Paul," remarked Jack, just before they quitted the vicinity of the big +cedar on top of the hill. + +"What?" asked Bobolink, cocking his head on one side to see how well his +initials looked in the bark of the tree from which Cedar Island took its +name; and which would tell later explorers that others had been there +ahead of them. + +"Why, it seems to me those clouds down there on the southern horizon have +a look that spells storm," Jack continued. + +"Wow! wonder if we will strike another rainy spell?" said Bobolink, so +quickly that none of the others had a chance to get a word in; "that last +one helped us get out of the mud in the canal; if another comes will it +be as accommodatin', or turn on us, and whoop things up, carrying our +tents away over the island, and losing 'em in the swamps beyond there?" + +"Oh! say, don't imagine so much, Bobolink," interrupted Phil. "You're +the greatest fellow I ever saw for figuring all sorts of bad things out +long before they ever get a chance to start. What Jack means is, will we +be apt to get caught in the rain, and be soaked?" + +"That's the main thing," added Tom Betts, who was rather particular about +how his khaki suit looked on him, for Tom was a bit of a "dresser," as +some of the others, less careful with regard to their looks, called it. + +"I've noticed that it's grown pretty close and muggy," Paul went on. + +"I should say it had," added Bobolink. "I kept moppin' my face most of +the way up the rise. Thought we'd sure get a fine breeze after reachin' +the top; but nixey, nothing doing. It's as dead as a door nail; or Julius +Caesar ever was. Yes, that spells rain before night, I'd like to risk my +reputation as a weather prophet in saying." + +"Still, we go on?" Paul asked. + +"Well, we'd be a fine lot of scouts," blurted out Bobolink, "if the +chance of getting our backs wet made us give up a plan we'd decided on." + +"Lead the way, Paul; they're bent on finding out something more about +these men. And feeling that way, as Bobolink says, a little rain storm +wouldn't make them change their minds," and Jack, while speaking, started +after the scout master, who had commenced to descend the hill. + +They did not immediately turn toward the north side. There seemed no use +in deliberately making their presence known to any one stationed over at +the north end of the island, providing the mysterious men were not +already aware of it. + +Paul, when doing his wigwag act, had been careful to keep the crest of +the hill between his flag and that suspicious quarter where the smoke +column was lazily creeping up, as smoke has a habit of doing just before +rain comes. + +Of course it might be possible that the man in the aeroplane, after +discovering the tents in the sink, may have made some sort of signal +that would tell his comrades the fact of the scouts having returned in +the night. + +Paul wished, now that it was too late, he had thought to ask Jud about +that point. It might be of some benefit to them to know whether the men +were aware of their presence; or rested serene in the belief that they +were the only occupants of the island, besides the wild man. + +After the scouts had gone down a little way, Paul began to change his +course. He was now turning toward the north. The trees grew much more +thickly here, and would surely screen them from observation. + +The boys had resumed their former habit of observing everything that came +in their way, as true scouts always should. They turned their heads from +right to left and Bobolink even looked back of him more than a few times. +Perhaps he remembered that there was a wild man at large who might take a +notion to awake from his sleep, and, discovering the scout patrol, think +it his business to follow them. + +And then, to be sure, they ought to keep in mind the fact concerning that +wild dog that had gone back to the habits of its ancestors, preferring to +live by hunting, rather than take food from the hand of man. It would be +far from pleasant to have old Lion suddenly sneak up on them, and give +them a scare. + +But everything seemed peaceful around them. Now and then a bird would fly +out of a thicket, or give a little burst of song from the branch of some +tree. A red-headed woodpecker tapped boisterously on the dead top of a +beech near by, trying hard to arouse the curiosity of the worms that +lived there, so as to cause them to poke out their heads to see who was +so noisy at their front doors; when of course the feathered hammerer +stood ready to gobble them up. + +"Oh!" gasped Bobolink, when there was a sudden whirring sound of wings, +and they had a furtive glimpse of something flashing through the +undergrowth near by. + +"It's only a partridge; don't be worried!" remarked Phil. + +"Sure it was," muttered Bobolink, with scorn; "any fellow with only one +eye'd know that _now_; but all the same, the thing gave me a bad turn, +I'm that keyed up." + +"And that's a cotton-tail looking at us over yonder, so don't throw +another fit when he takes a notion to skip out," Phil continued, pointing +with his cudgel to where a rabbit sat, observing the intruders, as though +wondering what business any human beings had coming to the island that +had been left alone so long. + +Presently the little animal skipped off a few paces and then stopped +again. As the scouts advanced, it repeated these tactics; indeed, so +tame did it seem that any of them could have easily hit the rabbit with +a stone, had they felt so inclined, which, as scouts, they could not +think of doing. + +"Looks like she's got a litter of young ones close by here," said +Bobolink; "and is playing lame just to lead us away from the bunch. I've +seen rabbits do that before now. The cuteness of the thing! Look at her, +would you, just beggin' us to run after, and try to capture her?" + +"I've seen a partridge act as if she had a broken wing," Jack remarked, +quietly; "and flutter along the ground in a way that couldn't help but +make one try to catch her; but if you chased after her, it would be to +see the old bird take wing pretty soon, and go off like a rocket." + +"Same here," declared Paul; "and going back, I flushed a whole covey of +the prettiest little birds you ever saw. They'd been crouching under a +bush while the old one played lame; just as if she'd told them all about +it. But I heard her calling in the brush later on, and of course she got +them all together again." + +"There goes your lame rabbit now, Bobolink; and say, look at the way she +jumps over the ground," remarked Phil, chuckling. + +"Not so loud, boys," cautioned the scout master. "These things are all +mighty interesting; but we mustn't forget what we're here for nor yet the +fact that we've got a pretty good hunch there are some men close by who +would be just as mad as hops if they knew we meant to stalk their camp +and spy on them. If you have to say anything, whisper it softly, +remember." + +At that they all fell silent. It was true that they had forgotten for the +moment that they were doing scouting work; and under such conditions +talking was not allowed, especially above the lowest tone. + +All of them noticed that it was getting very close now, for they had to +use the red bandanna handkerchiefs they carried, and quite frequently at +that, to wipe away the perspiration that oozed from their foreheads. + +"Lucky we left our coats in camp; isn't it?" remarked Phil. + +"Looks that way now, but if that rain does strike us, we may wish we had +'em on," Tom Betts replied; showing that he at least had not been able to +put out of his head the possibility of a storm. + +"Seems to me we must be getting somewhere," Phil observed. + +"It can't be very much further," Paul answered, feeling that the remark +was addressed to him as the pilot of the expedition." + +"I should say not," came from Bluff, as chipper as a bird's song, and +without the least sign of halt or break; "if we go on much more, we'll +walk off the end of the island." + +Bobolink patted him on the back, as if to encourage him in well doing. + +"That's the stuff, Bluff; you c'n do it when you try," he whispered; "but +as to steppin' into the lake, I guess we aren't that near the north end +yet, by a good sight." + +Paul nodded his head, but said nothing; from that Bobolink knew the scout +master agreed with him. They could go considerably longer without being +halted by coming to the water's edge. + +Jack called the attention of his chums just then to something ahead. + +"Seems to me I smell smoke," he said, "and if you bend down here, so you +can look under the branches of the trees, you'll see something that's got +the shape of a shed, or cabin, off yonder." + +The others, upon making a try, agreed with Jack that it did seem that +way. + +"Oh! we're right on top of the nest, all right" chattered Bobolink, but +showing his wisdom by keeping his voice down to its lowest note; "and +now, if we c'n duplicate that little dodge we played at the shack of the +wild man, it's goin' to be as easy as turning over off a spring-board, +with a ten foot drop." + +"But if we're caught we might get shot at," suggested Phil, as if the +idea had struck him for the first time that they were really playing with +fire, in thus bearding desperate lawbreakers in their den. + +"We aren't going to get caught," said Bobolink; "who's afraid? Not I. +Lead along, Paul. I want to get this thing out of my system, so I c'n +have a little rest up here," and he placed a hand on his brow. + +Although himself doubtful as to the wisdom of the move, Paul could not +back down now, after allowing the boys to vote on the matter. Perhaps he +was more or less sorry that at the time he had not exercised his +privilege as scout master to put his foot down on their taking any more +chances, just to satisfy such curiosity as reckless fellows like Bobolink +might feel, with regard to the unknown men. + +It was too late now. Until some of the boys themselves manifested a +desire to call the retreat, he must go on; although it began to seem more +than ever audacious--this creeping up on a den of men who were hiding +from the eye of the law in order to carry on their nefarious trade. + +And so they started to creep forward, now dodging behind trees, and +crawling back of friendly patches of bushes whenever the chance presented +itself. It was all exciting enough, to be sure, and doubtless gave the +boys many a delightful little thrill. + +In this fashion they came upon a larger clump of trees and bushes, which, +instead of trying to round, they concluded to pass through. + +It was just as they gained a point inside this clump that they were +brought up with a round turn by discovering a couple of objects standing +there, as though they had been left behind when the valuable contents +which they formerly encased had been taken out. + +These were two large packing cases, of unusual shape, and made of heavy +planed boards! + +Some of the scouts looked at them carelessly, for to them these objects +did not carry any particular meaning. Not so Jack, Tom Betts and +Bobolink. Those three boys had received a shock, as severe as it was +unexpected. + +They recognized those cases as being the identical ones which had only +lately reposed snugly in the planing mill of Jack's father in Stanhope, +and to guard which one Hans Waggoner had been hired by the man who owned +them, Professor Hackett! And as they stood there and gaped, doubtless +among the many things that flashed into the minds of those three lads was +the fact that _somebody_ had been trying to get to see what the contents +of those mysterious cases might be; which person they now knew must have +been a Government Secret Service man, a detective from Washington, on the +track of the bold counterfeiting gang! + +All these things, and much more, flashed through the minds of Jack and +his chums, as they stood there in that thicket, and stared hard at the +two big cases bound around with twisted wire, but which had now been +relieved of their unknown contents, for they stood empty. + +And the others, realizing that something had occurred out of the regular +channel, waited for them to speak, and explain what they had discovered. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV + +TIME TO GO BACK + + +"What is it, Bobolink--Jack?" asked the scout master. + +"The boxes yonder!" Bobolink managed to exclaim. + +"You evidently have seen them before; tell me, Jack, are they the ones +you said your father stored for that man?" continued Paul. + +"They certainly look mighty like them," replied the other; "and you know, +they were taken away that morning early. They must have been carried +across country to the shore of the lake, and then ferried over in a +rowboat. That was what we saw the marks of, and the four men walked off +with these between them." + +"Whee! did you ever?" gasped the still bewildered Bobolink. "Yes, here +you c'n see the markin' on the lid they threw away when they opened this +one--'Professor Hackett, In care of John Stormways, Stanhope,' all as +plain as anything. And to think how after all my worryin' the old boxes +have bobbed up here. Don't it beat the Dutch how things turn out?" + +That seemed to be the one thing that gripped Bobolink's attention--the +strange way in which those two heavy boxes with the twisted wire binding +had happened to cross his path again. + +But Paul was thinking of other things, that might have a more serious +bearing on the case. He turned to Jack again. + +"What do you know about this so-called professor?" he asked. + +"Me? Why, next to nothing, only that he comes from down near New York +City at a place called Coney Island, where lots of fakirs hold out; and +plenty of men too, in the summer season, who would want to circulate a +little money that did not bear the Government stamp." + +"But your father seems to have known him; or at any rate believed he was +a law-abiding citizen," pursued Paul; "otherwise he would hardly have +given him the privilege of storing his cases in his mill over night." + +"Oh! my father is that easy-going, nearly anybody could pull the wool +over his eyes. He believed the yarn this pretended professor told him, +I've no doubt, and thought it next door to nothing to let him keep the +boxes in the mill for a short time. You know, my father is the +best-hearted man in Stanhope, barring none. But I agree with the rest of +you that this time he must have got stung. The professor is sure a bad +egg. I must put my dad wise as soon as I get half a chance." + +"Perhaps it's already too late to save him from getting stuck with a lot +of the stuff they manufacture?" suggested Tom Betts. + +"Oh! that could hardly be so," Jack replied, cheerfully. "When these +bogus money-makers want to get rid of some of their stock they always +have go-betweens do the job for them. It would be too easy tracing things +if they passed the stuff themselves. So I guess my dad hasn't taken in +any great amount of the counterfeits." + +Bobolink was down on his knees. He even crawled into one of the +overturned boxes, as though trying hard to ascertain from sundry marks +what could have been contained under that wooden cover. + +He came out, shaking his head, as though his efforts had not been +attended by success. + +"Looks like machinery of some kind, that's all I c'n tell," he admitted. +"But of course, they'd need a press of some sort to work off the paper +money on. Now, chances are, it's bein' put up right in that long shed +yonder, that we c'n see. Question is, how're we goin' to get close enough +to peek through a crack, and find out what's goin' on in there?" + +Again did most of the boys look uneasily at each other. Paul believed +that, now the great test had arrived, they were beginning to weaken a +little. No doubt it did not seem so glorious a thing when you got close +up, this spying on a band of lawless men, who would be apt to deal +harshly with eavesdroppers, if caught in the act. + +Still, he would not give the order to retreat unless they asked for it. +They had been allowed to settle that matter when they voted; it was up to +Bobolink, Tom, Bluff or Andy to start the ball rolling, if they began to +reconsider their hasty conclusion of a while back. + +Bobolink looked toward the low, long shed, now plainly seen, in something +of a rocky opening, with glimpses of water beyond which told how close to +the shore it had been built. But he did not act as though as anxious to +rush matters as before. + +"Why d'ye believe they ever landed those boxes where they did, and toted +'em all the way up here, heavy as they were, when there's the water close +by?" asked Jack. + +"I was thinking about that a minute ago," replied Paul; "and the only +explanation I can find is this: Perhaps the water is mighty shallow all +around up at the north end of the island. I can see that the shore is +rocky, and if that's so, then no boat with a heavy load could get close +enough in to land the stuff. And so they had to get busy, and carry the +boxes, one at a time." + +"Sounds reasonable, and we'll let her go at that," commented Bobolink, +who, as a rule, was contented to take Paul's opinion. + +Paul himself stooped down to take a look into the cases. He did not make +any remark as he straightened up again, nor did any of the others think +to ask his opinion; which possibly may have been lucky, for perhaps Paul +would not have liked to commit himself just then. If he had found +anything that gave him a new clue, he was evidently keeping it to himself +until he could get more proof. + +"S'pose we ought to make a fresh start," suggested Bobolink, but with a +lack of eagerness that was plainly noticeable; it was as though the +discovery of those two mysterious boxes under such strange conditions had +rather cooled his ardor. + +"That's so," remarked Tom. + +"We've g-g-got so n-n-near now, we ought to f-f-finish!" Bluff declared. + +And yet none of them made the slightest movement looking to an advance, a +fact that Paul could not help but notice, and which warned him they were +close to the point of a change of policy. A suggestion that they give up +the spy business at this stage, and retreat in good order to their camp, +would doubtless have met with favor, and been sure of a unanimous vote. + +But still Paul, having his own notions of such matters, when dealing with +boys, declined to say anything. If one of the four who were mainly +responsible for their being there should take it upon himself to offer +such a motion, he would only too gladly put it to a vote. Until such time +came he must continue to remain silent. + +"Just as you say, boys; I'm carrying out your plans," he remarked, +quietly, wishing to let them know that they had it in their own power to +alter conditions at any time they so desired. + +They all finally moved after the scout master, even if some feet did lag +a little. Bluff and Phil particularly were conscious of a strange sinking +sensation in the region of their hearts, which they mistrusted signified +fear; and rather than have any of their comrades suspect that they had a +cold hand pressing there, they shut their teeth hard together, and +determined that under no circumstances would they show the white feather. + +So Paul led them on. + +Again they tried to conceal themselves as best they might in devious +ways. Here the wide and generous trunk of a friendly tree afforded them +a certain amount of shelter; a little further on a small pile of rocks +answered the same benevolent purpose; but always the main idea was to +hide from any curious eyes that might be on the lookout in the +vicinity of that queer looking shed--newly made, if the fresh boards +signified anything. + +"Looky here! there's a man!" suddenly exclaimed Bobolink. + +The others had discovered the man at about the same time. They all lay +flat and hardly dared breathe, lest in some manner they attract the +attention of the stranger, who seemed to be not only a big man, but +rather a fierce-looking fellow in the bargain. + +He was glancing all around at the heavens, as though wondering whether +the aeroplane was not coming back, whatever its mission in flying away +south could have been. Standing there, he shaded his eyes with his +hands and continued to look toward the south for several minutes. Then +he made a gesture as of disappointment, and vanished around the corner +of the shed. + +"Never looked down this way once!" Bobolink said triumphantly, as though +their escape had caused his spirits to rise a little. + +"That leaves the coast clear again, anyhow," said Tom Betts, as if he now +had a rather disagreeable duty to perform, which, since it had to be +done, had better be gotten through with as speedily as possible. + +When leaving camp these brave scouts had never dreamed but that +spying upon the enemy would prove the most delightful task imaginable. +Even later on, when they had voted to keep moving forward, with so +much assurance, the picture had not begun to fade; but now it did not +seem the same. + +As the shelter grew less and less, however, it became evident that +presently, if they continued to advance in this fashion, they must reach +a point where, in order to make progress, they must expose themselves to +hostile eyes, should any be on the watch. + +Would even this cause one of the four scouts to "take water," as Bobolink +called it, and make the sign that he had had enough? + +Paul knew them all pretty well, and he also realized the fact that every +fellow possessed a nature bordering on the stubborn. It was the dread of +being thought cowardly that kept them from taking the cue from Paul, and +ending this foolish advance. + +They had gone over fifty feet since the last stop, and passed the last +large tree which could be looked on to give them any shelter. + +It was just at this moment that once again the big man was seen coming +hastily around the corner of the shed. + +At sight of him the boys stood still. There was no use trying to hide +now. Perhaps some faint hope took possession of them that they might be +unnoticed if they did not move; just as the still hunter, stalking a +feeding deer, will watch its short tail, and whenever he sees it twitch +he stands perfectly motionless; for he knows that the animal is about to +raise his head, and that he will probably be taken for a stump if he does +not move hand or foot. + +But evidently the man had sighted the seven khaki-clad scouts. He seemed +almost petrified with amazement at first, and stood staring at them. As +if awaking from his trance, he began to make frantic motions with his +arms, and at the same time shouted hoarsely at them: + +"Go back! Get out of that! You're crazy staying there! Run, I tell you, +while you have the chance! Get away! Get away, you fools!" + +The scouts looked at each other in astonishment. What could it all mean? +Were all the men on this queer island stark, staring crazy? He called +them that, but it is always a rule for mad people to believe every one +else crazy but themselves. + +"Say, what does the guy mean?" cried Bobolink, who seemed to be utterly +unable to understand a thing; "mebbe it's a small-pox hospital we've run +on, fellows!" + +But Paul was beginning to see a light. Possibly the excited gestures, as +well as the urgent words of the big man, may have assisted him to arrive +at a conclusion. + +He no longer felt so decided about not speaking the word that would +cause his little detachment to turn and retreat. There must be danger +hovering over them, danger in some terrible form, to make that unknown +man so urgent. + +"Let's get out of this, boys!" he called, "every fellow turn, and streak +it as fast as he can. And get behind trees as quick as you can, +because--" + +They had already started to obey the scout master, and possibly had +covered a few jumps when it seemed that the very earth shook and quivered +under them, as a fearful roar almost deafened every boy. + +Just as you have seen a pack of cards, made into tent shape in a curving +row, go falling down when the first one is touched, so those seven scouts +were knocked flat by some concussion of the air. + +They had hardly fallen than one and all scrambled to their feet, and fled +madly from the scene, as if fearful lest the whole end of the island +might be blown up behind them, and catch them in a trap from which there +could be no escape. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI + +HONORABLE SCARS + + +So it turned out after all that the scout master did not have to change +his mind, and give the order for retreat. When that dreadful panic +overwhelmed the scouts, it was really a case of "every one for himself." + +Either by rare good luck, or some sort of instinct, the seven lads +managed to keep pretty well together as they ran. Not a single fellow +dreamed of allowing himself to get separated from his comrades. It seemed +to be a case of "united we stand, divided we fall," or "in union there is +strength." + +If in their mad rush some of the boys collided with trees, or stumbled +over obstacles that they failed to discover in time, they were not of a +mind to let such trifles interfere with their making record time. + +In such cases it was only necessary to scramble erect again, and put on a +little extra spurt in order to overhaul their comrades. + +What had taken them half an hour to cover when they were "scouting" in +such approved fashion, was passed over in about five minutes. + +It was Paul who came to his senses first. He realized that there was no +one chasing them and that, to tell the truth, not one of the boys could +have been seriously hurt by what had befallen. + +So he began to laugh, and the sound reaching the ears of the others, +appeared to act on their excited minds like soothing balm. + +Gradually the whole lot slackened their pace until they were going at a +jog trot; which in turn settled down to a walk. + +Finally Bobolink came to a full stop. + +"Whee! let's get a few decent breaths, fellows!" he managed to gasp. + +The others were apparently nothing loth, and so they all drew up in a +bunch. A sorry lot they looked just then, to tell the truth. It seemed as +though nearly every fellow had some distinguishing mark. + +Phil's rather aristocratic face had a long scratch that extended down the +right side, and gave him a queer look; Jack was caressing a lump on his +forehead, which he may have received from a tree, or else when he was +knocked down without warning by that singular explosion; Andy was trying +to quench a nose-bleed, and needed his face washed the worst way; Bluff's +left eye seemed partly closed, as if he had been too close to the +business end of an angry bee; while Bobolink had two or three small cuts +about his face that made him look as if he had been trying to tattoo +himself--with wretched success. + +So they looked at one another, and each thought the balance of the crowd +had the appearance of a set of lunatics on the rampage. + +Hardly had they stared at each other than they set to laughing. + +"Oh! my stars! but aren't you a screamer though, Andy, with all that +blood smeared over your face; and Bluff, why he looks as if he'd been in +a prize fight!" was the way Bobolink expressed his feelings, bending over +as he laughed. + +"Huh! you're not so very pretty yourself!" replied Bluff, with not the +slightest sign of an impediment in his speech--evidently it had been +frightened out of his system for the time being. "Anybody'd think you +were a South Sea Islander on the warpath. And wouldn't they cross over to +the other side of the road in a hurry if they met you! Say, if Mazie +Kenwood or Laura Carson could only see you now, they'd give you the cut +straight." + +"Look at Jack's bump, would you?" Tom Betts exclaimed. + +"Don't call attention to me any more than you can help," Jack remarked, +making a wry face, as he caressed the protuberance on his forehead; "it +feels as big as a walnut, let me tell you, and hurts like fun. The sooner +I'm back in camp, so I can slap some witch hazel on that lump, the better +it'll please me, boys." + +After a little more laughing and grumbling, Paul, who had escaped without +any visible hurts, though he walked a little lame, remarked: + +"Well, do we start right back again, and take a look-in on those men? +Don't everybody speak at once, now!" + +All the same they did, and the burden of the united protest was that +circumstances alter cases; that they had arrived at the conclusion that +what those men were doing on the island could be no affair of honest, +law-abiding scouts; and that as for them, the camp in the sink offered +more attractions at that particular moment than anything else they +could think of. + +Of course that settled it. The scouting was over for that occasion. They +had done themselves credit, as far as it went; but then, who would ever +dream that they would come within an ace of being blown sky-high with the +whole upper end of the island? + +As if by common consent, they started to move forward again, and every +fellow seemed to know, as if by instinct, which was south, and +whereabouts the camp was, for they needed no pilot now. + +And as they journeyed they talked it all over. Every boy seemed to have +an opinion of his own with regard to what had happened, and they differed +radically. + +"Tell you what," said Tom Betts, who had also escaped with only a few +minor injuries, because he was as quick as a cat, and must have fallen on +a soft piece of ground besides; "tell you what, I thought that old hill +had turned into a volcano, and just bust all to flinders." + +"Well, now," Phil admitted, "I somehow had an idea that storm had chased +up when we didn't chance to be watching, and lightning had struck a tree +close to the place where we happened to be standing looking at that crazy +man wave his arms." + +"Me?" Bobolink remarked; "why, I was dead sure what we guessed about a +war game bein' played up here between two pretended hostile armies was +right; and that one of 'em had blown up the fort of the other. You see, +that aeroplane had a sorter military air about it, even if I didn't see +it. And I'm not sure yet it isn't that." + +"One thing sure," remarked Paul; "the man was trying to warn us to keep +back, for he knew some sort of mine was going to explode, and that we +might be killed. As it was, we got off pretty lucky, I think. This sprain +will heal in a day or two; but if a rock weighing a ton or two had +dropped down on me, I guess the chances of my ever seeing Stanhope again +would have been mighty slim." + +"But tell me," Bobolink asked, "what in the world would counterfeiters +want with exploding mines, and doin' all that sort of thing? Just +remember that big bang we had the other night, that woke everybody up. +Shows it's a habit with 'em, and that this wasn't some freak accident. +Gee! my head's buzzing around so I can't think straight. Somebody do my +guessin' for me; won't you, please?" + +"That's right," said Tom Betts, suddenly; "who are these men, anyway? +P'raps we didn't size 'em up straight when we made up our minds they were +bogus money-makers. Mebbe they happen to be a different sort of crowd +altogether. How about that, Paul; am I off my trolley when I say that?" + +"I've been beginning to believe something was crooked in our guess for a +little while, Tom," replied the scout master; "but all the same, you've +got me up in the air when you ask who and what they are. I'm rattled more +than I've been in many a day, to be honest with you all." + +Bobolink took out something from his pocket. He stared hard at the two +shining quarters, and jingled them in his hand. + +"Look good to me," he was heard to say; "I'd pass 'em any time for +genuine. But what silly chump'd be throwing good money around like +that, tell me?" + +"Or bad money either, Bobolink," remarked Paul; "so you see, it was an +accident in any case. You've lost money many a time out of your pocket; +well, this man was in the same boat. Chances are, that's straight goods." + +Bobolink grinned. + +"If that's so," he remarked calmly, "I'm in a half dollar, and that's +some satisfaction. But say, what a time we'll have tellin' the boys. Wow! +I can see the eyes of Little Billie, and Curly, and Nuthin just stickin' +out of their heads when they hear all we've run up against." + +"And we'd better move along a little faster while about it," +observed Paul. + +"Why? Hope you don't think any of those men are chasin' after us; or that +we'll run up against that wild man, or the big yellow dog again?" +Bobolink inquired, glancing fearfully about him. + +"No, I was considering the feelings of the boys," replied the +scout master. + +"That's a fact," Jack went on, "they'll be worried about us, after +hearing that terrible report, and think something has happened to our +crowd. But we're not a great way from camp now, Paul." + +"No, and if the distance was greater, I'd stop long enough to send up a +smoke signal that would tell Jud we were all right. But that'd take time, +and perhaps we'd better hurry along," and the scout master set a new +pace, even though limping slightly. + +"Got hurt some yourself; did you, Paul?" Jack asked, solicitously. + +"Oh! only a little sprain, but it happens to be on a muscle that I have +to use when I walk, and you know a fellow favors such a pain. But I can +see where the sink lies now; we'll be there in ten minutes, perhaps +half that." + +They continued to push on. For the time being most of them forgot about +their personal troubles, in their anxiety to join their comrades. And +Bobolink, as he walked beside Jack, spoke what was on his mind: + +"It was a grand old scare, all right, and one we won't ever forget, +believe me; but there's one thing that tickles me half to death, Jack. We +know _now_ where the queer old boxes went to, even if we are up in the +air about what was in them. And the chances are we may find that out +before we're done with this business; because those men ought to come +down and ask if anybody got hurt by their silly Fourth of July fireworks +display. There's the camp, boys. Whoopee!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII + +ANOTHER THREATENING PERIL + + +Loud cheers greeted the appearance of the seven scouts, as they hurried +forward into the camp. And when those who had remained with the tents saw +the various scratches, contusions and bumps that adorned most of the +returned boys' faces, they were burning with eagerness to hear the +details of the adventure. + +Such a clatter of tongues as ensued, as every fellow tried to tell his +version of the happening. If half that was said were written down, it +would require many more chapters to give the details. + +Gradually, however, each stay-at-home scout began to get a pretty clear +idea of the series of adventures that had befallen their mates in trying +to explore the mysteries of the island. They understood all about the +wild man, and what the consensus among the seven explorers seemed to be +concerning the strangers who occupied the island, and were conducting +such an amazing series of experiments, even making use of an aeroplane to +accomplish their ends. + +The guesses that followed were legion, yet Paul, who listened patiently +to the most astounding theories, shook his head in the end. + +"I don't believe any of us have hit on the right thing yet, fellows," he +said. "But there's meat in a number of the guesses you've made, and +perhaps we'll get the story after a while. But how about grub; we're as +hungry as bears?" + +"Never expected to join you at lunch, for a fact," grinned Bobolink; "but +then, we made better time than we ever thought we could on the return +journey. Talk to me about a prize spurrin' a fellow on to do his level +best--the whip that does it is to put a first-class scare in him. Then +you're goin' to see some runnin' that takes the cake. Wheel didn't we +sprint, though? Bet you I jumped clear over a log that stood six feet +high from the ground--more or less." + +It happened that the stay-at-home scouts had just prepared their noon +meal at the time the explosion occurred that made the whole island +tremble. That had startled them so much that they had not had the +heart to think of sitting down because of anxiety about the fate of +their chums. + +And so the dinner had remained untouched up to the time they heard the +"cooee" of the returning warriors; and then caught the bark of the fox, +that told them that Paul and his posse had returned. + +There was enough for all, because the cooks were very liberal in making +up their messes. And over the dinner more suggestions were made as to +what their future course ought to be. + +By now even the fire-eating Bobolink was ready to cry quits, and +back down; nor did he seem at all ashamed to admit the fact that he +was afraid. + +"If those sillies mean to blow up the whole island, some way or other, +why, what's the use of us stayin' here, an' goin' up with it, I'd like to +know?" he said. "Tell you what, I've got another guess comin', and it's +this: P'raps they're meanin' to get rid of this island and lake, and have +started to do the job. Mebbe some big railroad wants a short line across +country, and this thing is right in their way. I've heard of 'em doin' +bigger things than just blowing up a little island; haven't you, Paul?" + +He always appealed to the scout master when one of his brilliant thoughts +came along. Paul nodded his head. + +"That sounds more reasonable than a whole lot of things I've been +listening to, Bobolink, for a fact," Paul admitted. "Still, we don't +know, and there's no way to find out the true story, right now. +Listen, fellows!" + +"Thunder, away off, Paul; guess we've all got explosions on the brain, +because it gave me a start, too," said Jack, laughing. + +"And if a storm's coming along," observed Jud Elderkin, who seemed vastly +pleased when he heard that his signalling had been so easily understood, +"why, I reckon we ought not to think of pulling down our good tents, and +getting out of here, till she's over." + +It was plain from this that the scouts had determined to abandon their +dangerous island, and spend the balance of the outing by making a camp on +the mainland, where at least there was a reasonable expectation of not +being blown sky-high by some explosion. + +"And since we're done eating perhaps we'd better take another look at the +tent pins, to make sure they'll hold when the wind strikes us. Some of +these summer storms have a lively advance breeze, you know, boys," Paul +suggested. + +"Little Billie and I'll go over to the boats, and see that the curtains +are buttoned down snug. Some of us can stay inside while its rainin' and +that'll give more room in the tents," Bobolink remarked, jumping to his +feet, with a return of his customary lively Way. + +"And in this sink we'll be protected from any wind coming from the south, +don't you think, Paul?" Jack ventured. + +"Couldn't be better," was the reply. "Those trees and bushes, as well as +the rise in the ground, will help a lot. But get busy, fellows, with +those tent pins. I'll take the axe, and go the rounds myself, to make +doubly sure. It's not the nicest thing in the world to have your canvas +blow away--eh, Nuthin?" + +"You're right, it isn't," replied the little scout, "'specially when it +lifts you right up with it into a tree, and has you tied up there in the +snarls of a clothes line. I know all about that, and none of the rest of +you ever tried it. Excuse me from another balloon ride like that." + +In a short time everything was done that could be thought of to render +things storm-proof. Then the boys went over to the edge of the water to +watch the advance of the black clouds, which those at the boats in the +little cove declared was a sight worth seeing. + +And it certainly was, all the scouts admitted. Some of them were filled +with a certain awe, as they saw how inky the clouds looked. But what boy, +or man either, for that matter, is there who has not felt this sensation +when watching scurrying clouds that tell of an approaching storm? + +By degrees the boys began to drift back to the camp. Every sort of excuse +was given for leaving the beach. One fellow suddenly remembered that he +had left his coat hanging on a bush, another had forgotten to fasten his +knapsack, while a third wished to tie his blanket in a roll, in case the +water did find a way to get into the sink. + +Paul, Jack, Bobolink and Jud remained until they saw the rough water away +down near the southern shore of the lake, and understood that the first +squall must be swooping upon them. Then they too gave up the vigil, for +the chances were the rain would come with the first breeze. + +With a howl and a roar the storm broke upon them. Cowering in the tents, +about four in each, as the others had taken to the boats, they waited +with more or less suspense what might happen. + +The wind made the canvas shake at a lively clip, and the fastenings on +the southern side were sorely tried; but they had been well taken care of +and Paul called out that he believed they were going to hold. + +For half an hour the rain beat down in torrents. None of them remembered +ever hearing such a deluge descend, but perhaps their imaginations were +excited on account of the peculiar conditions that surrounded them. All +the same it rained, and then rained some more, until a very large +quantity of water must have fallen, all of them decided. + +With Paul and Jack in the tent that was nearest to the lake were +Bobolink, Tom Betts and Nuthin. + +"Seems to me it's gettin' kind of damp in here," remarked Bobolink, +when the clamor outside had died down somewhat, and they could hear each +other talk. + +"That's a fact," declared Paul; "and after all it's just as well that we +made sure our blankets and other things were tied up and hung away from +the ground. But seems to me I hear one of the fellows in the boat +shouting to us." + +When he opened the flap he found that the rain had almost stopped, as +well as the wind to a great extent. Perhaps the storm was over. + +"Hello!" Paul called out. + +"Hey! that you, Paul?" came in a voice he recognized as belonging to Jud, +who had been one of those in charge of the nearby boats. + +"Yes, what's wrong?" asked the scout master. + +"Can't you come over here? Going to be the dickens to pay, I reckon. The +bally old lake's rising like fun. Looks like the outlet must have got +stopped up somehow. You're sure going to have to move your tents mighty +quick. Coming, Paul?" + +"All right," answered the other, as he crawled out, and started under the +dripping trees for the spot where the two motorboats lay in the cove, +sheltered from the waves that had been dashing against the shore +elsewhere. + +When he reached the spot he found that all of the boys who had been +sheltered in the boats were lined up on the shore, where they could see +down the lake. Jud himself seemed to be watching the water steal up a +stick he had thrust into the sand. + +"Gee! she's mounting like fun!" he exclaimed. "Water must be pouring into +the old lake from every side, and little gettin' out. Say, if this keeps +on, the whole island, except that hill up yonder, will be under water +before night. It sets rather low, you understand, Paul." + +The scout master was naturally thrilled by these words. He knew that the +leader of the Gray Fox Patrol was no alarmist, and that he seldom lost +his head in times of excitement. + +And so it was with considerable apprehension that Paul stooped down so he +might see just how fast the lake was rising. And when he noticed that it +actually crept up the stick before his very eyes, he knew that what Jud +had said about the whole island being covered might not be such a silly +assertion after all. + +It began to look as though the adventures of the scouts had not yet +reached an end, and that they were in for another thrilling experience. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII + +PREPARED FOR THE WORST + + +"She's just walking up hand over fist; eh, Paul?" asked Jud. + +"No question about it, Jud," came the reply as the scout master cast an +apprehensive look across the half-mile of water that separated them from +the outlet of the lake. "I'd give something to know what's happened down +there, to dam this water up, and just how far it's going to rise on us." + +"Tell you what," said Bobolink, who had followed Paul when he left the +tent, as had also the rest of the occupants, "I wouldn't be a bit +surprised if that awful explosion shook the shoulder of earth and rock +down, that we saw hanging above the mouth of the Radway River where she +leaves the lake." + +"You've hit it, I do believe!" cried Paul, exultantly; "and that's just +what did happen, chances are, fellows." + +"But if the outlet is filled up," said Jud, "and this water keeps pouring +in on four sides, it's dead sure the blooming lake will fill up in short +order. What had we better do, Paul?" + +"That's just what I'm trying to figure on, Jud," answered the other; +"it's one of two things--either hike out for the hill, where we'll be +safe until the water goes down; or else get our things aboard the boats, +and stay here." + +"That last strikes me as the best of all!" declared Jack. + +"Besides," broke in Nuthin, "we don't want to lose those boats, you know. +They were loaned to us and if we let 'em go to smash, wouldn't it take us +a long time to pay the bill, though? Besides, we'll need 'em to get away +from here." + +"That isn't the worst of it," remarked Paul, who was very serious. + +"Why, what is there besides?" demanded Bobolink. + +"Suppose the water does get up so as to cover the island, all but the +hill," the scout master went on deliberately, as though making sure of +his ground as he talked; "and then, all of a sudden the weight of it +broke through the dam; don't you see the suction, as the water rushed +out, would be something _terrific_. No rope ever made, I reckon, could +hold these boats back. They'd sure be drawn through the gap, and carried +on the flood, any old way, even upside-down, maybe." + +"Whew!" whistled Bobolink; and as for some of the other fellows, they +began to lose their usual color as they realized what Paul was saying. + +"Now, that's just an idea that came into my mind," Paul went on, seeing +that he had alarmed some of the scouts. "It may never happen, you +understand. But you know the motto we believe in is 'be prepared!' That +means never to take things for granted. Keep your eyes and ears always on +guard, and see lots of things, even before they swoop down on you. So, +it's up to us, fellows, to get our tents and other fixings loaded up as +soon as we can. After that we'll go aboard ourselves, and try to prepare +against a sudden break in the dam." + +"And lookin' at that water creeping up," remarked Jud, "the sooner we get +busy, the better." + +Accordingly, they all hastened back to the camp. It was found that +already the water seemed to be creeping into the sink. Those in the other +two tents were talking it over, and wondering what was about to happen. + +When they heard the latest news, their faces indicated both astonishment +and not a little alarm. But under the direction of the scout master, they +started to convey all their belongings to the boats. + +First the blankets and clothes bags were taken over; then the food and +cooking utensils; and finally the tents came down in a hurry, for the +boys were working in water almost up to their knees when this last part +of the job was concluded. + +Once out of the sink, they found plenty of high ground to walk on, while +carrying the wet tents to the landing where the boats were lying. + +After they were all aboard, the scouts packed the stuff as best they +could, so that it would take up as little space as possible. Meanwhile +Paul and Jack, with both the other patrol leaders, were trying to figure +out just what would be the best course for them to pursue. + +"Makes me think of old Noah, when he went aboard the ark, and the animals +they followed two by two," said Bobolink, with a chuckle. + +"Huh, call yourself a kangaroo, or a monkey, if you like," spoke up Old +Dan Tucker, "but as for me I'd rather play the part of Ham, or one of the +other sons." + +"Sure thing!" assented Bobolink, cheerfully; "never saw the time yet +when you raised any kick about takin' the part of Ham. Sounds good, +don't it, Dan?" + +It was pretty hard to keep the spirits of Bobolink from sizzling and +gushing forth like a fountain when the water is turned on. He could joke, +even while the several leaders of the expedition were consulting gravely +about their chances of holding the boats against the frightful suction of +the current, when the obstructions in the outlet of the lake gave way, +which they hoped would not be suddenly, but by degrees. + +It was certainly a condition that confronted them, and not a theory. Paul +was really more worried than he showed; for he kept his feelings under +control, knowing that if some of the others realized how much he was +concerned, the fact might create a panic. + +"If I really thought the worst would come," Paul said, in a low tone, to +Jack, after it had been concluded that they would stay by the boats, and +do the best they could, "why I'd be tempted to give the order to just cut +for the hill, and leave everything but some food behind. Once up there, +we would be safe, and that's what we can't say is the case now." + +"But even if the water goes out with a rush, it can't tear a tree like +this one up by the roots; can it?" asked Jack, pointing to where the +cables of the boats had been secured as strongly as possible. + +"That's so," replied the scout master; "but then, think of the ropes, and +what a terrible strain would come on them. I'm afraid both would snap +like pipe-stems. To hold tight, we'd need a big chain; or a hawser like +that one the switching engine on the railroad uses to drag cars on a +parallel track. But then, the water may be nearly as high, right now, as +it will get We'll hope so, anyhow." + +That was Paul's way of trying to look on the bright side, although he +never failed to prepare for the worst, even while expecting the best. + +"If we could only think up some way to help ease the strain, it would be +a good thing," observed Jack, thoughtfully. + +"I wish you could. It would ease my mind more than I care to tell you," +was Paul's answer. + +"One thing, the storm is over," called out Jud, just then; "see, there's +a break in the clouds, and I reckon the sun will be peepin' out soon." + +"But the water will keep on rushing down the sides of the hills away off +yonder," Paul remarked, "and filling up this cup until it runs over. They +say that the Radway River drains three times the amount of country that +our own Bushkill does. And by the way the water comes in here, I believe +it. Look out there on the lake, will you; it shows that it's getting +wider right now." + +"Why, in another half hour, if it keeps on the same way, it's going to +lap over pretty much all the lower part of the island," Jack declared. + +Everything else was neglected now, and the scouts gathered along the side +of each boat, watching the lake. It was as if they half expected to see +the water suddenly take to rushing toward the spot where they knew the +peculiar outlet lay, not more than twenty feet across, and with abrupt +sides, one of which had been partly overhanging the water at the time +they entered. + +It was, of course, this section which must have been dislodged by the +blast which shook the surrounding territory, filling the bed of the +stream, and causing the rapidly accumulating waters of the lake to back +up, since they could find no place to discharge, as usual. + +It was while they were moodily watching the waste of waters that one of +the scouts, who had wandered across to the other side of the _Comfortt_ +suddenly sounded a fresh alarm, that sent another thrill to the hearts of +the already excited boys. + +"Hey! here's a lot of men comin' down on us, fellows I They're meanin' to +capture our boats, just like pirates. Boarders ahoy! Get busy everybody. +Clubs are trumps!" + +As they rushed to the other side, some having to clamber over the heaps +of duffle that took up so much room aboard, the scouts saw that it was no +false alarm. A number of men were hurrying toward them, splashing through +water that was in places almost knee deep, even when they took the upper +levels. Should they make a blunder, and stray off the ridges, it was +likely they would speedily have to swim for it. + +Paul was considerably aroused at first. They did not know very much +about these mysterious people of the island; and after their recent +rough experience, most of the boys were decidedly averse to knowing +anything more of them. And yet, here they were hurrying toward the +two motor-boats, as though they might indeed have some desperate +idea in view. + +Perhaps they meant to capture the boats, so as to insure their escape +from the rising waters. And then again, it seemed at least possible +that they might want to keep the scouts from telling what strange +things they had seen. + +So the first thing Paul did when he had that glimpse of the oncoming men, +was to hasten to possess himself of his double-barreled shotgun. Not that +he expected that there would be any necessity for firing it, but it was +apt to inspire a certain amount of respect. + +And the balance of the scouts had made haste to arm themselves with +whatever they could find that would help hold the enemy at bay. Some had +brought their clubs aboard, others seized upon the push poles, while one +grabbed up the camp axe, and another seized upon the hatchet. + +When eighteen husky and determined lads line the sides of two boats, +prepared to give a good account of themselves, it must needs be brave men +who would dare try to clamber aboard. + +And it was about this time, when things were looking rather +squally around the floating homes of the scouts, that Paul noticed +something singular. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX + +LIFTING THE LID + +Three men could be seen splashing desperately through the water; and they +seemed to be carrying a fourth, who was lying on a rude sort of litter, +as though he might either be sick, or badly hurt. + +And so it flashed through Paul's mind that perhaps after all their +mission was not one of conquest, or even hostility, but that they were +seeking help. + +"Hold up, fellows," he hastened to say; "we'll have to let them come +aboard now, because they never could get back to the hill again, with the +water rising so fast. Besides, I think they've got a wounded man along, +and need help. Don't forget we're scouts, and always ready to hold out a +helping hand." + +"That's the ticket!" declared the impulsive Bobolink, forgetting his +warlike disposition when he saw the man on the litter. + +So Paul beckoned to the men to approach. He had already made the +discovery that one of those who bore the litter was the big man who had +waved them away with such violent gestures, just before the terrible +explosion, when they happened to get too near the mine that was being +fired for some strange purpose. + +Two minutes later, and still splashing through water that came almost up +to their hips, those who bore the injured man arrived close to the boats. + +"Why, it's Professor Hackett who's being carried!" exclaimed Jack. + +The small man on the litter, who looked very white, lifted his head with +an effort, and tried to wave his hand. + +"Yes, that's who it is; and you're Jack Stormways; aren't you? Oh! I hope +that chum of yours can do something to stop this bleeding; I made them +carry me down here as a last chance. My man who was sent for a doctor in +our aeroplane, has not come back, and we're afraid he had an accident. +Can some of you boys help lift me aboard? I'm very weak from loss of +blood, and nearly gone." + +His voice was as faint as a whisper; and indeed, it was a wonder that he +managed to speak at all. + +The scouts had quite forgotten everything but that there was some one in +trouble. Tender hands immediately were forthcoming to assist in raising +litter and man over the side of the boat. Then the three attendants +climbed aboard, and strange to say the scouts seemed to have forgotten +all their fear of the men they had believed to be lawbreakers. For now +they saw that they were an intelligent lot of men, who bore little +resemblance to such criminals as they had seemed to be. + +Paul had long been interested in surgery. His father was the leading +doctor of Stanhope, and had always encouraged this fancy in the boy. It +seemed that the professor chanced to remember that he had been told about +the ability of Jack Stormways' chum; and when matters began to look +desperate, since none of his assistants could seem to stop the flow of +blood that followed his accident, as a last resort he had forced them to +put him on a litter, and make for the spot where they knew the scouts had +their camp, the man in the aeroplane having signaled the fact back to +them, just as Paul suspected. + +Of course they had not dreamed of such a thing as the lake rising, until +they had gone too far to retreat; and then they took desperate chances of +finding the boys still there, where they had boats with which they could +go to the mainland. + +Paul busied himself immediately. It was a pretty bad wound that the +little man had received, and his left arm would be practically useless +the balance of time; but he cared not for this, if only his life might +be spared. + +Jack and Jud assisted whenever their services were needed and in the end +Paul had not only stopped the flow of blood, but had the injured arm +neatly bandaged--as well, the professor weakly declared, as any surgeon +could have done. + +"And now," said Paul, turning on the big man, who had hovered around +anxiously, watching what was being done, as though he thought a great +deal of the professor; "in return for what we've done, won't you please +tell us who and what you are, and why you're doing all these queer stunts +away up here on this lonely island, where nobody can see you? We're all +mixed up, and don't know what to think. At first we believed you must be +a lot of counterfeiters hiding from the Government agents; but what with +these explosions, and such things as aeroplanes, I'm getting it in my +head that it means you're trying out some big sensations that are going +to be sprung on the Coney Island public next season." + +"And that's where you made a pretty clever guess, my boy," said the big +man, as he settled down to take it a bit more easily after his recent +hard work; "Professor Hackett has invented most of the biggest sensations +seen at seaside resorts these last ten years. He expects to excel his +record next season, and then retire; and I tell you, now, I began to +think he'd retire another way, if he lost much more blood from that +wound, which he got by accident this morning." + +The scouts looked at each other, and a broad smile appeared on many a +face that only a short time before had been pale with apprehension. + +When a thing that has seemed a dark mystery is finally explained, it +often looks so easy and simple that all of us wonder how we ever could +have bothered our heads over such a puzzle. And so it was in this case. +Why did it come that no one had guessed the true explanation before, when +it was so easy? + +They began to tell the big man all about their experiences, and how so +many things seemed to make it appear that the strangers were hiding +from officers. + +"How about that fellow who was hanging around my father's mill that night +you had your two big boxes stored there?" Jack asked. + +"He represented a rival inventor, who has always been jealous of +Professor Hackett, and is forever trying to find out what he has on the +stocks," replied the big man, whose name they learned was Mr. Jameson, an +able assistant to the inventor of aerial bombs, brilliant exploding +mines, and a dozen other wonders that thrill audiences at the seashore +each season. + +"But wouldn't he be likely to follow the wagon when it took the boxes +away in the morning?" the boy continued to ask. + +"Oh! we put him on a false scent, by shipping two other boxes away on a +train," was the reply. "He must have gone two hundred miles before he +discovered his mistake; and I doubt very much if he knows yet, but is +watching those cases to see what we do with them, away out in western New +York State." + +"Er, how about these?" asked Bobolink, jingling the two shining quarters +in his hand. "I picked 'em up close to that field smithy you have on the +island. We thought they were the best counterfeits we ever saw. I guess +they are." + +"I lost a bunch of small change through a hole in my pocket," laughed the +man, "and so I judge those are a part of it. But keep them as souvenirs +of your wonderful adventures on Cedar Island. Every time you look at them +you'll remember that narrow escape you and your friends had when you came +near stepping on a mine, the fuse of which had been lighted; for +Professor Hackett, even while he was wounded, would not hear of us +stopping our work." + +"Thanks," replied the gratified Bobolink, again pocketing the quarters +that had been the cause of so much speculation among the seven scouts; +"I'll be glad to accept your kind offer. But there's another thing we'd +like to know." + +"Speak up, then, and I'll be pleased to accommodate you, if the +knowledge is in my power to bestow. This flood bids fair to bring our +experiments to an end for the time being, even if the professor's +weakness hadn't made it necessary that we get to some place where he can +receive the right kind of care, to build up his strength. What's +bothering you now, my boy?" + +"How about the wild man?" asked Bobolink. + +"Oh! he was here when we came, and we made friends with him," the other +replied, promptly. "You see, some of us have been up here for a month. We +had some new stuff shipped in those big cases; but it'll all be rusted +now by this water. The poor fellow is harmless, for all he looks so +fierce. Why, at the smell of coffee the tears trickled down his dirty +cheeks like rain; it seemed to be just one last link that bound his +flitting memory to something in the far-away past. We gave him an old +saucepan to cook it in, and showed him how. Ever since he's visited us +often, and we supplied him with food, because it seemed as though he was +the one who had first right to this island." + +"I hope the poor old chap has the good sense to climb that hill, and get +away from the rising water," remarked Jack, with some feeling. "Have you +any idea who he can be, or where he came from?" + +"We made up our minds that he had been out of his head a long time, and +perhaps had escaped from some institution. He mentioned the name of John +Pennington once, and we think it must have been his. The professor +intended to make inquiries, later on, and if possible have him returned +to his home, wherever it might be." + +"Did he have a big yellow dog tied up at his shack?" asked Nuthin, +eagerly, as though he wished to settle that point, because the animal in +question had once belonged to the Cypher family. + +"Yes," answered Mr. Jameson, "but it got away from him one night, by +breaking the rope, and he's been making a great fuss about it ever since. +But from the ugly looks of the beast, I'd sooner put a bullet in him than +try to make friends." + +"Well, that about finishes the list of questions we've been nearly dying +to ask somebody," remarked Bobolink, "and seems like everything's been +explained. What we want to know now, and there isn't a livin' soul c'n +tell the answer to that, I reckon, is, how high is this old lake goin' to +get before she commences to fall again? And how in Sam Hill are we +expectin' to ride those motor-boats over that pile of rocks and mud, that +lies in the outlet? Anybody know the answer? I'd like to hear it." + +But they shook their heads. Nobody could say, although all sorts +of guesses ran the rounds, for the scouts were good hands at that +sort of thing. + +The water was still rising, and apparently just as fast as ever. Already +it had encroached upon the main part of the island; and Mr. Jameson +declared that he was sure it must be all around the shed where they kept +their machinery, that had been brought secretly to this isolated spot, +where they hoped to complete the greatest marvel in the way of sensations +ever known to curious crowds at watering places. + +"It'll be badly hurt, unless the water goes down soon," remarked the +big man; "but that doesn't seem to be the worst thing that can happen, +if what your Doctor Paul here, says, turns out to be true, and the +water goes out of the lake in a raging torrent that may drag boats and +all with it." + + + + +CHAPTER XXX + +GOOD-BYE TO CEDAR ISLAND + + +They passed a most anxious hour, after the coming of the professor and +his assistants. The lake kept on rising until pretty much all of the +island except the hill was under water. Of course the trees stood out, +but most of their roots were under ten feet or more of water. + +It would not last much longer, that they knew, for the supply must be +falling short, and besides there was always a chance that the fearful +force exerted by such a mass of pent-up water would break away the +obstruction that clogged the outlet. + +Paul had done everything he could think of to add to their security in +case the worst came. Some of the scouts were even perched in the +neighboring trees. These were the more timid, who Paul knew were +shivering from anxiety, and watching the spot where the lake water +ordinarily escaped, as though dreading lest at any second they should see +a sudden heave that would mean the beginning of the end. + +"Good news, Paul!" sang out Jud Elderkin, to whom had been delegated the +duty of keeping watch on the rise of the flood. "She's stationary at last +Never rose a bit the last ten minutes. And believe me, I honestly think +she's begun to go down just a little." + +The other boys let out a cheer at this news. That was what they were all +hoping for--that the water would go down gradually, so as not to endanger +the motorboats. + +Just how the craft were to get out of the lake, if the exit remained +closed, no one could say; but then they might look to Paul to open a way +somehow. He could make use of some dynamite to blow up the obstructions, +so Mr. Jameson had suggested, and it sounded all right. + +Five minutes later Jud was quite positive that the tide was on the ebb. + +"Two inches lower than she was at the highest point. Paul!" he called +out, jubilantly. + +"Hurrah! that sounds good to me!" exclaimed Bobolink, swinging his +campaign hat vigorously about his head, as he sat in the bow of the +_Comfort_, it being a part of his task to watch the cable, and if the +worst came to ease up on it so that there would be less likelihood of a +sudden snap. + +"But we're not out of danger yet, remember," cautioned the scout master. + +Presently the water was lowering at a still faster rate. + +"Looks like the opening might be getting larger," said Jack, when this +fact was made clear beyond any doubt. + +"Watch over there," said Paul, "and see if there's any sudden rush, +though already the water is escaping so fast that I begin to believe we +might hold on here, even if the whole pile of earth and rocks were washed +away, leaving the channel clear." + +Five, ten, fifteen minutes crept along, and all the while the water kept +going steadily down until much of the island could be seen again under +the trees. + +"Oh! look, there she goes!" cried Bobolink, without warning, and thereby +causing some of the fellows who had descended from the trees to wish they +were aloft again. + +Over in the vicinity of the outlet they could see something of a +commotion. The water seemed to be running down hill, as it struggled to +pour out through the now cleared passage. + +Immediately the boats felt the suction, which must have been very strong +indeed. They strained at their ropes, and those who had the cables in +charge obeyed the instructions given to them, allowing a certain length +of line to slip, thus easing the fearful drag. + +"Whoop! they're going to hold!" exclaimed Bobolink, in great glee. + +Paul believed so himself, and a smile came to his face that up to now had +looked careworn and anxious; for a dreadful catastrophe had been hovering +over them, he felt certain. + +And the ropes did make good, holding in spite of that fierce drag. The +water soon got down to about its normal level, when the pull upon the +hawsers ceased, and everything seemed to settle back into the old rut. + +But the boys had had quite enough of Cedar Island. It was water-soaked +now, and offered little attraction to them for camping. Paul suggested +that they leave the cove and head for a certain section of the main shore +which, on account of being much higher than the island, had not been +overflowed. + +There was not a single voice raised in opposition, and so they started +the motors and with a series of derisive sounds that seemed almost like +chuckles the boats said goodbye to Cedar Island. Landing they found a +splendid spot for the erection of the tents, and before the coming of +night the scouts were as snugly fixed as though nothing had happened to +disturb them. + +The injured professor declared that he meant to stick by Paul until his +messenger arrived with a carriage and a doctor by way of the road, which +ran only a half mile away from the lake. + +He expressed himself satisfied with the work Paul had done on his arm, +and believed it to be the right thing. + +They hoped to spend a quiet night. There would be no bomb explosions in +the heavens to disturb them, at least. Mr. Jameson had already +explained to the boys that, if they had happened to be awake at the +time of that first tremendous shock, they must have seen by the glare +in the heavens that it was a new kind of aerial bomb that had been +fired; and possibly under such conditions some one of the scouts would +have guessed the truth. But when they crept out of the tents there was +nothing to be seen aloft. + +Luckily, these wide-awake boys could accommodate themselves to their +surroundings. Their former experiences had made most of them +quickwitted, resolute and cheerful under difficulties that might have +daunted most lads. + +Although they had received a tremendous shock because of the numerous +remarkable occurrences that had taken place since their landing on Cedar +Island, now that their troubles seemed to have departed, most of the +scouts were just as full of life and good-natured "chaff" as ever. + +Bluff seemed to never tire of entertaining those who had not been +fortunate enough to be among the valiant band of explorers with +wonderful accounts of all they had seen. He had them holding their +very breath with awe, as he described, in his own way, how they first +of all crept up to the shack in the thicket and looked in upon the +wild man asleep. + +But when Bluff told of how he and his comrades had been warned off in +such a dramatic manner by the unknown man, and immediately afterwards +found themselves knocked down by that tremendous concussion, as the +explosion took place, he had them hanging on his every sentence. + +But words failed Bluff when he tried to picture the wild scene that had +followed. That furious scamper through the wooded part of the island must +remain pretty much in the nature of a nightmare with the boys. + +Phil and Bobolink and Andy all eagerly chimed in, trying to do the +subject justice, but after all it seemed beyond their powers. They could +only end by holding up both hands, rolling their eyes, shrugging their +shoulders, and then mutely pointing to the various cuts, scratches and +contusions that decorated their faces. The rest had to be left to the +imagination. + +Fortunately there was an abundance of witch hazel ointment along, so that +every sufferer was able to anoint his hurts. The whole bunch seemed to +fairly _glisten_ from the time of their arrival at the boats. Indeed, +there never had been such a wholesale raid made upon the medical +department since the Stanhope Troup of Banner Boy Scouts was organized. + +But after all was said and done they had come out of the whole affair at +least with honor. And now that the peril was a thing of the past they +could well afford to laugh at their adventures on Cedar Island. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI + +A SCOUT'S DUTY + + +"Seems like a dream; don't it, Paul?" + +Jack dropped down beside the acting scout master as he made this +remark. He had just stepped out from the new camp on the mainland, and +found Paul sitting upon a log, looking across the water in the +direction they had come. + +The sun was just setting, and a rosy flush filled the western heavens. It +seemed to fall softly upon mysterious Cedar Island, nestling there in the +midst of the now tranquil waters. + +Paul looked up with a smile, as he made room on the log for his chum, who +had always been so willing to stand by him through thick and thin. + +"Well, do you know, Jack," he spoke, "that was just exactly what seemed +to strike me. I was staring hard at the island, and wondering if I had +been asleep and dreamed all those queer happenings. Fact is, just before +you spoke I even pinched my leg to see if I was really wide awake." + +The other laughed at this. + +"Oh! you're awake, all right, Paul," he remarked. "You seemed to get off +without any show of damage to your good-looking face. As for the rest of +us, if ever we begin to think we've been and dreamed it, we've got a +remedy better than pinching. All we have to do is to bend down over a +still pool of water and take a look at our faces. That'll convince us in +a hurry we _did_ have a lively time of it." + +Paul pointed across the lake to where the island lay bathed in that +wonderful afterglow that shone from the painted heavens. + +"Did you ever see a prettier sight?" he asked. "It looks as peaceful as +any picture could be. You wouldn't think a bunch of fellows could run up +against such a lot of trouble over on such a fine little place as Cedar +Island; would you, now?" + +"I feel the same way you do, Paul; and I'd say we never ought to have +left it, only after the flood it'd be a muddy place, and we wouldn't take +any pleasure getting around." + +"Oh! well," Paul rejoined cheerfully, "after all, perhaps it isn't our +last visit up this way. Who knows but what we may have another chance to +come over here and look around. It was a good scheme, I'm thinking, Jack, +and we'll never be sorry we came." + +"I should say not," remarked the other, quickly; "just turn around and +take a look back into our camp. See where Professor Hackett is lying +propped up with pillows from the boats. Well, suppose we'd never come +over this way, what d'ye think would have happened to him? He says he +owes his life to your skill, Paul, and that, try as they would, Mr. +Jameson and the other assistants couldn't seem to stop the bleeding. That +alone pays us for all we've gone through, Paul." + +"I guess it does," Paul admitted, readily, "because he's a smart man, and +has done a lot to entertain the crowds that go to the seashore to rest +and forget their troubles. But I'm glad none of the boys seem to have +suffered any serious damage from the effect of the explosion or that mad +chase afterwards." + +"Yes, we ought to call ourselves lucky, and let it go at that," +Jack remarked. + +"When you think about all that might have happened, I tell you we've got +lots of reason to be thankful," Paul went on, with considerable feeling. + +"Sure we have," added Jack. "Instead of that stick taking me in the +cheek, it might have struck my eye and injured my sight for life." + +"And where I got only a wrench that may make me limp a little for a few +days, I could have broken a leg," said Paul. + +"That's one of the rules scouts have to keep in mind, you know," Jack +continued; "always be cheerful and look on the bright side of things. I +reckon there never comes a time when you can't find a rainbow of promise +if you look far enough. Things are never as bad as they might be." + +"The boys seem to have settled down here just as if they meant to enjoy +the rest of the stay," Paul observed, as he turned his head again, so as +to look at the bustling camp close by. + +"Yes, and even the very air seems to tell of peace and plenty," said +Jack, with a little laugh, as he sniffed the appetizing odors that were +beginning to announce that preparations for the evening meal had started. + +"You're right," agreed Paul, "I guess there's nothing more 'homey' than +the smell of onions frying. I never get a whiff of it on the street of a +winter evening but what I seem to see some of the camps I've been in. And +then, just think how it gets your appetite on edge, till you can hardly +wait for the cook to call out that supper's ready. But I was thinking of +some other things when you came up." + +"I reckon I could mention one of them," said Jack. + +"Let's hear, then," the other demanded. + +Jack swept his hand down the lake in the direction of the outlet. + +"You're worrying about that," he said. + +"Well, that's just about the size of it, Jack. We know the lake's gone +down to about what it was before the storm hit us; but what if a great +big rock blocks the passage?" + +"You know what Mr. Jameson said you could do?" Jack remarked. + +"About the dynamite, to blast an opening big enough for our boats to get +through? Yes, Jack, I suppose that could be done." + +"And he says he'll stand by to see that it _is_ done," the other +continued. "As Mr. Jameson is an expert at all sorts of explosives, you +can just make up your mind we'll have no trouble getting away. Besides, +Paul, I've got a feeling that when we go down in the morning to take a +survey, we'll be more than pleased with the way things look." + +"Which all sounds good to me," Paul hastened to declare. "Anyhow, I'm +going to believe it's bound to turn out as you say. In spite of our +troubles we've been a pretty lucky lot." + +"But you talked as though the getting away part of the business was only +a part of what you had on your mind," Jack went on. + +"There was something else," the other scout admitted. + +"Suppose you open up and tell me, Paul; because somehow I don't seem to +be able to get what you mean." + +"It seems to me," the patrol leader remarked, seriously, "that while all +of us scouts, and the professor's party in the bargain, have been shaking +hands with each other over the lucky escape we had, we've pretty near +forgotten one poor chap." + +Jack gave a start, and then whistled softly. + +"That's right, Paul," he said, "for I take it you mean the crazy +islander." + +"How do we know what happened to him?" Paul continued. + +"But Mr. Jameson seemed to feel sure he would take to the hill when the +flood came," Jack replied. "And he also told us, you remember, that some +of their food was at a higher point than the water could have reached. +So, if the crazy man wanders about that camp, there's no need of his +going hungry long." + +"I guess that's about so," Paul agreed, as though these words from his +chum took away some of his anxiety. "From what they say, it seems as if +he has come to look on them as friends. So, chances are ten to one he'd +go to their different camps after the flood went down." + +"Queer how he came to be here," Jack remarked. + +"Oh, I don't know," the other observed; "there's no telling what a crazy +person will do. His coming to this island must have been with the hazy +notion that any one searching for him couldn't find him here." + +"Searching for him, Paul?" + +"Well, you remember Mr. Jameson said he had an idea the poor fellow must +have escaped from some institution," Jack continued. + +"Yes, he did say that; and for all he looks so big and fierce, with his +long hair and beard, he's harmless. But, Jack, between us now, do you +think we could go back home when our little vacation trip is over and +feel that we'd done _all_ our duty as true scouts, when that poor chap +had been left up here--perhaps to starve on Cedar Island?" + +"Whew! You're the greatest boy I ever saw, Paul, to get a grip on a +situation and remember things." + +"But--answer my question," persisted the other. + +"Well, what you said must be so," Jack acknowledged; "and it makes me +feel pretty small to remember that, while we've all been feeling so merry +over our wonderful escape, I'd forgotten all about _him_." + +"Jack, it's too late to do anything tonight, you know." + +"I reckon it is, Paul," replied the other, looking a bit anxiously across +the water to where the glow was commencing to give way to shadows along +the wooded shore of Cedar Island; "but if you thought best, I'd be +willing to take the lantern and cross over with you." + +Paul thrust out his hand impulsively. + +"Shake on that, old chum," he exclaimed. "Your heart's as big as a bushel +basket, and in the right place every time. But on the whole, Jack, I +don't believe it would be the wise thing for us to do." + +"Just as you say, Paul; only I wanted you to know I was ready to back you +up in anything." + +"We're both tired, and sore in the bargain," continued the scout +master, steadily. + +"Yes," Jack admitted, unconsciously caressing his painful bruises. + +"The island is in a bad state just now, after being flooded," Paul +continued. + +"That's right, I can jolly well believe it," his chum agreed. + +"And if the wild man hasn't been drowned, he'll surely be able to look +out for himself a while longer. Mr. Jameson felt sure he wouldn't starve, +with all the food they left behind." + +"Then it won't hurt to let it go till tomorrow, eh, Paul?" + +"I had made up my mind that we'd organize another party, this time taking +some of the fellows who have been kept in camp, and comb Cedar Island +from end to end to find that man." + +"A good plan, Paul," said the other scout; "but do you think he'll make +friends with us, even when we find him?" + +"Mr. Jameson says he understands the peace sign," the scout master +continued, "and must really have had a bright mind at some time. He told +me he had an idea the man may have met with some injury that had +unsettled his reason. He seemed to be greatly interested in all they were +doing, and several times even made suggestions that startled the +professor." + +"I remember that much, too," said Jack, "and Mr. Jameson also said he +meant to try and learn if anybody knew about a John Pennington. That was +the name the man spoke once in his rambling talk." + +"Well, perhaps we may be able in some way to do the poor fellow a good +turn, Jack. I hope so, anyhow. My! how those boys are trying to beat the +record at getting up a grand supper. Seems to me my appetite is growing +at the rate of a mile a minute." + +"If it keeps on that way, good-bye to our stock of provisions," laughed +Jack; "but, to tell the truth, I feel pretty much the same. The most +welcome sound I could hear right now would be Bluff calling everybody to +get a share of that fine mess." + +"Then you won't have to wait long, I guess," his chum declared, +"because from all the signs of dishing out I imagine they're about ready +right now." + +Paul proved a true prophet, for immediately Bluff began to ding-dong upon +a sheet iron frying pan, using a big spoon to produce a discord that, in +the ears of the hungry boys, was the sweetest music in the world. + +Gathering around, the scouts made a merry group as they proceeded to +demolish the stacks of savory food that had been heaped upon their tin +plates; and drink to each other's health in the fragrant coffee that +steamed in the generous cups, also of tin, belonging to their mess chest. + +After supper the scouts sat around, and while some of them worked at +various things in which they were particularly interested, such as +developing the films that would give a dozen views of the great flood, +others sang songs or listened to Mr. Jameson tell strange stories. + +The man had been to the corners of the world during a busy lifetime, +often with scientific parties sent out by societies interested in +geography, natural history or astronomy. And hence it had fallen to the +lot of Mr. Jameson to experience some remarkable adventures. The boys +felt that he was the most interesting talker they had ever met. + +After several hours had slipped by, some of the scouts, notably those +who had been among the bold explorers band, were discovered to be nodding +drowsily. Indeed, Andy and Tom Betts had gone sound asleep, just as they +lay curled up before the fire. The warmth of the blaze, together with the +unusual exertions of the day, had been too much for the boys. + +And so the bugler was told to sound "taps" to signify that it was time +they crawled under their blankets. + +A few chose to sleep aboard the motor boats, which, of course, relieved +the tents from overcrowding. Professor Hackett and his assistants had +been lodged in one of the tents, which fact had something to do with the +lack of room. + +But presently all these things had been arranged. Paul himself intended +to pass the night in the open. He declared he would really enjoy the +experience; and two others insisted on keeping him company--little Nuthin +and Bobolink. + +So Paul, who knew a lot about these things, showed them just how to wrap +themselves up like mummies in their blankets, and then lie with their +feet to the fire. He said old hunters and cowboys always slept that way +when camping in the open. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXII + +CONCLUSION + + +Paul was awakened by feeling something nudging him in the ribs. It was +Bobolink's elbow; and, thinking at first that it might be an accident, +the scout master made no move. + +But again he received a severe jolt. And at the same time came a whisper +close in his ear: + +"Paul! Are you awake?" Bobolink was saying, so low that any one six feet +away could not have heard his voice. + +"What ails you?" asked Paul. + +He might have imagined that the other had been taken ill, from over +feeding, perhaps, and wanted Paul, as the doctor of the troop, to give +him some medicine. But on second thought Paul realized that there was too +much mystery about the action of Bobolink to admit of such an +explanation. + +"Listen, Paul," the other went on, still whispering, "there's some sort +of wild beast goin' to raid the camp!" + +"What's that?" asked the scout master, a little sternly, for, knowing +the weakness of Bobolink in the line of practical joking, he suspected +that the other might be up to some of his old tricks. + +And Bobolink must have detected an air of doubt in the manner in which +Paul spoke those two words, for he immediately resumed: + +"Honest Injun, Paul, I ain't foolin'! Say, do they have panthers around +here? Because that's what I think it must be." + +"Where'd you see it?" + +As Paul put this question he was working his arms free from the folds of +his blanket. When he lay down, more through force of habit than because +he thought there would be any need of such a thing, Paul had placed his +shotgun on the ground beside him. And no sooner was his right hand at +liberty than, groping around, he took possession of it. + +"Up in that big oak tree," Bobolink went on. "You watch where that limb +hangs out over the camp and you'll see somethin' move; or I've been +dreamin', that's all." + +Paul did not have to twist his head very far around in order to see the +spot in question. He watched it as the seconds began to troop along, +until almost a fell minute had gone. + +And Paul was just about to believe Bobolink must have been dreaming, when +he, too, saw the bunch of leaves violently agitated. + +Undoubtedly some tree-climbing animal was up there. Paul felt a thrill +pass through him. Unconsciously, perhaps, his fingers tightened their +grip upon the shotgun, which was apt to prove a tower of strength in case +the worst that could happen came to pass. + +Straining his eyes, as he partly lifted his head, Paul believed he could +just make out a shadowy form stretched upon the large oak limb. + +He was more than puzzled. + +Wild animals were not altogether unknown within the twenty-mile limit +around Stanhope. A bear might be seen occasionally--or at least the +tracks of one, for the timid beast knew enough to hide in the daytime in +one of the numerous swamps. + +But this did not seem large enough for a bear, which would have surely +made a more bulky object clinging to the limb. Moreover, bears were not +reckoned bold, and no hunter had ever known one to come spying around a +camp. As soon as the trail of human beings is run across by a bear, the +animal always takes the alarm and hastens to its den, to lie low until +the danger has passed. + +But Bobolink had mentioned the magic word "panther," and this caused the +other aroused scout to look more closely at the dimly seen object Sure +enough it did seem to be flattened out on the limb, much as Paul +imagined a big cat might lie. + +"What'd we better do about it, Paul--give a yell and jump up?" Bobolink +asked, his voice quivering, perhaps with excitement, or it might be under +stress of alarm; for it was not the nicest thing in the world to be lying +there helpless with a hungry panther crouching above. + +"Wait, and let's make sure," replied the careful Paul. + +Some impetuous boys would have thought, the very first thing, of bringing +that double-barrelled gun to bear on the dark, shadowy figure, and +cutting loose, perhaps even firing both charges at once. + +At such close range, less than thirty feet, a shell containing even bird +shot is apt to be projected with all the destructive qualities of a large +bullet. Paul knew all about this, and also had faith in the hard-hitting +qualities of his long tested gun; but he was not the one to be tempted +into any rash action. + +"Be sure you're right; then go ahead," was a motto which Paul always +tried to practice. He had certainly found it worth while on more than one +occasion in the past, and it was likely to serve him well now. + +And so he waited, ready for a sudden emergency, but not allowing himself +to be hurried. + +He soon had reason to feel very thankful that his good sense had +prevailed, for presently the leaves were again set to shaking and, as +they parted, Paul saw something that gave him a shock. + +"Oh! what d'ye think of that, now? It's the wild man of Cedar Island!" +gasped Bobolink, actually sitting up in his excitement. + +And Paul had already made certain of this fact as soon as his eyes +fell upon the hairy face seen among the branches. The shudder that +passed through his frame had nothing to do with fear. Paul was only +horrified to realize what might have happened had he taken Bobolink's +suggestion for the truth, and fully believed the figure in the oak to +be a savage panther. + +"We'd better let Mr. Jameson know," Paul remarked, as he also sat up and +cleared his legs of the blanket. + +"Yes, he'll know how to get him down. I bet you, Paul, the feller went +and swam across from the island. But how would he guess we were here?" + +"Oh! he could see the boats in the day time; and don't forget we've had a +fire burning all night, so far," said the scout master. + +When Mr. Jameson came out of the tent, in answer to Paul's low summons, +and learned what had happened, he readily agreed to influence the wild +man to come down. The poor fellow had learned to look on Mr. Jameson as +a friend, and, realizing that he had abandoned the island, doubtless it +was his desire to see him again that had induced this visit. + +He proved to be harmless, and upon being given food ate ravenously. Later +on it was discovered that he had launched a log and made his way to the +mainland by means of this crude craft, with a branch for a paddle. + +Mr. Jameson declared that he would take the stranger to Stanhope when the +vehicle came for the professor, and do all in his power to learn just who +he was, as well as get him safely back among his friends. + +To dispose of the wild man of Cedar Island once and for all, it might be +said right here that Mr. Jameson kept his word. The name John Pennington +served as a clue, and in the end he learned that was his name. He had +lost his mind through an accident and, though his case was deemed +hopeless, occasionally he was apt to have little flashes of his former +cleverness. He was returned to the sanitarium from which he had escaped, +and the boys never heard of him again. But the memory of the wild man +would always be associated with Cedar Island. + +On the following day Paul and Jack managed to get around to the outlet, +for the scout master was anxious to learn what the chances of their +leaving the lake, when they were ready, might be. + +They found that, just as had been believed that shoulder of rock and +earth had been shaken loose by the tremor of the earth at the time of the +big shock, when the professor was experimenting with some new explosive. + +In falling, it had indeed dammed the outlet, and the storm coming so soon +after, of course the water in the lake had risen at a frightful rate. In +the end the obstruction had commenced to disappear; but luckily for all +concerned, it had held fairly well until much of the water had escaped, +when finally it had given way. + +The channel was as good as ever; indeed, Paul seemed to think that +it offered fewer impediments to a passage now than before all this +had happened. + +That eased the minds of the scouts, and they could go back again to their +camp with good news for the others. + +A carriage came that day for the professor, and his assistants managed to +carry him across country to the road; just as they had undoubtedly done +the two big boxes of material that came from Mr. Stormways' mill that +other day. + +He shook hands with each and every scout before leaving, and promised to +remember them always for what they had done. When he came to Paul, he +clung to his hand, and there were tears in the eyes of the little +professor as he, said: + +"I honestly believe that you saved my life, my boy, and I trust that +through your ability I may be spared a few more years. And depend on it, +I'm never going to let you get out of touch with me, Paul Morrison. I +hope to live to see you a great surgeon, some day." + +The scouts filled out the balance of their vacation at the lake, and +considered that they had had some of the strangest experiences that could +happen to a group of boys; but although at the time they could not +suspect it, there were still more interesting things in store for Paul +and his comrades of Stanhope Troop of Boy Scouts. What these were, you +will find related in the next volume of this series, to be called, "The +Banner Boy Scouts Snowbound; Or, A Tour on Skates and Iceboats." + +When the time came for them to start back, it was with more or less +anxiety that they came to the canal connecting the waters of the two +rivers flowing parallel for a few miles, and only a short distance apart. + +But they need not have borrowed trouble, for the Bushkill was still +higher than usual at this season of the year and all through the +disused canal they found plenty of water, so that neither of the boats +stuck in the mud. + +In good time, then, the Banner Boy Scouts arrived home, to thrill the +lads who had not been fortunate enough to accompany them on their trip +afloat, with wonderful accounts of all the remarkable things which had +happened to them while in camp on Cedar Island. + + + + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT *** + +This file should be named bbsca10.txt or bbsca10.zip +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, bbsca11.txt +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, bbsca10a.txt + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +http://gutenberg.net or +http://promo.net/pg + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext05 or +ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext05 + +Or /etext04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, +91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + + PROJECT GUTENBERG LITERARY ARCHIVE FOUNDATION + 809 North 1500 West + Salt Lake City, UT 84116 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +hart@pobox.com + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* + diff --git a/old/bbsca10.zip b/old/bbsca10.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b287f48 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/bbsca10.zip |